2012 Product Catalog TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction to Chatsworth Products, Inc. Pages i - x Rack Systems Section 1 Cabinet & Enclosure Systems Section 2 Zone Cabling & Wireless Enclosures Section 3 Wall-Mount Systems Section 4 Cable Management Products Section 5 Cable Runway & Tray Products Section 6 Power Management Products Section 7 KVM Systems Section 8 Environmental Monitoring & Security Systems Section 9 Software Systems Section 10 Grounding & Bonding Products Section 11 Seismic Protection Systems Section 12 Index - Alphabetical Section 13 Index - Part Number Section 14 i WELCOME FROM CPI To know Chatsworth Products, Inc. (CPI) is to know our WHY CHOOSE CPI? motto – “Delight the Customer.” As an employee owned company, it’s important for us to work with you on an HISTORY individual basis to deliver quality products and service Twenty years ago, CPI began when 90 employees joined for every IT infrastructure need. Whether you’re placing together and purchased the Dracon Division of Harris an order through customer service or clarifying a project Corporation using an Employee Stock Ownership Plan through technical support, CPI’s team of experienced (ESOP). With deregulation in the telecommunications professionals will find the perfect solution. It’s that industry and technological innovation in voice and data dedication to solving the needs of customers that led to equipment, CPI focused on the explosive needs of the providing our most popular products for IT infrastructure information technology market to manage IT solutions in this catalog. And if there is still something infrastructure equipment. Today, CPI is a leading global you can’t find, give us a call at 800-834-4969 and we’ll supplier of integrated solutions that optimize technology be happy to delight you too. equipment. This pioneering spirit is what motivates CPI to delight the customer by responding rapidly with WHAT WE DO tailored standard and custom solutions that give them a CPI is a global manufacturer of voice, data and security higher return on their investment. products that Optimize, Store and Secure technology equipment. Offering quality in-stock products and WHO WE SERVE customized solutions, CPI leads the industry in As technology needs evolve, so does CPI. Whether it’s innovation, configurability and value with an array of organizing cable in a network cabinet, securing data in a integrated system components that cover virtually all brand new facility, ensuring security for banking physical layer needs. Our organization’s knowledge and institutions or satisfying HIPAA requirements in a co- expertise allows us to communicate and collaborate with location facility, CPI has the experience and know-how to IT professionals, architects, contractors, engineers, OEM provide the perfect solution at the perfect time. equipment manufacturers, integrators and end users, Some of the markets we have served include: working in a partnership each step of the way to create • Banking & Financial Services custom-fit IT infrastructure solutions. Headquartered in • Telecommunications the United States, CPI operates global offices within the • Government (Federal, State and Local) US, Mexico, Canada, China, Middle East and the United • Pharmaceutical & Biotech Kingdom. • Consulting & Business Services • Healthcare & Medical • Insurance • Media & Entertainment • Retail • Information Technology • Electronics • Education • Security CPI is committed to being a company of the highest quality in every aspect of its business, providing Quality Products, Quality Services and most of all – Quality People. ii WHY CHOOSE CPI? Center is a comprehensive facility complete with a CUSTOMIZED SOLUTIONS Product Showroom, Customer Meeting Center and a A great deal of precision and thought goes into the Thermal Test Lab. In addition to giving customers a design of today’s data center – but plans can change in chance to learn and interact directly with CPI Products an instant. Each step comes with its own set of and Solutions, the test lab is equipped to model various obstacles, from a need to maintain energy costs through heat loads, cabinet configurations and conduct in-house thermal management solutions, to the deployment of product testing. For more information or to schedule a quality-built cabinets that can withstand high density visit go to www.chatsworth.com/rdt. loads and earthquakes. As the environment within data centers continually changes, infrastructure systems must be able to change too. That’s why CPI provides the INDUSTRY AFFILIATIONS marketplace with a variety of high quality, unique CPI maintains its comprehensive product and industry solutions that allow for future technology and evolving knowledge with help from the following affiliations and standards. associations: • Industry Advisory Council (IAC) VALUE-ADDED ONLINE TOOLS • Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) The design and implementation of everything from • The Green Grid network closets to sprawling data centers is literally • US Green Builders Council (USGBC) filled with twists and turns. That’s why CPI has • AFCOM National and Local Chapters developed a robust support structure at • ASHRAE www.chatsworth.com that can help plan out infinite • TIA designs and solutions for any IT infrastructure need. • BICSI Platinum Level Prestige Corporate Member Some of the most popular online resources include (PCM) with one of the largest groups of RCDDs Building Information Modeling (BIM) drawings, the • BICSI Standards Committee e-Catalog, our full documentation library and a product - Data Center Rack and Cabinet Editor Configurator that has been utilized more than 100,000 - Mechanical Group times. - Thermal Consultant - BIM Best Practices Subcommittee • Society of Telecommunications Consultants (STC) • International Organization for Standardization (ISO) • Armed Forces Communications and Electronics Association (AFCEA) • ESOP Association EXPERT SERVICE AND SUPPORT CPI understands that the high-speed world of data management is constantly changing and for this reason, we offer highly trained Technical Support Specialists and Customer Service Representatives to help solve your IT infrastructure needs. Based on your specific requirements, our Technical Support Specialists can help LEADING THE WAY IN RESEARCH, DEVELOPMENT & TRAINING design the precise layout for your data center and With the financial strength to reinvest in the company provide a detailed bill of material complete with layout and continually improve manufacturing and logistical and assembly drawings. Furthermore, our Customer processes, CPI has become an industry leader in product Service Representatives work closely with distributors to innovation and excellence. Complementing our numerous maintain product availability, ultimately helping preserve active patents for groundbreaking product designs, CPI your project’s scheduling requirements. has its own Research Development and Training (RD&T) Center. Designed with customers in mind, the RD&T iii CONTACT INFORMATION CPI Global Offices: Corporate Office - Westlake Village, CA 818-735-6100 • 818-735-6199 FAX Chatsworth, CA Operations 818-882-8595 • 818-718-0473 FAX New Bern, NC Operations 252-514-2779 • 252-514-2977 FAX Georgetown, TX Operations 512-863-7800 • 512-869-1374 FAX Asia Pacific Pudong, Shanghai, China +86-21-6880-0266 www.chatsworth.com.cn Latin America Mexico City, Mexico +52-55-5203-7525, toll free: +01-800-201-7592 www.chatsworth.com.co Europe Buckinghamshire, England UK +44-01628-524-834 www.chatsworth.com.uk Middle East & Africa Dubai, United Arab Emirates +971-4-2602125 Canada Toronto, Ontario, Canada +905-850-7770 For answers to your questions or for custom solutions please call Customer Service or Technical Support at 1-800-834-4969 (toll free in the U.S. & Canada) Monday to Friday, 5 a.m. to 5 p.m., Pacific Time; 1-818-739-3400 (outside of the U.S. & Canada), or email Technical Support at techsupport@chatsworth.com Visit our Global Website at www.chatsworth.com iv HOW TO ORDER GOVERNMENT BUSINESS HOW TO ORDER CPI sales are conducted in partnership with a global network of distributors, contractors and resellers. To obtain a purchase Contract GS-35F-0184N price quote and product availability please locate the CPI FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT BUSINESS - partner near you by calling 800-834-4969. GSA CONTRACT NO. GS-35F-0184N This catalog has been developed according to comprehensive CPI is listed with the General Services Administration (GSA) product groups. Each group is presented as a convenient under Federal Supply Schedule 70 for General Purpose section within the catalog and contains part numbers, Commercial Information Technology Equipment, Software and ordering information and detailed illustrations or photographs. Services, is a Small Business manufacturer (SB) and is available through GSA Advantage, NETCENTS, SEWP III, TO ORDER, FOLLOW THESE SIMPLE STEPS: NITAAC-ECSIII, GSA Connections as well as other channels. 1. Locate desired product(s) within the appropriate section. For more information visit www.chatsworth.com/gov. 2. Use the complete part number. Pay close attention to the digits indicating product variations such as size, finish COLOR FINISHES (refer to Color Finishes information) and hole pattern. CPI utilizes the powder-coating finishing process to produce a 3. Check “Consists Of” information for each product for a durable, long-lasting finish that is aesthetically superior to listing of all components and hardware included with the other techniques. The majority of CPI Products are available part number. in three colors and a grained metal finish, referred to as 4. Check to see if product descriptions include “Installation “clear.” For the three colors (white, black and gray), CPI’s May Require” or “Installation Will Require” the following powder-coating and curing techniques provide a more hardware. These components are not included with the consistent, uniform finish. Therefore, the color is evenly product; however, most of these items are contained in the applied (even on angles, die cuts or unique shapes) and does ® catalog and may be ordered. Please see part number not vary among different products. CPI’s TeraFrame Cabinet references where indicated. Systems are available in Black, Signature Blue, Glacier White 5. Indicate quantity and full part numbers in your purchase and Steel Gray. orders (POs). The description is not essential but should be included when ordering. The product description will Note: Due to space limitations, sometimes “Computer White” appear on your acknowledgment, invoice and packing list. may be described simply as “White.” These are the same 6. Locate a distributor by calling 800-834-4969 or visiting colors. Both indicate an off-white color designed to coordinate www.chatsworth.com. Or if you are an authorized CPI with typical computer-white products. distributor, send POs via mail or fax to one of our Customer Service Department locations listed to the right. CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENTS 7. Questions? Call CPI toll-free at 800-834-4969 within the Chatsworth, CA Operations United States and Canada or visit www.chatsworth.com. 9353 Winnetka Avenue Chatsworth, CA 91311-5205 Note: Prices and quantity breakdowns are not listed in this Ph: 818-882-8595 • Fax: 818-718-0473 product guide. For product pricing, please contact our Georgetown, TX Operations Customer Service Department at 800-834-4969. 3004 South Austin Avenue Georgetown, TX 78626 All orders received are subject to acceptance by CPI and are Ph: 512-863-7800 • Fax: 512-869-1374 subject to a minimum charge of $200.00. CPI must receive New Bern, NC Operations written confirmation for all orders prior to shipment. 701 Industrial Drive New Bern, NC 28562-5447 Products listed do not include export packaging, insurance, Ph: 252-514-2779 • Fax: 252-514-2977 taxes, tariffs or duties. Europe, United Kingdom Operations Unit L, Bourne End All pricing is subject to change. CPI reserves the right to make Buckinghamshire UK SL8 5AS adjustments to pricing and product offerings for reasons Ph: +44-1628-524-834 including, but not limited to, changing market conditions, product discontinuations, product unavailability and price changes. v TERMS & CONDITIONS WARRANTY TERMS & CONDITIONS NON-WARRANTY REPLACEMENTS CPI maintains a policy of continuous product improvement; CPI Products are not serviceable in the field, and customers therefore, we reserve the right to make changes without are encouraged to return them to CPI Customer Service for notice. repairs. Some documentation and replacement components are WARRANTY available for purchase from CPI. Please contact CPI Customer CPI guarantees manufactured products and each part or Service for ordering information and availability. component thereof against all defects in material and/or workmanship. CPI agrees to remedy any manufacturing defect either through replacement or repair at no charge RETURNS AND REPAIRS provided that the defective unit is returned, transportation No products or part thereof shall be returned to CPI unless prepaid, to the CPI factory. The warranty extends for a period the customer first obtains a Customer Return Authorization of one year from the date of installation or initial use, Number from a CPI Customer Service Representative. This provided that this period shall not exceed 18 months from number must appear clearly and prominently on all shipping the original date of shipment from factory. containers. Containers without the labels will not be accepted. Any product that has been repaired or replaced shall be similarly warranted on its repair or replacement for the Products returned for warranty repair shall be shipped remaining product warranty period or 90 days from the date prepaid to CPI. Some products are subject to handling of repair or replacement, whichever expires last. charges if no defects are found during inspection. All products returned to CPI shall be packaged to prevent This warranty does not extend to products that have been damage during shipment. Any damage that occurs during subjected to neglect, accident or improper use, nor to units shipment is the responsibility of the customer and the that have been altered by non-CPI personnel. shipping company. CPI will send back repaired products freight prepaid. No warranties other than those set forth in this section are given or implied with respect to the products furnished. CPI If CPI finds that products returned for repair, whether in or shall, in no event, be liable for consequential damages, for out of warranty, have failed due to misuse or negligence or loss, damage or expense directly or indirectly arising from have components removed, CPI will repair the product in the use of the products, for any inability to use materials or accordance with “out-of-warranty” charges. If CPI finds from any other cause. products, in or out of warranty, to be damaged beyond repair, the customer can choose to have the product sent back “as is” or scrapped by CPI. vi CODES & SYMBOLS ISO 9001-2008 REGISTRATION NON-CPI REGISTRATION MARKS ® Aironet is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. ® AT&T is a registered trademark of AT &T Intellectual Property, Inc. ® AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc. ® Operation Certificate Registration No. Cisco is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. ® Chatsworth, CA 10002325 QM08 Compaq is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Ref. 10002325 Development Company, L.P. ™ New Bern, NC 10002325 QM08 Dell is a trademark of Dell Inc. ® Ref. 10004453 Delrin is a trademark of E.I duPont de Nemours & Company Georgetown, TX 10002325 QM08 (DuPont). ® HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Ref. 10004454 Development Company, L.P. ® The UL Registered Firm symbol indicates that the facility has Hilti is a Registered trademark of Hilti Corporation ® passed UL’s evaluation to the international quality standards Hubbell is a registered trademark of Hubbell Inc. ® of the International Organization for Standardization. This IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation ® means the facility has been thoroughly monitored and has Krone is a registered trademark of ADC GmbH ® participated in an audit to determine compliance with a Lexan is a registered trademark of SABIC Innovative Plastics ® strict and comprehensive set of quality specifications. An Slip-on is a registered trademark of Slip-on Lock Nut appropriate quality system must be demonstrated to meet Company Corporation ® these specifications for quality in the relevant areas of Velcro is a registered trademark of Velcro Industries B.V. ® design, development, production, assembly, final inspection Visio is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. and testing. All other trademarks belong to their respective companies. The UL Classified symbol indicates that Underwriters Laboratories Inc. classifies the product as an equipment grounding conductor only. The UL Listed symbol indicates the product is Listed to applicable UL Standards and requirements by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. The cULus indicates compliance with both Canadian and U.S. requirements by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. The UL Component Recognition symbol is used on components that are part of a larger product or system. The CE Marking is a European marking of conformity, indicating a product complies with the requirements of the applicable European laws with respect to safety, health environment and consumer protection. ENVIRONMENTALLY SAFE CPI is committed to recycling as the solution to environmental and landfill concerns and continues to pursue packaging solutions that are cost effective and environmentally friendly. vii SUPPORT SERVICES CUSTOMER SERVICE & TECHNICAL SUPPORT ONLINE TOOLS Customer Service is available at 800-834-4969 (Monday to To accommodate our customers in Friday, 5 a.m. to 5 p.m., Pacific Time). Our friendly and every possible way, CPI provides professional Customer Service Representatives have the a variety of value-added online experience and know-how to ensure you get the right tools. solutions for your needs. Customer Service Representatives are available to answer questions about CPI Products, direct PRODUCT CONFIGURATOR you to a distributor, help you find what you need on CPI’s The Product Configurator will Website or to provide product information sheets via fax or guide you through the steps and selections necessary to e-mail. create customized Racks, Cabinets and Enclosure Systems, Wall-Mount Systems and Electronics, Monitoring and Security Systems. Once built, the Product Configurator will present a total list price, rendered drawings and offer a selection of distributors or global resellers. Access this tool at www.chatsworth.com/configurator. eCATALOG Our eCatalog is a tool that will allow users to view products and their descriptions, create project carts, receive MSRP pricing and locate a distributor for a quote. The eCatalog Technical Support is also available at 800-834-4969 (Monday to Friday, 5 a.m. to 5 p.m., Pacific Time) or via e-mail at can be accessed at www.chatsworth.com. techsupport@chatsworth.com. CPI’s team of knowledgeable SM support personnel takes pride in getting the right answers to CPI PUE CALCULATOR SM you quickly to help you meet your project requirements. The CPI PUE Calculator will determine your data center ® cost savings by combining CPI Passive Cooling Solutions FREE LAYOUT SERVICES with today’s most effective cooling strategies. By utilizing CPI provides a number of free services that can be your existing energy consumption and cost data information, downloaded from www.chatsworth.com, including detailed the CPI PUE Calculator will identify the efficiency of CPI ® drawings using AutoCAD . Technical Support also provides Passive Cooling Solutions in your exact data center bills of material, CAD drawings (also available in PDF format) environment. Check out this tool at www.chatsworth.com/ and the support you need to complete your project on budget pue-calculator. and on schedule. The Technical Support staff specializes in working with value added resellers, contractors, information DOCUMENTATION CENTER systems teams, schools, government agencies, end users and CPI’s Documentation Center is a comprehensive online new customers who would like a job “done right the first reference that will provide you with the ability to search time.” specific product and general company information. and is an easy and quick way to retrieve printable documentation to ® CPI offers free Visio Shapes to help you plan your next support bids and proposals. Access by selecting Supports project and free CAD Blocks (dwg files) to help you quickly and Downloads, Documentation Center from the and accurately develop a room layout.For more information www.chatsworth.com homepage. about these tools visit www.chatsworth.com/designtools. CPI RESOURCE CD Get the latest in CPI product info, industry news, event info Each year CPI produces a free CD that contains the entire CPI and more at: ® ® Mini-Catalog in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. To request a CD www.chatsworth.com/About-CPI/The-Source-Newsletter visit www.chatsworth.com and select “Support and or at www.chatsworth.com/blog. Downloads” and then “Request Printed Literature.” viii SUPPORT SERVICES SAMPLE LAYOUTS 3 Easy Steps to Configure a Rack/Cabinet System 1 Make a list of all equipment that will be placed on the rack. •Make an enlarged photocopy of the following page •Fill out the Customer Equipment section •List the make, model and number under description •List the rack-mount width (19” or 23”) and the number of rack mount units for height •List the fully configured (maximum) equipment weight •List the power wattage. If power supplies are redundant, do not double the wattage 2 Sketch the location of equipment on the rack drawing. •If the rack you are configuring has less than 45U, note this with a line across the rack drawing at the appropriate U •Place the heaviest and deepest equipment near the bottom of the rack/cabinet. Place UPS’s and battery backups near the bottom. Include horizontal cable management above patch panels and switches. Provide 1U of cable management for every 2U of connectivity •Any equipment that is not rack-mount requires a shelf. A 19” rack shelf supports equipment up to 17-3/4”W (450.9 mm). A 23” rack shelf supports equipment up to 21-3/4”W (552.5 mm). Allow 2U for the shelf plus the height of the equipment. 1U is 1-3/4”H (44.45 mm) 3 Fill out the Bill Of Material section. •Review the Customer Equipment section to determine if you need a 19” or 23” rack or cabinet. If there is any 23” wide rack-mount equipment or any shelf-mount equipment over 17-3/4”W (450.9 mm), a 23” rack is required. Most equipment fits a 19” rack. If equipment is rack-mount and over 20”D (510 ® mm), consider a cabinet or QuadraRack 4-Post Frame. •List shelves. Shelves should be deeper than equipment. Equipment should weigh less than the shelf capacity. Consider a Lockable Storage Drawer to hold extra cords, software, backup media, etc. •In cabinets that hold computer server and data storage equipment, use perforated doors and add an Air Dam Kit and Filler Panels to close all open rack mount unit spaces. Provide vertical cable management and a power strip along both sides at the rear of the cabinet. •For racks that hold network equipment, provide vertical cable management along both sides of the rack. A power strip may be required. ix Four-Post Mounting Two-Post Mounting LAYOUT ASSISTANCE & SUPPORT SERVICES Date _____________________________ Customer _____________________________________________ __ Project ___________________________ Contact _________________________________________________ Address __________________________ Phone ____________________ FAX _________________________ Building __________________________ Distributor______________________________________________ Room ____________________________ Contact ________________________________________________ Individual Rack # __________ _________ Phone _____________________ FAX _______________________ CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT Item Description Quantity Width Height Depth Weight Power 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Select Appropriate Rack Width: BILL OF MATERIAL o 19” o 23” Description Qty. Part No. Page Select Color: Rack/Cabinet oGray Monitor Shelf oWhite oClear Keyboard Shelf oBlack Equipment Shelves Air Dam Kit Filler Panel(s) Horizontal Cable Management Vertical Cable Management PDU/Power Strip(s) Installation Hardware x RACK SYSTEMS Racks, Rack Enclosures, Shelves & Accessories Universal Rack Page 1-3 Standard Rack Page 1-7 Adjustable Rail, 4-Post Rack Page 1-10 Adjustable, 4-Post Rack Page 1-13 Fixed 4-Post Rack Page 1-17 Shelves for Racks Page 1-20 Keyboard Trays Page 1-26 Installation Products Page 1-29 Additional Accessories Page 1-31 High-Density Patching Frame Page 1-39 RACK SYSTEMS Advances in technology are moving information faster and faster every day. But no matter how advanced or involved a network becomes, it can all come to a halt if not supported by a sturdy rack. Building a proven record of supporting these complex network configurations through ® standout products like the cost-effective Adjustable QuardraRack , CPI’s industry-leading Rack Systems deliver the confidence of unsurpassed strength, stability and durability. From multiple patch panels to cabling and other equipment, CPI Rack Systems keep equipment safe and secure. Designed and built with a commitment to quality, CPI Rack Systems can also be quickly adapted for your changing needs with the addition of shelves or special brackets engineered to hold larger devices and computer hardware, such as servers and switches. Enclosures can be added to some Rack Systems as well, which improves security for your equipment. CPI Rack Systems feature: • High-quality construction and design • Fixed mounting rails, most with rack-mount unit markings, ideal for support of patch panels, termination blocks and other equipment • Standard EIA-310-D hole pattern • Small footprint saves floor space • Unrestricted airflow for maximum ventilation • Easy access to cables for moves, adds and changes • Large variety of styles, sizes and accessories for various configurations • High static load ratings; 750 lb (340.2 kg) to 2200 lb (1000.0 kg) Featured Product: Universal Racks (Page 1-4) UL Listed in US and Canada, now with installation of integrated masked grounding studs for quick attachment to Telecommunications Grounding System 1-2 UNIVERSAL RACK Universal Rack Features: • High-strength, lightweight aluminum extrusion construction • Two top angles or top bars and heavy-duty assembly hardware for stronger rack to handle heavier loading • 50 special #12-24 mounting screws with combination Phillips/Straight heads and pilot points to reduce cross threading and installation time • Unique packaging inserts eliminate damage from components hitting together in the carton during shipping and handling; racks are packed unassembled in individual cartons • Ease of assembly is enhanced through use of threaded channels; no hex nuts are required • Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern offers greater mounting flexibility, maximizes usable mounting space and is compatible with conventional wide 1-1/4”-1/2” (31.8 mm - 12.7 mm) alternating hole patterns • Integrated masked grounding studs on the inside of the rack channel for quick attachment to the Telecommunications Grounding System • Available in powder coat color finishes (black, white or gray) or grained aluminum finish (clear) • State-of-the-art manufacturing methods provide the best quality and fastest delivery in the industry • Side channels have multiple mounting holes and (4) pem nuts for quick installation of cable management • EIA Channels: 3.0” x 1.265” x .25” (76 mm x 32.13 mm x 6.4 mm) thick flange (pair) • Base Angles: 3.5” x 6.0” x .375” (89 mm x 152 mm x 9.53 mm) thick (pair) • Top Angles: 1.5” x 1.5” x .25” (38 mm x 38 mm x 6.4 mm) thick (pair) • Top Angles, Flush Bolted: 1.5” x 2.0” x .25 (38 mm x 51 mm x 6.4 mm) thick • Top Bars: 1.5” x .25” (38 mm x 6.4 mm) thick (pair) • Panel Mounting Holes: #12-24 rolled threads in both flanges front and back • Custom configurations and assemblies available by special order • Assembly hardware is included • Select models (P/N 48353-XXX, 48383-XXX) are UL Listed: File E140851; Category DUXR (US), DUXR7 (Canada) – Communications Circuit Accessory • Weight capacity 1500 lb (680.4 kg) — weight must be evenly distributed and rack must be properly secured to floor Installation Hint: When mounting equipment, use #3 Phillips tip to assure maximum torque. Channel Cross Section and Hole Pattern Rack-Mount Unit (U) marks simplify equipment installation Standards CPI offers EIA aluminum channel uprights on all Standard and Universal racks. All Standard and Universal racks are threaded to accept industry standard #12-24 mounting screws. Extra care is taken in that the threads are “rolled’’ rather than “cut’’ for greater strength and durability. The Universal Rack hole pattern is 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) and is compatible with wide 1 1/4”-1/2” (31.8 mm-12.7 mm) patterns while offering greater flexibility. 1-3 UNIVERSAL RACK Universal Rack Ordering Matrix • UL Listed racks offered in multiple heights and 19” or 23” widths • For heavy-duty, high-capacity installations Top Bar or Angles Flange 460 Two Top Bars Edge 463 Two Top Angles to Flange 467 Two Top Angles, Flush Bolted Edge 483 UL Listed (With Two Top Angles) A Width 5 19” EIA Channel 8 23” Channel Mounting Hole Mounting Holes to Mounting 3 Mounting Holes Both Sides Hole Color B 1 Gray 2 Computer White 5 Clear 7 Black Height - ft (m) 31 3 (0.9) 17U 20 4 (1.2) 24U 19 5 (1.5) 31U 00 5.6 (1.7) 34U 01 6 (1.8) 38U 02 6.6 (2.0) 41U 03 7 (2.1) 45U 05 7.6 (2.3) 48U 15 8 (2.4) 51U 17 8.6 (2.6) 55U 08 9 (2.7) 58U 4XX X X - X XX 19” EIA Rack 23” EIA Rack Dimension in (mm) in (mm) A 17.75 (450.9) 21.75 (552.5) .75 (19.1 mm) B 18.31 (465.1) 22.31 (566.7) Top View of Base Angle C 16 (410.0) 20 (510.0) 12.50 D 20.31 (515.9) 24.31 (617.5) (317.5 mm) 15.00 (381.0 mm) Shipping Weights - lb (kg) 4.75 (120.7 mm) 6’ (1.8 m) Rack 37 (16.8) 2.13 7’ (2.1 m) Rack 39 (17.7) (54.1 mm) 8’ (2.4 m) Rack 41 (18.6) 1-4 C D UNIVERSAL RACK 35” x 3” (889 mm x 80 mm) Universal Rack Universal Rack in a 35” (889 mm) frame width supports block hardware. • High strength aluminum construction • Supplied with two top angles for maximum strength Flange Edge • EIA-310-D Standard Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm-15.9 mm- to 12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern offers greater mounting flexibility Flange Edge and is fully compatible with conventional wide 1-1/4”-1/2” (31.8 mm- 12.7 mm) alternating hole patterns 33.75 • Four web channel holes per side allow multiple racks to be firmly (857.3 mm) mounted together side by side • High strength roll-formed threaded mounting holes Mounting • Rack-mount unit marks simplify equipment installation Hole • Includes 50 pilot point #12-24 mounting screws with combination to Phillips/Straight heads Mounting • Integrated masked grounding studs on the inside of the rack channel for Hole quick attachment to the Telecommunications Grounding System. • Ships unassembled, individually packaged with assembly and 34.31 (871.5 mm) installation instructions included; bulk packaging is also available • Supports up to 1500 lb (680.4 kg) Note: Accessory shelves are not available for this rack. Top Bar or Angles 463 Two Top Angles 467 Two Top Angles, Flush Bolted Width - in 6 35 EIA Channel Mounting Holes 3 Mounting Holes Both Sides Color 1 Gray 2 Computer White 5 Clear 7 Black Height - ft (m) 01 6 (1.8) 38U 03 7 (2.1) 45U 46X 6 3 - X 0X Shipping Weights - lb (kg) 6’ (1.8 m) Rack 49 (22.2) 7’ (2.1 m) Rack 51(23.1) Rack-Mount Unit (U) marks simplify equipment installation See Section 5 for Cable Management Products 1-5 36.31 (922.3 mm) UNIVERSAL RACK Dimensions: C B 0.656” 23.0” (16.66 mm) 12-24 (584.2 mm) holes Threaded 3 PL. Mounting Holes 12.00” 12-24 (304.8 mm) Threaded C-C Mounting Holes 1.125” (28.58 mm) A HOLES 2 PL. 43.0” (1092.2 mm) 14.0” 1/2–20 (355.6 mm) Threaded insert 12.0” 4 PL. (304.8 mm) 3.88” 4.0” (98.6 mm) (101.6 mm) Web Surface Front and Rear Flanges 7’ (2.1 m) Universal Rack (both sides drilled) Rack Height Number of Number of Dimension B Dimension C Dimension A in (mm) in (mm) Mounting Holes Mounting Spaces ft (m) 3 (0.9) N/A 1.75 (44.5) 53 17 4 (1.2) N/A 2.13 (54.1) 72 24 5 (1.5) 43 (1090) 1.88 (47.8) 94 31 5.6 (1.7) 44 (1120) 2.00 (50.8) 104 34 6 (1.8) 56 (1420) 2.12 (53.8) 114 38 6.6 (2.0) 56 (1420) 1.75 (44.5) 125 41 7 (2.1) 56 (1420) 1.87 (47.5) 135 45 7.6 (2.3) 56 (1420) 2.62 (66.5) 144 48 8 (2.4) 72 (1830) 2.25 (57.2) 155 51 8.6 (2.6) 72 (1830) 2.38 (60.5) 165 55 9 (2.7) 72 (1830) 2.00 (50.8) 176 58 1-6 STANDARD RACK Standard Rack 3”D (80 mm) The Standard Rack is designed for value conscious, high volume customers, who require the quality and service that sets CPI racks apart from the competition. The Standard Rack is a UL Listed communication circuit accessory designed specifically for use in telecommunications equipment installations where codes require UL Listed equipment racks. For a greater breadth of features, we recommend CPI Universal Racks. • High strength aluminum construction • Shipped with (2) top angles, (2) base angles, (2) 3”D (80 mm) equipment channels and installation hardware • Top angles allow J-bolt attachment without interfering with top rack-mount spaces • EIA-310-D Standard Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern offers greater mounting flexibility and is fully compatible with conventional wide 1-1/4”-1/2” (31.8 mm-12.7 mm) alternating hole patterns • Six web channel holes per side enable multiple racks to be mounted together side by side or attachment of cable managers • High strength roll-formed threaded mounting holes • Rack-mount unit marks simplify equipment installation • Includes 50 pilot point #12-24 mounting screws with combination Phillips/Straight heads to reduce cross-threading and installation time • White, black, gray or clear grained finish provides attractive appearance • Ships unassembled, individually packaged, with assembly hardware and installation instructions; bulk packaging is also available • Redesigned shipping container saves space and freight costs • Choose from three heights • Weight capacity of 1000 lb (453.6 kg) — weight must be evenly distributed and rack must be properly secured to the floor • UL Listed; File E140851; Category DUXR (US), DUXR7 (Canada) – Communications Circuit Accessory Description Shipping Part H x W Weight Number 7’ ( 2.1 m) Rack Shown Height - ft (m) lb (kg) 55053-X03 7 (2.1) x 19”, 45U 31 (14.1) 55053-X15 8 (2.4) x 19”, 51U 37 (16.8) 55053-X08 9 (2.7) x 19”, 58U 40 (18.1) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Rack-Mount Unit (U) marks simplify equipment installation See Section 5 for Cable Management Products 1-7 STANDARD RACK Standard Rack 6”D (150 mm) Features 6”D (150 mm) upright mounting channels for MDF, IDF and other high-capacity distribution frame applications. The additional rack depth provides extra room for high-density equipment and cable needs. • High strength aluminum construction • Supplied with (2) top angles for additional strength • EIA-310-D Standard Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern offers greater mounting flexibility and is fully compatible with conventional wide 1-1/4”-1/2” (31.8 mm-12.7 mm) alternating hole patterns • Rack-mount unit marks simplify equipment installation • High-strength, roll-formed threaded mounting holes • Ships unassembled and individually packaged • Includes assembly hardware and (50) pilot point #12-24 mounting screws with combination Phillips/Straight heads • Weight capacity 1,000 lb (453.6 kg) — weight must be evenly distributed and rack must be properly secured to the floor • UL Listed; File E140851; Category DUXR (US), DUXR7 (Canada) – Communications Circuit Accessory Description Shipping Part H x W Weight Number Height - ft (m) lb (kg) 66353-X03 7 (2.1) x 19”, 45U 38 (17.2) 66383-X03 7 (2.1) x 23”, 45U 42 (19.1) 66363-X03 7 (2.1) x 35”, 45U 52 (23.6) X=color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Rack Dimensions 19” EIA Rack 23” EIA Rack 35” EIA Rack Dimension P/N 66363 (35” W) Shown: in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) The 6”D (150 mm) Standard Rack is the A 17.79 (451.9) 21.79 (553.5) 33.79 (858.3) high-capacity frame that is designed for use with cabling sections and is the basic B 18.31 (465.1) 22.31 (566.7) 34.31 (871.5) frame around which the XLBET/MDF C 20.31 (515.9) 24.31 (617.5) 36.31 (922.3) frames are developed. 1-8 RACK ENCLOSURES Single Rack Enclosures Enclose a single rack while leaving ample room for wire and cable. The aluminum top panel with six edge-protected punch-out ports provides cabling access wherever needed. Run cable through the back panel by removing one of four cable access plates located along the bottom kick plate. • Convenient cable access with removable sides, rear-kick panel and cut-out top sections • Lockable plexiglass or metal doors are easily reversible • Top and side panels can be removed in minutes to provide access to interior • Ships partially assembled in one 14” x 32” x 89” (360 mm x 810 mm x 2260 mm) carton to minimize shipping and handling costs • Shipping weight approximately 135 lb (61.2 kg) Single Rack Enclosure 110 Plexiglass Doors on Enclosure Rack Enclosure Rack Width 38 19” 48 23” Color 2 Computer White 7 Black Rack Height - ft (m) 06 6 (1.8) With Side Panels 07 7 (2.1) With Side Panels 96 6 (1.8) Without Side Panels 97 7 (2.1) Without Side Panels 110 XX - X XX Metal Door Rack Enclosure Single Rack Enclosure 11558 For 19” Rack - Metal Enclosure Doors Color 2 Computer White 7 Black Rack Height - ft (m) 06 6 (1.8) With Side Panels 07 7 (2.1) With Side Panels 96 6 (1.8) Without Side Panels 97 7 (2.1) Without Side Panels 11558 - X XX Fan & Filter Assembly Fan Kit for Single Rack Enclosures; 400 CFM, 115 VAC, P/N 11755-001 11755-001 50/60 Hz, 0.19 Amp, NEMA 5-15P Plug, Standard side-mounted enclosure fan kit includes Components are UL & ROHS approved (2) complete fan assemblies with an 11222-001 Replacement Filter Kit attached cord with NEMA 5-15P plug. 1-9 ADJUSTABLE RAIL 4-POST RACK ® Adjustable Rail QuadraRack (ARQR) and Adjustable Rail ServerRack (ARSR) ® The Adjustable Rail QuadraRack (ARQR) and the Adjustable Rail ServerRack (ARSR) provide a sturdy, feature-rich solution for supporting rack-mount network, computer server and data storage equipment in data centers, computer equipment rooms and other IT facilities. Both racks offer the strength and stability of an enclosure in an open four-post mounting system that provides easy access to equipment and cabling. The front and rear frames are welded to speed assembly and increase strength. Four brackets connect the front and rear corners of the frames. Front mounting rails attach to the front frame in a fixed position and align with the front of the rack or can be reversed for recessed mounting to maximize side- to-side airflow through network switches. Rear mounting rails are adjustable in depth and can extend beyond the rear of the frame. A second set of holes along the sides of the frame lets you add optional side-mounted equipment support rails and vertical power strips that are independent of the mounting rails and use no rack-mount space. The bottom of the rack is punched for easy floor attachment. Each rack includes a Top-Mount Cable Waterfall Tray with adjustable radius drops to allow easy side-to-side routing for patch cords. Use with any CPI cabling section (vertical cable manager) or Cable Guide Kits to organize cables along the sides of the rack. Attach CPI Cable Runway to the top of the rack with J-Bolts, a Cable Runway Elevation Kit or a Cable Runway Mounting Bracket to support overhead premise cables. A side panel is also available. Features: • Available in three heights and two depths • Adjustable Rail QuadraRack (ARQR) has threaded mounting holes that speed installation of patch panels, fiber enclosures and network switches. • The Adjustable Rail ServerRack (ARSR) has square-punched mounting rails that let you change mounting hardware (cage nuts) to match specific computer server and data storage equipment mounting requirements. • Each rack-mount unit is marked and numbered • The front pair of mounting rails may be mounted to allow rack-mount unit numbering to start at the top or bottom of the rack • The rear mounting rail adjusts in depth • UL Listed; File E227626; Category NWIN (US), NWIN7 (Canada) – Information Technology and Communications Equipment Cabinet, Enclosure and Rack • Each rack will support up to 2200 lb (1000.0 kg) of equipment. Rack Includes: • (2) mounting frames • (4) horizontal braces • (2) front mounting rails • (2) rear mounting rails • (1) top-mount cable tray • Assembly hardware: (1) Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block and Mounting Rails can be flipped Antioxidant Joint Compound to change numbering from • ARSR includes (50) #12-24 cage nuts and screws bottom-to-top or top-to-bottom • ARQR includes (50) #12-24 screws 1-10 ADJUSTABLE RAIL 4-POST RACK ® 1525 Adjustable Rail QuadraRack and ServerRack, 19" Rack Max. Rail Mounting Depth (B) Depth (C) Hole Style in (mm) in (mm) 1 #12-24 Threaded 23.62 (600) 29.52 (750) 2 #12-24 Threaded 35.43 (900) 41.33 (1050) 3 Square-Punched 23.62 (600) 29.52 (750) 4 Square-Punched 35.43 (900) 41.33 (1050) Note: Min. Rail Depth is 15” (380 mm) Color 1 Gray 2 Computer White 7 Black Height (A) U Height - in (mm) 72 (1800) 01 38 03 45 84 (2100) 15 51 96 (2400) 1525 X - X XX 1-11 ADJUSTABLE RAIL 4-POST RACK ACCESSORIES Adjustable Rail 4-Post Rack Accessories Equipment Support Rail Provides additional support for heavy rack-mount equipment, attaches to the side of the Adjustable Rail QuadraRack or ServerRack and provides a .98”W (25 mm) support surface for equipment. Does not interfere with rack-mount unit (U) spaces. Supports 200 lb (90.7 kg) of equipment and includes assembly 15285-X01 and installtion hardware. Top-Mount Cable Waterfall Tray Use at the top of rack to guide patch cords side-to-side or rack-to-rack. One Top-Mount Cable Waterfall Tray is included with each rack. 6”W x 5.2”D (152 mm x 132 mm) steel tray with adjustable radius bends. Cable Guide Kit T-shaped cable guides (7U) snap onto the front or rear of the rack to organize 15275-X01 cables. The openings align with each rack-mount unit on the rack. Includes cable guides for one side (front or rear) of the rack. Side Panel Solid, steel side panel used to cover the end of the rack and/or vertical cable managers at the end of a row. Matches the height and depth of rack, steel. Fixed Equipment Mounting Rail 15286-001 Additional pair of equipment mounting rails which attach to the rear rack frame to create a solution with two mounting depths set between 15”D (381 mm) and the rack depth. Includes installation hardware. Shipping Part Description Weight 15270-X01 Number lb (kg) 15285-X01 Equipment Rail, for 23.62” (600 mm) Racks 7 (3.2) 15285-X02 Equipment Rail, for 35.43” (900 mm) Racks 11 (5.0) 15275-X01 Top-Mount Cable Waterfall Tray 14 (6.4) 15286-001 Cable Guide, for 38U Racks, Black 5 (2.3) 15286-003 Cable Guide, for 45U Racks, Black 6 (2.7) 15286-015 Cable Guide, for 51U Racks, Black 7 (3.2) 15270-X01 Side Panel, 23.62”D x 72”H 51 (23.1) 15270-X02 Side Panel, 23.62”D x 84”H 57 (25.9) 15270-X03 Side Panel, 23.62”D x 96”H 48 (21.8) 15270-X04 Side Panel, 35.43”D x 72”H 63 (28.6) 15270-X05 Side Panel, 35.43”D x 84”H 71 (32.2) 15270-X06 Side Panel, 35.43”D x 96”H 60 (27.2) 15259-X01 Fixed Rail, Threaded, for 38U Racks 20 (9.1) 15259-X03 Fixed Rail, Threaded, for 45U Racks 23 (10.4) Mounting Rails can 15259-X15 Fixed Rail, Threaded, for 51U Racks 26 (11.8) be flipped to change 15260-X01 Fixed Rail, Square-Punched, for 38U Racks 19 (8.6) numbering from 15260-X03 Fixed Rail, Square-Punched, for 45U Racks 22 (10.0) bottom-to-top or 15260-X01 15260-X15 Fixed Rail, Square-Punched, for 51U Racks 25 (11.3) top-to-bottom X=Color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 1-12 ADJUSTABLE 4-POST RACK ® Adjustable QuadraRack (AQR) and ServerRack (ASR) ® The Adjustable QuadraRack and the Adjustable ServerRack provide a sturdy, cost-effective solution for supporting rack-mount network, computer server and data storage equipment in data centers, computer equipment rooms and other IT facilities. Both racks offer the strength and stability of an enclosure in an open four-post frame that provides easy access to equipment and cabling. Each rack will support up to 2,000 lb (907.2 kg) of equipment. The corner posts are C-shaped equipment mounting channels that provide front and rear support for 19”W rack-mount equipment or shelves. The front and rear frames are welded to reduce assembly time. Four brackets connect the front and rear corners of the rack. The rack is available in four heights and four depth ranges. The front-to-rear depth of the mounting channels can be adjusted up to 5.91” (150 mm) in depth in .98” (25 mm) increments during assembly. The mounting channels are fixed in place once assembled to surround and protect equipment. The Adjustable QuadraRack has threaded mounting holes that make installation time of patch panels, fiber enclosures and network switches shorter. Adjustable ServerRack has square-punched holes that let you change mounting hardware (cage nuts) to match specific computer server and data storage equipment mounting requirements. Each rack-mount unit is marked on the channels making it easy to locate and position equipment. A second set of holes along the sides of the channels lets you add optional side-mounted Equipment Support Rails that use no additional rack-mount space. Features: • Open design for unrestricted airflow and easy access to equipment and cabling • Self-squaring assembly with welded front and rear frames reduces assembly time • Mounting channels adjust in depth to provide front and rear support for equipment • Maximizes floor space with a minimal rack footprint • Rack components are bonded together during assembly • Includes a Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block for easy attachment to the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar • Choose square-punched or threaded equipment mounting holes • Rack-mount unit spaces are marked on the mounting channels • Easy to bay together to create multi-rack configurations • Use with any CPI Cabling Section to manage cables • Support large equipment on heavy-duty shelves or on side-mounted Equipment Support Rails • UL Listed; File E227626; Category NWIN (US), NWIN7 (Canada) – Information Technology and Communications Equipment Cabinet, Enclosure and Rack • Supports 2000 lb (907.2 kg) of equipment 1-13 ADJUSTABLE 4-POST RACK Front View ® 1521 Adjustable QuadraRack and ServerRack, 19" Mounting Mounting Channel Depth Range (C) Hole Style in (mm) 1 Square-Punched 15.75 to 21.65 (400 to 550) 2 Square-Punched 22.64 to 28.54 (575 to 725) 3 Square-Punched 29.53 to 35.43 (750 to 900) 4 Square-Punched 36.42 to 42.32 (925 to 1075) 5 #12-24 Threaded 15.75 to 21.65 (400 to 550) 6 #12-24 Threaded 22.64 to 28.54 (575 to 725) 7 #12-24 Threaded 29.53 to 35.43 (750 to 900) A B 8 #12-24 Threaded 36.42 to 42.32 (925 to 1075) Color 1 Gray 17.78” 2 Computer White (451.6 mm) Opening 7 Black 18.31” Height (465.1 mm) Hole Centers U (A) - in (mm) (B) - in (mm) 01 38 72 (1800) 67 (1700) 20.31 03 45 84 (2100) 79 (2000) (515.9 mm) 15 51 96 (2400) 91 (2300) 108 (2740) 08 58 103 (2620) Side View 1521 X - X XX Note: Mounting channel depth adjusts in .98” (25 mm) increments during assembly. The mounting depth is fixed once the rack is assembled. See the table on next page for a list of mounting channel depth settings by part number. C A A See next page for mounting channel details. 1-14 ADJUSTABLE 4-POST RACK Bottom View - Section A-A Mounting Channel Depth Settings and Dimensions by Part Number Channel Depth Overall Depth Floor Mounting Holes (E) (C) (D) Part Numbers in mm in mm in mm 15.75 400 15.96 405.4 12.47 316.7 16.73 425 16.94 430.3 13.45 341.6 D E C 17.72 450 17.93 455.4 14.44 366.8 15215-XXX 15211-XXX 18.70 475 18.91 480.3 15.42 391.7 19.69 500 19.90 505.5 16.41 416.8 20.67 525 20.88 530.4 17.39 441.7 21.65 550 21.86 555.2 18.37 466.6 1.64” 16.00” (41.6 mm) 22.64 575 22.85 580.4 19.36 491.7 (406.4 mm) 23.62 600 23.83 605.3 20.34 516.6 2.16” 20.31” (54.7 mm) 24.61 625 24.82 630.4 21.33 541.8 (515.9 mm) 15216-XXX 15212-XXX 25.59 650 25.80 655.3 22.31 566.7 Notes: 26.57 675 26.78 680.2 23.29 591.6 1. There are seven depth settings for each part number as listed in the table. 27.56 700 27.77 705.4 24.28 616.7 2. Each rack adjusts front-to-rear in depth up to 5.91” 28.54 725 28.75 730.3 25.26 641.6 (150 mm) in .98” (25 mm) increments. 3. Rack mounting channel depth is fixed once assembled. 29.53 750 29.74 755.4 26.25 666.8 4. Overall Depth (D) is Channel Depth (C) + .21” (5.3 mm). 30.51 775 30.72 780.3 27.23 691.6 5. Floor Mounting Holes (E) are Channel Depth (C) - 3.28” 31.50 800 31.71 805.4 28.22 716.8 (83.3 mm). 15217-XXX 15213-XXX 32.48 825 32.69 830.3 29.2 741.7 33.46 850 33.67 855.2 30.18 766.6 34.45 875 34.66 880.4 31.17 791.7 35.43 900 35.64 905.3 32.15 816.6 36.42 925 36.63 930.4 33.14 841.8 37.40 950 37.61 955.3 34.12 866.6 38.39 975 38.60 980.4 35.11 891.8 15218-XXX 15214-XXX 39.37 1000 39.58 1005 36.09 916.7 40.35 1025 40.56 1030 37.07 941.6 41.34 1050 41.55 1055 38.06 966.7 42.32 1075 42.53 1080 39.04 991.6 Solid and Vented Shelves Supports heavy peripheral equipment. 1U x 19”W steel, shelf with adjustable depth rear mounting brackets with solid or vented support surface; 17.68”W (449.1 mm) . Supports 200 lb (90.7 kg) of equipment, includes assembly hardware. 15245-X01 Shelf Mounting Shipping Shelves Depth Channel Depth Weight Solid Vented in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) 15255-X01 15.75 to 21.65 (400 to 550) 15245-X01 13.84 (351.5) 10 (4.5) 15245-X02 15255-X02 20.73 (526.5) 22.64 to 28.54 (575 to 725) 12 (5.4) 15245-X03 15255-X03 27.62 (701.6) 29.53 to 35.43 (750 to 900) 15 (6.8) 15255-X04 36.42 to 42.32 (925 to 1075) 15245-X04 34.51 (876.6) 18 (8.2) 15255-X01 X=Color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 1-15 15205-X01 15330-X01 15335-X01 ADJUSTABLE 4-POST RACK Adjustable 4-Post Rack Accessories Equipment Support Rail Provides additional support for heavy rack-mount equipment. Attaches to the side of rack and provides a 1.5”W (38 mm) front-to-rear support surface for equipment. Supports 200 lb (90.7 kg) of equipment, includes assemblyand installtion hardware. 15235-X01 Extra Heavy Duty Sliding Shelf This 2U x 19”W sliding shelf with adjustable depth rear mounting brackets attaches to rack channels set 20.62” to 32.48”D (525 to 825 mm). Solid surface is 15.5”W x 26”D (393.7 mm x 660 mm) and extends 24” (609 mm) and locks in the open and closed positions. Supports 300 lb (136 kg) of equipment. Cable Runway Mounting Bracket Attaches Runway to the top of the Adjustable QuadraRack or ServerRack. Aligns 12700-X19 with the front, rear or side of the rack and supports 6”W to 24”W (150 mm to 600 mm) CPI Cable Runway. S-shaped, steel bracket measures 1.0”H x 3.3”W x 24.4”L (25 mm x 84 mm x 620 mm) and includes mounting hardware. Center Rail Provides an additional pair of steel mounting rails for rack-mount equipment. One pair of 19”W mounting rails with square-punched or threaded equipment mounting rails. Adjustable depth - attach the rails at any point along the side of the rack, marked and numbered rack-mount spaces simplify equipment installation. Maximum mount depth is 6” (152 mm) less than the channel depth of the rack. 1,000 lb (453.6) equipment load bearing capacity when used as an independent pair or rails; rack load remains 2,000 lb (907.2) when Center Rail is used as the front or rear pair of four-point mounting solution. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 15235-X01 Equipment Rail, 15.75 to 19.69 (400 to 500) D 5 (2.3) 15235-X02 Equipment Rail, 20.67 to 24.61 (525 to 625) D 6 (2.7) 15235-X03 Equipment Rail, 25.59 to 29.53 (650 to 750) D 7 (3.2) 15235-X04 Equipment Rail, 30.51 to 34.45 (775 to 875) D 9 (4.1) 15235-X05 Equipment Rail, 35.43 to 39.37 (900 to 1000) D 10 (4.5) 15235-X06 Equipment Rail, 40.35 to 44.29 (1025 to1125) D 12 (5.4) 12700-X19 Extra Heavy Duty Solid Shelf, 19”W 51 (23.1) 15330-X01 Center Rail, Square Punched, 38U, 72 (1800) H 20 (9.1) 15330-X03 Center Rail, Square Punched, 45U, 84 (2100) H 23 (10.4) 15330-X15 Center Rail, Square Punched, 51U, 96 (2400) H 26 (11.8) 15330-X08 Center Rail, Square Punched, 58U, 108 (2740) H 29 (13.2) 15335-X01 Center Rail, Threaded #12-24, 38U, 72 (1800) H 20 (9.1) 15335-X03 Center Rail, Threaded #12-24, 45U, 84 (2100) H 23 (10.4) 15335-X15 Center Rail, Threaded #12-24, 51U, 96 (2400) H 26 (11.8) 15335-X08 Center Rail, Threaded #12-24, 58U, 108 (2740) H 29 (13.2) Cable Runway Mounting Bracket, 15205-X01 5 (2.3) for 6 to 24 (150 to 600) W Cable Runway X=Color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 1-16 FIXED FOUR-POST RACK ® QuadraRack Server Frame ® Designed specifically for rack-mount servers, the QuadraRack Server Frame offers the strength and stability of a cabinet, but in an open mounting system. Providing easy access for simplified installation and cabling, the QuadraRack Server Frame offers unrestricted airflow for improved cooling and heat dissipation. The unique, steel C-shaped channels with square holes and horizontal braces were designed to provide optimal torsional strength. We've made the horizontal braces quick and easy to install with the supplied carriage bolts. Since rack-mount servers require various types of mounting screws, cage nuts provide the flexibility. • 19” EIA width • Manufactured from aluminum and steel • Painted black, gray and white powder coat, textured finish • EIA-310-D Standard Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern • Square-punched mounting holes adapt with cage nuts (listed below) to match equipment mounting requirements • Top Extension Pan Set provides two 6” x 16” (150 mm x 410 mm) cable access ports • Frame depth is 29” (740 mm) with overall depth of 41” (1040 mm) from edge-to-edge of base angles • Load Rating: 1000 lb (453.6 kg) — weight must be evenly distributed and the rack must be properly secured to the floor QuadraRack Server Frame Kit includes: • (4) Rack Channels • (2) Base Angles • (2) Top Angles • (1) Extension Pan Set • (8) Plate Nuts and Assembly Hardware • (2) Horizontal Braces Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number Height - ft (m), Depth - in (mm) lb (kg) 15053-X03 7 (2.1) x 19 x 29 (740), 45U 77 (34.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black Steel Channels with square holes adapt to server mounting screws Square-Punched Hardware Kits (sold separately) Shipping Part Nominal Package Finish Weight Number Size Of lb (kg) 12637-001 M-6 25 Gold Over Zinc 1 (0.5) 12638-001 10-32 25 Zinc 1 (0.5) 12639-001 12-24 25 Black 1 (0.5) 1-17 FIXED FOUR-POST RACK ® QuadraRack 4-Post Frame ® The QuadraRack 4-Post Frame offers the strength and stability of a cabinet in an open mounting system. Enjoy easy equipment installation along with unrestricted airflow for improved cooling and heat dissipation. • 19” EIA width • Manufactured from aluminum • EIA-310-D Standard Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm-15.9 mm-12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern, mounting holes are roll-formed #12-24 • Ships unassembled • Load Rating: 2000 lb (907.2 kg) — weight must be evenly distributed and the rack must be properly secured to the floor QuadraRack 4-Post Frame Kit includes: • (4) Rack Channels • (2) Base Angles • (2) Top Angles • (1) Extension Pan Set • (1) Bag of 100 Rack mounting screws — Pilot Point #12-24 with combination Phillips/Straight head Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number Height - ft (m), Depth - in (mm) lb (kg) 50120-X03 7 (2.1) x 19 x 29 (740), 45U 65 (29.5) 50120-X15 8 (2.4) x 19 x 29 (740), 51U 67 (30.4) 50120-X08 9 (2.7) x 19 x 29 (740), 58U 69 (31.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Not intended for rack-mount servers ExpandaRack Convert a CPI two-post rack to a QuadraRack with ExpandaRack. Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number Height - ft (m), Depth - in (mm) lb (kg) ExpandaRack - Standard Rack 50110-X03 7 (2.1) x 19 x 29 (740), 45U 46 (20.9) 50110-X15 8 (2.4) x 19 x 29 (740), 51U 48 (21.8) 50110-X08 9 (2.7) x 19 x 29 (740), 58U 50 (22.7) ExpandaRack - Universal Rack 50130-X03 7 (2.1) x 19 x 29 (740), 45U 52 (23.6) 50130-X15 8 (2.4) x 19 x 29 (740), 51U 55 (24.9) 50130-X08 9 (2.7) x 19 x 29 (740), 58U 58 (26.3) ExpandaRack - Pan Set (W x D) 50150-X99 19 x 29 (740) — Std Rack 18 (8.2) 50160-X99 19 x 29 (740) — Universal Rack 18 (8.2) 1-18 FIXED FOUR-POST RACK ACCESSORIES ® QuadraRack Accessories Heavy Duty Fixed Shelf - Solid Specially designed for QuadraRack. 1U x 19”W x 29”D (740 mm) shelf. Supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg). Heavy Duty Fixed Shelf - Vented Specially designed for QuadraRack. 1U x 19”W x 29”D (740 mm) vented shelf 16351-X19 that optimizes airflow. Supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg). Extra Heavy Duty 4-Point Sliding Shelf Specially designed to support heavy equipment. 2U x 19”W x 26”D (660 mm) sliding shelf, extends 24” (610 mm), adjusts between 20” and 34” (510 mm and 860 mm) mounting depth. Supports up to 300 lb (136.1 kg). Equipment Tie-Down Bracket Prevents back-and-forth, side-to-side and up-and-down movement of shelf- 16350-X19 mount equipment. 3U x 19”W x 23”D (580 mm). Dust Cover Improves the appearance of QuadraRack 4-Post Frame and prevents the accumulation of dust and debris at the base. Power Strips Both horizontal and vertical power strips can be mounted to the QuadraRack. These solutions can be found in Section 7. 12700-X19 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 16351-X19 Heavy Duty Fixed Shelf, Solid 11 (5.0) 16350-X19 Heavy Duty Fixed Shelf, Vented 11 (5.0) 12700-X19 Extra Heavy Duty Sliding Shelf* 8 (3.6) 16342-X01 Rack Line-Up Spacer, Universal 1 (0.5) 16342-X02 Rack Line-Up Spacer, Standard 1 (0.5) 16356-X19 16356-X19 Equipment Tie-Down Bracket 4 (1.8) 16341-X19 Rack Base Dust Cover 4 (1.8) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black *12700-X19 not available in Clear 16341-X19 1-19 SHELVES Small Peripheral Shelf Designed to hold small peripheral equipment in a central location. Each shelf typically holds two units and allows a convenient cable run down the inside of the rack channel. Mounting hardware not included. 19” rack mountable, holds equipment up to 17.35”W x 9.82”D (440.7 mm x 249.4 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 50 lb (22.7 kg). 10758-X01 Single-Sided Shelf A convenient 15”D (380 mm) mounting shelf for miscellaneous equipment, test gear, etc. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.25”W x 14.82”D (438.2 mm x 376.4 mm), 23” version holds equipment up to 21.25”W x 14.82”D (539.8 mm x 376.4 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 50 lb (22.7 kg). 19” version is UL Listed: File E140851; Category DUXR (US), DUXR7 (Canada) – Communications Circuit Accessory. Single-Sided Vented Shelf Supports routers, switches, CPUs or any equipment requiring bottom ventilation. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.25”W x 14.82”D (438.2 mm x 376.4 mm), 23” version holds equipment up to 21.25”W x 14.82”D (539.8 mm x 376.4 mm). Wall, backboard or rack mountable. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum with airflow perforations, supports up to 50 lb (22.7 kg). 40074-X00 16”D (410 mm) Low Profile Shelf Reduced height design saves on valuable rack space. Center mount design is ideal for single sided racks, mounts to either front or back of rack channel face. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.25”W x 15.82”D (438.2 mm x 401.8 mm), 23” version holds equipment up to 21.25”W x 15.82”D (539.8 mm x 401.8 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 40 lb (18.1 kg). Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10758-X01 Small Peripheral Shelf, 19”W 5 (2.3) 40074-X00 Single-Sided Shelf, For 19” Rack 6 (2.7) 40075-X00 Single-Sided Shelf, For 23” Rack 7 (3.2) 40117-X19 40117-X19 Single-Sided Vented Shelf, For 19” Rack 6 (2.7) 40118-X23 Single-Sided Vented Shelf, For 23” Rack 7 (3.2) 11293-X19 Low Profile Shelf, For 19” Rack 4 (1.8) 11293-X23 Low Profile Shelf, For 23” Rack 5 (2.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 11293-X19 1-20 SHELVES Standard Single-Sided Steel Shelf Economical rack or wall-mounted shelf for miscellaneous equipment. Made of cold-rolled steel and may be rack or wall-mounted. 19” rack-mountable, holds equipment up to 17.25”W x 14.75”D (438.2 mm x 374.7 mm). Sold two per shipping carton, supports up to 35 lb (15.9 kg). 40750-X19 Standard Double-Sided Steel Shelf An economical rack or wall-mounted shelf with twice the shelf space for centered loading and deeper equipment handling. Made of cold-rolled steel, this shelf mounts on double-sided racks only. 19” rack mountable, holds equipment up to 17.25”W x 21.50”D (438.2 mm x 546.1 mm) and supports up to 25 lb (11.3 kg) per side or 50 lb (22.7 kg) total. 19”D (480 mm) Low Profile Shelf Reduced height design saves on valuable rack space. Mounts to either front or back of rack channel face. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.25”W x 18.82”D (438.2 mm x 478.0 mm), 23” version holds equipment up to 21.25”W x 18.82”D (539.8 mm x 478.0 mm) Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 40 lb (18.1 kg). 26”D (660 mm) Shelf 40751-X19 Extra deep design is convenient for mounting large equipment requiring additional support. Will fit inside most CPI rack enclosures, except P/N 11058 or wall enclosure). Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds 4.25” (108.0 mm) 4.80” (121.9 mm) equipment up to 17.75”W x 25.8”D (450.9 mm x 655.8 mm), 23” version holds equipment up to 21.75”W x 25.8”D (552.5 mm x 655.8 mm). Made of strong, 9.37” (238.0 mm) 10.84” (275.3 mm) lightweight aluminum, supports up to 150 lb (68.0 kg). 19” version is UL Listed: File E140851; Category DUXR (US), DUXR7 (Canada) – Communications Circuit Accessory. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 40750-719 Standard Single-Sided Steel Shelf, Black 12 (5.4) 11294-X19 40751-719 Standard Double-Sided Steel Shelf, Black 10 (4.5 ) 11294-X19 Low Profile Shelf, For 19” Rack 5 (2.3) 11294-X23 Low Profile Shelf, For 23” Rack 6 (2.7) 11054-X19 26”D (660 mm) Shelf, For 19” Rack 10 (4.5) 11054-X23 26”D (660 mm) Shelf, For 23” Rack 10 (4.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 11054-X19 1-21 SHELVES Double-Sided Shelf Provides centered loading for deeper and heavier equipment. Mounts on 3”D (80 mm) double-sided racks only. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.75”W x 21.5”D (450.9 mm x 546.0 mm), 23” version holds equipment up to 21.75”W x 21.5”D (552.5 mm x 546.0 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 100 lb (45.4 kg). 19” version is UL Listed: File E140851; Category DUXR (US), DUXR7 (Canada) – Communications Circuit Accessory. 40108-X19 Double-Sided Vented Shelf Convenient for mounting any equipment requiring bottom ventilation, airflow perforations for increased airflow around components. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.75”W x 21.5”D (450.9 mm x 546.0 mm), 23” version holds equipment up to 21.75”W x 21.5”D (552.5 mm x 546.0 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 100 lb (45.4 kg). Double-Sided Low Profile Vented Shelf Reduced height design saves valuable rack space and perforated shelf keeps equipment cool, bottom ventilation for enhanced airflow circulation. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.75”W x 19.8”D (450.9 mm x 503.4 mm). Mounts on 3”D (80 mm) double-sided racks only. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 60 lb (27.2 kg). 11231-X19 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 40108-X19 Double-Side Shelf, For 19” Rack 8 (3.6) 40108-X23 Double-Side Shelf, For 23” Rack 9 (4.1) 11231-X19 Double-Side Vented Shelf, For 19” Rack 8 (3.6) 11232-X23 Double-Side Vented Shelf, For 23” Rack 9 (4.1) 11359-X19 Low Profile Vented Shelf For 19” Rack 8 (3.6) 11359-X23 Low Profile Vented Shelf For 23” Rack 9 (4.1) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 11359-X19 1-22 SHELVES Heavy Duty Equipment Shelf for 3” (80 mm) Channel Convenient for mounting large equipment requiring additional support. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.75”W x 19.8”D (450.9 mm x 503.4 mm), 23” version holds equipment up to 21.75”W x 19.8”D (552.5 mm x 503.4 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg). 19” version is UL Listed: File E140851; 11164-X19 Category DUXR (US), DUXR7 (Canada) – Communications Circuit Accessory. Heavy Duty Equipment Shelf for 6” (150 mm) Channel This shelf is designed to hold heavy equipment requiring extra support. Fits ® Standard Rack 6”D (150 mm) and Seismic Frame Two Post Rack. Mounting hardware not included. 19” version holds equipment up to 17.75”W x 19.8”D (450.9 mm x 503.4 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg). Sliding Equipment Shelf Provides a sliding shelf for front access to all equipment. Mounting hardware not included. 18”D (460 mm) shelf extends out an additional 16” (410 mm) from closed position, lockable in fully extended and fully retracted positions. 19” version holds up to 16”W x 17.5”D (410 mm x 445 mm) equipment, 23” 12293-X19 version holds up to 20”W x 17.5”D (510 mm x 445 mm) equipment. Mounts on 3”D (80 mm) double-sided racks only. Made of sturdy, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 100 lb (45.4 kg). Extra-Extended Sliding Equipment Shelf Provides a full 25” (640 mm) extension, it is easy to access the back of network servers (or other large equipment). Mounting hardware not included. 19” holds up to 16”W x 24”D (410 mm x 610 mm) equipment, 23” holds up to 20”W x 24”D (510 mm x 610 mm) equipment. Shelf locks in closed or fully open position and, ships fully assembled. Strong, lightweight aluminum construction, supports up to 150 lb (68 kg). Note: To prevent tipping, rack must be properly attached to floor. Shipping Part Description Weight 11415-X19 Number lb (kg) Heavy Duty Shelf for 3” (80 mm) Channel, 11164-X19 8 (3.6) For 19” Rack Heavy Duty Shelf for 3” (80 mm) Channel, 11164-X23 9 (4.1) For 23” Rack Heavy Duty Shelf for 6” (150 mm) Channel, 12293-X19 10 (4.5) For 19” Rack 11415-X19 Sliding Equipment Shelf, For 19” Rack 13 (5.9) 12227-X19 11415-X23 Sliding Equipment Shelf, For 23 Rack 13 (5.9) 12227-X19 Extra-Extended Shelf, For 19” Rack 10 (4.5) 12227-X23 Extra-Extended Shelf, For 23 Rack 10 (4.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 1-23 SPECIALTY SHELVES anyServer Bracket The anyServer Bracket is a simple, yet sturdy solution to secure virtually any server to a 19”W, two-post open rack. It is the ideal, cost-effective system for retrofitting existing racks to accommodate one or more servers instead of reverting to a four-post rack or cabinet system. The anyServer Bracket can be adjusted to fit all of your server’s requirements enabling you to keep the same mounting system — even if you change equipment in the future. Purchase optional Supplementary Server Support Arms to firmly secure the tops of tall servers to the rack. In some instances, they can also help you mount your server if its captive screw holes are in the middle or top of the device. The anyServer Bracket comes with front and rear steel pans and four steel adjustable arms (with mounting hardware). • Manufactured from cold rolled steel • The server can be positioned 9” to 13” (230 mm to 330 mm) in front of the A split-pan design provides a broader surface rack channel; mounting arms extend 4” (100 mm) total in .5” (10 mm) area to support server weight increments • Square holes at the front of adjustable mounting arms for cage nuts (sold separately) • Acorn nuts eliminate sharp edges • Supplementary arms (purchased separately) provide extra support • Load rating: - 1U bracket is 80 lb (36.3 kg) - 2U bracket is 120 lb (54.4 kg) • Rack mounting hardware is not included Description Shipping Part H x W Weight Number (in) lb (kg) 12751-719 1U x 19, Black Bracket 11 (5.0) 12752-719 2U x 19, Black Bracket 14 (6.4) Supplementary Server Support Arms, anyServer Bracket shown on rack with server 12759-701 3 (1.4) Fixed, 1 Pair, 1U, Black and optional Server Support Arms Square-Punched Hardware Kits (sold separately) Shipping Part Nominal Package Finish Weight Number Size Of lb (kg) 12637-001 M-6 25 Gold Over Zinc 1 (0.5) 12638-001 10-32 25 Zinc 1 (0.5) Optional Server Support Arm 12639-001 12-24 25 Black 1 (0.5) 1-24 DRAWERS Redesigned to allow Lockable Storage Drawer stackable units CPI’s improved Lockable Storage Drawer keeps backup media, software, manuals, laptops, test equipment and extra patch cords in close proximity to where they are typically used within a rack or cabinet. Lockable Storage Drawer is available for 19”W or 23”W racks and cabinets. It includes attachment brackets that allow center mounting on two-post racks with 3” or 6”D (80 mm or 150 mm) equipment channels or front and rear attachment to four-post racks and cabinet systems with mounting rails that are adjusted between 24” and 39”D (610 mm and 990 mm). • Attaches to any CPI freestanding 19”W or 23”W rack or cabinet system Drawer with two-post mounting brackets • Available in three heights: 2U, 3U and 4U • Features 20”D (510 mm) lockable drawer that extends full depth for easy access to stored equipment • Redesigned to allow for stackable units • Supports a 100 lb (45.4 kg) load (drawer and top surface combined) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 19” Rack or Cabinet Mount Depth - in (mm) Drawer with four-post mounting brackets 13082-X19 2U Drawer, 20 (510) 18 (8.2) 13083-X19 3U Drawer, 20 (510) 20 (9.1) 13084-X19 4U Drawer, 20 (510) 22 (10.0) 23” Rack or Cabinet Mount Depth - in (mm) 13082-X23 2U Drawer, 20 (510) 21 (9.5) 13083-X23 3U Drawer, 20 (510) 23 (10.4) 13084-X23 4U Drawer, 20 (510) 25 (11.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Drawer Dividers For Lockable Storage Drawer Divide your Lockable Storage Drawer into three sections, approximately 5”W (130 mm) each, to organize and store CD and tape cases. For use with the 3U and 4U drawers only. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13185-X01 Divider, 3U & 4U Drawers 3 (1.4) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 1-25 15.88” (403.4 mm) MONITOR/KEYBOARD TRAYS CPU/Monitor Shelf with Single Sliding Keyboard Tray Provides convenient mounting of CPU or monitor and keyboard. Mounting hardware not included. Keyboard tray extends 8.6” (218 mm), 19”W rack trays must use small footprint keyboard; maximum width 16.30” (414 mm). 19” holds equipment up to 17.75”W x 19.82”D (450.9 mm x 503.4 mm), 23” holds equipment up to 21.75”W x 19.82”D (552.5 mm x 503.4 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg). Note: Small footprint keyboards are available from CPI. 11487-X19 CPU/Monitor Shelf with Double Sliding Keyboard Tray Convenient mounting two keyboards. Mounting hardware not included. The keyboard tray extends 8.6” (218 mm). 19”W rack trays must use small footprint keyboard; maximum width 16.30” (414 mm). 19” holds equipment up to 17.75”W x 19.8”D (450.9 mm x 503.4 mm), 23” holds equipment up to 21.75”W x 19.8”D (552.5 mm x 503.4 mm). Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg). Note: Small footprint keyboards are available from CPI. Sliding Single Keyboard Tray Provides retractable rack-mounting tray for keyboards up to 9.8”D (249 mm). Extends 8” (200 mm) providing full access to keyboard, retracts out of the way when not in use. 19” version holds up to 16.1”W (409 mm) keyboards, 23” version holds up to 20.1”W (511 mm) keyboards. Mounting hardware not included. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11488-X19 11487-X19 Monitor Shelf, Single Tray, For 19” Rack 12 (5.4) 11487-X23 Monitor Shelf, Single Tray, For 19” Rack 12 (5.4) Monitor Shelf, Single Tray, For 19” Rack, 12487-X19 12 (5.4) with Mouse Pad Tray Monitor Shelf, Single Tray, For 23” Rack, 12487-X23 12 (5.4) with Mouse Pad Tray 11488-X19 Monitor Shelf, Double Tray, For 19” Rack 16 (7.3) 11488-X23 Monitor Shelf, Double Tray, For 23” Rack 16 (7.3) 12062-X19* Sliding Single Keyboard Tray, For 19” Rack 10 (4.5) 12062-X23 Sliding Single Keyboard Tray, For 23” Rack 10 (4.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black *Must use small footprint keyboard. Also available, Sliding Double Keyboard Tray (P/N 11227-XXX). Visit www.chatsworth.com for details. 12062-X19 2.86” 3.27” (72.6 mm) (83.1 mm) 7.20” (182.9 mm) 1-26 KEYBOARD TRAYS 23” Full Size Sliding Keyboard Tray & Mouse Convenient tray for holding keyboard and mouse. Mounting hardware not included. Keyboard tray extends 8” (200 mm) for full access to all keys, tray and pad retract when not in use. Holds keyboards up to 20.1”W x 9.8”D (511 mm x 249 mm). 9” x 7” (230 mm x 180 mm) mouse pad mounts in a choice of four convenient locations. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum. 11690-X23 Flush Mounted Sliding Keyboard Tray with Wrist Rest Space-saving tray requires only 1U (44.45 mm) providing more space for mounting electronics. Ball bearing slides for smooth operation, locks in open position and retracts when not in use. 19” version holds up to 16.37”W x 7.67”D (415.8 mm x 194.8 mm) keyboards, 23” version holds up to 20.37”W x 8.67”D (517.4 mm x 220.2 mm) keyboards. Mounting hardware not included. Keyboard tray extends 11” (280 mm) for full access to all keys. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum. Flush Mounted Keyboard Tray Provides retractable rack-mounting tray for most keyboards up to 8.5”D (216 mm). Mounting hardware not included. Extends 8” (200 mm) giving full access to keyboard, retracts when not in use. 19” version holds up to 16.1”W (409 mm) keyboards. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum, This tray does not support the mouse pad attachment. Shipping Part 1555-X19 Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11690-X23 23” Full Size Sliding Keyboard & Mouse 12 (4.5) Flush Mount Sliding Keyboard 15555-X19 8.5 (3.9) with Wrist Rest, For 19” Racks Flush Mount Sliding Keyboard 15556-X23 10 (4.5) with Wrist Rest, For 23” Racks 12717-X19* Flush Mount Keyboard Tray, For 19” Racks 8 (3.6) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black *19” rack tray must use small footprint keyboard. 12717-X19 1-27 KEYBOARD TRAYS 19” Full Size Sliding Keyboard & Mouse Tray Holds full size keyboard and mouse. Slide is mounted under shelf to provide maximum tray width. Mounting hardware not included. Mouse pad tray is 10”W x 8”D (250 mm x 200 mm), retracts out of the way when not in use. Fits up to 19.25”W x 9”D (489 mm x 230 mm) keyboards. Extends approximately 9” (230 mm) for full access to keyboard. Made of strong, lightweight Note: Mouse pad aluminum. 12193-X01 on right side only 19” Full Size Sliding Keyboard Tray Tray holds full size keyboard with slide mounted under shelf to provide maximum tray width. Mounting hardware not included. Extends approximately 9” (230 mm) for full access to keyboard. Fits up to 19.25”W x 9”D (489 mm x 230 mm) keyboards. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum. Note: Does not support the mouse pad attachment. Keyboard and Tray The Keyboard+Tray features a built-in touchpad, two PS/2 standard connectors; one for the keyboard, one for the touchpad (mouse) and requires only 1U of space. Slides into the cabinet or rack when not needed. Gold Contact Keyboards provide an extremely clean signal, improving the overall signal integrity. Mounting hardware not included, ships fully assembled. 11546-X01 Space-Saving Stationary Keyboard Shelf CPI’s Space-Saving Stationary Keyboard Shelf was designed to be used in high-density server installations. The shelf incorporates a rigid 10° angled surface for keyboard support, providing comfortable and convenient keyboard positioning and operation. Mounting hardware not included. Available in 19”W or 23”W x 8.28”D (210.3 mm) Made from strong, lightweight aluminum. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12193-X01* 19” Sliding Keyboard Tray 9 (4.1) 11546-X01 19” Full Size Keyboard Tray 9 (4.1) 12665-X19 Space-Saving Shelf, For 19” Racks 3 (1.4) 12665-X23 Space-Saving Shelf, For 23” Racks 3 (1.4) 12665-X19 13490-719 2-Post, Keyboard+Tray, Black 13 (5.9) 2-Post, Keyboard+Tray, 13490-729 13 (5.9) With Gold Contacts 13480-719 4-Post, Keyboard+Tray, Black 12 (5.4) 4-Post, Keyboard+Tray, 13480-729 12 (5.4) With Gold Contacts 23480-001 Keyboard Only 3 (1.4) 23480-002 Keyboard With Gold Contacts 3 (1.4) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black *Also available, Mouse Pad Attachment (P/N 11692-XXX) and 23” Wrist Rest Attachment (P/N 12306-XXX). Visit www.chatsworth.com for details. Keyboard without 13490-719 tray also available 1-28 INSTALLATION PRODUCTS Rack Base Insulator Kit Rack Base Insulator Kits electrically isolate the racks from the floor for an effective grounding and bonding system. Made of .062” (1.57 mm) — thick phenolic insulating material and accepts up to 0.5” (10 mm) diameter screws. Used primarily on concrete floors, not needed for raised-floor applications. Kit consists of: • (2) isolation plates • (4) isolation grommets Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10605-019 Insulator Kit, 19” Rack 3 (1.4) 10605-023 Insulator Kit, 23” Rack 3 (1.4) Rack Line-Up Spacer Kit Bolts and spacer securely attach two racks mounted side-by-side. Universal Rack Kit consists of: • (2) spacer plates 1” x 3” x 1/8” (30 mm x 80 mm x 3.18 mm) thick aluminum • (4) 5/16-18 x 2” hex cap screws • (4) 5/16-18 hex nuts • (8) 5/16 plain washers Standard Rack Kit consists of: • (2) spacer plates 1” x 3” x 1/8” (30 mm x 80 mm x 3.18 mm) thick aluminum • (4) 1/2-20 x 1” hex cap screws • (4) 1/2-20 hex nuts • (4) 1/2 plain washers Shipping Kits for Kits for Weight Universal Racks Standard Racks lb (kg) 40602-X00 40702-X00 1 (0.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Rack and Frame Installation Kits Required hardware for securing equipment racks and frames to both concrete and wood floors. Concrete Kit has four 3/8” thread component or four 1/2” thread components. Wood kit has four 3/8” thread components. Shipping Part Floor Type Finish Weight Number lb (kg) 40604-001 Concrete Floor, 3/8” Zinc 1 (0.5) 40604-003 Concrete Floor, 1/2” Zinc 1 (0.5) 40607-001 Wood Floor, 3/8” Zinc 1 (0.5) 1-29 INSTALLATION PRODUCTS Anchors Use to secure threaded rods or stud bolts in concrete or masonry. The 20067-001 Anchor is used with 3/8-16 threaded rods, and the 06001-004 Anchor used with 5/8-11 threaded rods. To install the 06001-004 Anchor, use the specially designed Anchor Setting Tool (P/N 06003-001). 20067-001 Installation instructions included. Sold individually. Min. Part Drill Description Length Hole Number Dia. Depth 20067-001 3/8-16 Exp. Shield 2” 5/8” 2-1/8” 06001-004 5/8-11 Multi-Set 2-1/2” 7/8” 2-1/2” 06003-001 Anchor Setting Tool N/A N/A N/A 06001-004 Raised Floor Rack Support Used to support equipment racks installed on 4” to 36” (100 mm to 910 mm) height raised floor support systems. Enhances structural integrity during seismic events. • Racks are mounted to sub or base floor using 5/8” threaded rods and steel brackets • Steel brackets finished in gray color Kits consists of: • (4) pre-cut threaded rods • (4) “Z” brackets • All mounting hardware Note: To install the anchors, use the specially designed anchor setting tool (P/N 06003-001) sold separately. 3” (80 mm) Rack Channel Rack with 3”(80 mm) channel shown Shipping Height of Floor 19” Rack 23” Rack Weight in (mm) lb (kg) 10632-119 10632-123 4 to 10 (100 to 250) 15 (6.8) 10629-119 10629-123 10 to 16 (250 to 410) 18 (8.2) 10630-119 10630-123 16 to 22 (410 to 560) 20 (9.1) 10631-119 10631-123 22 to 28 (560 to 710) 23 (10.4) 13501-119 13501-123 30 to 36 (760 to 910) 34 (15.4) 6” (150 mm) Rack Channel 11760-119 11760-123 4 to 10 (100 to 250) 15 (6.8) 11761-119 11761-123 10 to 16 (250 to 410) 18 (8.2) 11762-119 11762-123 16 to 22 (410 to 560) 21 (9.5) P/N 13501 11763-119 11763-123 22 to 28 (560 to 710) 24 (10.9) 13515-119 13515-123 30 to 36 (760 to 910) 34 (15.4) 1-30 TOP & BASE ANGLES Heavy Duty Top Angle Optional top angle for CPI Universal, 3”D (80 mm) Standard or 6”D (150 mm) Standard Rack. • Material is aluminum extrusion • Top Angle is L-shaped, 1-1/2” x 2” x 1/4” (38 mm x 51 mm x 6.4 mm) thick • Recommended for use in pairs with 10562-001 Universal Earthquake Bracing Kit • Sold individually Part Number Shipping Weight 19” Rack 23” Rack lb (kg) A Rack Width 10473-X01 10473-X02 3 (1.4) in (mm) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 19” 14.57 (370.1) 23” 18.57 (471.1) Top Angle Optional top angles for CPI Universal Rack. • Material is aluminum extrusion 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/4” (38 mm x 38 mm x 6.4 mm) • Sold individually Part Number Shipping Weight 19” Rack 23” Rack lb (kg) 10375-X01 10375-X02 3 (1.4) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Base Angle Optional base angle for CPI Universal Racks. • Material is aluminum extrusion 3-1/2” x 6” x 3/8” (89 mm x 150 mm x 9.53 mm) • Sold individually Part Number Shipping Weight 19” Rack 23” Rack lb (kg) 41021-X01 41021-X02 10 (4.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 1-31 FILLER PANEL Filler Panels For airflow control and/or equipment mounting. • Filler Panels fill empty spaces between mounted equipment. 300 Filler Panels Thickness - in (mm) Width 24 3/16 (4.763) 19” 25 3/16 (4.763) 23” 26 1/8 (3.18) 19” 27 1/8 (3.18) 23” Color 1 Gray 2 Computer White 5 Clear 7 Black Spaces - in (mm) U 01 1.72 (43.7) 1 02 3.47 (88.1) 2 03 5.22 (132.6) 3 04 6.97 (177.0) 4 05 8.72 (221.5) 5 06 10.47 (265.9) 6 07 12.22 (310.4) 7 08 13.97 (354.8) 8 09 15.72 (399.3) 9 10 17.47 (443.7) 10 11 19.22 (488.2) 11 12 20.97 (532.6) 12 300 XX - X XX Touch-Up Paint Spray can: Air dry lacquer for touching up finish. Matches color and gloss of CPI’s textured paint. Air dries to hard finish in minutes • 12-ounce (340 g) pressurized can Note: Cannot be shipped via air. Bottle: Air dry waterborne paint for touching up finish. Matches color and gloss of CPI’s textured paint. • 1-ounce (30 g) bottle with applicator 25401-X00 Shipping Part Description Weight Number oz (g) lb (kg) 25400-X00 12 (340) Can 2 (0.9) 25401-X00 1 (30) Bottle 1 (0.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 1-32 RACK DOLLY WHEELS & ROLLERS Mid-Size Rack Dolly Full swivel capability allows rack to be easily moved, providing access to equipment. The front wheel locks to prevent unintentional movement. Mounts to most CPI Universal and Standard Racks and adds 1-1/4” (31.8 mm) to rack’s height. Two-piece construction of 1/4” (6.4 mm) aluminum complete with hardware. Sold in pairs, load capacity 750 lb (340.2 kg). Rack Universal Dolly Wheels 11643-X01 Allows rack to be moved, providing access to equipment. Wheels may be Note: Vertical cabling sections locked to prevent moving during assembly stages. Holds any width CPI cannot be used on dolly-equipped Universal or Standard Rack. Two-piece construction of 3/8” (9.53 mm) racks. Also, dolly will not fit 6”D aluminum complete with rack-mounting hardware. Supports up to 1000 lb (150 mm) Standard Rack. (453.6 kg). Note: Not to be used with enclosures. Rack Standard Rollers Mount to CPI Universal and Standard racks, regardless of width. Fixed rollers prevent rack from accidental turning. Adds 2” (50 mm) to rack’s height. Ships complete with installation hardware. Supports up to 500 lb (226.8 kg). Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11643-X01 Mid-Size Rack Dolly 24 (10.9) 10175-X00 Universal Dolly Wheels 20 (9.1) Note: Vertical cabling sections 10175-X00 cannot be used on dolly-mounted Rack Standard Rollers, For 3”D (80 mm) racks. Can be used with Universal, 11554-X01 8 (3.6) Rack Channel 3”D (80 mm) Standard or 6”D (150 mm) Standard Racks. Rack Standard Rollers, For 6”D (150 mm) 11554-X03 8 (3.6) Rack Channel X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5 = Clear, 7=Black 11554-X01 1-33 EXTENSION KITS & GUARD RAILS Rack Extension Kit Provides additional height to existing racks. Kit includes one pair of rack channels, four plates and assembly hardware. • Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm - 15.9 mm - 12.7 mm) hole pattern • Mounting hardware is included; ships unassembled Shipping Part Color Weight Number lb (kg) 10565-X12 12”H (300 mm), 4U 4 (1.8) 10565-X24 24”H (610 mm), 11U 6 (2.7) Note: Not for use with X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black CPI Standard Rack Rack Base Dust Cover Improves appearance and prevents the accumulation of dust and debris at the rack base. Snaps securely in place over the base assembly; no mounting hardware necessary. Made of lightweight aluminum. • For CPI Racks with 3” or 6”D (80 mm or 150 mm) channel Part Number Description in (mm) 19” Rack 23” Rack 35” Rack 41050-X19 41050-X23 N/A 3 (80) Rack Channel 42050-X19 42050-X23 42050-X35 6 (150) Rack Channel X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Equipment Guard Rail Provides protection for equipment in racks from rolling gear or tool boxes. • Made of 1/4” x 2” (6.4 mm x 50 mm) aluminum bar • Mounting hardware is included, sold individually 400 Guard Rails Stand Off - in (mm) 56 7 (180) 57 6.5 (165) 58 5.25 (133.4) 59 4.25 (108) Color 1 Gray 2 Computer White 5 Clear 7 Black Width 19 19” Rack 23 23” Rack 400 XX - 6 XX 1-34 PANEL ADAPTERS & SUPPORT BRACKET Rack Panel Adapters (Pair) Allows 19”W equipment to be mounted on a 23”W rack. • Universal 5/8”- 5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm - 15.9 mm - 12.7 mm) • Joggled so that installed panels fit flush Description Shipping Part Height Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 31410-X00 Adapter, Pair, 1U, 1.71 (43.4) 1 (0.5) 31420-X00 Adapter, Pair, 2U, 3.46 (87.9) 1 (0.5) 31430-X00 Adapter, Pair, 3U, 5.21 (132.3) 1 (0.5) 31440-X00 Adapter, Pair, 4U, 6.96 (176.8) 1 (0.5) 31450-X00 Adapter, Pair, 5U, 8.71 (221.2) 1 (0.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5 = Clear, 7=Black Equipment Support Bracket The Equipment Support Bracket mounts on the rear of the rack channel to provide safety and additional support for deep or heavy electronic equipment panel or rack mounted on CPI Racks. • Supports electronic equipment up to 24”D (610 mm) and weighing up to 60 lb (27.2 kg) • Made of strong, lightweight aluminum • Overall depth is 13” (330 mm); chassis support lip is 1.5”W (38 mm) • Fits all EIA standard hole pattern rack channels Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12312-X01 Pair of Brackets 2 (0.9) Sold in pairs. Attachment hardware not included. X=color: 1=Gray,2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black RMU Label Kits Easy-to-read numbers take the guesswork out of aligning components. • Two kits are available: 1-45U for 7’ (2.1 m) racks and cabinets, 1-58U for 8’ or 9’ (2.4 m or 2.7 m) racks and cabinets • Kit contains four individual label packs, enough for four racks or four cabinets • Labels are constructed of ½”W (10 mm) durable polyester film with adhesive backing and are black with rack-mount unit numbers printed in white Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11927-001 1-45U Label 1 (0.5) 11927-002 1-58U Label 1 (0.5) 1-35 RACK CHANNEL STANDOFFS Rack Channel Standoffs Rack Channel Standoffs offer solutions to many electronic component positioning problems including: • Adding deeper electronic components to existing CPI Wall Racks, Heavy Duty Wall Racks, Universal Swing Gate Wall Racks, Standard Swing Gate Wall Rack or Self-Support Racks • Providing improved patch panel cable transitioning when a double- sided cabling section is used with a 3”(80 mm) Rack Channel; use 1-1/2” (38 mm) Rack Channel Standoff • Repositioning rack-mounted electronic components to redistribute component weight or to realign component for whatever reason • Available in three depths and six heights • Packaged one pair per box Shipping Part Overall Mounting Weight Number Height Holes lb (kg) 3” Depth (80 mm) 12309-X01 1U 3 1 (0.5) 12309-X02 2U 6 1 (0.5) 12309-X03 3U 9 2 (0.9) 12309-X04 4U 12 2 (0.9) 12309-X05 5U 15 2 (0.9) 12309-X10 10U 30 4 (1.8) 6” Depth (150 mm) 12310-X01 1U 3 1 (0.5) 12310-X02 2U 6 1 (0.5) 12310-X03 3U 9 2 (0.9) 12310-X04 4U 12 2 (0.9) 12310-X05 5U 15 2 (0.9) 12310-X10 10U 30 4 (1.8) 1-1/2” Depth (38 mm) 12311-X01 1U 3 1 (0.5) 12311-X02 2U 6 1 (0.5) 12311-X03 3U 9 2 (0.9) Front of channel tapped with #12-24 threaded 12311-X04 4U 12 2 (0.9) holes, EIA 310 Universal holes spacing 12311-X05 5U 15 2 (0.9) 12311-X10 10U 30 4 (1.8) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 1-36 PANEL ADAPTER Panel Adapter with Cable Management, Single-Sided, 23” to 19” CPI offers a solution for those who have 7’H (2.1 m) x 23”W racks and need to mount 19” equipment along the entire length of the rack. Existing panel adapters are typically composed of two side panels which reduce the mounting width and center the equipment. CPI’s unique design performs the reduction on one side. Not only can you mount 19” equipment, but you also have room for cable management on the wide adapter panel. Eight 2.25” (57.2 mm) oval pass-through ports with edge protectors provide cable access from front to rear of the panel. In addition, there are seven threaded holes along the front surface of the panels for mounting optional ® Center Grommet Buckle Saf-T-Grip Cable Management Straps to provide strain relief and vertical cable management. • Includes (50) pilot point #12-24 mounting screws with combination Phillips/Straight heads • Saf-T-Grip straps are optional • Split design allows you to adapt half or all of a 7’H (2.1 m) relay rack • Adapter panels mount on right or left side of rack • Panels are joggled to maintain uniform mounting surface plane • For lightweight applications (patch panels & cable management) Shipping Part Description/Color Weight Number lb (kg) 7’ (2.1 m) Panel Adapters 13044-X03 7’H (2.1 m) Panel Adapters 5 (2.3) OPTIONAL: Saf-T-Grip Center Grommet Cable Management Straps (Pkg. of 25) W x L - in (mm) 06006-201 3/4 x 6 (19.1 x 150), Black 1 (0.5) 06006-203 3/4 x 6 (19.1 x 150), Royal Blue 1 (0.5) 06009-201 3/4 x 9 (230 x 19.1), Black 1 (0.5) 06009-203 3/4 x 9 (230 x 19.1), Royal Blue 1 (0.5) 06012-201 3/4 x 12 (300 x 19.1), Black 1 (0.5) 06012-203 3/4 x 12 (300 x 19.1) Royal Blue 1 (0.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 1-37 MISCELLANEOUS SCREWS Combination Pan Head, Pilot Point, Mounting Screws The #12-24 Combination Pan Head, Pilot Point Mounting Screws attach equipment to racks and cabinets. A cutting notch in the thread removes paint in threaded holes to improve metal-to-metal contact. The pilot point reduces cross-threading. The combination head can be used with #3 Phillips and slotted screwdrivers. • Available in choice of zinc plated or black finish in packages of 50 and 1000 Shipping Part Nominal Package Weight Number Size Of lb (kg) 40605-001 12-24 50 1 (0.5) 40605-004 12-24 1000 9 (4.1) 40605-005 12-24 (Black) 50 1 (0.5) 40605-006 12-24 (Black) 1000 9 (4.1) Combination Pan Head, Pilot Point, Sems Mounting Screws Similar to 40605 except includes captive lock washer. • Zinc plated finish Shipping Part Nominal Package Weight Number Size Of lb (kg) 40606-001 12-24 50 1 (0.5) 1-38 HIGH DENSITY PATCHING FRAME Structured Termination Products are pre-configured frames designed specifically to hold 110-style or 66-style blocks or patch panels. Use Structured Termination Products to support main, intermediate or horizontal cross-connects. High Density Patching Frame Designed to maximize support of patch panels, the High Density Patching Frame combines the benefits of CPI’s 2-post open racks and vertical cable management into a single package. • High-density cable management fins provide an integrated vertical pathway for premise cabling and facilitate adherence to bend radius requirements • Inverted U-shaped tabs formed into the cable management fins ® provide a quick method for securing premise cabling with Saf-T-Grip Cable Management Straps • Cable management rings and integrated upper jumper tray provide slack management for patch cords • Feed patch cords front-to-rear through edge-protected pass-through ports • Base angles are pre-punched for direct attachment to building structure and feature a U-shaped cut-out for cable delivered from under a raised floor • Connect Frames side-by-side into continuous rows with an accessory baying kit • Attach Cable Runway to the top of the frame with J-bolts in the perpendicular orientation or a Mounting Kit in the parallel orientation Specifications: • Overall dimensions of 86.0”H x 29.1”W x 18.6”D (2184 mm x 739 mm x 472 mm) • Provides 45U x 19”W of mounting space • Features EIA-310-D, Universal spacing, threaded #12-24 mounting holes • Frame components are aluminum, while cable rings are an engineered polymer • UL Listed: File E140851; Category DUXR (US), DUXR7 (Canada) – Communications Circuit Accessory • Finished with black, powder coat paint • Ships unassembled and individually packaged • Assembly requires one person, a standard ratchet/wrench set, screwdriver and square • Attach to building structure using one Rack Installation Kit per frame • Supports 750 lb (340.2 kg) of able and equipment; 110 lb (49.9 kg) maximum per cable fin Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 7’H (2.1 m) x 19”W High Density 55100-703 63 (28.6) Patching Frame, Black 55104-701 Baying Kit, Black 1 (0.5) 55105-712 12”W (300 mm) Runway Mounting Kit 1 (0.5) Integrated top jumper Unique fins support 55105-718 18”W (460 mm) Runway Mounting Kit 1 (0.5) trough provides large bundles of cable smooth transition 55105-724 24”W (610 mm) Runway Mounting Kit 1 (0.5) 1-39 XLBET 110A BLOCK MOUNTING SYSTEM XLBET 110A Block Mounting System The Extra Large Building Entrance Terminal (XLBET) 110A Block Mounting System is designed for high-density, space-saving style block mounting. The 8”W x 6.6”D (200 mm x 168 mm) large wire managers provide distinct vertical and horizontal cable and jumper pathways for efficient space usage. The basic frame (23” or 35”), mounting bars and the small and large wire managers are available under one part number. The XLBET 110A Block Mounting System ships completely assembled for quick, easy installation. • Supports 300 pair 110A style blocks • 3600 pair in two columns to 5400 pair in three columns can be mounted per side depending on the frame selected • Double-sided version provides 7200 to 10,800 pair depending on the frame selected • Horizontal and vertical cable managers provide clearly defined cable routing of large quantities of cross-connect wires • 6”D (150 mm) rack channel provides extra cable capacity 11810-X36 Kit (3600 pair/12 blocks/single sided) consists of: • (1) 23” Standard Rack, 6”D (150 mm) (P/N 66383-X03) • (6) Mounting Bars • (3) Large Wire Managers, (3) Small Wire Managers 11810-X72 Kit (7200 pair/24 blocks/double-sided) consists of: • (1) 23” Standard Rack, 6”D (150 mm) (P/N 66383-X03) • (12) Mounting Bars • (6) Large Wire Managers, (6) Small Wire Managers 11910-X54 Kit (5400 pair/18 blocks/single-sided) consists of: • (1) 35” Standard Rack, 6”D (150 mm) (P/N 66363-X03) • (6) Mounting Bars • (3) Large Wire Managers, (3) Small Wire Managers 11910-X80 Kit (10800 pair/36 blocks/double-sided) consists of: • (1) 35” Standard Rack, 6”D (150 mm) (P/N 66363-X03) • (12) Mounting Bars • (6) Large Wire Managers, (6) Small Wire Managers Shown with wiring blocks (not included) Part Number 23” Width 35” Width 3600 Pair 7200 Pair 5400 Pair 10,800 Pair 11810-X36 11810-X72 11910-X54 11910-X80 X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Panel Hinges Versatile 1.75”H (44.45 mm) rack-mounting hinges provide rear access to patch panels or other shallow equipment by allowing them to swing outward. Made from high strength black composite material. • Sold in pairs with mounting hardware included • Supports up to 30 lb (13.6 kg) per pair Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11520-001 Hinges, Pair 1 (0.5) 1-40 TERMINATION PRODUCTS ACCESSORIES 66 Block Mounting Brackets Used to organize and manage 66 blocks at one convenient location. Includes U-shaped cable loops to route jumper cables between blocks. • 19” Mounting Bracket: 8 blocks (2 rows of 4), 400 pair, 5 cable loops • 35” Mounting Bracket: 18 blocks (2 rows of 9), 900 pair, 10 cable loops • Mounting hardware not included Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11177-X01 19” Mounting Bracket 2 (0.9) 11188-X01 35” Mounting Bracket 2 (0.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 11177-X01 Block Mounting Bar, Rack-Mounted For mounting terminal blocks, card files and other equipment on 19” and 23” racks. • Angle mounting bars are 1/8” (3.18 mm) cold-rolled steel • T-mounting bars are 1/8” (3.18 mm) extruded aluminum • Hole patterns are 12-24 tapped on 7/16” (11.113 mm) centers • Supports 66/89 Blocks, sold individually Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 30013-X00 19” Angle 2 (0.9) 30014-X00 23” Angle 2 (0.9) 30014-X00 30015-X00 19” T-Bar 2 (0.9) 30016-X00 23” T-Bar 2 (0.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Hinged Panel Mounting Bracket Provides easy access to back of wall or rack-mounted panels. • Can be mounted to open left or right • Available in 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 mounting space, 1.75”H (44.45 mm), 4” or 8”D (100 mm or 200 mm) and 19”W • Mounting hardware not included, supports up to 30 lb (13.6 kg) load 11523-X04 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11521-X04 3.50 (88.9), 2U High, 4 (100) Deep 2 (0.9) 11522-X04 5.25 (133.4), 3U High, 4 (100) Deep 2 (0.9) 11523-X04 7.00 (177.8), 4U High, 4 (100) Deep 2 (0.9) 11524-X04 8.75 (222.3), 5U High, 4 (100) Deep 2 (0.9) 11525-X04 10.5 (267.0), 6U High, 4 (100) Deep 2 (0.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black. Also available in 8” (200 mm) H (-X08) 1-41 CABINET & ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS Cabinets, Thermal Products and Cable Management Accessories ® Data Center Overview Page 2-3 C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet System Page 2-47 ® F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System Page 2-7 E-Series ISP Co Location Cabinet Page 2-50 ® F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet System Page 2-20 Seimsic Frame Cabinet Page 2-51 ® N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet Page 2-25 Thermal Management Accessories Page 2-52 Fiber Management Accessories Page 2-31 Cable Management Accessories Page 2-58 ® GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System Page 2-34 Shelves for Cabinets Page 2-60 ® M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet System Page 2-42 Additional Accessories Page 2-64 CABINET & ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS The cabinet platform on which your enterprise is built is just as critical as the equipment it stores. Utilizing a properly configured cabinet that is designed to fit your equipment and work with your data center’s cooling system is crucial. Leading the industry with innovative storage solutions, CPI Cabinet and Enclosure Systems provide a trusted frame and secure location for storing multiple servers, switches and various pieces of computer equipment. CPI Cabinet and Enclosure Systems are also designed to promote energy savings and enhanced thermal ® management solutions that utilize CPI Passive Cooling through the use of Aisle Containment and Vertical Exhaust Ducts. Infinite configurability helps meet your growing enterprise needs through additional features such as remote environmental monitoring, power distribution, seismic accessories, grounding and bonding, locking systems and advanced cable management. CPI Cabinet and Enclosure Systems feature: • Four vertical mounting rails for four-point attachment • Standard EIA-310-D and EIA/ECA-310-E hole pattern • Industry leading performance standards like high static load ratings and shock pallet options • High static load rating, ranging from 800 lb (362.9 kg) to 3000 lb (1360 kg) • High dynamic load rating of 3000 lb (1360 kg) on some models • Large open base for cable entry and exit • Rack-mount unit markings on most rails and channels for fast equipment mounting • Options and accessories that can be pre-installed, reducing data center installation time • Green energy-saving thermal management options and configurations • Extensive cable management options and features that keep cables organized and make installation changes easy New Products: ® GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System (Page 2-34) KoldLok Wave™ Split Integral Grommet (Page 2-53) New easy-to-use, cost-effective computer and Increases sealing effectiveness with a solid, flexible network storage equipment cabinet wave shaped thermoplastic elastomer material 2-2 DATA CENTER SOLUTION OVERVIEW Air Containment on Every Level As an early trailblazer in lowering energy costs through the development of proven concepts such as Passive Cooling, CPI has earned a solid reputation for reducing energy costs with air containment products and strategies that focus on the aisle, cabinet and cable levels of infrastructure deployment. Key Benefits: • Higher return air temperature improves chilled water cooling system efficiency • Allows higher equipment densities and energy cost savings • Isolates hot air, eliminating hot spots and reducing the number of computer room air conditioners or air handlers required • Allows higher chilled water temperatures and additional “free cooling” hours using economizers Aisle Level From creating enclosed rows for hot and cold aisle containment to regulatory requirements for specific industries, CPI engineers consult directly with each customer to deliver the entire aisle containment package. That also means supplying the pieces and parts of containment – quality cabinets, end-of-row doors, cable runway, blanking panels, floor grommets, vertical exhaust ducts and more. CPI stands out by offering standard and customized parts, professional designs, and sealing solutions that have been engineered to perform 200 percent better than the competition. 2-3 DATA CENTER SOLUTION OVERVIEW Cabinet Level CPI's server and network cabinets have been engineered to create a one-way path for airflow that eliminates the mixing of hot and cold air. Optimized even further with the use of filler panels, blanking panels and vertical exhaust ducts, CPI cabinet systems produce a uniform room temperature and seal quality of 95 percent and above. ® ® Installed on the top of GlobalFrame Cabinet Systems and TeraFrame Cabinet Systems, the Vertical Exhaust Duct isolates hot air from the room and returns it to the primary cooling system through the drop ceiling plenum or ducted return positioned high above the cabinet. The resulting lower room temperature eliminates the need for supplemental liquid or active cooling solutions and supports higher heat and power densities. For high-density network switches using side-to-side airflow, CPI's Network Switch Exhaust Duct on the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet supports an isolation strategy of hot and cold air that maximizes the energy efficiency of any data center. Cabling Level If openings in the access floor environment are not properly sealed, 50-80 percent of the valuable cold supply air can bypass critical ® equipment. By sealing the openings with products such as KoldLok Raised Floor Grommets, a data center can eliminate wasted bypass air and instantly increase cooling capacity by up to 40 percent. Getting Started The journey toward data center efficiency is always evolving ... and so is CPI. Find out what solutions we can create for you by contacting one of our containment experts today. In the U.S. call 1-800-834-4969, outside the U.S. & Canada, call 1-818-739-3400 or learn more at www.chatsworth.com. 2-4 CABINET & ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS F E D B C A G Cabinet & Enclosure Systems Load Rating Product Description lb (kg) ® F-Series TeraFrame Metric footprint cabinet is available in three widths, 12 heights and 17 depths A Cabinet System (612 standard frame sizes). Welded steel and bolted aluminum four-post frame 2500 Page 2-7 includes two pairs of sliding, continuously adjustable mounting rails and has (1134) internal cable management space. ® F-Series TeraFrame Metric footprint cabinet is available in a 600 mm width, two depths (6 standard B HD Cabinet System frame sizes). Heavy-duty F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet for systems integrators 3000 Page 2-19 includes heavy-duty casters, high capacity shock pallet and a reusable padded (1360) shipping carton. ® N-Series TeraFrame TeraFrame-style network equipment cabinet has extra space along the front, rear B Network Cabinet and side for cable management. Available with an internal Network Switch 2500 Page 2-24 Exhaust Duct designed specifically to control side-to-side airflow for network (1134) switch equipment that guides hot air out the rear of the cabinet. ® GF-Series GlobalFrame The GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System is an easy-to-use, cost-effective, C Cabinet System computer and network equipment storage cabinet that complies with data center, 3000 Page 2-34 computer room and premise network equipment room requirements. 30 popular (1360) sizes available. ® M-Series MegaFrame Wide footprint cabinet with adjustable depth equipment mounting rails and 3” D 2000 Cabinet System (80 mm) of internal cable management space on both sides. Bolted aluminum (907.2) Page 2-42 construction, may be delivered partially assembled. ® C-Series SlimFrame Narrow footprint enclosed cabinet with adjustable depth equipment mounting rails E Cabinet System and 1” (30 mm) of internal cable management space on both sides. Minimal 24” 2000 Page 2-47 (610 mm) overall footprint matches the width of access floor tiles in the United (907.2) States. Bolted aluminum construction, may be delivered partially assembled. E-Series ISP Special wide footprint MegaFrame Cabinet with three separate compartments F Co Location Cabinet for secure multi-user applications. Bolted aluminum construction, may be 2000 Page 2-50 delivered partially assembled. Used in co-location facilities or on the customer (907.2) premise when multiple services or tenants share an equipment room. ® Seismic Frame Special wide footprint MegaFrame Cabinet internally braced for use in Zone 4 G 800 Cabinet areas. Delivers fully assembled. Used in seismic zones to provide added (362.9) Page 2-51 protection for equipment. 2-5 CABINET SYSTEMS Cabinet Systems When selecting a CPI Cabinet consider: CPI continuously provides flexibility in meeting the challenges of • Overall and usable width and depth changing data and telecommunications technology. To meet these • Rack-mount unit required changes, CPI develops cabinets that are well-designed, forward- • Aluminum or steel construction thinking and versatile. • Style of equipment mounting rail (five to choose from) • Door style (five styles including double doors) The chart below lists the main style differences of CPI’s cabinet • Cabinets are available without doors, sides or tops families. Cabinets are available in several styles and sizes with a • Color choice of included equipment mounting rails, side panels and • Fully or partially assembled doors. Product Comparison Cabinet & Enclosure Systems Product Overall/Rack-Mount Material & Key Attribute Partially Width - in (mm) Construction Assembled ® F-Series TeraFrame 23.6 (600)/19” EIA Steel and Aluminum, Metric footprint available in 612 27.6 (700)/19” EIA No Cabinet System Welded and Bolted standard frame sizes 31.5 (800)/19” EIA Page 2-7 For high-density server and storage ® F-Series TeraFrame Steel and Aluminum, applications that require the cabinet to HD Cabinet System 23.6 (600)/19” EIA No Welded and Bolted be re-shipped after up to 3000 lb (1360 Page 2-19 kg) of equipment has been installed ® N-Series TeraFrame Controls side exhaust airflow from Network Cabinet 31.5 (800)/ 19” EIA Steel, Welded*** switches; Cisco and Juniper compatible No Page 2-24 versions available ® GF-Series GlobalFrame 23.6 (600)/19” EIA Cost-effective cabinet solution that Steel, Welded and Cabinet System 29.5 (750)/19” EIA supports 3000 lb (1360 kg) of No Bolted 31.5 (800)/19” EIA equipment. 30 popular frame sizes. Page 2-34 ® M-Series MegaFrame 27.3 (693)/19” EIA 3” (80 mm) of internal cable Cabinet System 31.3 (795)/23” EIA Aluminum, Bolted** management space along both sides Yes 31.3 (795)/19” EIA* of equipment Page 2-42 M-Series 48” 27.3 (693)/19” EIA Secure half a rack (25U) of ® MegaFrame Cabinet Aluminum, Bolted Yes 31.3 (795)/23” EIA equipment Page 2-46 ® C-Series SlimFrame Fits over 24”W (610 mm) access floor Cabinet System 24 (610)/19” EIA Aluminum, Bolted Yes tile Page 2-47 E-Series ISP 27.3 (693)/19” EIA Three secure compartments in one Co Location Cabinet Aluminum, Bolted Yes 31.3 (795)/23” EIA cabinet Page 2-50 ® Seismic Frame Aluminum, Bolted Cabinet 27.3 (693)/19” EIA with Inner Steel Rated for use in Zone 4 seismic areas No Frame Page 2-51 *Use a 23"-19" Rail Adapter Kit to convert the cabinet. This cabinet has 5” (130 mm) of cable management space along both sides. **Aluminum extrusion with an anodized finish. Doors, top and side panels are painted. ***Steel cabinets are fully welded and painted a single color. 2-6 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM ® The F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System Choose a solid top panel with two (server-style) or four Metric footprint for (network-style) large international use brush-sealed network cable access ports or use the Vertical Available in three widths, Exhaust Duct option with high 12 heights and 17 depths heat density applications to (612 standard sizes) isolate and remove hot air from the room Includes two pairs of sliding, continuously adjustable equipment Welded steel and bolted mounting rails to provide front and aluminum frame construction rear support for 19” EIA-310-D supports up to 2500 lb (1134.0 kg) compliant rack-mount equipment of equipment and shelves Choose solid or vented easy to Mounting rails have 1.75”H remove side panels; side panels (44.45 mm) rack-mount units and have recessed spring-loaded are available with square-punched latches with keyed locks; cabinets or threaded attachment points; can be bayed (side-by-side) with rack-mount unit spaces are side panels installed marked and numbered on each mounting rail Choose a solid metal, perforated metal or double perforated metal rear door Choose from seven styles of latch-lock combinations; all doors have swing handles with a The mounting rails, top panel, single-point or two-point slam or side panels and doors are cam latch and keyed, electrically bonded to the cabinet combination or electronic lock frame; a ground terminal block is included to attach the frame to the CBN or TGB Choose a solid Lexan, solid metal or perforated metal front door; doors are reversible to open from the right or left and can be quickly Organize network cables, power removed during equipment strips and power cords along the installation or service work sides of the cabinet with optional side-mounted vertical cable power managers ® Open base for cable entry; Use optional CPI Passive Cooling includes leveling feet and floor Solutions (thermal management attachment brackets (casters and acccessories) to control airflow bottom panel are available through, over and around the as accessories) cabinet to eliminate hot spots and improve equipment cooling Available in 612 standard sizes Static load rating up to 2500 lb (1134 kg) 2-7 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM ® F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System ® The F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System helps organize, store and secure computer, data storage and network equipment in the data center, computer room or network environment. Every cabinet includes two pairs of sliding, continuously adjustable equipment mounting rails to provide critical front and rear support for equipment. Square-punched or tapped EIA-310-D compliant equipment mounting rails guarantee compatibility with most rack-mount equipment. Plus, each rack-mount unit is marked and numbered on all mounting rails making it easy to locate and attach equipment. Top panels have large brush-covered cable openings that will handle large bundles of cables while preventing undesirable hot air re-circulation. Side panels have a recessed locking spring-loaded latch and can be easily removed to access equipment. Cabinets can be bayed with side panels installed or uninstalled. Doors and side panels are either solid or perforated (mesh). Doors feature a swing handle for better security. There are seven latch lock styles to choose from. Combine F-Series TeraFrame with thermal and cable management accessories to create a custom solution that fits your exact needs. Cabinet Specifications: • Available in 12 heights, three widths and 17 depths • Provides front and rear support for 19”W EIA equipment and shelves with two pairs of adjustable depth rack-mount unit marked and numbered equipment mounting rails • Includes grounding and bonding kit • Includes leveling feet and floor anchor brackets • Can be ordered with or without top panel, side panels and doors • Choose from seven door latch-lock combinations • Welded steel and bolted aluminum frame construction • Load rating: – 2500 lb (1134 kg) for 23.6” (600 mm) wide cabinets – 2000 lb (907.2 kg) for 27.6” (700 mm) wide cabinets – 2000 lb (907.2 kg) for 31.5” (800 mm) wide cabinets • UL Listed: File E227626; Category NWIN (US), NWIN7 (Canada) - Information Technology and Communications Equipment Cabinet, Enclosure and Rack Systems Cabinet Includes: • (1) Four-post frame (painted finish) • (4) Vertical Mounting Rails (square-punched or tapped) • (1) Grounding/Bonding Kit • (2) Locking, Solid or Vented Side Panels (optional) • (1) Front Door (optional) • (1) Rear Door (optional) • (1) Top Panel (optional) • (4) Leveling Feet • (4) Floor Anchor Clamps • (2) Mounting Brackets for CPI Vertical Power Strips/PDUs in 42U and taller cabinets • (1) Bag of 25 Each M6 Cage Nuts and Screws (square-punched rails) See following pages for details. • (1) Bag of 50 Each #12-24 Rack Channel Mounting Screws (tapped rails) 2-8 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Use the part number configurator below to create a custom TeraFrame. Choose the Height, Width, Depth, Rail Style, Front Door, Rear Door, Latch, Color, Top Panel Style and Side Panel Style. Example part number: FF2J-112A-C22 F H W D - R FD RD L - C TP SP 1. Height 10. Side Panel Style Cabinet Frame 0 None 1 Solid, 1 each in mm in mm U A 2 Solid, 2 each 46.8 1189 46.6 1184 24 3 Vented, 1 each 67.8 1722 67.6 1717 36 B 4 Vented, 2 each 78.3 1989 78.1 1984 42 C D 80.0 2032 79.9 2029 43 9. Top Panel Style 81.8 2078 81.6 2073 44 E 0 None 83.5 2121 83.4 2118 45 F 2 Network, 4 Cable Openings 85.3 2167 85.1 2162 46 G 4 Server, 2 Cable Openings 87.0 2210 86.9 2207 47 H 1 Vertical Exhaust Duct System , 88.8 2256 88.6 2250 48 J 5 20”-34”H (508 mm-863 mm) 90.5 2299 90.4 2296 49 K 1 Vertical Exhaust Duct System , 92.3 2344 92.1 2339 50 L 6 34”-60”H (863 mm-1523 mm) M 94.0 2388 93.9 2385 51 1 Use on 45.1”D (1147 mm) to 50.1”D (1297 mm) cabinets only. Recommend the use of an 2. Width optional front air dam. Cabinet Frame EIA in mm in mm 8. Color 23.6 600 19” 23.4 594 1 C Black 2 27.6 700 19” 27.3 694 D Signature Blue 31.5 800 19” 31.3 794 3 E Glacier White F Steel Gray 3. Depth 7. Latches (Door) Cabinet Rails Frame A Single-Point, Slam Latch, Keyed Lock in mm in mm in mm B Single-Point, Cam Latch, Keyed Lock A 35.3 897 28.6 726 31.5 800 C Two-Point, Cam Latch, Keyed Lock 36.3 922 29.6 751 32.5 825 B D Single-Point, Cam Latch, Combo Lock 37.3 947 30.6 776 33.5 850 C E Two-Point, Cam Latch, Combo Lock D 38.2 972 31.5 801 34.4 875 K Single-Point, Slam Latch, Combo Lock 39.2 997 32.5 826 35.4 900 E N None (use when NO DOORS selected) 40.2 1022 33.5 851 36.4 925 F 41.2 1047 34.5 876 37.4 950 G 6. Rear Door 42.2 1072 35.5 901 38.4 975 H 0 None 43.2 1097 36.5 926 39.4 1000 J 1 Single, Solid Metal 44.2 1122 37.4 951 40.4 1025 K 2 Single, Perforated Metal 45.1 1147 38.4 976 41.3 1050 L 3 Double, Perforated Metal M 46.1 1172 39.4 1001 42.3 1075 Note: Double door requires a two-point latch 47.1 1197 40.4 1026 43.3 1100 N (C) or (E), see latches above. 48.1 1222 41.4 1051 44.3 1125 P 5. Front Door R 49.1 1247 42.4 1076 45.3 1150 0 None 50.1 1272 43.3 1101 46.3 1175 T 1 Single, Perforated Metal 51.0 1297 44.3 1126 47.2 1200 U ® 2 Single, Solid Lexan 4. Rail Style 3 Single, Solid Metal Square-Punched, 2 Pair 1 Tapped, #12-24, 2 Pair 2 See notes on next page. 2-9 Vertical Exhaust Duct ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Ordering Notes: 1. Height: Twelve heights are available. Frame height is height without the top panel. Cabinet height is height with the top panel installed. Frames and cabinets include leveling feet which add approximately 1.3” (33 mm) to the height of the cabinet. Accessory casters kits add approximately 2.5” (64 mm) to the height of the cabinet. 2. Width: Three widths are available. The 23.6”W (600 mm) cabinet will match 24”W (600 mm) access floor tiles. All widths include mounting rails spaced for 19” EIA equipment. Mounting rails are centered by standoff brackets within the frame. Wider cabinets have more space along the sides for cable management. 3. Depth: Seventeen depths are available. Frame depth is the outside depth of the frame. Rail depth is the maximum front-to-rear spacing of equipment mounting rails. Rail depth is reduced when accessories are added. Cabinet depth includes the front and rear doors. The footprint of the cabinet is frame width by frame depth. 4. Rail Style: Two mounting rail styles are available. Square-punched rails are preferred with rack-mount computer server and data storage equipment because they use snap-in cage nut hardware that can be changed to match equipment mounting requirements. Threaded rails speed installation of panel-mount network and cable termination equipment. ® 5. Front Door Style: Three front door panel styles are available: Perforated (vented) metal, solid tinted Lexan and solid metal. The door matches the color of the cabinet and includes an anodized aluminum center beam. Doors can be reversed to open from the right or the left. The perforated door is preferred with rack-mount computer server and data storage equipment. 6. Rear Door Style: Three rear door styles are available. The double door reduces the amount of aisle space required to access the rear of the cabinet. Double doors must use two-point latches (see Note 7). If you select a double rear door and a single-point latch, the double door will have a two-point cam latch (C) or (E) with the same type of lock as the front door. 7. Door Latches: Six styles of door latch are available. All doors must have a latch. The (N) option should only be selected if the cabinet has NO doors. Doors have a swing handle on the exterior. Choose a single-point or two-point latch. Double doors require a two-point latch. The slam latch is a spring-loaded latch that engages when the door is pushed closed. The cam latch requires the swing handle to be turned to secure the door in the closed position. The combination lock uses a 3-digit combination entered on 3-dials that are integrated into the swing handle or a key. The combination lock can be reprogrammed in the field. 8. Color: The frame, doors, side panels and top panel are painted the color of choice. Lexan front door panels are tinted. Mounting rails are zinc plated. Interior brackets are black. 9. Top Panel Style: There are three styles of top panel available. Network Top Panels have four large cable openings. Server Top Panels have two large cable openings. Server Top Panels on cabinets that are 45.1”D (1147 mm) or deeper have a knockout for the Vertical Exhaust Duct. Vertical Exhaust Duct System is only available for cabinets that are 45.1” (1147 mm) to 51.0”D (1297 mm). The system includes a top-mount Vertical Exhaust Duct, a Server Top Panel, an Airflow Director and a Rear Door Sealing Kit (use with solid rear door). Select from two duct height ranges: 20” to 34” (508 mm - 863 mm) or 34” to 60” (863 mm - 1523 mm) high. Vertical Exhaust Duct System Components are also sold separately. 10. Side Panel Style: Solid and vented side panels are available. Cabinets can be bayed with or without side panels installed. Order baying kits separately. 2-10 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Vertical Exhaust Duct Components Upgrade your F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet to a ducted exhaust cabinet by adding the Vertical Exhaust Duct System Components necessary to isolate and guide hot air out of the top of the cabinet. Combine the Vertical Exhaust Duct System Components with an Air Dam Kit and Snap-In Filler Panels in a cabinet with a perforated front door, solid side panels and a solid rear door to create front-to-top airflow through the duct. Connect the duct to a drop ceiling plenum to isolate the hot air return path and keep the room and equipment cooler. • TeraFrame Cabinets 45.1”D (1147 mm) to 51.0 “D (1297 mm) equipped with a Server Top Panel include a field removable knockout for use in a Vertical Exhaust Duct applications • Order the individual components separately to match your application requirements (Vertical Exhaust Duct, Airflow Director and a Rear Door Sealing Kit) • Vertical Exhaust Duct telescopes to match ceiling height and has gaskets along the top edge to create a seal around the opening in the drop ceiling; two height ranges are available • Airflow Director (P/N 34570-C00) causes hot server exhaust air to flow upward from the base of the cabinet to the top of the cabinet • Rear Door Sealing Kit (P/N 34573-000) seals the space between the solid rear door and the cabinet frame so hot air does not escape, but flows upward toward the duct For best results, use the Vertical Exhaust Duct System Components on cabinets configured with a perforated front door, solid side panels, a solid rear door, an Air Dam Kit and Snap-In Filler Panels. Part Number Description Shipping Height Weight* 23.6”W 27.6”W 31.5”W in (mm) lb (kg) (600 mm) (700 mm) (800 mm) Vertical Exhaust Duct, 34370-X00 34370-X00 34370-X02 31 (14.1) 20-34 (508 - 863) Vertical Exhaust Duct, 34370-X01 34370-X01 34370-X03 51 (23.1) 34-60 (863 - 1523) X=color: C=Black, D=Signature Blue, E=Glacier White, F=Steel Gray. P/N 34370-C0X Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 34570-C00 Airflow Director, Black 7 (3.2) 34573-000 Rear Door Sealing Kit for 600 & 700 mm 2 (0.9) 34573-001 Rear Door Sealing Kit for 800 mm 2 (0.9) Dimensions and Usable Area Cabinet Width Exterior Width Exterior Depth Internal Area in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) 2 23.6 (600) 20.0 (509) 23.9 (609) 435.8 in 2 27.6 (700) 23.9 (609) 20.0 (509) 435.8 in P/N 34570-C00 2 31.5 (800) 23.9 (609) 20.0 (509) 435.8 in Note: Dimensions do not include the rubber seal at the top of the duct. 2-11 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Air Dam Kit Use with Snap-In Filler Panels to block airflow around the top, bottom and sides of equipment. Requires a 1.7” (43 mm) mounting rail setback. Part Number Shipping Description Weight* 23.6”W 27.6”W 31.5”W lb (kg) (600 mm) (700 mm) (800 mm) 34521-X02 34522-X02 34523-X02 For 42U Cabinets 17 (7.7) 34521-X03 34522-X03 34523-X03 For 43U Cabinets 17 (7.7) 34521-X04 34522-X04 34523-X04 For 44U Cabinets 17 (7.7) 34521-X05 34522-X05 34523-X05 For 45U Cabinets 18 (8.2) 34521-X06 34522-X06 34523-X06 For 46U Cabinets 18 (8.2) 34521-X07 34522-X07 34523-X07 For 47U Cabinets 18 (8.2) 34521-X08 34522-X08 34523-X08 For 48U Cabinets 18 (8.2) 34521-X09 34522-X09 34523-X09 For 49U Cabinets 19 (8.6) 34521-X10 34522-X10 34523-X10 For 50U Cabinets 19 (8.6) 34521-X11 34522-X11 34523-X11 For 51U Cabinets 19 (8.6) X=color: C=Black, D=Signature Blue, E=Glacier White, F=Steel Gray. Not available for 24U and 36U cabinets. *Shipping weight is for 31.5”W (800 mm). Bottom Panel Covers the bottom of the cabinet to block airflow into and out of the base of the cabinet. Includes one brush-sealed, 3” x 11.75” (76 mm x 292 mm) cable access port located at the rear center of the panel. Part Number (by width) Cabinet Frame Shipping Depth Size Weight* 23.6”W 27.6”W 31.5”W in (mm) lb (kg) (600 mm) (700 mm) (800 mm) 35085-X00 35085-X17 35085-X34 For 31.5 (800) 19 (8.6) 35085-X01 35085-X18 35085-X35 For 32.5 (825) 19 (8.6) 35085-X02 35085-X19 35085-X36 For 33.5 (850) 20 (9.1) 35085-X03 35085-X20 35085-X37 For 34.4 (875) 20 (9.1) 35085-X04 35085-X21 35085-X38 For 35.4 (900) 21 (9.5) 35085-X05 35085-X22 35085-X39 For 36.4 (925) 21 (9.5) 35085-X06 35085-X23 35085-X40 For 37.4 (950) 21 (9.5) 35085-X07 35085-X24 35085-X41 For 38.4 (975) 22 (10.0) 35085-X08 35085-X25 35085-X42 For 39.4 (1000) 22 (10.0) 35085-X09 35085-X26 35085-X43 For 40.4 (1025) 23 (10.4) 35085-X10 35085-X27 35085-X44 For 41.3 (1050) 23 (10.4) 35085-X11 35085-X28 35085-X45 For 42.3 (1075) 23 (10.4) 35085-X12 35085-X29 35085-X46 For 43.3 (1100) 24 (10.9) 35085-X13 35085-X30 35085-X47 For 44.3 (1125) 24 (10.9) 35085-X14 35085-X31 35085-X48 For 45.3 (1150) 25 (11.3) 35085-X15 35085-X32 35085-X49 For 46.3 (1175) 25 (11.3) 35085-X16 35085-X33 35085-X50 For 47.2 (1200) 25 (11.3) X=color: C=Black, D=Signature Blue, E=Glacier White, F=Steel Gray. *Shipping weight is for 31.5”W (800 mm). 2-12 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Vertical Cable Manager Creates an internal pathway that guides and protects network and signal cables and organizes patch and equipment cords as they enter and exit the manager to make equipment connections.T-Shaped cable management guides (fingers) separate openings that align with each rack-mount unit in the cabinet to guide patch/equipment cords to specific connections. Vertical Cable Manager with Standard Fingers Part Number Shipping Description Weight* 23.6”W 27.6”W 31.5”W Height lb (kg) (600 mm) (700 mm) (800 mm) 34416-C01 35090-C00 35095-C00 For 24U Cabinets 14 (6.4) 34417-C01 35090-C01 35095-C01 For 36U Cabinets 18 (8.2) 34418-C01 35090-C02 35095-C02 For 42U Cabinets 20 (9.1) 34419-C01 35090-C03 35095-C03 For 43U Cabinets 20 (9.1) 34420-C01 35090-C04 35095-C04 For 44U Cabinets 21 (9.5) 34421-C01 35090-C05 35095-C05 For 45U Cabinets 21 (9.5) 34422-C01 35090-C06 35095-C06 For 46U Cabinets 21 (9.5) Standard Fingers 34423-C01 35090-C07 35095-C07 For 47U Cabinets 22 (10.0) 34424-C01 35090-C08 35095-C08 For 48U Cabinets 22 (10.0) 34425-C01 35090-C09 35095-C09 For 49U Cabinets 22 (10.0) Extended Fingers 34426-C01 35090-C10 35095-C10 For 50U Cabinets 23 (10.4) 34427-C01 35090-C11 35095-C11 For 51U Cabinets 23 (10.4) Vertical Cable Manager with Extended Fingers Outside Dimensions, Usable Internal Part Number Width Shipping Description Weight* Cable Area, Rail Setback 23.6”W 27.6”W 31.5”W Height lb (kg) (600 mm) (700 mm) (800 mm) Cabinet Rail Width Depth Cable Width Setback N/A 35102-C00 35103-C00 For 24U Cabinets 14 (6.4) in (mm) in (mm) Area in (mm) in (mm) N/A 35102-C01 35103-C01 For 36U Cabinets 18 (8.2) Standard Fingers 2 N/A 35102-C02 35103-C02 For 42U Cabinets 20 (9.1) 23.6 (600) 1.9 (48) 10.5 (267) 7.1 in 4.5 (115) 2 N/A 35102-C03 35103-C03 For 43U Cabinets 20 (9.1) 27.6 (700) 3.1 (79) 11.6 (295) 27 in 4.5 (115) 2 31.5 (800) 5.0 (127) 11.6 (295) 46 in 4.5 (115) N/A 35102-C04 35103-C04 For 44U Cabinets 21 (9.5) Extended Fingers N/A 35102-C05 35103-C05 For 45U Cabinets 21 (9.5) 2 27.6 (700) 3.1 (79) 14.1 (358) 34 in 7 (178) N/A 35102-C06 35103-C06 For 46U Cabinets 21 (9.5) 2 31.5 (800) 5.0 (127) 14.1 (358) 58 in 7 (178) N/A 35102-C07 35103-C07 For 47U Cabinets 22 (10.0) N/A 35102-C08 35103-C08 For 48U Cabinets 22 (10.0) N/A 35102-C09 35103-C09 For 49U Cabinets 22 (10.0) Use the Slide Adapter N/A 35102-C10 35103-C10 For 50U Cabinets 23 (10.4) Kit to attach Vertical 35103-C11 For 51U Cabinets 23 (10.4) N/A 35102-C11 Cable Managers to the cabinet frame instead Slide Adapter Kit of the equipment N/A 35092-C01 35092-C02 Black 3 (1.4) mounting rails. The depth of the frame must be a minimum 34.4” (875 mm) when used with Airflow Director or Quad Vertical Power Strip Manager and side panels. The depth of the frame must be a minimum 39.4” (1000 mm) when used with Wide Vertical Power Cord Manager and side panels. Color is black. *Shipping weight is for the 31.5” For Recommended Cable Fill Table, go to (800 mm) Vertical Cable Manager. www.chatsworth.com/cablefill 2-13 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Front-to-Back Cable Manager Adjustable depth tray connects a front-facing and a rear-facing Vertical Cable Manager to create a front-to-back cable pathway along the side of the cabinet. The large manager extends between 10" (250 mm) and 17" (430 mm). The small manager extends between 6" (150 mm) and 10" (250 mm). Sold in pairs. - Large Manager, use with rails spaced 26 to 33 (660 to 840) apart - Small Manager, use with rails spaced 22 to 26 (560 to 660) apart Part Number Shipping Description Weight* 23.6”W 27.6”W 31.5”W in (mm) lb (kg) (600 mm) (700 mm) (800 mm) Outside Dimensions and Usable Area N/A 35106-C01 35108-C01 Large 4 (1.9) Cabinet Internal Height Width Width Area N/A 35106-C02 35108-C02 Small 4 (1.9) in (mm) in (mm) 2 2 in (mm) in (mm ) Color is black. *Shipping weight is for the 31.5” (800 mm) Front-to-Back Cable 27.6 (700) 2.5 (64 2.4 (61) 4.6 (2970) Manager. 31.5 (800) 4.0 (102) 4.0 (102) 14 (9000) Vertical Cable Ring Manager Attaches to the side of the equipment mounting rails, features plastic C-shaped cable management rings to guide and manage network cables, signal cables, patch and equipment cords. Each manager includes two half- height mounting brackets, cable rings and installation hardware. • The (-C01) 36U manager includes six rings (three per bracket); the (-C11) 51U manager includes ten rings (five per bracket); all other managers include eight rings (four per bracket) • Managers with small rings can be used in the 23.6”W (600 mm) cabinets only; managers with large rings can be used in the 27.6”W (700 mm) and 31.5”W (800 mm) cabinets only. Not available for 24U cabinets. - Small rings are 1.5”W x 4.2”D (38 mm x 107 mm), have an interior area 2 2 of 2.9 in (1870 mm ) and require a 4.8” (122 mm) rail setback - Large rings are 3.3”W x 6.5”D (84 mm x 165 mm), have an interior area 2 2 of 12.4 in (8000 mm ) and require a 7.3” (185 mm) rail setback Shipping Part Number Description Weight Height lb (kg) Small Large 35100-C01 35101-C01 For 36U Cabinets 10 (4.5) 35100-CXX 35100-C02 35101-C02 For 42U Cabinets 11 (5.0) 35100-C03 35101-C03 For 43U & 44U Cabinets 11 (5.0) 35100-C05 35101-C05 For 45U & 46U Cabinets 12 (5.4) 35100-C07 35101-C07 For 47U & 48U Cabinets 12 (5.4) 35100-C09 35101-C09 For 49U & 50U Cabinets 12 (5.4) 35101-CXX 35100-C11 35101-C11 For 51U Cabinets 12 (5.4) Color is black. Large ring managers will not fit 23.6”W (600 mm) F-Series Cabinets. 2-14 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Vertical Power Strip Manager Create a separate pathway specifically for two CPI Vertical Power Strips for cabinets along the side of the cabinet. Attaches to the cabinet frame and adjusts in depth to match equipment. • Supports 1.8”W (45 mm) or narrower CPI PDUs or power strips • Vertical Power Strip Manager is C-shaped, 4.3”W x 1”D (110 mm x 25 mm), requires a 6.3” (160 mm) rail setback and supports two PDU/power strips Shipping Part Description Weight Number Height lb (kg) 34595-C01 For 36U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 34595-C02 For 42U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 34595-C03 For 43U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 34595-C04 For 44U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 34595-C05 For 45U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 34595-C06 For 46U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 34595-C07 For 47U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 34595-C08 For 48U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 34595-C09 For 49U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 34595-C10 For 50U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 34595-C11 For 51U Cabinet 17 (7.7) Color is black. (-C01) manager is only compatible with 38.5”H (978 mm) power strip. (-CO3) or taller Dual Manager is required for 68.5”H (1740 mm) PDU. (-C04) or taller Dual Manager is required for 70.5”H (1791 mm) PDU. Vertical PDU Mounting Brackets Kit ® Used to attach Vertical PDUs to the F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System. Kit supports two 2.4”W (61 mm) or narrower PDUs, has tool-less attachment points spaced 64.75” (1645 mm) and 61.25” (1556 mm) apart and requires a minimum 6.7” (170 mm) equipment mounting rail setback. One kit is included with each 42U or taller cabinet manufactured after August 1, 2011. The kit is not compatible with F-Series TeraFrame Cabinets manufactured before August 1, 2011, F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet System or N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet. 13780-C01 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13780-C01 For F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System 2 (0.9) 2-15 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM PDU/Power Strip Lashing Bracket Supports one or two CPI Vertical PDU/Power Strips for Cabinets and provides multiple attachment points for fastening power cable bundles. Attaches to the cabinet frame behind the rear equipment mounting rails. • Supports two 2.3”W (58 mm) or narrower or one 3.5”W (89 mm) CPI PDUs • The manager is S-shaped, 8.375”W x 1.7”D (213 mm x 42 mm) and requires a minimum 5” (127 mm) equipment mounting rail setback Shipping Part Description Weight Number Height lb (kg) 35086-C01 For 36U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 35086-C02 For 42U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 35086-C03 For 43U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 35086-C04 For 44U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 35086-C05 For 45U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 35086-C06 For 46U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 35086-C07 For 47U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 35086-C08 For 48U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 35086-C09 For 49U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 35086-C10 For 50U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 35086-C11 For 51U Cabinet 17 (7.7) Color is black. Not available for 24U cabinets. (-C01) bracket is only compatible with 38.5”H (978 mm) power strip. (-C03) or taller bracket is required for 68.5”H (1740 mm) PDU. (–C04) or taller bracket is required for 70.5”H (1791 mm) PDU. Cable Lashing Bracket Provides attachment points to quickly secure cable bundles within the cabinet. • C-shaped bracket, 5.125”W x .7”D (130 mm x 17 mm) • Bracket attaches to the cabinet frame and requires a minimum 5” (127 mm) equipment mounting rail setback when positioned behind the rear equipment mounting rails Shipping Part Description Weight Number Height lb (kg) 35087-C00 For 24U Cabinet 8 (3.6) 35087-C01 For 36U Cabinet 11 (5.0) 35087-C02 For 42U Cabinet 12 (5.4) 35087-C03 For 43U Cabinet 13 (5.9) 35087-C04 For 44U Cabinet 13 (5.9) 35087-C05 For 45U Cabinet 13 (5.9) 35087-C06 For 46U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 35087-C07 For 47U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 35087-C08 For 48U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 35087-C09 For 49U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 35087-C10 For 50U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 35087-C11 For 51U Cabinet 15 (6.8) Color is black. 2-16 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Baying Kits Zero Spacing Baying Kit Includes M6 hardware to bay two cabinets (same height and depth) side-by-side with or without side panels for simplified installation when no space is required between the cabinets. Each kit includes four M6 screws, washers and nuts. 24” (610 mm) Baying Bracket Kit 35078-001 Includes brackets and hardware to bay two 23.6” (600 mm) cabinets so that the cabinets are centered over 24”W (610 mm) raised access floor tiles. Note that there will be a .4” (10 mm) gap between the cabinets. Each kits includes two .8”H x 3.6”W x 1.0”D (20 mm x 92 mm x 25 mm) C-shaped brackets attach to the tops of the cabinet frames at the front and rear. Installation hardware allows cabinets of different depths to be bayed together. Narrow Baying Kit Includes brackets and hardware that bay two cabinets with or without side panels. Each kit includes two .8”H x 3.2”W x 1.0”D (20 mm x 82 mm x 25 mm) C-shaped brackets that attach to the tops of the cabinet frames at the front and rear and installation hardware. Allows cabinets of 35079-C01 different depths to be bayed together. 24” (610 mm) Baying & Fascia Kit Allows you to bay and center two 23.6”W (600 mm) cabinets over 24”W (610 mm) raised access floor tiles. The kits includes two brackets and hardware to space and connect the cabinets together and two fascias that cover and hide the 0.4” (10 mm) gap between the cabinets. Each kit incudes two .8”H x 3.6”W x 2.0”D (20 mm x 92 mm x 50 mm) C-shaped brackets that attach to the tops of the cabinet frames at the front and rear, two 1”W (25 mm) T-shaped fascias and installation hardware to bay the cabinets. Cabinets must be the same height and depth. Shipping 35079-C02 Part Description Compatible Weight Number in (mm) Seal Kit lb (kg) 35078-001 Zero Spacing Baying Kit 35081-000 1 (0.5) 35079-X01 24 (600) Baying Brackets 35081-001* 1 (0.5) 35079-X02 Narrow Baying Kit 35081-003 1 (0.5) 35080-X00 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 24U 35081-001* 9 (4.1) 35080-X01 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 36U 35081-001* 11 (5.0) 35080-X02 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 42U 35081-001* 12 (5.4) 35080-X03 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 43U 35081-001* 12 (5.4) 35080-X04 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 44U 35081-001* 12 (5.4) 35080-X05 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 45U 35081-001* 13 (5.9) 35080-X06 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 46U 35081-001* 13 (5.9) 35080-X07 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 47U 35081-001* 13 (5.9) 35080-X08 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 48U 35081-001* 13 (5.9) 35080-X09 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 49U 35081-001* 13 (5.9) 35080-C02 35080-X10 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 50U 35081-001* 14 (6.4) 35080-X11 24 (600) Baying & Fascia Kit, for 51U 35081-001* 14 (6.4) X=color: C=Black, D=Signature Blue, E=Glacier White, F=Steel Gray. Use Seal Kits when side panels are omitted. *Use Seal Kit 35081-001 if one panel is omitted and 35081-002 if both panels are omitted 35081-001 between cabinets. 2-17 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Rack-Mount Cable Shelf Use Rack-Mount Cable Shelf in any 19”W CPI Cabinet equipped with an Air Dam Kit to provide a front-to-rear pathway for cables. Cables pass through brush sealed ports along the front of the shelf. Rack-Mount Cable Shelf uses 1U and will fit in cabinets with mounting rails set between 22” (560 mm) and 40”D (1020 mm). Shipping Part Description Weight Number H x W (in) lb (kg) 13517-701 1U x 19, Black 17 (7.7) Note: Rack-Mount Cable Shelf can be used with all CPI four-post cabinets and racks. Caster Kit Front casters are full-swivel. Caster Kit adds 2.5” (64 mm) to the overall height of the cabinet. Includes four non-locking casters and mounting hardware. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 35051-C01 Set of 4 Casters, Black 25 (11.8) Installation Kits and Mounting Hardware TeraFrame can be fitted with threaded or square-punched equipment mounting rails. Use screws to secure equipment to threaded mounting rails. Use cage nuts to secure equipment to square-punched mounting rails. With square- punched rails, you can change the thread (cage nut) to match equipment mounting hardware requirements. Shipping Part 40605 Description Weight Number lb (kg) Screws, #12-24, 40605-001 1 (0.5) Package of 50, Zinc Screws, #12-24, 40605-005 1 (0.5) Package of 50, Black Cage Nuts and Screws, M6, 12637-001 1 (0.5) Package of 25, Gold 12637 Cage Nuts and Screws, #10-32, 12638-001 1 (0.5) 12638 Package of 25, Zinc Cage Nuts and Screws, #12-24, 12639-001 1 (0.5) 12639 Package of 25, Black Hardware Kit, Rail Support, (16) M8 Drop- 35058-001 3 (1.4) In Nuts/Bolts, Package of 16, Zinc 40604-003 Installation Kit, Concrete Slab 1 (0.5) 2-18 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Mounting Rails Two mounting rail styles are available. Select square-punched rails for servers and data storage equipment. Square-punched rails let you change threads (cage nuts) at mounting locations to match equipment requirements. Select tapped rails to speed installation of rack-mount patch panels and network equipment. The 23.6”W (600 mm) rails attach to the cabinet frame. The 27.6” (700 mm) and 31.5”W (800 mm) rails include standoff brackets that center the rails for 19” EIA spacing. Sold in pairs, each rack-mount unit is marked and numbered on the rails. Part Number Shipping U Weight* 23.6” 27.6” 31.5” lb (kg) (600 mm) (700 mm) (800 mm) Square-Punched Equipment Mounting Rails 35009-000 35009-012 35009-024 24 28 (12.7) 35009-001 35009-013 35009-025 36 35 (15.9) 35009-002 35009-014 35009-026 42 38 (17.2) 35009-003 35009-015 35009-027 43 39 (17.7) 35009-004 35009-016 35009-028 44 40 (18.1) 35009-005 35009-017 35009-029 45 40 (18.1) 35009-006 35009-018 35009-030 46 41 (18.6) 35009-007 35009-019 35009-031 47 41 (18.6) 35009-008 35009-020 35009-032 48 42 (19.1) 35009-009 35009-021 35009-033 49 42 (19.1) 35009-010 35009-022 35009-034 50 43 (19.5) 35009-011 35009-023 35009-035 51 44 (20.0) #12-24 Tapped Equipment Mounting Rails 35008-000 35008-012 35008-024 24 28 (12.7) 35008-001 35008-013 35008-025 36 35 (15.9) 35008-002 35008-014 35008-026 42 38 (17.2) 35008-003 35008-015 35008-027 43 39 (17.7) 35008-004 35008-016 35008-028 44 40 (18.1) 35008-005 35008-017 35008-029 45 40 (18.1) 35008-006 35008-018 35008-030 46 41 (18.6) 35008-007 35008-019 35008-031 47 41 (18.6) 35008-008 35008-020 35008-032 48 42 (19.1) 35008-009 35008-021 35008-033 49 42 (19.1) 35008-010 35008-022 35008-034 50 43 (19.5) 35008-011 35008-023 35008-035 51 44 (20.0) Mounting rails and standoff brackets are zinc plated. *Shipping weight is for the 31.5”W (800 mm) tapped rail. For F-Series TeraFrame Cabinets manufactured before February 9, 2009, contact CPI Technical Support for assistance with part numbers at 800-834-4949. 2-19 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME HD CABINET SYSTEM ® The F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet System Choose a solid top panel with two (server-style) brush-sealed Metric footprint for network cable access ports or international use use the Vertical Exhaust Duct option with high heat density Available in 600 mm width, applications to isolate and three heights and two depths remove hot air from the room Heavy-Duty, welded steel and Includes two pairs of sliding, bolted aluminum frame continuously adjustable equipment construction supports up to mounting rails to provide front and 3000 lb (1360.0 kg) of equipment rear support for 19”W (482.6 mm) in a dynamic environment. EIA/ECA-310-E compliant rack-mount equipment and shelves Mounting rails have 1.75”H Easy to remove solid side panels (44.45 mm) rack-mount units and have recessed spring-loaded are available with square-punched latches with keyed locks; cabinets holes that accept cage nuts; can be bayed (side-by-side) with rack-mount units are marked side panels installed and numbered bottom-to-top on all rails Choose a solid metal, perforated metal or double, perforated metal rear door Includes a single-point cam latch with keyed locks The mounting rails, top panel, side panels and doors are electrically bonded to the cabinet Includes a single, perforated, frame; a ground terminal block is curved metal front door (79% included to attach the frame to open); reversible to open from the the CBN or TGB right or left, easy to remove at 90˚ open position. Organize network cables, power distribution units and power cords along the sides of the cabinet with optional side-mounted vertical cable Open base for cable entry; and power managers includes leveling feet heavy-duty casters with roller bearings for Heavy-duty shock pallet and re-usable cushioned carton allow the superior, long-term performance. cabinet to be reshipped after equipment is installed. A bottom panel is available Heavy-duty welded steel ramp provides a safe method for as an accesory. unloading the cabinet from the pallet upon arrival at customer site. Static & dynamic load rating of 3000 lb (1360 kg) 2-20 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME HD CABINET SYSTEM ® F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet System ® The F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet System is designed for safe transportation of up to 3,000 lb (1360 kg) of electronic equipment from a factory integration site direct to the customer’s datacenter. Every cabinet includes two pairs of sliding, continuously adjustable equipment mounting rails with square-punched mounting holes for compatibility with most rack-mount equipment. In addition, the F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet system includes heavy duty casters with roller bearings for superior long-term performance under load, a shock pallet, and a re-usable cushioned carton for protection during shipment. The top panel includes large brush-covered cable openings that will handle large bundles of cables while preventing undesirable hot air re-circulation. The top panel includes a removable cover plate allowing the use of a Vertical Exhaust Duct for high-density applications. Cabinets include solid side panels to protect equipment. Heavy-duty steel ramp is an optional accessory designed to simplify unloading the populated cabinet from the shock pallet. An optional bolt-down kit allows the cabinet to be securely anchored to the floor structure and can be installed prior to the cabinet’s arrival to minimize installation time. Combine the F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet with thermal and cable management accessories to create a custom solution that fits your exact needs. Cabinet Specifications: • Available in 600 mm width, 3 heights and 2 depths • Provides front and rear support for 19”W EIA equipment and shelves with two pairs of adjustable depth rack-mount unit marked and numbered equipment mounting rails • Includes grounding and bonding kit • Includes leveling feet and casters • Can be ordered with a server top panel or Vertical Exhaust Duct • Choose from three rear door styles • Heavy-duty welded steel and bolted aluminum frame construction • Load rating: – 3000 lb (1360 kg) static – 3000 lb (1360 kg) dynamic Cabinet Includes: • (1) Four-post frame (painted finish) • (4) Vertical Mounting Rails (square-punched) • (1) Grounding/Bonding Kit • (2) Locking, Solid Side Panels • (1) Front Door • (1) Rear Door • (1) Top Panel • (4) Leveling Feet and casters • (1) Bag of 25 Each M6 Cage Nuts and Screws (square-punched rails) • (1) Shock pallet rated for 3000 lb of equipment (excluding cabinet weight) • (1) Re-usable cushioned carton 2-21 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME HD CABINET SYSTEM Use the part number matrix below to select a F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet. Choose the Height, Width, Depth, Rail Style, Front Door, Rear Door, Latch, Color, Top Panel and Side Panel style to form a part number. To order the cabinet with accessories installed, contact CPI Technical Support. Example Part Number: FHD-F1U-111B-C52 - FHD H W D - R FD RD L - C TP SP 1. Height 10. Side Panel Style 2 Solid, 2 each Cabinet Frame in mm in mm U 9. Top Panel Style 82.5 2096 78.1 1984 42 C 4 Server, 2 Cable Openings 87.7 2228 83.4 2118 45 F Vertical Exhaust Duct System, H 91.2 2316 86.9 2207 47 5 20”-34”H (508 mm-863 mm) Cabinet height includes casters. Vertical Exhaust Duct System, 2. Width 6 34”-60”H (863 mm-1523 mm) Cabinet Frame Use a solid rear dor with Vertical Exhaust Duct. EIA in mm in mm 8. Color 23.6 600 19” 23.4 594 1 C Black 3. Depth 7. Latches (Door) Cabinet Rails Frame B Single-Point, Cam Latch, Keyed Lock in mm in mm in mm The rear double-door will have a two-point latch. 46.1 1172 39.4 1001 42.3 1075 M 51.0 1297 44.3 1126 47.2 1200 U 6. Rear Door 1 Single, Solid Metal 4. Rail Style 2 Single, Perforated Metal Square-Punched, 2 Pair 1 3 Double, Perforated Metal 5. Front Door 1 Single, Perforated Metal Ordering Notes: 1. Height: Three heights are available. The cabinet height is the overall height of the cabinet with a top panel and casters. The frame height is the height of the internal frame without the top panel or casters. Casters add approximately 4.2 inches (107 mm) to the height of the frame and cabinet. 2. Width: Overall cabinet width with side panels is 23.6 inches (600 mm). The cabinet includes equipment mounting rails spaced for 19”EIA (482.6 mm) rack-mount equipment. 3. Depth: Two depths are available. Cabinet depth is the overall depth of the cabinet including doors. Frame depth is the outside depth of the frame excluding doors. Doors add approximately 3.8 inches (97 mm) to overall depth. Rail depth is the maximum front-to-rear spacing of equipment mounting rails. Rail depth is reduced by an equipment mounting rail setback when accessories are added. 4. Rail Style: Square-punched rails use snap-in cage nut hardware that can be changed to match equipment requirements. Order additional mounting hardware as required. 5. Front Door Style: The door matches the color of the cabinet and includes an anodized aluminum center beam. 6. Rear Door Style: Three rear door styles are available. The double-door reduces the amount of aisle space required to access the rear of the cabinet. Double doors have two-point latches. A single solid metal door must be used when the Vertical Exhaust Duct System top panel style is selected. 7. Latches: All doors have a swing handle. Single doors have a single-point cam latch with keyed lock; the double-door has a two-point cam latch with keyed lock. The keyed lock includes a physical key which matches the locks on the doors and side panels. 8. Color: The frame, doors, side panels and top panel are painted black. Mounting rails are zinc plated. 9. Top Panel Style: There are two styles of top panel available. Server Top Panels have two large brush-sealed cable openings and include a removable cover plate for the Vertical Exhaust Duct. The Vertical Exhaust Duct System includes a Server Top Panel, a top-mount Vertical Exhaust Duct, an Airflow Director and a Rear Door Sealing Kit. Select from duct height ranges: 20” to 34” (508 mm – 863 mm) or 34” to 60” (863 mm – 1523 mm) high to match ceiling height. Use with a single solid rear door. 10. Side Panel Style: Side panels are solid. Cabinets are bayed with side panels installed. Order baying kits separately. 2-22 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME HD CABINET SYSTEM TeraFrame HD Cabinet Accessories Unloading Ramp Safely remove a loaded cabinet from the shock pallet at the customer site with this re-usable, heavy-duty steel unloading ramp. The ramp is 78 inches (1981 16280-C01 mm) long, provides a 5° incline, has U-shaped narrow width tracks and bolts to the shock pallet to ensure the ramp and pallet remain connected. Order one per customer site. Bolt Down Kit Securely anchors F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinets to the floor. The kit includes two heavy-duty two-piece steel brackets that attach to the cabinet frame. Disassemble the brackets and mount the L-shaped floor flanges, roll cabinets into place and secure the cabinets to the floor flanges with the remaining bracket. Once installed, the Bolt-Down Kit covers the opening between the cabinet frame and floor at the front and rear of the cabinet concealing the 16279-C01 casters and providing a barrier that minimizes air leakage underneath the cabinet. Order required floor anchor hardware separately. Side Skirt The Side Skirt attaches to the Bolt Down Kit (P/N 16279-X01), conceals the casters and provides a barrier that minimizes air leakage under the cabinet. Use 16277-C1X one Side Skirt on each end of multi-cabinet rows. Each kit includes one cover and installation hardware. Select the depth to match the cabinet. Baying and Fascia Kit Allows you to bay and center two F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinets (same height and depth) over 24 inch wide (610 mm) raised access floor tiles. The kit includes two brackets and hardware to space and connect the cabinets together and two fascias that cover and hide the 0.4 inch (10 mm) gap between the cabinets. 16271-C0X Air Dam Kit The Air Dam Kit blocks airflow around the top, bottom and sides of the rack- mount space inside the cabinet. Use Snap-In Filler Panels with Air Dam Kit to separate hot and cold air inside the cabinet. The kit requires a 1.7 inch (43 mm) to 2.5 inch (63 mm) equipment mounting rail setback. Select the height to match the cabinet. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 16280-C01 Unloading Ramp, Black 185 (83.9) 16279-C01 Bolt Down Kit, Black 14 (6.4) 16270-C0X 16277-C11 Side Skirt, For 42.3 (1075), Black 6 (2.7) 16277-C16 Side Skirt, For 47.2 (1200), Black 6 (2.7) 16271-C02 Baying/Fascia Kit, For 42U Cabinets, Black 10 (4.5) 16271-C05 Baying/Fascia Kit, For 45U Cabinets, Black 10 (4.5) 16271-C07 Baying/Fascia Kit, For 47U Cabinets, Black 10 (4.5) 16270-C02 Air Dam Kit, For 42U Cabinets, Black 12 (5.4) 16270-C05 Air Dam Kit, For 45U Cabinets, Black 13 (5.9) 16270-C07 Air Dam Kit, For 47U Cabinets, Black 13 (5.9) 2-23 ® F-SERIES TERAFRAME HD CABINET SYSTEM Bottom Panel Covers the bottom of the cabinet and blocks airflow into and out of the base of the cabinet. The two-piece telescoping design includes one brush-sealed 3 inch by 11.75 inch (76 mm x 292 mm) cable access port located at the rear center of the panel and fits all sizes. 16278-C01 Cable Lashing Bar Secures a single network or power cable bundle within the cabinet and features notched edges to ensure Saf-T-Grips and cable ties do not slide. The bar attaches to the cabinet frame and is only 1.5 inches (38 mm) wide allowing multiple bars to be placed side-by-side. Requires a minimum 2.5 inch (64 mm) 16272-C02 equipment mounting rail setback. Select the bar to match cabinet height. Cable Lashing Bracket Secures multiple network or power cable bundles within the cabinet featuring U-shaped attachment points for Saf-T-Grips or cable ties. The bracket attaches to the cabinet frame and is 5.125 inches (130 mm) wide and requires a minimum 5 inch (127 mm) equipment mounting rail setback. Power Strip Lashing Bracket Supports one 3.5 inch (89 mm) wide or two 2.3 inch (58 mm) wide CPI Vertical 16273-C02 PDU/Power Strips and provides multiple attachment points for fastening power cable bundles with Saf-T-Grip Straps or cable ties. The bracket attaches to the cabinet frame and is 8.375 inches (213 mm) wide. Power strip mounting holes are spaced 64.75 inch (1645 mm) or 36.75 inch (934 mm) apart. The bracket requires a minimum 5 inch (127 mm) equipment mounting rail setback. Vertical Cable Ring Manager Attaches to the side of the cabinet’s equipment mounting rails and has plastic C-shaped cable management rings that guide and manage cables. Rings are 1.4 inches (36 mm) wide and 4 inches (100 mm) deep. The manager requires a minimum 4.8 inch (122 mm) equipment mounting rail setback. 16274-C02 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 16278-C01 Bottom Panel 19 (8.6) 16272-C02 Cable Lashing Bar, For 42U Cabinets 7 (3.2) 16272-C05 Cable Lashing Bar, For 45U Cabinets 8 (3.6) 16272-C07 Cable Lashing Bar, For 47U Cabinets 8 (3.6) 16273-C02 Cable Lashing Bracket, For 42U Cabinets 12 (5.4) 16273-C05 Cable Lashing Bracket, For 45U Cabinets 13 (5.9) 16275-C01 16273-C07 Cable Lashing Bracket, For 47U Cabinets 14 (6.4) 16274-C02 Power Strip Bracket, For 42U Cabinets 14 (6.4) 16274-C05 Power Strip Bracket, For 45U Cabinets 15 (8.8) 16274-C07 Power Strip Bracket, For 47U Cabinets 16 (7.3) 16275-C02 Cable Ring Manager, For 42U Cabinets 5 (2.3) 16275-C05 Cable Ring Manager, For 45U Cabinets 5 (2.3) 16275-C07 Cable Ring Manager, For 47U Cabinets 6 (2.7) Color is black. Power Lashing Bracket, (-C05) or taller bracket required for 68.5”H (1740 mm) and 70.5”H (1791 mm) PDUs. 2-24 ® N-SERIES TERAFRAME NETWORK CABINET ® The N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet Comes with a five-piece top Metric footprint for panel, center panel and four international use perimeter panels (front, sides, rear) with cable knockouts Available in 10 heights and 11 depths (110 standard sizes) Includes two pairs of equipment mounting rails to provide front and rear support for 19” EIA-310-D Frames are welded steel and compliant equipment and shelves; support up to 2500 lb (1134.0 kg) mounting rails have 1.75”H of equipment (44.45 mm) rack-mount units and are available with square-punched or threaded attachment points Rack-mount units are marked and Choose solid or vented easy to numbered on each mounting rail remove side panels; side panels have recessed latches with keyed Choose keyed or locks combination/keyed locks; order Right Hand Door Latch Kit (P/N Cabinets can be bayed 34684-C02) to reverse (side-by-side) when side panels front door swing are removed Network Cabinet comes with Cabinet comes with a double, single, perforated front door perforated rear door with swing with handle and two-point handle and two-point latch latch swing Organize fiber trunk cables along the sides of the cabinet with The Network Switch Exhaust Duct optional side-mounted vertical guides hot exhaust air from the fiber managers side of rack-mount switches out the rear door Open base for cable entry; Standoff Brackets offset doors and includes leveling feet and floor side panels to provide extra space attachment brackets (casters are around equipment for enhanced side-to-side airflow and additional available as an accessory) cable management Designed specifically to control side-to-side airflow for network switch equipment deployed in a hot aisle/cold aisle data center environment 2-25 ® N-SERIES TERAFRAME NETWORK CABINET ® N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet ® The N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet provides an engineered solution for network switches and cabling in data centers with hot aisle/cold aisle layouts, delivering superior thermal management for high-density applications. Featuring offset doors and side panels, the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet provides extra interior space around the cabinet frame for cable management and enhanced airflow. Select the Network Switch Exhaust Duct option when deploying network switches that require side-to-side airflow. The Network Switch Exhaust Duct isolates and re-directs hot exhaust air out the rear of the cabinet to help prevent the re-circulation of hot air through equipment and establishes proper airflow for a hot aisle/cold aisle layout. The N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet includes vertical cable guides and cable management spools to help organize cables. The guides are T-shaped with openings that align with each rack-mount unit on the rack and attach to the front of the cabinet frame. The spools attach to the side of the cabinet frame and help guide cables along the side of the cabinet preventing them from accidentally blocking air intakes on switch chassis. Use the vertical cable guides and cable management spools to route cables to the sides of switches to maintain full access to the switch I/O and fan modules. Specifications: • Available in 10 heights and 11 depths • Designed to meet third party specifications for specific manufacturer switches • Matches standard TeraFrame Cabinet system style and sizes • Includes two pairs of 19” EIA equipment mounting rails providing front and rear support for equipment and shelves • Static load rating: - 2500 lb (1134 kg) on leveler feet Cabinet Includes: • (1) Welded Steel Four-Post Frame • (4) Equipment Mounting Rails • (1) Single, Perforated Front Door with Swing Handle • (1) Double, Perforated Rear Door with Swing Handle • (1) Five-piece Top Panel • (4) Leveler Feet and Floor Anchor Brackets • (1) Ground Terminal Block • (1) Baying Kit • (1) Bag of 25 Each M6 Cage Nuts and Screws (square-punched rails) • (1) Bag of 50 Each #12-24 Rack Channel Mounting Screws (tapped rails) Applications: The N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet supports Cisco Catalyst, Cisco Nexus and Juniper Network switches. Many other switches can also benefit from the superior thermal management designed into the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet. More information on specific switch models is The Network Switch Exhaust Duct guides hot available on page 2-28 or at www.chatsworth.com. exhaust air from the side of the switch out the rear door of the cabinet. 2-26 ® N-SERIES TERAFRAME NETWORK CABINET Use the part number configurator below to create a custom N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet. Choose the Height, With or Without Duct, Depth, Rail Style, Front Door, Rear Door, Latch, Color, Top Panel Style and Side Panel Style. Example part number: NF1K-113C-C42 N H W D - R FD RD L - C TP SP 1. Height 10. Side Panel Style Cabinet Frame 0 None U in mm in mm 1 Solid, 1 each 78.3 1989 78.1 1984 42 C 2 Solid, 2 each 80.0 2033 79.9 2029 43 D 3 Vented, 1 each 81.8 2077 81.6 2073 44 E 4 Vented, 2 each 83.5 2122 83.4 2118 45 F 85.3 2166 85.1 2162 46 G 9. Top Panel 87.0 2211 86.9 2207 47 H 4 Solid with Knock-Out Ports 88.8 2255 88.6 2251 48 J 90.5 2300 90.4 2296 49 K 92.3 2344 92.1 2340 50 L 8. Color 94.0 2389 93.9 2385 51 M C Black Note: When sizing to match the N-Series TeraFrame D Signature Blue Cabinet System, use the same part number digit for cabinet height and depth as the F-Series TeraFrame. E Glacier White F Steel Gray 2. Network Switch Exhaust Duct None - Includes two Cable Finger Kits 0 7. Latches (Door) Included - Includes one Cable Finger Kit 1 C Two-Point, Cam Latch, Keyed Lock Note: Use the Network Switch Exhaust Duct with E Two-Point, Cam Latch, Combination Lock switches that require side airflow. See Ordering Notes 3 & 4 for additional information. 6. Rear Door 3. Depth 3 Double, Perforated Metal N-Series Equiv. F-Series Cabinet Rail (max) Frame Size Frame Size in mm in mm in mm in mm 5. Front Door 41.2 1047 22.6 575 25.6 650 37.4 950 G 1 Single, Perforated Metal 42.2 1072 23.6 600 26.6 675 38.4 975 H 43.2 1097 24.6 625 27.6 700 39.4 1000 J 4. Rail Style 44.2 1122 25.6 650 28.5 725 40.4 1025 K 1 Square Punch, 2 Pair 45.2 1147 26.6 675 29.5 750 41.3 1050 L 2 Tapped, #12-24, 2 Pair 46.1 1172 27.6 700 30.5 775 42.3 1075 M 47.1 1197 28.6 725 31.5 800 43.3 1100 N 48.1 1222 29.5 750 32.5 825 44.3 1125 P 49.1 1247 30.5 775 33.5 850 45.3 1150 R 50.1 1272 31.5 800 34.4 875 46.3 1175 T 51.1 1297 32.5 825 35.4 900 47.2 1200 U Note: Depths G and H have a maximum rail spacing less than 24” (610 mm) and will not support certain switch mounting brackets. The N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet supports Use CPI P/N 12336-719, 18” D (460 mm) Fixed Shelf, to support Cisco Catalyst, Cisco Nexus and Juniper Network switches. equipment when ordering these cabinet sizes. See next page for specific part number information. 2-27 ® N-SERIES TERAFRAME NETWORK CABINET Ordering Notes: 1. Height: Ten heights are available. The frame height is the height of the internal frame without the top panel. The cabinet height is the overall height of the cabinet with a top panel. Leveler feet add approximately 1” (25 mm) to the height of the cabinet. Frame heights match F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System heights. Accessory Caster Kits adds approximately 2.5” (64 mm) to the height of the cabinet. 2. Width: One width is available. Overall cabinet width with side panels is 31.5” (800 mm). The internal frame width without side panels is 23.6” (600 mm). The included mounting rails are 19” EIA-310-D compliant. 3. Network Switch Exhaust Duct: Select [1] to include a Network Switch Exhaust Duct with the cabinet (special configurations are listed under note 4 below). The duct will be pre-installed into the cabinet and includes removable exhaust panels on the side that faces the equipment. The duct is 2U less than the full height of the cabinet. Select [0] to exclude the duct for patching applications or switches that have front-to-rear airflow. Cabinets that include the Network Switch Exhaust Duct include one Cable Management Fingers Kit (see next page). Cabinets that do not include the Network Switch Exhaust Duct include two Cable Management Fingers Kits. 4. Depth: Eleven depths are available. The frame depth is the depth of the internal frame without doors. The cabinet depth is the overall depth of the cabinet with doors. Rail depth is the maximum rail-to-rail depth within the frame. The N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet can be used side-by-side with the F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System. Overall cabinet depths are the same. Equivalent F-Series TeraFrame frame depths are listed in a separate column in the order table. 5. Rail Style: Square-punched rails use snap-in cage nut hardware (P/N 12637-001, 12628-001 or 12639-001) that can be changed to match equipment requirements. Tapped rails use screws (P/N 40605-001 or 40605-005). Order additional mounting hardware as required. (see page 2-16) 6. Front Door: The front door is hinged on the right side. To reverse the swing, order a Right Hand Door Latch Kit (P/N 34684-C02). 7. Latches: All doors have swing handles and a two point cam latch. The keyed lock includes a physical key. The combination lock has a programmable three-digit combination and is opened with three dials on the handle or with a key. 8. Side Panels: Vented and solid side panels are available. Select a quantity of one or two panels per cabinet. Omit side panels to bay cabinets. In addition to the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet Solution in the order table on the previous page, specific N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet configurations have been developed for the following Manufacturer’s Switches: Meets Compatibility Guidelines for: Part Number Dimensions H x W x D - in (mm) Cisco Nexus 7010 switch NF0U-113C-C42 45U x 31.5 x 47.2 (800 x 1200)*** Cisco Catalyst 6500, 6509* and 6513 switches NF2K-113C-C42 45U x 31.5 x 40.4 (800 x 1025)** Cisco MDS 9509 director Cisco MDS 9513 director NF3K-113C-C42 45U x 31.5 x 40.4 (800 x 1025)** Juniper EX8208 or EX8216 NF4M-113C-C42 45U x 31.5 x 42.3 (800 x 1075)** Cisco Nexus 7018 switch NF5U-143C-C42 45U x 40.0 x 47.2 (1016 x 1200)*** *Cisco 6509-NEBS does not require Network Switch Exhaust Duct. ** Dimensions correspond to Equivalent TeraFrame depth in the order matrix on previous page. *** Other sizes avialable to support this switch For more information on N-Series solutions for Cisco Switches, refer to www.chatsworth.com/ciscoteraframe, and for more information on N-Series solutions for Juniper Network Switches, refer to the www.chatsworth.com/juniperteraframe. 2-28 ® N-SERIES TERAFRAME NETWORK CABINET TeraFrame N-Series Cabinet Accessories Network Switch Exhaust Duct Panel Included with cabinets equipped with the Network Switch Exhaust Duct. Install above and below switches to form a seal between the exhaust grill on the switch chassis and the exhaust duct. Order additional panels separately. Cable Management Fingers Kit 34620-CXX Includes a set of T-shaped cable guides (with five cable spools) that attach to Included with some cabinets. the front of the cabinet frame. The openings align with the rack-mount unit *Duct only compatible with P/N NF4M-113C-C42. spaces on the rack and can pass up to 48 CAT 6a patch cords. The cable spools are approximately 1” (25 mm) in diameter and 4”H (100 mm) and attach to the side of the cabinet frame to maintain cables in the front or rear corners. Caster Kit Set of four full-swivel casters and mounting brackets that attach to the outside corners of the cabinet frame and can be removed after the cabinet moved and set. Position the cabinet before loading the cabinet with equipment. Baying Kit Connect two N-series TeraFrame Network Cabinets (same height and depth) side-by-side. Side panels must be removed. Right Hand Door Latch 34680-00X Allows front door to be reversed to open from the right (hinges on left). Shipping Included with each cabinet. Part Description Weight Number Height lb (kg) 34620-C01 Network Exhaust Duct, 2U to 3U Panel, Black 3 (1.4) 34620-C02 Network Exhaust Duct, 4U to 7U Panel, Black 4 (1.8) 34620-C03 Network Exhaust Duct, 8U to 15U Panel, Black 6 (2.7) 34620-C11* Network Exhaust Duct, 2U to 3U Panel, Black 3 (1.4) 34620-C12* Network Exhaust Duct, 4U to 7U Panel, Black 4 (1.8) 34628-C01 34620-C13* Network Exhaust Duct, 8U to 15U Panel, Black 6 (2.7) 34680-002 Cable Fingers Kit, For 42U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34680-003 Cable Fingers Kit, For 43U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34680-004 Cable Fingers Kit, For 44U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34680-005 Cable Fingers Kit, For 45U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34682-C01 34680-006 Cable Fingers Kit, For 46U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34680-007 Cable Fingers Kit, For 47U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34680-008 Cable Fingers Kit, For 48U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34680-009 Cable Fingers Kit, For 49U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34680-010 Cable Fingers Kit, For 50U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34680-011 Cable Fingers Kit, For 51U Cabinets, Black 4 (1.8) 34628-C01 Caster Kit, Set of 4, Black 25 (11.3) 34684-C02 34682-C01 Cabinet Baying Kit 5 (2.3) 34684-C02 Right Hand Door Latch Kit 5 (2.3) *Duct only compatible with P/N NF4M-113C-C42. 2-29 ® N-SERIES TERAFRAME NETWORK CABINET Mounting Rails Two mounting rail styles are available. Fixed Mounting Rails Replacement pair of mounting rails for the front side of the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinets equipped with the Network Switch Exhaust Duct. Mounting rails attach to the cabinet frame’s vertical uprights and are not adjustable in depth. The rail minimizes interference with the airflow of the network switch. Match to cabinet height. Part Number Shipping Description Weight Square- Tapped Height Punched #12-24 lb (kg) 34626-002 34667-002 For 42U Cabinet 13 (5.9) 34626-003 34667-003 For 43U Cabinet 13 (5.9) 34626-004 34667-004 For 44U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 34626-005 34667-005 For 45U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 34626-006 34667-006 For 46U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 34626-007 34667-007 For 47U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 34626-008 34667-008 For 48U Cabinet 14 (6.4) 34626-009 34667-009 For 49U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 34626-010 34667-010 For 50U Cabinet 15 (6.8) 34626-011 34667-011 For 51U Cabinet 15 (6.8) Adjustable-Depth Mounting Rails Replacement pair of mounting rails for the rear side of the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinets equipped with the Network Switch Exhaust Duct and for the front and rear of cabinets that do not have an exhaust duct. Mounting rails attach to the side of the cabinet frame and adjust in depth front-to-rear. Match to cabinet height. Part Number Shipping Front of cabinet shown Description Weight Square- Tapped with fixed rails Height lb (kg) Punched #12-24 34408-002 34409-002 For 42U Cabinet 27 (12.2) 34408-003 34409-003 For 43U Cabinet 28 (12.7) 34408-004 34409-004 For 44U Cabinet 28 (12.7) 34408-005 34409-005 For 45U Cabinet 29 (13.2) Rear of cabinet shown 34408-006 34409-006 For 46U Cabinet 29 (13.2) with adjustable rails 34408-007 34409-007 For 47U Cabinet 30 (13.6) 34408-008 34409-008 For 48U Cabinet 30 (13.6) 34408-009 34409-009 For 49U Cabinet 31 (14.1) 34408-010 34409-010 For 50U Cabinet 31 (14.1) 34408-011 34409-011 For 51U Cabinet 32 (14.5) Additional accessories available, visit Mounting rails are plated and silver color. *Shipping weights are for tapped rails. www.chatsworth.com for more information. 2-30 ® FIBER MANAGEMENT FOR TERAFRAME Fiber Management Accessories For ® TeraFrame Cabinet Systems ® CPI Fiber Management for the TeraFrame Family of Cabinets is designed to ® ™ manage Corning Cable Systems LANscape Pretium Zero-U System, a ™ compliment to Plug & Play Universal Systems products to support Fibre Channel connectivity in Storage Area Networks (SANs) and 10-, 40- and 100- Gigabit Ethernet in the data center. Manage large volumes of optical fiber cable and patch cords in cabinets that store large modular switches (directors). CPI and Corning Cable Systems provide a solution that maximizes available cabinet rack space. The system supports and provides for attachment and strain-relief of the Plug & Play Universal Systems trunk cables, as well as mounting of Plug & Play Universal Systems Modules and/or high-density Zero-U System MTP Adapter Brackets in the zero rack-mount unit space between the cabinet frame and side panel. The TeraFrame Cabinet Systems are designed to support high- density cabling and thermal management for modular switches. Fiber Trunk Cable Manager Attaches to the the rear frame upright on the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet and supports and protects Corning Cable Systems Plug & Play Universal Systems trunk cables as the cables transition from vertical to horizontal orientation to make connections inside the cabinet. It is used in combination with the Vertical Furcation Bracket and provides critical strain relief so that the furcation plug on the trunk cable can mount properly to the Vertical Furcation Bracket. Is C-shaped, 9.7”W x 0.5”D (246 mm x 13 mm), made from steel, and includes installation hardware and is sized to support connections for two fully populated Cisco 9513 series or Brocade 48000 SAN Directors. Description Shipping Part Height Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 34719-C02 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 42U Cabinets, 69.6 (1768) 16 (7.3) 34719-C03 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 43U Cabinets, 71.4 (1814) 16 (7.3) 34719-C04 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 44U Cabinets, 73.1 (1857) 17 (7.7) 34719-C05 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 45U Cabinets, 74.9 (1902) 16 (7.3) 34719-C06 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 46U Cabinets, 76.6 (1946) 17 (7.7) 34719-C07 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 47U Cabinets, 78.4 (1991) 17 (7.7) 34719-C05 34719-C08 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 48U Cabinets, 80.1 (2035) 17 (7.7) 34719-C09 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 49U Cabinets, 81.9 (2080) 18 (8.2) 34719-C10 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 50U Cabinets, 83.6 (2123) 18 (8.2) 34719-C11 Fiber Trunk Mgr, For 51U Cabinets, 85.4 (2169) 19 (8.6) Color is black. Use in CPI N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinets only. Cannot be installed on the left side of a cabinet that has a Network Switch Exhaust Duct installed. Cannot be used with a Horizontal Furcation Bracket. 2-31 ® FIBER MANAGEMENT FOR TERAFRAME Universal Accessory Rail Attaches to the front vertical frame upright of the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet and supports Corning Cable Systems high-density Zero-U System MTP Adapter Brackets, Fiber Module Adapters and Swivel Cable Spools in the rack-mount space between the cabinet frame and the cabinet side panel and provides attachment points that align with rack-mount unit. 1.6”W x .8”D (41 mm x 19 mm), C-shaped rail, made from steel and includes installation hardware. Use with the Fiber Trunk Cable Manager and Vertical Furcation Bracket in high-density installations. 34701-C05 Swivel Cable Spool The spools are recommended next to modular SAN switches to manage cable slack where large numbers of harness assemblies are installed in a small number of rack-mount spaces. 1U high, attaches to the Universal Accessory Rail in the zero rack-mount unit space between the cabinet frame and the cabinet side panel. Spool is 1.7”H x 4”W x 5.5”D (44 mm x 102 mm x 140 mm) overall and includes installation hardware. An L-shaped mounting bracket and an L-shaped spool are also included; the spool rotates 360° with stops at 90° increments. Plastic L-shaped spool is 4”W x 3”D (102 mm x 80 mm), 1” (30 mm) in diameter; the steel L-shaped standoff mounting bracket is 1.7”H x 2.7”W x 2”D (44 mm x 70 mm x 50 mm). Fiber Module Adapter 4U high adapter mounts to the Universal Accessory Rail in a N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet for applications with lower cable densities that do not require the Corning Cable Systems high-density Zero-U System MTP Adapter Brackets and harness assembly connectivity. Supports a single Corning Cable Systems Plug & Play Universal Systems CCH Module in the rack-mount space between the cabinet frame and the cabinet side panel. Is S-shaped, 7”H x 2”W x 2.5”D (178 mm x 50 mm x 64 mm), made from steel and includes installation hardware. Description Shipping Part 34716-C01 Height Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 34701-C02 For 42U Cabinets, 63.0 (1600) 5 (2.3) 34701-C03 For 43U Cabinets, 64.8 (1645) 5 (2.3) 34701-C04 For 44U Cabinets, 66.5 (1689) 5 (2.3) 34701-C05 For 45U Cabinets, 68.3 (1734) 5 (2.3) 34701-C06 For 46U Cabinets, 70.0 (1778) 6 (2.7) 34701-C07 For 47U Cabinets, 71.8 (1822) 6 (2.7) 34701-C08 For 48U Cabinets, 73.5 (1867) 6 (2.7) 34701-C09 For 49U Cabinets, 75.3 (1911) 6 (2.7) 34701-C10 For 50U Cabinets, 77.0 (1956) 6 (2.7) 34701-C11 For 51U Cabinets, 78.8 (2000) 6 (2.7) 34713-C01 34716-C01 Swivel Cable Spool, Each, Black 2 (0.9) 34716-C02 Swivel Cable Spool, Kit of 6, Black 3 (1.4) 34713-C01 Fiber Module Adapter 2 (0.9) Color is black. Use Universal Accessory Rail in N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinets only. 6U (3U top/3U bottom) shorter than the cabinets equipment mounting rails. 2-32 ® FIBER MANAGEMENT FOR TERAFRAME Vertical Furcation Bracket Attaches to the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet or the F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet and supports Corning Cable Systems Plug & Play Universal Systems trunk cables. Is C-shaped, 5.1”W x .7”D (130 mm x 17 mm), made from steel and includes installation hardware. Color is black. Description Shipping Part Height Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 34707-C00 For 24U Cabinets, 38.6 (981) 8 (3.6) 34707-C01 For 36U Cabinets, 59.6 (1514) 10 (4.5) 34707-C02 For 42U Cabinets, 73.6 (1870) 11 (5.0) 34707-C03 For 43U Cabinets, 75.4 (1915) 11 (5.0) 34707-C04 For 44U Cabinets, 77.1 (1959) 12 (5.4) 34707-C05 For 45U Cabinets, 78.9 (2003) 12 (5.4) 34707-C06 For 46U Cabinets, 80.6 (2048) 13 (5.9) Requires a 5.2” (132 mm) 34707-C07 For 47U Cabinets, 82.4 (2092) 13 (5.9) setback if installed inside 34707-C08 For 48U Cabinets, 84.1 (2137) 13 (5.9) the rack-mount space 34707-C09 For 49U Cabinets, 85.9 (2181) 14 (6.5) behind equipment mounting rails. 34707-C10 For 50U Cabinets, 87.6 (2226) 14 (6.4) 34707-C11 For 51U Cabinets, 89.4 (2270) 14 (6.4) Horizontal Furcation Bracket Attaches the N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet or the Equipment Mounting Rail in the F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet and can be used to secure trunk cables in the vertical orientation as the cables enter the cabinet or as a horizontal (front-to-rear) support for the furcation legs of the trunk cable. Is C-shaped, 4.3”W x .5”D (108 mm x 12 mm) with 1.5”D (38 mm) mounting flange, made from steel and includes installation hardware. Color is black. Description Fits Max. Rail Shipping Part Length Spacing Weight Number in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) 34708-C02 22.4 (569) 22.4 (569) 5 (2.3) 34708-C03 23.3 (592) 23.3 (592) 5 (2.3) 34708-C04 24.3 (617) 24.3 (617) 5 (2.3) 34708-C05 25.3 (643) 25.3 (643) 5 (2.3) 34708-C06 26.3 (668) 26.3 (668) 5 (2.3) 34708-C07 27.3 (693) 27.3 (693) 5 (2.3) 34708-C08 28.3 (718) 28.3 (718) 5 (2.3) Cannot be used with Fiber Trunk 34708-C09 29.3 (743) 29.3 (743) 5 (2.3) Cable Manager, Vertical Cable Manager or Internal Air Duct. 34708-C10 30.2 (768) 30.2 (768) 5 (2.3) 34708-C11 31.2 (793) 31.2 (793) 5 (2.3) 34708-C12 32.2 (818) 32.2 (818) 5 (2.3) 34708-C13 33.2 (843) 33.2 (843) 5 (2.3) 34708-C14 34.2 (868) 34.2 (868) 5 (2.3) 34708-C15 35.2 (893) 35.2 (893) 6 (2.7) Additional accessories available, visit 34708-C16 36.2 (918) 36.2 (918) 6 (2.7) www.chatsworth.com for more information. 2-33 ® GF-SERIES GLOBALFRAME CABINET SYSTEM ® GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System ® The GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System is an easy-to-use, cost effective, computer and network equipment storage cabinet that complies with data center, computer room and premise network equipment room requirements. The GlobalFrame is available in 30 popular frame sizes. The enhanced frame design handles up to 3000 lb (1360 kg) of equipment load. Equipment mounting rails are easily adjustable by loosening three hex nuts and the markings on the frame provide easy vertical alignment during adjustment. The rails feature a Z-shaped design and have attachment points along the sides for accessory cable rings that create a vertical pathway for cables. The GF-Series GlobalFrame is available in Standard and Vertical Exhaust Duct configurations. Select the standard configuration with perforated metal front and rear doors to support front-to-rear airflow in traditional hot aisle/cold aisle or enclosed aisle applications. The standard configuration features a solid top panel with four large knockouts for cable access and a double (vertically split) perforated metal rear door for easy access to equipment. Select the Vertical Exhaust Duct configuration with perforated metal front door and solid metal rear door to support front-to-top airflow and isolate hot ® exhaust air as it exits the cabinet using CPI Passive Cooling . Isolating hot exhaust air from the room creates a more uniform room air temperature, eliminates hot spots, allows higher temperature set points, increased chilled water temperatures and enables more hours of economizer cooling. The Vertical Exhaust Duct configuration features a top panel with two large knockouts in the front corners for cable access, an extendable top-mount Vertical Exhaust Duct, a seal for the rear door and a Bottom Panel. Specifications: • Freestanding equipment cabinet provides front and rear support for 19”W (482.6 mm) EIA rack-mount equipment and shelves • Load Capacity: - 3000 lb (1360 kg), static load on leveling feet - 2250 lb (1020 kg), rolling on casters - 2000 lb (907.2 kg), shipping on shock pallet Cabinet Includes: • Welded and bolted steel four-post frame • Equipment mounting rails, two pairs • Equipment mounting hardware, (25) M6 cage nuts and screws • Factory installed grounding/bonding system • Leveling feet and casters • Floor attachment brackets • PDU Brackets, one pair, for mounting two vertical CPI PDUs • Baying kit for 600 mm and 24” tile spacing • Standard or Vertical Exhaust Duct top panel with cable access knock-outs • Perforated metal front door • Double perforated metal rear door with standard top panel • Solid metal rear door with Vertical Exhaust Duct top panel • Bottom Panel with Vertical Exhaust Duct top panel • Solid metal side panels (optional) See following pages for details. 2-34 ® GF-SERIES GLOBALFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Dimensions: Height Dimensions - in (mm) Rail Height 42U 45U 48U Overall Height, Casters included 79.3 (2013) 84.5 (2147) 89.8 (2280) Frame Opening, Front 73.9 (1876) 79.1 (2010) 84.4 (2143) Overall Height dimensions do not include the Vertical Exhaust Duct. The Vertical Exhaust Duct is available in two height ranges; 20”-34”H (508 mm - 863 mm) or 34”-60”H (863 mm - 1523 mm). Width Dimensions - in (mm) Nominal Width 600 mm 750 mm 800 mm Overall Width 23.6 (600) 29.5 (750) 31.5 (800) Frame Opening, Front 20.0 (508) 25.9 (658) 27.9 (708) Panel Width 19” EIA (482.6 mm) 19” EIA (482.6 mm) 19” EIA (482.6 mm) Depth Dimensions - in (mm) Nominal Depth 800 mm 1000 mm 1050 mm 1200 mm 1 Overall Depth with Doors 32.7 (831) 40.3 (1024) 42.3 (1074) 48.4 (1229) 2 Frame Depth, At Base, No Doors 31.5 (800) 39.4 (1000) 41.3 (1050) 47.2 (1200) Min./Max. Rail Depth, N/A 7.2 (183) / 34.6 (879) 7.2 (183) / 36.6 (929) 7.2 (183) / 42.5 (1079) 3 600 mm Cabinet Min./Max. Rail Depth, 6.8 (173) / 26.3 (668) 6.8 (173) / 34.2 (868) 6.8 (173) / 36.1 (918) 6.8 (173) / 42.0 (1068) 3 750 / 800 mm Cabinets 1. Doors add approximately 1.0” (25 mm) to the frame depth of the cabinet. The front door is 2.2”D (56 mm) and adds approximately 1” (25 mm) to the frame depth. The rear door is approximately 1.0”D (25 mm) and does not add to the frame depth. See note 2. 2. Depth at the base of the cabinet frame is 2.5” (64 mm) more than depth at the frame uprights. There is a 1.25” (32 mm) threshold on the front and rear of the cabinet that provides easy access to leveling feet. When installed, the front and rear doors cover this threshold. Frame uprights (corner posts) are approximately 2.9” (74 mm) deep. 3. When adjusted to maximum depth, mounting rails wrap around the frame uprights (corner posts). Note: Cable Ring Kits cannot be attached to the rails when they are set to maximum depth. Part Number Configurator (tables on next page) When ordering GlobalFrame Cabinet, the part number is always preceded by the letters GF. Example Part Number: GF-1A200 5th Digit - Configuration 1st Digit - Height There are two configurations and two pallet options. The GlobalFrame is offered in three overall heights (42U, 45U and 48U). Heights are listed as rack-mount unit (U). a. Select standard cabinets when deploying in hot aisle/cold 2nd Digit - Width aisle installations or where aisle containment will be Three widths available: 23.6” (600 mm), 29.5” (750 mm) and employed. 31.5” (800 mm). The cabinet includes equipment mounting rails b. Select the shock pallet when cabinets will be pre-loaded spaced for 19” EIA (482.6 mm). with equipment at a factory integration site prior to final 3rd Digit - Depth shipment to the customer site. Note that the cabinet’s load Four depths: 31.5” (800 mm), 39.4” (1000 mm), 41.3” (1050 mm) capacity is limited to 2000 lb (907.2 kg) when equipment is and 47.2” (1200 mm). Doors add approximately 1” (25 mm) to shipped installed using shock pallet. depth. c. Select high density cabinets with Vertical Exhaust Ducts 4th Digit - Side Panels when deploying in facilities with isolated return air Select the number of side panels based on your requirements. containment. 2-35 ® GF-SERIES GLOBALFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Standard Cabinets: • Supports front-to-rear airflow for hot aisle/cold aisle or enclosed aisle environments • 30 frame sizes available - three heights, three widths, four depths • Includes a cabinet frame, two pairs of 19”EIA square-punched equipment mounting rails, a top panel, a perforated metal front door, a double perforated metal rear door, swing handle latches, keyed locks, casters, leveling feet, floor attachment brackets and baying kit • Supports 3000 lb (1360 kg) static load on leveling feet; 2250 lb (1020 kg) “rolling” load on casters • Color is black. Height Width Depth Side Panels Configuration in mm U in mm in mm Description Description 1 79.3 2013 42U A 23.6 600 2 39.4 1000 0 No Sides 0 Standard Top Panel/Standard Pallet GF- 2 84.5 2147 45U B 29.5 750 3 41.3 1050 1 One Side 3 89.8 2280 48U 4 47.2 1200 2 Two Sides Height Width Depth Side Panels Configuration in mm U in mm in mm Description Description 1 79.3 2013 42U C 31.5 800 1 31.5 800 0 No Sides 0 Standard Top Panel/Standard Pallet GF- 2 84.5 2147 45U 2 39.4 1000 1 One Side 3 89.8 2280 48U 3 41.3 1050 2 Two Sides 4 47.2 1200 Standard Cabinets with Shock Pallet: • Ship the cabinet with equipment pre-installed for faster equipment deployment • 8 frame sizes available - two heights, two widths, two depths • Includes a cabinet frame, two pairs of 19”EIA square-punched equipment mounting rails, a top panel, a perforated metal front door, a double perforated metal rear door, swing handle latches, keyed locks, casters, leveling feet, floor attachment brackets and baying kit • Ships on a shock pallet with reusable carton and wood unloading ramp • Supports 2000 lb (907.2 kg) shipping load on shock pallet • Supports 3000 lb (1360 kg) static load on leveling feet; 2250 lb (1020 kg) “rolling” load on casters • Color is black. Height Width Depth Side Panels Configuration in mm U in mm in mm Description Description 1 79.3 2013 42U A 23.6 600 3 41.3 1050 0 No Sides 3 Standard Top Panel/Shock Pallet GF- 2 84.5 2147 45U B 29.5 750 4 47.2 1200 1 One Side 2 Two Sides High-Density Cabinets with Vertical Exhaust Duct: • Isolates hot exhaust air; supports front-to-top airflow with the Vertical Exhaust Duct • 18 frame sizes to choose from - three heights, three widths, two depths • Includes a cabinet frame, two pairs of 19”EIA square-punched equipment mounting rails, a Vertical Exhaust Duct and top panel, a Bottom Panel, a perforated metal front door, a solid metal rear door, a rear door sealing kit, swing handle latches, keyed locks, casters, leveling feet, floor attachment brackets and baying kit • Supports 3000 lb (1360 kg) static load on leveling feet; 2250 lb (1020 kg) “rolling” load on casters • Color is black. Height Width Depth Side Panels Configuration in mm U in mm in mm Description Description Vertical Exhaust Duct, 20”- 34”H 1 79.3 2013 42U A 23.6 600 3 41.3 1050 0 No Sides 1 (508 mm - 863 mm)/Standard Pallet Vertical Exhaust Duct, 34”- 60”H GF- 2 84.5 2147 45U B 29.5 750 4 47.2 1200 1 One Side 2 (863 mm - 1523 mm)/Standard Pallet 3 89.8 2280 48U C 31.5 800 2 Two Sides 2-36 ® GF-SERIES GLOBALFRAME CABINET SYSTEM GF-Series GlobalFrame Accessories Airflow Director Attaches to the cabinet frame and redirects exhaust airflow from servers mounted near the bottom of the cabinet towards the top of the cabinet. Use in cabinet with high heat load (>15kW) using a Vertical Exhaust Duct top panel. Bottom Panel Prevents airflow from entering the bottom of the cabinet. Bottom panel has 25150-702 one 8.8”W x 3.9”D (224 mm x 99 mm) brush-sealed cable access port located near the rear center of the panel. Bottom Panel is included with High-Density Cabinets with Vertical Exhaust Duct. Rail Seal Kit Use on the cabinet’s front pair of equipment mounting rails to create a front/rear (cold/hot) airflow barrier within the cabinet. Each kit includes four half-heights panels, edge seal and installation hardware. Each panel has three round 2.8” (71 mm) diameter cable grommets that align with cable openings in the mounting rail. 25130-7XX Brushed Side Panel Includes two half-height solid side panels to cover one side of a cabinet. Each half-height panel has four 8.8”H x 3.9”W (224 mm x 99 mm) brush-sealed cable access ports, one per corner, a single locking latch and a connection point for a grounding and bonding strap. Select the side panel to match the height and depth of the cabinet. Part Number Shipping Cabinet Width Description Weight lb (kg) 600 mm W 750 mm W 800 mm W 25150-701 25150-702 25150-702 Airflow Director 8 (3.6) Bottom Panel (Cabinet Depth) N/A N/A 25130-708 800 mm Cabinets 19 (8.6) 25130-701 25130-705 25130-709 1000 mm Cabinets 23 (10.4) 25250-70X 25130-702 25130-706 25130-710 1050 mm Cabinets 24 (10.9) 25130-703 25130-707 25130-711 1200 mm Cabinets 27 (12.2) Rail Seal Kit (Cabinet Height) N/A 25250-700 25252-700 For 42U Cabinet 21 (9.5) N/A 25250-701 25252-701 For 45U Cabinet 22 (10.0) N/A 25250-702 25252-702 For 48U Cabinet 23 (10.4) Brushed Side Panel (Cabinet Depth) 42U 45U 48U 25037-700 25037-704 25037-708 800 mm Cabinets 38 (17.2) 25037-701 25037-705 25037-709 1000 mm Cabinets 47 (21.3) 25037-702 25037-706 25037-710 1050 mm Cabinets 49 (22.2) 25037-703 25037-707 25037-711 1200 mm Cabinets 55 (24.9) 25037-7XX Color is Black. Shipping Weights are for 800 mm part numbers. 2-37 ® GF-SERIES GLOBALFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Cable Port Brush Kit Use to cover the large cable knockouts in the cabinet’s top panel. Each kit includes two 3.9” x 8.8”D (99 mm x 224 mm) brush-sealed grommets that snap into the opening on the top panel once the large 4.5”W x 9.0”D (114 mm x 228 mm) knockout is removed. The split design also allows the grommet to be temporarily removed to pass large power plugs through the knockout when power is added or removed. 25190-001 Cable Port Grommet Kit Use kit to cover the round cable knockouts in the cabinet’s top panel. Each kit contains two 2.8” (71 mm) diameter grommets that snap into the openings in the top panel once the knockout is removed. The standard and fan top panels have four round knockouts and four openings that include grommets. Snap-In Grommet Kit 35021-000 Kit includes fourteen 5.5”H x 3.25”W (140 mm x 83 mm) grommets that protect cables from the edges of the openings in the equipment mounting rails in 750 mm and 800 mm wide cabinets. Each rail has seven openings. The Snap-In Grommet Kit cannot be used with the Rail Seal Kit (P/Ns 25250-70X or 25252- 70X). Snap-In Grommet and Plug Kit 25107-001 Includes 14 individual snap-in grommets with covers that seal the openings in 750 mm and 800 mm wide equipment mounting rails. Each rail has seven openings. Use one kit to seal all of the openings on the front pair of equipment mounting rails. The Snap-In Grommet and Plug Kit is an alternative to the Rail Seal Kit (P/N 25250-70X or 25252-70X). Baying Seal Kit The Baying Seal Kit is used to seal the gap between 600 mm cabinets (of the 25108-001 same height and depth) when they are centered on 24” (610 mm) floor tiles. The kit includes six snap-in plastic seals; three that seal the front gap and three that seal the rear gap. Baying Seal Kit works with or without side panels. No hardware required. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 25242-701 25190-001 Cable Port Brush Kit, Pack of 2 2 (0.9) 35021-000 Cable Port Grommet Kit, Pack of 2 2 (0.9) Snap-In Grommet Kit, 25107-001 2 (0.9) For 750 mm & 800 mm Cabinets Snap-In Grommet & Plug Kit, 25108-001 2 (0.9) For 750 mm & 800 mm Cabinets 25242-700 Baying Seal Kit, For 42U Cabinets 5 (2.3) 25242-701 Baying Seal Kit, For 45U Cabinets 5 (2.3) 25242-702 Baying Seal Kit, For 48U Cabinets 5 (2.3) Color is Black. 2-38 ® GF-SERIES GLOBALFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Cable Lashing Bracket Kit Attaches to the cabinet frame and provides multiple tie points for cables. Secure cables to the bracket using Saf-T-Grip Straps or cable ties. The kit includes two half-height brackets with U-shaped cable tie points and installation hardware. Select from two widths. The 5” (125 mm) wide version has two vertical columns of tie points for cables and requires a 6.75” (172 mm) rail setback. The 10” (250 25221-70X mm) wide version has three vertical columns of tie points for cables and requires an 11.75” (299 mm) rail setback. The 10”W (250 mm) cannot be used in 800 mm deep cabinets. Cable Ring Kit The Cable Ring Kit includes eight plastic D-rings that snap onto the equipment mounting rails inside the cabinet creating a vertical pathway for cables. Each rail can support eight rings. Select the kit to match cabinet width. There are two ring sizes (depths) for the 750 mm and 800 mm wide cabinets. Mounting rails in the 600 mm wide cabinet must be setback a minimum of 5.5” (140 mm) to provide clearance for the cable rings. Mounting rails in the 750 mm and 800 mm wide cabinets must be setback a minimum of 5.0" (127 mm) to provide clearance for medium cable rings and 10.0" (254 mm) to provide clearance for large cable rings. Cable Ring Kit cannot be used with Vertical Cable Managers (P/Ns 25110- 70X, 25120-70X) or Rail Seal Kit (P/Ns 25250-70X, 25252-70X). 25104-001 Full Height PDU Bracket Attaches to the cabinet frame and provides two attachment points for vertical power distribution units (PDUs) or power strips for cabinets and multiple tie points for power cables. Use with CPI vertical PDUs for cabinets that are 68.5”H 25105-002 (1740 mm) or 70.5”H (1791 mm). Tool-less PDU attachment points are located 64.75” (1645 mm) and 61.25” (1556 mm) apart. The bracket supports two 2.4”W (61 mm) or narrower PDUs or power strips side-by-side or one 4.9”W (124 mm) PDU. The bracket is 5.2” (132 mm) wide and requires a 7.5 inch (191 mm) rail setback. 25106-001 Shipping Part Description W eight Number lb (kg) 25221-701 5”W (125 mm) Bracket for 42U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 25221-702* 10”W (250 mm) Bracket for 42U Cabinet 16 (7.3) 25221-703 5”W (125 mm) Bracket for 45U Cabinet 17 (7.7) 25221-704* 10”W (250 mm) Bracket for 45U Cabinet 17 (7.7) 25221-705 5”W (125 mm) Bracket for 48U Cabinet 18 (8.2) 25221-706* 10”W (250 mm) Bracket for 48U Cabinet 18 (8.2) 25104-001 Cable Ring Kit, 600 mm Cabinets 2 (0.9) 25105-002 Medium Cable Ring Kit, 750 mm Cabinets 3 (1.4) 25141-70X 25106-002 Medium Cable Ring Kit, 800 mm Cabinets 3 (1.4) 25105-001 Large Cable Ring Kit, 750 mm Cabinets 5 (2.3) 25106-001 Large Cable Ring Kit, 800 mm Cabinets 8 (2.7) 25141-700 Full Height PDU Bracket, For 42U Cabinets 10 (4.5) 25141-701 Full Height PDU Bracket, For 45U Cabinets 10 (4.5) 25141-702 Full Height PDU Bracket, For 48U Cabinets 11 (5.0) Color is Black. *Cannot be used in 800 mm deep cabinets. 2-39 ® GF-SERIES GLOBALFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Cable Ring Manager A vertical cable manager with plastic D-rings that attaches directly to the cabinet’s frame independent of the equipment mounting rails and is available for 750 mm and 800 mm wide cabinets. The manager includes two half-height panels, eight plastic D-rings and installation hardware. Each panel for the 750 mm wide cabinet includes four 4.5"W x 4.7"D (114 mm x 119 mm) medium or 4.5”W x 9.8”D (114 mm x 249 mm) large rectangular plastic D-rings to manage cables and three 2.8” (71 mm) diameter round edge protected cable pass through ports. Each panel for the 800 mm wide cabinet includes four 5.5"W x 4.7"D (140 mm x 119 mm) medium or 5.5”W x 9.8”D (140 mm x 249 mm) large rectangular plastic D-rings to manage cables and three 5.5”H x 3.25”W (140 mm x 83 mm) rectangular edge protected cable pass through ports with snap-on covers. The managers with medium rings are 5.8"D (150 mm) and require a minimum 6" (153 mm) rail setback; the managers with large rings are 10.9”D (277 mm) and require a 11.5" (293 mm) rail setback. Shipping Part Number Description Weight 750 mm 800 mm lb (kg) 25103-703 25102-703 Medium Rings For 42U Cabinets 13 (5.9) 25103-704 25102-704 Medium Rings For 45U Cabinets 14 (6.4) 25103-703 25102-701 25103-705 25102-705 Medium Rings For 48U Cabinets 15 (6.8) 25103-700 25102-700 Large Rings For 42U Cabinets 15 (6.8) 25103-701 25102-701 Large Rings For 45U Cabinets 16 (7.3) 25103-702 25102-702 Large Rings For 48U Cabinets 17 (7.7) Color is Black. Shipping Weights are for 800 mm part numbers. Vertical Cable Manager Attaches to the cabinet’s equipment mounting rails and provides vertical cable management with plastic T-shaped cable guides and openings that align with each rack-mount space/unit (U) in the cabinet. The manager for the 600 mm wide cabinet includes fingers only and can be used in any cabinet. The manager for the 750 mm or 800 mm wide cabinet is available in two depths with standard or extended fingers and also includes a cover that partially encloses cables. Standard Fingers require a 7” (178 mm) rail setback. Extended Fingers require a 9.25” (235 mm) rail setback. Cannot be used with Cable Ring Kit. Vertical Cable Manager with Standard Fingers Shipping Part Number Description Weight 600 mm 750 mm 800 mm lb (kg) 25110-700 25404-703 25404-706 For 42U Cabinets 15 (6.8) 25110-701 25404-704 25404-707 For 45U Cabinets 16 (7.3) 25110-702 25404-705 25404-708 For 48U Cabinets 16 (7.3) Vertical Cable Manager with Extended Fingers N/A 25120-703 25120-706 For 42U Cabinets 19 (8.6) N/A 25120-704 25120-707 For 45U Cabinets 20 (9.1) 25110-701 25120-703 N/A 25120-705 25120-708 For 48U Cabinets 21 (9.5) Color is Black. Shipping Weights are for 800 mm part numbers. 2-40 ® GF-SERIES GLOBALFRAME CABINET SYSTEM Fan Top Panel Kit Use to replace the standard top panel and provide additional exhaust airflow through the top of the cabinet. Two fan housings are mounted on the bottom of the panel. Each fan housing has two 4.5” (114 mm) diameter fans capable of 100 CFM (170 CMH) each and an IEC C14 connector. The kit includes a detachable 15’L (5 m) power cord with dual C13 connectors for the fan housings and a molded NEMA 5-15P plug (115 VAC) or C14 (230 VAC) connector. Part Number Shipping Description Cabinet Width Weight (Cabinet Depth) lb (kg) 600 mm 750 mm 800 mm 115 VAC Fans, NEMA 5-15P Plug N/A N/A 25088-708 800 mm Cabinet 25 (11.3) 25088-701 25088-705 25088-709 1000 mm Cabinet 29 (13.2) 25088-702 25088-706 25088-710 1050 mm Cabinet 31 (14.1) 25088-703 25088-707 25088-711 1200 mm Cabinet 34 (15.4) 230 VAC Fans, IEC C14 Connector N/A N/A 25088-728 800 mm Cabinet 25 (11.3) 25088-721 25088-725 25088-729 1000 mm Cabinet 29 (13.2) 25088-722 25088-726 25088-730 1050 mm Cabinet 31 (14.1) 25088-723 25088-727 25088-731 1200 mm Cabinet 34 (15.4) Color is Black. Shipping Weights are for 800 mm part numbers. Snap-In Filler Panel Block airflow through open rack-mount spaces to help keep hot air at the back of the cabinet. Snap-In Filler Panels can be used in any 19"W CPI Cabinet that has square-punched equipment mounting rails. Shipping Part Description Weight Number H x W (in) lb (kg) 34537-000 1U x 19, Black, 1 Each 1 (0.5) 34538-000 2U x 19, Black, 1 Each 2 (0.9) 34537-001 1U x 19, Black, 6 Each 4 (1.8) 34538-001 2U x 19, Black, 6 Each 4 (1.8) 34537-002 1U x 19, Black, 50 each 22 (10.0) 34538-002 2U x 19, Black, 50 each 35 (15.9) Additional accessories available, visit www.chatsworth.com for more information. 2-41 ® M-SERIES MEGAFRAME CABINET SYSTEM ® The M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet Top Panel with 6 edge-protected punch-out ports provides cabling access wherever needed Attach 12” (300 mm) cable runway easily with pre-drilled Optional fan kit provides 400 attachment holes CFM of airflow through cabinet Quick and easy assembly with unique patented corner attachment bracket Lightweight aluminum construction provides strength, durability, easy handling and lower shipping costs Adjustable (front to rear) vertical mounting rails allow use as a standard four-post cabinet or two Fully adjustable side-mounted channel rack cabling ring sections provide unsurpassed vertical cable Rack-mount units marks management without protruding simplify installation into usable space Inch markers on horizontal Extruded horizontal mounting rail mounting rails ensure proper provides support for equipment alignment of vertical mounting mounting rails and cabling ring rails panels Standard door options include Wide variety of mounting rails smoked plexiglass or vented front with Universal EIA 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” door and solid aluminum rear (15.9 mm -15.9 mm - 12.7 mm) door; options include vented alternating hole pattern to meet plexiglass and perforated metal all equipment installation doors requirements “Quick release” attachment for Adjustable leveling feet front and rear doors provides provide stability easy assembly and equipment installation; door can be Open base allows cable entry, positioned to open to the right exit and ventilation or left side Available in up to 39” (990 mm) Static load rating of Solid aluminum side panels 19” or 23” Standard EIA 2000 lb (907.2 kg) are easy-to-remove and usable depth, many heights rack width locking 2-42 ® M-SERIES MEGAFRAME CABINET ® M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet 72”, 78” and 84” (1830 mm, 1980 mm and 2130 mm) ® The M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet System supports a vast array of potential applications. The cabinet is available in a variety of heights, widths and depths to meet the most stringent demands. Also, the M-Series Cabinet System allows the user to select mounting rails to accommodate today’s variety of rack-mount equipment. Specifications: • Available in three heights; 72”, 78” and 84” (1830 mm, 1980 mm and 2130 mm)* • Available in 19” or 23” EIA standard rack widths • Available in four depths; 24”, 30”, 36” and 39” (610 mm, 760 mm, 910 mm and 990 mm) • Available with or without top or side panels • Side panels are easy-to-remove and locking • Can be ordered with or without doors in a variety of materials and styles • Cabinet is available with a choice of tapped 12-24, square-punched, ® ® Sun or IBM rails • Rack-mount unit marks simplify equipment installation • Hardware for each rail type is included • All vertical mounting rails are available in half heights (also sold separately) • Manufactured from aluminum custom designed for maximum strength and functionality • Bolted construction, delivers fully or partially assembled • Load Rating: 2000 lb (907.2 kg) • UL Listed: File E212094; Category DUXR (US) - Communications - Circuit Accessory Cabinet Includes: • (1) Four-Post Frame (anodized aluminum finish) • (4) Vertical Mounting Rails & Mounting Hardware • (2) Locking, Easy-To-Remove Side Panels • (1) “Quick-Release” Front Door • (1) “Quick-Release” Rear Door • (1) Vented Top Panel & Six Cable Access Ports • (2) Vertical Half Height Cable Managers (wide) • (4) Leveling Feet • (1) PDU Mounting Bracket Kit • (1) Multi-Bay Attachment Hardware Kit • (4) Floor Anchor Clamps • (1) Bag of 50 Each #12-24 Rack Channel Mounting Screws with tapped rails • (1) Bag of 16 each M6 Cage Nuts and Screws, and 25 each #12-24 Cage Nuts and Screws with square-punched rails *Note: Special 8’ (2.4 m) cabinets are available in standard lead times. 2-43 ® M-SERIES MEGAFRAME CABINET ® MegaFrame Cabinet System 72”, 78” and 84” (1830 mm, 1980 mm and 2130 mm) Dimensions: Height Dimensions - in (mm) All Cabinet Styles 72 (1830) 78 (1980) 84 (2130) Usable Vertical Panel Space 38U, 66.50 (1689.1) 42U, 73.50 (1866.9) 45U, 78.75 (2000.3) Overall Height without Leveling Feet 72.02 (1829.3) 78.02 (1981.7) 84.02 (2130.0) Overall Height with Leveling Feet 72.92 (1852.2) 78.92 (2004.6) 84.92 (2157.0) Overall Height with Casters 75.70 (1922.8) 81.70 (2075.2) 87.70 (2230.0) Frame Vertical Opening 67.90 (1724.7) 73.90 (1877.1) 79.90 (2029.5) Width Dimensions - in (mm) Usable Equipment Panel Width 19” EIA 23” EIA Overall Width 27.32 (693.9) 31.32 (795.5) Frame Horizontal Opening 20.20 (513.1) 24.20 (614.7) Depth Dimension Cabinet Only (With Doors) - in (mm) Nominal Cabinet Depth 24 (61) 30 (760) 36 (910) 39 (990) Maximum Mounting Depth - Rail to Rail 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 39.00 (990.6) Overall Depth - Inside Door to Inside Door 27.22 (691.4) 33.22 (843.8) 39.22 (996.2) 42.22 (1072.4) Overall Depth - Door Face to Door Face 27.62 (701.5) 33.62 (853.9) 39.62 (1006.3) 42.62 (1082.5) Depth Dimension Frame Only (Without Doors) - in (mm) Nominal Cabinet Depth 24 (610) 30 (760) 36 (910) 39 (990) Maximum Mounting Depth - Rail to Rail 24.00 (609.6) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) 39.00 (990.6) Overall Depth 26.13 (663.7) 32.13 (816.1) 38.13 (968.5) 41.13 (1044.7) Shipping Weights - lb (kg) All Cabinet Styles - in (mm) 72 (1830) 78 (1980) 84 (2130) Minimum 152 (68.9) 152 (68.9) 155 (70.3) Maximum 251 (113.9) 262 (118.8) 287 (130.2) 2-44 ® M-SERIES MEGAFRAME CABINET Part Number Configurator When ordering an M-Series Cabinet, the part number is always preceded by the letter M. Use the part number matirx below to configure your M-Series Cabinet. Choose the Width, Height, Depth, Cabinet Style, Color, Door, and Shipping Option. Example Cabinet Part Number: M1221-112 M W H D S - C D O 2. Width 8. Shipping Option in 1 Knocked Down 19 1 2 Assembled 23 2 7. Doors 3. Height 0 No front or rear doors in mm Cabinet Style 1 Plexiglass front/metal rear 84 2130 0 78 1980 1 2 Metal front/Metal rear 3 72 1830 2 Vented plexiglass front/perforated metal rear 4 Perforated metal front/perforated metal rear 4. Depth (Perforated metal doors are 63% open for high airflow) in mm 24 610 2 3 6. Color 3 30 760 1 Gray 39 990 4 2 White 36 910 5 7 Black 5. Cabinet Style 0 Tapped rails, top & side panels 1 Tapped rails, top & no side panels 1 2 Tapped rails, no top or side panels (frame only) 3 Square-punched rails, top & sides 4 Square-punched rails, top, no sides 1 5 Square-Punched rails, no top or side panels (frame only) Frame Only Style 2 D Sun rails , top & side panels 2 E Sun rails , top & no side panels 2 1 F Sun rails , no top or side panels (frame only) 2 G IBM rails , top & side panels 2 H IBM rails , top & no side panels 2 1 J IBM rails , no top or side panels (frame only) Notes: 1. Frame only style cannot be ordered with doors 2. Server rail styles are only available on cabinets 36” (910 mm) or 39” (990 mm) in depth. 3. Color refers to mounting rails and side panels and metal/perforated metal door panels. Frame is silver-colored anodized aluminum. For further assistance call 800-834-4969. 2-45 ® M-SERIES MEGAFRAME CABINET ® 48” (1220 mm) M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet ® The 48”H (1220 mm) M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet is designed for space conscious customers who demand value. The cabinet is available in a variety of widths and depths. Multiple cabinets can be mounted side-by-side using optional baying hardware. The cabinet is available in white, black or gray powder-coated finish. The cabinet is also available in a frame only configuration. Note: When ordering a frame only configuration, the mounting rails have a powder-coated finish based on your color selection. The frame is always silver- colored anodized aluminum. Specifications: • Provides 25U of rack-mount space • Available in 19” EIA or 23” EIA standard rack widths • Available in three depths; 24”, 30” and 36” (610 mm, 760 mm and 910 mm) • Load Rating: 2000 lb (907.2 kg) Part Number Configurator When ordering an M-Series Cabinet, the part number is always preceded by the letter M. Use the part number matirx below to configure your M-Series Cabinet. Choose the Width, Height, Depth, Cabinet Style, Color, Door, and Shipping Option. Example Cabinet Part Number: M2530-112 M W H D S C D O - 2. Width 8. Shipping Option in 1 Knocked Down 19 1 2 Assembled 23 2 7. Doors 3. Height 0 No front or rear doors in mm 1 Plexiglass front/metal rear 48 1220 5 2 Metal front/Metal rear 3 Vented plexiglass front/perforated metal rear Cabinet Style 4. Depth 4 Perforated metal front/perforated metal rear in mm (Perforated metal doors are 63% open for high airflow) 24 610 2 3 30 760 2 6. Color 36 910 5 1 Gray 2 White 7 Black 5. Cabinet Style 0 Tapped rails, top & side panels 1 Tapped rails, top & no side panels 1 2 Tapped rails, no top or side panels (frame only) 3 Square-punched rails, top & sides 4 Square-punched rails, top, no sides 1 5 Square-Punched rails, no top or side panels (frame only) Notes: 1. Frame only style cannot be ordered with doors Frame Only Style 2. Color refers to mounting rails and side panels and metal/perforated metal door panels. Frame is silver-colored anodized aluminum. For further assistance call 800-834-4969. 2-46 ® C-SERIES SLIMFRAME CABINET ® C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet System ® The C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet System is an ideal storage solution for EIA standard 19” rack-mountable equipment that fits on a standard, 24” (610 mm) access floor tile and provides up to 43U of space. The cabinet can bay to any existing MegaFrame to meet the demand for data storage expansion. Multiple SlimFrame Cabinets bay together by selecting variations without side panels and using the included Multi-Bay Attachment Hardware Kit. Two cable management solutions are available for the SlimFrame. CPI's unique Narrow Vertical Cable Manager is included with each cabinet, or choose the larger vertical cable manager, P/N 12465, for greater capacity when baying two or more SlimFrame Cabinets. Specifications: • Available in three heights; 72”, 78” and 84” (1830 mm, 1980 mm and 2130 mm) • Available in 19” EIA rack width • Available in three depths; 22”, 30” and 36” (560 mm, 760 mm and 910 mm) • Available with or without top or side panels • Side panels are easy-to-remove and locking • Can be ordered with or without doors in a variety of materials and styles • Cabinet is available with your choice of tapped 12-24, square-punched, ® ® Sun or IBM rails • Rack-mount unit marks simplify equipment installation • Hardware for each rail type is included • All vertical mounting rails are available in half heights (also sold separately) • Manufactured from aluminum custom designed for maximum strength and functionality • Bolted construction, delivers fully or partially assembled • Load Rating: 2000 lb (907.2 kg) Cabinet Includes: Requires only 24” (610 mm) of floor space! • (1) Four-Post Frame (anodized aluminum finish) • (4) Vertical Mounting Rails & Mounting Hardware • (2) Locking, Easy-To-Remove Side Panels • (1) “Quick-Release” Front Door • (1) “Quick-Release” Rear Door • (1) Vented Top Panel with Six Cable Access Ports • (2) Vertical Half Height Cable Managers (narrow) • (4) Leveling Feet • (1) PDU Mounting Bracket Kit • (1) Multi-Bay Attachment Hardware Kit • (4) Floor Anchor Clamps • (1) Bag of 50 Each #12-24 Rack Channel Mounting Screws with tapped rails • (1) Bag of 16 Each M6 Cage Nuts and Screws and 25 Each #12-24 Cage Nuts and Screws with square-punched rails 2-47 ® C-SERIES SLIMFRAME CABINET ® C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet System Dimensions Height Dimensions - in (mm) All Cabinet Styles 72 (1830) 78 (1980) 84 (2130) Usable Vertical Panel Space 37U 40U 43U Overall Height without Leveling Feet 72.00 (1828.8) 78.00 (1981.2) 84.00 (2133.6) Overall Height with Leveling Feet 72.90 (1851.7) 78.90 (2004.1) 84.90 (2156.5) Overall Height with Casters 75.38 (1914.7) 81.38 (2067.1) 87.38 (2219.5) Frame Vertical Opening 64.88 (1648.0) 70.88 (1800.4) 76.88 (1952.8) Width Dimensions - in (mm) Usable Equipment Panel Width 19” EIA Overall Width 24 (610) Frame Horizontal Opening 19.84 (500) Depth Dimension Frame Only ( With Doors) - in (mm) Nominal Cabinet Depth 22 (560) 30 (760) 36 (910) Maximum Mounting Depth - Rail to Rail 21.84 (554.7) 30.00 (762.0) 36.00 (914.4) Overall Depth - Frame Only 23.96 (608.6) 32.12 (815.8) 38.12 (968.2) Overall Depth - Door Face to Door Face 25.46 (646.7) 33.62 (853.9) 39.62 (1006.3) Shipping Weights - lb (kg) All Cabinet Styles - in (mm) 72 (1830) 78 (1980) 84 (2130) Minimum 142 (64.4) 141 (64.0) 149 (67.6) Maximum 233 (105.7) 249 (112.9) 250 (113.4) 2-48 ® C-SERIES SLIMFRAME CABINET Part Number Configurator When ordering an C-Series Cabinet, the part number is always preceded by the letter C. Use the part number matirx below to configure your C-Series Cabinet. Choose the Width, Height, Depth, Cabinet Style, Color, Door, and Shipping Option. Example Cabinet Part Number: C1133-732 C W H D S - C D O 2. Width 8. Shipping Option in 1 Knocked Down 19 1 2 Assembled 3. Height 7. Doors in mm 0 No front or rear doors 84 2130 0 Cabinet Style 1 Plexiglass front/metal rear 78 1980 1 2 Metal front/Metal rear 72 1830 2 3 Vented plexiglass front/perforated metal rear 4 Perforated metal front/perforated metal rear 4. Depth (Perforated metal doors are 63% open for high airflow) in mm 30 760 3 3 6. Color 5 36 910 1 Gray 22 560 6 2 White 7 Black 5. Cabinet Style 0 Tapped rails, top & side panels 1 Tapped rails, top & no side panels 1 2 Tapped rails, no top or side panels (frame only) 3 Square-punched rails, top & sides 4 Square-punched rails, top, no sides 1 5 Square-Punched rails, no top or side panels (frame only) 2 Frame Only Style D Sun rails , top & side panels 2 E Sun rails , top & no side panels 2 1 F Sun rails , no top or side panels (frame only) 2 G IBM rails , top & side panels 2 H IBM rails , top & no side panels 2 1 J IBM rails , no top or side panels (frame only) Notes: 1. Frame only style cannot be ordered with doors 2. Server rail styles are only available on cabinets 36” (910 mm) or 39” (990 mm) in depth. 3. Color refers to mounting rails and side panels and metal/perforated metal door panels. Frame is silver-colored anodized aluminum. For further assistance call 800-834-4969. 2-49 1 6. Color 1 Gray 2 White 7 Black E-SERIES ISP CO LOCATION CABINET SYSTEM E-Series ISP Co Location Cabinet Three separate, secure compartments in 7’ (2.1 m) cabinet provide 14 usable rack-mount space for equipment mounting in each compartment. The E-Series ISP Co Location Cabinet is available in standard 30” and 36” (760 mm and 910 mm) usable mounting depths to accommodate most file server variations. The internal width is 19” or 23”. The cabinet features patented self-squaring construction to allow shipment in Optional door- both fully assembled and partially assembled configurations. A patented, mounted fan keeps equipment cool. secure, 3-channel vertical cable raceway provides security for both data and power to each compartment. The cable raceway accommodates either overhead or access floor cable access. Separate power distribution to each compartment protects each co-locator’s equipment from power surges or outages caused by adjacent co-locators. Front and rear doors are lockable with optional keysets unique for each compartment. Each of the three compartments includes a separate vertical power strip (see bottom of page). Each compartment includes a 125 VAC, E-Series Cabinets feature an optional door mounted rear fan that draws in 15 Amp rated power ambient air and expels heated air for effective temperature maintenance. For strip. optimum efficiency when using the fan, the rear door features a solid (rather than perforated) design. Load Rating: 2000 lb (907.2 kg) Part Number Configurator When ordering an E-Series Cabinet, the part number is always preceded by the letter E. Use the part number matirx below to configure your E-Series Cabinet. Choose the Width, Height, Depth, Cabinet Style, Color, Door, and Shipping Option. Example Cabinet Part Number: E1051-732 E W H D S C D O - 2. Width/Rails 8. Shipping Option in 1 Knocked Down 19, Tapped 1 2 Assembled 23, Tapped 2 7. Doors 3 19, Square-punched Cabinet Style 3 Vented plexiglass front/perforated metal rear 23, Square-punched 4 4 Perforated metal front/perforated metal rear 3. Height Perforated metal doors are 63% open for high airflow in mm 84 2130 0 (3), 14U compartments 4. Depth in mm 5. Cabinet Style/Accessories 3 30 760 0 Side panels, no fan, standard locks 36 910 5 1 Side panels, fan, standard locks 2 Side panels, no fan, custom-keyed locks 3 Side panels, fan, custom-keyed locks Notes: 4 Baying, no fan, standard locks Color refers to mounting rails and side panels and 5 Baying, fan, standard locks metal/perforated metal door panels. Frame is silver-colored anodized aluminum. For further 6 Baying, no fan, custom-keyed locks assistance visit www.chatsworth.com. 7 Baying, fan, custom-keyed locks 2-50 ® SEISMIC FRAME CABINET SYSTEM ® Seismic Frame Cabinet System Rated Zone 4 compliant to Bellcore GR-63-CORE for Network Equipment ® Building Systems (NEBS), Section 4.4.1.1, the Seismic Frame Cabinet System is designed to withstand the seismic stress of an 8.3 Richter scale earthquake. Offered in a 84”H x 19”W x 36”D (2130 mm x 910 mm) cabinet solution, the aluminum outer frame provides the sound structural environment necessary for sensitive Information Technology (IT) hardware components. • Standard 19” EIA rack width • Features square-punched mounting rails with rack-mount unit marks • Aluminum outer frame with steel inner frame delivers maximum strength with minimum weight • Seismic bracing kits and a full line of structural enhancement products are available to support site-specific structural requirements • Internal cable management provides flexibility for wire routing and fits on-site customization • Adjustable front to rear vertical mounting rails allow use as a standard four-post cabinet or two-channel rack • Load Rating: 800 lb (362.9 kg) seismic 84”H x 19” W x 36”D (2130 mm x 910 mm ) Seismic Cabinet Part Cabinet Door Style Number Front Rear 11972-X02 No Front No Rear 11972-X12 Plexiglass Metal 11972-X22 Metal Metal Vented Plexiglass Perforated Metal 11972-X32 11972-X42 Perforated Metal Perforated Metal 84”H x 19” W x 36”D (2130 mm x 910 mm) Without Side Panels Cabinet Door Style Part Number Front Rear 11973-X02 No Front No Rear 11973-X12 Plexiglass Metal 11973-X22 Metal Metal 11973-X32 Vented Plexiglass Perforated Metal Closeup of reinforced inner frame 11973-X42 Perforated Metal Perforated Metal X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Frame is anodized aluminum Cabinet Dimensions Usable Height 77.88” (1978.2 mm) or 43U 84”H x 19” W x 36”D (2130 mm x 910 mm) Frame Only** Usable Depth 36” (910 mm) Usable Width 19” Part Number Cabinet Door Style 11974-X02 Frame Only Overall Height 84.13” (2136.9 mm) Overall Depth (w/doors) 39.62” (1006.3 mm) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. **Frame is anodized aluminum Overall Width 27.32” (693.9 mm) Shipping Weight 286 lb Min / 376 lb Max (129.7 kg) / (170.6 kg) 2-51 THERMAL MANAGEMENT Thermal Management For Cabinet & Enclosure Systems The biggest challenge in today’s data center is thermal management, which is no surprise considering the average heat load generated per equipment cabinet has doubled since 2000. Creating a properly configured cabinet that works with your data center’s cooling system to control airflow and maximize cooling effectiveness is vital to success. Not only is it important to create a properly configured cabinet, but arranging cabinets in a hot aisle/cold aisle layout enhances thermal conditions and establishes one-way airflow thought the cabinet space. CPI provides a wide range of innovative thermal management solutions that are designed to channel cool air to the front of equipment cabinets where it is needed most. Our most recent approach to cooling the data ® center involves CPI Passive Cooling Solutions. This solution allows customers to reclaim control over airflow so it can be directed where it is needed, eliminating bypass and re-circulation of hot exhaust air and the formation of hot spots. ® HotLok Snap-In Filler Panels The HotLok Snap-In Filler Panels attach to 19” EIA-310-D and EIA/ECA-310-E compliant square-punched or threaded equipment mounting rails. Universal panels fit .375 inch (9.5 mm) square-punched equipment mounting rails or M5/M6/#12-24 tapped equipment mounting rails. The cantilevered sealing vanes and snap-spring design create a 99 percent effective seal between adjacent panels and equipment blocking most airflow between panels. Optional built-in temperature strips have a color-coded scale to provide a quick visual indicator for hot spots. The scale shows the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) recommended envelope range as blue; the allowable environmental envelope range as yellow and hot spots as red. Shipping Part Description Weight Number H x W (in) lb (kg) 14171-310 1U x 19, Black Panel, Pack of 10 3 (1.4) 1417X-310 14172-310 2U x 19, Black Panel, Pack of 5 3 (1.4) 1U x 19, Black Panel with Temperature Strip, 14171-320 4 (1.8) Pack of 10 2U x 19, Black Panel with Temperature Strip, 14172-320 3 (1.4) Pack of 5 1417X-320 Identify Temperatures within a particular range Accurate within +/- 1°C 2-52 THERMAL MANAGEMENT ® KoldLok Raised Floor Grommet Reduce bypass airflow, improve data center cooling and block unsealed cable ® holes with KoldLok Raised Floor Grommets. Two styles of grommets are available: KoldLok Wave™ or the original KoldLok brush grommets. Wave grommets use a solid, flexible patent-pending wave shaped thermoplastic elastomer material to form a tight seal around cables which blocks 98 percent to 100 percent of air loss. Brush grommets use layers of brush filaments made of premium grade Nylon 6, not styrene, ABS or polypropylene, to form a seal 13870-001 around cables which blocks 92 percent to 100 percent of air loss. Both with sealing materials resist breaking, deformation and wear for repeated use. 13873-001 Easy to install, KoldLok Raised Floor Grommets can be positioned in the middle or along the edge of floor tiles, allowing large bundles of cables and large power connectors to effortlessly pass through the opening. ™ • KoldLok Wave Raised Floor Grommet increases sealing effectiveness with a solid, flexible wave shaped thermoplastic elastomer material that is over 2 molded to the grommet frame. Offers over 45 in of usable cable area, durable, impact-resistant ABS frame with optional cover for increased safety. 13571-001 • Integral Grommet is a flush-mount design with a sleeve that protects cables as they pass through the cut in the floor tile. Two styles: Integral Grommet (one-piece) and Split Integral Grommet (two-piece) • Surface-Mount Grommet is two-piece and covers an existing cable access hole. Three sizes available: Surface-Mount, Large Surface-Mount and Extra- Large Surface-Mount. • Extended Grommet is three-piece and covers a long, narrow slot like those used along the edges of rooms. Available in two sizes: Extended 3” (76 mm) Brush Grommet and Extended 6” (152 mm) Brush Grommet 13576-001 • Mini Grommet is a smaller flush-mount design with a sleeve that protects cables as they pass through the cut in the floor tile Grommets are now patented. Part Number Shipping Description Weight 1 Each 10 Each lb (kg) 13870-001 13870-002 KoldLok Wave™ Split Integral Grommet 11 (5.0) 13873-001 13873-002 Cover, For KoldLok Wave™ Split Integral Grommet 6 (2.7) 13676-001 13571-001 13571-002 Integral Grommet 18 (8.2) 13671-001 13671-002 Split Integral Grommet 20 (9.1) 13576-001 13576-002 Surface-Mount Grommet 21 (9.5) 13676-001 13676-002 Large Surface-Mount Grommet 43 (19.5) 13677-001 13677-002 Extra-Large Surface-Mount Grommet 43 (19.5) 13674-001 13674-002 Extended 3" (76 mm) Brush Grommet 29 (13.2) 13675-001 13675-002 Extended 6" (152 mm) Brush Grommet 37 (16.8) 13872-001 13872-002 Mini Grommet 5 (2.3) 13675-001 See next page for dimensions 2-53 THERMAL MANAGEMENT Dimensions Overall Size Cable Opening Hole in Floor Part Description Number Height Width Depth Width Depth Width Depth KoldLok Wave™ Split 1-7/8" 11" 9" 7-3/4" 5-7/8" 9-1/4" 6-3/4" 13870-00X Integral Grommet (48 mm) (279 mm) (229 mm) (197 mm) (149 mm) (235 mm) (172 mm) 1-5/8" 11" 8-1/4" 8" 4" 9-1/4" 6-3/4" 13571-00X Integral Grommet (41 mm) (279 mm) (210 mm) (203 mm) (102 mm) (235 mm) (172 mm) 1-5/8" 11" 8-1/4" 8" 4" 9-1/4" 6-3/4" 13671-00X Split Integral Grommet (41 mm) (279 mm) (210 mm) (203 mm) (102 mm) (235 mm) (172 mm) 1-1/8" 11" 8-1/4" 8-1/4" 4" 10" 7-1/4" 13576-00X Surface-Mount Grommet (29 mm) (279 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (102 mm) (254 mm) (184 mm) Large Surface-Mount 1-15/16" 12" 11-3/4" 8-1/4" 4" 10" 9-3/4" 13676-00X (33 mm) (305 mm) (298 mm) (210 mm) (102 mm) (254 mm) (248 mm) Grommet Extra-Large 1-15/16" 12" 15" 8-1/4" 4" 10" 13" 13677-00X Surface-Mount Grommet (33 mm) (305 mm) (381 mm) (210 mm) (102 mm) (254 mm) (330 mm) Extended 3" (76 mm) 1" 24" 4" 22" 2-1/2" 22" 2-1/2" 13674-00X Brush Grommet (25 mm) (610 mm) (102 mm) (559 mm) (64 mm) (559 mm) (64 mm) Extended 6" (152 mm) 1" 24" 7" 22" 5-1/2" 22" 5-1/2" 13675-00X Brush Grommet (25 mm) (610 mm) (178 mm) (559 mm) (140 mm) (559 mm) (140 mm) 1-1/2” 7-11/16” 5-11/16” 5” 2-1/2” 6” 4” 13872-00X Mini Grommet (38 mm) (195 mm) (144 mm) (127 mm) (64 mm) (152 mm) (102 mm) Fan Kit For M-Series MegaFrame The MegaFrame Fan Kit provides optional ventilation and cooling for the cabinet. • Four fans mount on two interchangeable frames to fit cabinet top panel • Grill design and ball-bearing motor offer longer life and quiet operation • Each fan frame has an IEC C-14 power inlet • Includes a detachable 15’L (4.6 m) power cord with a molded plug • Provides up tp 400 CFM of ventilation for cabinet • Can be used on the MegaFrame, SlimFrame and Seismic Frame Cabinets • UL Recognized Shipping Part Weight Description / Color Number lb (kg) Cooling Fan Kit - 400 CFM 12480-701 Black, 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, NEMA 5-15P 6 (2.7) 12480-702 Black, 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, NEMA 6-15P 6 (2.7) Fan Specifications - Each Fan Operating Noise Level Power Operating Airflow Voltage (1 Meter Max) Consumption Frequency 115 VAC 100 CFM 37 dBA 15 Watts 50/60 Hz 230 VAC 100 CFM 37 dBA 15 Watts 50/60 Hz 2-54 THERMAL MANAGEMENT Air Dam Kit, Cabinet Airflow Baffles The Air Dam Kit creates a barrier between the cabinet door and the front of equipment along the top, bottom and sides of the cabinet. When used in combination with perforated front and rear doors, the Air Dam Kit helps to channel cool air to the front of equipment and also helps to prevent the mixing of heated air from the rear of the cabinet with cool air at the front of the cabinet. • Use on M-Series MegaFrame and C-Series SlimFrame Cabinets • 5”D (130 mm) baffles Kit consists of: • (1) Top baffle • (1) Bottom baffle • (4) Small side baffles • (4) Large side baffles • Installation hardware Description Shipping Part H x W Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) For M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet System 13336-X10 84 (2130) x 19 11 (5.0) 13336-X11 78 (1980) x 19 10 (4.5) 13336-X12 72 (1830) x 19 10 (4.5) 13336-X15 48 (1220) x 19 8 (3.6) 13336-X20 84 (2130) x 23 11 (5.0) 13336-X21 78 (1980) x 23 10 (4.5) 13336-X22 72 (1830) x 23 10 (4.5) 13336-X25 48 (1220) x 23 8 (3.6) For C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet System 13336-X10 84 (2130) x 19 11 (5.0) 13336-X11 78 (1980) x 19 10 (4.5) 13336-X12 72 (1830) x 19 10 (4.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 2-55 THERMAL MANAGEMENT Intelligent & Standard Fan Doors The Intelligent Fan Door, when used as the rear door on a cabinet, removes heated air and prevents the build up of heated air inside the cabinet, which can cause equipment to overheat and shut down. Intelligent Fan Door uses a solid-state temperature control to vary fan speed from an ultra quiet low speed at low air temperature through increasingly higher speeds as temperature rises. Peak exhaust airflow can reach 960 CFM. Intelligence allows this system to deliver cooling when and where it's needed while keeping the noise to a minimum. Standard Fan Door using single-speed fans are also available. They provide 100 CFM per fan for a total of 800 CFM. • Use Intelligent Fan Doors on the rear of CPI M-Series MegaFrame and C-Series SlimFrame Cabinets that support rack-mount computer and data storage equipment • Multiple IEC C-14 power connections allow attachment to different circuits for power redundancy (2 connections/4 fans each) Standard Fan Door • 115 VAC/60 Hz fans includes two detachable power cords with IEC C-13 to NEMA 5-15P plugs Intelligent Fan Door MegaFrame & SlimFrame Fan Doors Door Type 13212 Intelligent Fan Doors for MegaFrame 13222 Standard Fan Doors for MegaFrame 13213 Intelligent Fan Doors for SlimFrame 13223 Standard Fan Doors for SlimFrame Color 1 Gray 2 White 7 Black Cabinet Width 1 19” Rack-Mount 2 23” Rack-Mount Cabinet Height - in (mm) 0 84 (2130) Overall 1 78 (1980) Overall 2 72 (1830) Overall 5 48 (1220) Overall* 132XX - X X X *Only available for M-Series MegaFrame Cabinets. (1) power connection, 480 CFM (Intelligent), 400 CFM (Standard) 2-56 THERMAL MANAGEMENT Filtered Ventilation System For 30”D ® (760 mm) MegaFrame Cabinets This system has the fans and filters installed at the bottom of the cabinet. Air exhausts through vents in the cabinet top. Equipment may not be mounted in the 2U at the bottom of the cabinet to allow clearance for cabinet intake air. The Standard Filter Cabinet Ventilation System is for the retrofitting of MegaFrame Cabinets with fans already located on the cabinet top. • For 19” and 23”W x 30”D (760 mm) MegaFrames • Air Filter Kit with 115 VAC fans provides up tp 400 CFM and has an attached 15’L (4.6 m) power cord with a NEMA 5-15P plug • Air Filter Kit with 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz fans provides up to 400 CFM and has an attached 15’L (4.6 m) power cord with a NEMA 6-15P plug • Trim-to-fit filter media is readily available from many commercial suppliers or can be ordered from CPI • 3/8” (9.53 mm) thick filter provides 70-75% dust particle retention • One filter provided with each kit Note: This product only available for 30”D (760 mm) MegaFrame Cabinets. Unit 12511-50X will generate 48 db noise level. Air Filter Kit with Fans Shipping Part Number Description Weight lb (kg) 19” 23” Deluxe Filter Cabinet Ventilation System 12511-501 12511-502 Air Filter Kit w/ 115 VAC Fans 22 (10.0) 12510-50X Air Filter Kit w/o Fans 12511-503 12511-504 Air Filter Kit w/ 230 VAC Fans 22 (10.0) Standard Filter Cabinet Ventilation System 12510-501 12510-502 Air Filter Kit w/o Fans 13 (5.9) Accessories - in (mm) 12507-001 12 X 24 X 3/8 (300 x 610 x 9.53) Filter, 6 Pack 1 (0.5) 12505-001 Foam Insert, 2 Pack (for cable ports) 1 (0.5) 2-57 CABLE MANAGEMENT Cable Management For Cabinet & Enclosure Systems CPI offers a variety of optional Cable Management Products for our Cabinet and Enclosure Systems to manage power and network cables. The MegaFrame and SlimFrame Cabinet Systems contain internal cable management space along both sides of the frame. Vertical ring style and enhanced trough style cable managers are available. These cable managers can be attached to the frame and adjusted from front-to-rear, independently of the mounting rails. Vertical Cable Manager Available for 72”, 78” and 84” (1830 mm, 1980 mm and 2130 mm) cabinets. • Includes one pair of sections and eight rings • Large 3.3”W x 6.5”D (84 mm x 165 mm) heavy duty plastic rings with rounded edges organize and protect cable sheaths • Position anywhere along horizontal mounting rails • Use with MegaFrame and Seismic Frame cabinets; use with SlimFrame when bayed without side panels, ships pre-assembled Color Shipping Part Height (pair) Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 12465-X05 Cabling Ring Section, 72 (1830) 7 (3.2) 12465-X06 Cabling Ring Section, 78 (1980) 7 (3.2) 12465-X07 Cabling Ring Section, 84 (2130) 7 (3.2) 14068-701 8 Cable Ring Kit, Black 3 (1.4) Create two cable pathways using one X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Rings are black. manager Narrow Vertical Cable Manager This space-saving manager is ideal in CPI’s SlimFrame C-Series Cabinets. • Rings snap on, making new configurations a simple process • Control radius helps maintain a proper bend radius in cables • Includes (2) vertical mounting brackets, (8) pre-assembled cable rings, (1) control radius and (1) hardware kit Add additional cable rings to the Narrow Vertical Cable Manager. • Contains (8) black 1.40”H x 1.45”W x 4.13”D (36.8 mm x 104.9 mm x 35.6 mm) plastic U-rings • U-ring design allows for easy insertion of cables Shipping Section Dimensions Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) For 84”H (2130 mm) Cabinet, 1 Pair 11809-X00 5 (2.3) 34.7 x 1.75 x 4.13 (881 x 44.5 x 104.9) For 78”H (1980 mm) Cabinet, 1 Pair 11809-X01 5 (2.3) 31.7 x 1.75 x 4.13 (44.5 x 104.9 x 805) For 72”H (1830 mm) Cabinet, 1 Pair Control radius 11809-X02 4 (1.8 ) 28.7 x 1.75 x 4.13 (44.5 x 104.9 x 729) shown attached to bracket 11817-001 8 Narrow Cable Ring Kit, Black 1 (0.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black (Rings are black.) 2-58 CABLE MANAGEMENT Enhanced Cable Managers Enhanced Vertical Managers allow cables to be organized by rack-mount unit, making it easier to trace individual cables during moves, adds and changes. Additionally, two Enhanced Vertical Managers can be connected with Front- to-Back Managers (as shown) to create a complete pathway for cables that connect network switches and computers within the same or adjacent cabinets. Enhanced Vertical Managers are available in two sizes for large and extra- large cable capacities. The narrow version can be added to any MegaFrame Cabinet. The wide version is used in any 23”W MegaFrame Cabinet that has been converted into a 19” rack solution with CPI's 23”-19” Rail Adapter Kit (P/N 10587, page 2-83). Both models include a lockable, snap-on door to Narrow Enhanced protect cables. The matching Front-to-Back Managers (sold in pairs) snap onto the vertical managers and adjust to match the depth of the cable managers. Vertical • Cable openings in Enhanced Vertical Manager allow cables to exit by Cable Manager rack-mount unit; openings have rounded edges to protect cable and will not deform or break • The back side of the Enhanced Vertical Manager has four edge-protected cable pass-through ports for front-to-back cabling • Cover snaps on and opens to the right or left • Front-to-Back Managers adjust in depth to connect the front and rear Enhanced Vertical Manager • Constructed of high-strength lightweight aluminum Shipping Description Part Front-to-Back Manager Weight H x W x D Number lb (kg) in (mm) Enhanced Vertical Manager, Narrow 13171-702 72 x 3.50 x 5.23 (1830 x 88.9 x 132.8) 9 (4.1) 13171-701 78 x 3.50 x 5.23 (1980 x 88.9 x 132.8) 10 (4.5) 13171-700 84 x 3.50 x 5.23 (2130 x 88.9 x 132.8) 11 (5.0) Enhanced Vertical Manager, Wide 13170-702 72 x 4.75 x 8.77 (1830 x 120.7 x 222.8) 11 (5.0) 13170-701 78 x 4.75 x 8.77 (1980 x 120.7 x 222.8) 12 (5.4) 13170-700 84 x 4.75 x 8.77 (2130 x 120.7 x 222.8) 13 (5.9) Front-to-Back Horizontal Manager, Narrow 13169-701 2.38 x 1.74 (60.5 x 44.2), 2 each 3 (1.4) Front-to-Back Horizontal Manager, Wide 13168-701 2.38 x 3.77 (60.5 x 95.8), 2 each 2 (0.9) Shown: Shown: (2) 13171-700 (2) 13170-700 (2) 13169-701 (2) 13168-701 2-59 SHELVES Fixed Shelf Use fixed shelves to support equipment without rack-mounted brackets such as modems, CPUs, small power supplies, monitors, etc. Shelves mount to the Universal EIA 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm -15.9 mm -12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern of the four vertical mounting rails. Three depths are offered in 18”, 24” and 29” (460 mm, 610 mm and 740 mm) to provide clearance for cables, ventilation, power strips, etc. Shelves have adjustable mounting depths of 13” to 24” (330 mm to 610 mm) for the 18” (460 mm) shelf, 17” to 28” (430 mm to 710 mm) for the 24” (610 mm) shelf and 24” to 38” (610 mm to 970 mm) for the 29” (740 mm) shelf. Available in vented and non-vented styles. Vented shelves are designed to optimize airflow through cabinet. Sold individually. • Made of strong, lightweight aluminum • Installs using (8) #12-24 screws (not included) • 19” shelf supports up to 250 lb (113.4 kg) • 23” shelf supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg) • 19” shelves are UL Listed: File E227626; Category NWIN - Accessories Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12336-X19 7 (3.2) 19”W x 18”D (460 mm), Non-Vented 12337-X19 19”W x 18”D (460 mm), Vented 7 (3.2) 12334-X19 19”W x 24”D (610 mm), Non-Vented 9 (4.1) 12335-X19 19”W x 24”D (610 mm), Vented 9 (4.1) 14070-X19 19”W x 29”D (740 mm), Non-Vented 11 (5.0) 14072-X19 19”W x 29”D (740 mm), Vented 10 (4.5) 12336-X23 23”W x 18”D (460 mm), Non-Vented 8 (3.6) 12337-X23 23”W x 18”D (460 mm), Vented 8 (3.6) 12334-X23 23”W x 24”D (610 mm), Non-Vented 10 (4.5) 12335-X23 23”W x 24”D (610 mm), Vented 10 (4.5) 14070-X23 23”W x 29”D (740 mm), Non-Vented 12 (5.4) 14072-X23 11 (5.0) 23”W x 29”D (740 mm), Vented X=Color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 2-60 SHELVES Sliding Shelf These specially designed shelves are suitable for applications where there is a need to access installed equipment for maintenance, upgrading, cleaning, etc. The cable management arm prevents cable damage during shelf extension or retraction. It also maintains proper bend radius of cable. Shelves mount to the four vertical mounting rails. Two depths are offered in 18” and 24” (460 mm and 610 mm) to provide clearance for cables, ventilation, power strips, etc. Shelves have adjustable mounting depths of 14” to 24” (360 mm to 610 mm) for the 18” (460 mm) shelf and 18” to 30” (460 mm to 760 mm) for the 24” (610 mm) shelf. Offered in either vented or non- vented styles. Vented shelves are designed to optimize airflow. Sold individually. • Extends 17” (430 mm) for 18”D (460 mm) shelf and 23” (580 mm) for 24”D (610 mm) • Offered in 18” (460 mm) or 24” (610 mm) depth, vented or non-vented • Made of strong, lightweight aluminum • Shelf locks in closed or fully open position, providing stability • Ships fully assembled, installs using (8) #12-24 screws (not included) • Fits cabinets that are 30”D (760 mm) or less • Accommodates the Monitor Tie-Down Bracket, P/N 11725-X01 • Supports up to 140 lb (63.5 kg) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12338-X19 19”W x 18”D (460 mm), Non-Vented 7 (3.2) 12339-X19 19”W x 18”D (460 mm), Vented 7 (3.2) 12345-X19 19”W x 24”D (610 mm), Non-Vented 9 (4.1) 12346-X19 19”W x 24”D (610 mm), Vented 9 (4.1) 12338-X23 23”W x 18”D (460 mm), Non-Vented 8 (3.6) 12339-X23 23”W x 18”D (460 mm), Vented 8 (3.6) 12345-X23 23”W x 24”D (610 mm), Non-Vented 10 (4.5) 12346-X23 23”W x 24”D (610 mm), Vented 10 (4.5) X=Color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 2-61 SHELVES 32” Deep (810 mm) Sliding Shelf Unlike most storage solutions that may cause kinking, twisting and cutting of cables during shelf extension and retraction, CPI's flexible polycarbonate belt, which fits in the rear undercarriage, solves these problems. This belt easily attaches to either the left or right side of the vertical bracket and contains eight molded releasable clips that accommodate cable bundles measuring up to 1” (25.4 mm) in diameter. • Supports up to 160 lb (72.6 kg) using less than 2U • Locks in the closed position • Open easily with accessible front lock levers providing greater stability while accommodating deep servers • Maximum usable shelf space of up to 32” (810 mm) • Cable management belt provides greater flexibility in the storage of wire bundles • Designed for 36” or 39”D (910 mm or 990 mm) cabinets Shipping Part Weight Style Number lb (kg) 19”W x 32”D (810 mm) Sliding Shelf 11913-X19 Vented 25 (11.3) Flexible cable manager 19”W x 32”D (810 mm) Sliding Shelf 11914-X19 Non-Vented 25 (11.3) 23”W x 32”D (810 mm) Sliding Shelf 11913-X23 Vented 25 (11.3) 23”W x 32”D (810 mm) Sliding Shelf 11914-X23 Non-Vented 25 (11.3) X=Color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black Extra Heavy Duty Sliding Shelf Shelf provides support up to 300 lb (136.1 kg) and uses only 2U, providing 26” (660 mm) usable depth. • Flexible cable management belt eliminates kinking, bending or cutting of cable • Adjustable mounting depth of 20” to 34” (510 mm to 860 mm) • 19” shelf provides 17.5” (445 mm) usable width • 23” shelf provides 21.5” (546 mm) usable width • Locks in fully closed or open position Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12700-X19 19”W Solid Shelf 29 (13.2) Patented shelf extends a full 24” (610 mm) 12700-X23 23”W Solid Shelf 30 (13.6) X=Color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 2-62 SHELVES Low Profile Fixed Shelf Unique telescoping design delivers between 20” and 36” (510 mm and 910 mm) of continuous support for up to 100 lbs (45.4 kg) of equipment in less than 1U of rack-mount space. • Shelf bracket provides front and rear support, attaching with single screw to mounting rails • Available in 19” EIA and 23” EIA widths, providing 17.5” and 21.5” (445 mm & 546 mm) surface space respectively • Made of steel • Supports up to 100 lb (45.4 kg) • 19” shleves are UL Listed Shipping Part Description Weight Number Shelf extends from 20”- 36” (510 mm - 910 mm) in lb (kg) depth. Mounting brackets included, but not shown. 12573-X19 19”W Solid Shelf 16 (7.3) 12573-X23 23”W Solid Shelf 18 (8.2) 12610-X19 19”W Vented Shelf 15 (6.8) 12610-X23 23”W Vented Shelf 17 (7.7) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black Rack-Mount Cable Shelf Use Rack-Mount Cable Shelf in any 19”W CPI cabinet equipped with an Air Dam Kit to provide a front-to-rear pathway for cables. Cables pass through brush sealed ports along the front of the shelf. Rack-Mount Cable Shelf uses 1U and will fit in cabinets with mounting rails set between 22” and 40”D (560 mm and 1020 mm). Shipping Part Description Weight Number H x W (in) lb (kg) 13517-701 1U x 19, Black 17 (7.7) Monitor Shelf And Sliding Keyboard Tray With Mouse Pad Provides a compact solution for storing and accessing components. Installs using eight #12-24 screws (not included). • Adjustable mounting depth of 23” to 39”D (580 mm to 990 mm) • Tray fits up to 19.1”W x 8.5”D (485 mm x 216 mm) keyboards • Tray and mouse pad store inside the monitor shelf • Keyboard tray locks into position • Mouse pad is 7” x 7” (180 mm x 180 mm) • Monitor shelf supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg) Note: Monitor Tie- Down Kit, see Page Part Number Shipping Weight 2-74, can be used lb (kg) 19” Wide 23” Wide with this product to 12495-X19 12495-X23 23/24 (10.4/10.9) securely hold your monitor to the shelf. X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 2-63 ACCESSORIES Lockable Storage Drawer Drawer stores backup media, software, manuals, laptops, test equipment, and extra patch cords in close proximity to the cabinet and are now stackable. Drawers are available for 19”W or 23”W racks and cabinets and includes attachment brackets that allow center mounting on two-post racks with 3” or 6”D (80 mm or 150 mm) equipment channels, or front and rear attachment to four-post racks and cabinet systems. (mounting rails must be adjusted between 24” and 39” (610 mm and 990 mm) in depth). • Attaches to any CPI freestanding 19”W or 23”W rack or cabinet system Drawer with two-post mounting brackets • Available in three heights: 2U, 3U and 4U • Features 20”D (510 mm) lockable drawer that extends full depth for easy access to stored equipment • Supports a 100 lb (45.4 kg) load (drawer and top surface combined) Shipping Description Part Weight Drawer Depth Number lb (kg) in (mm) 13082-X19 19” x 2U Drawer, 20 (510) 18 (8.2) 13083-X19 19” x 3U Drawer, 20 (510) 20 (9.1) 13084-X19 19” x 4U Drawer, 20 (510) 22 (10.0) Drawer with four-post mounting brackets 13082-X23 23” x 2U Drawer, 20 (510) 21 (9.5) 13083-X23 23” x 3U Drawer, 20 (510) 23 (10.4) Redesigned to allow 13084-X23 23” x 4U Drawer, 20 (510) 25 (11.3) stackable units 13185-X01 Drawer Divider, For 3U & 4U Drawers 3 (1.4) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Universal Cabinet Light Fits any 19” EIA or 23” rack or cabinet. It can be mounted in various orientations to direct additional illumination where it is most needed. • Only 1U; provides 8 Watts of fluorescent light from 115VAC • On/Off switch and 6’ (1.8 m) cord • White lens with white housing; black bracket Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13393-719 19” Cabinet Light, 8 Watt 3 (1.4) 13393-723 23” Cabinet Light, 8 Watt 3 (1.4) Rack Mount Unit Labels Kits contain four individual label packs, enough for four racks and four cabinets. Labels are constructed of 1/2”W (10 mm) durable polyester film with adhesive backing. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11927-001 1-45U Labels 1 (0.5) 11927-002 1-58U Labels 1 (0.5) 2-64 ACCESSORIES Caster Kits Caster Kits allow cabinets to be moved quickly and easily. When space is limited, cabinets can be placed against the wall when not in service. Casters also allow for easy reconfiguration of space. • Increases cabinet height as follows: - P/N 13203, by 3.68” (93.5 mm) - P/N 13204, by 3.38” (85.8 mm) • Casters swivel and lock P/N 13203 shown • Install casters prior to populating cabinet • Intended to be used on CPI Cabinets manufactured after July 1, 2004 P/N 13203 includes: • (4) Corner gussets Shipping Part • (4) Full swivel, 3” (80 mm) diameter locking casters Description Weight Number • Installation hardware lb (kg) P/N 13204 includes: 13203-001 Casters for MegaFrame 27 (12.2) • (4) Reinforcement plates Casters for SlimFrame & • (4) Full swivel, 3” (80 mm) diameter locking casters 13204-001 13 (5.9) Co-Location Cabinets • Installation hardware 23”-19” Rail Adapter Kit Mount your 19”W equipment in a 23”W MegaFrame Cabinet with the 23”-19” Rail Adapter Kit that includes 12 adapters and packaged hardware. • Made of steel • Front to rear adjustability remains intact; increases cable routing space • Rail adapter kit is available for all cabinet heights • Supports up to 1000 lb (453.6 kg) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10587-X01 (12) 23”-19” Rail Adapters 5 (2.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black Hardware Kits 12637 Tapped Rail Hardware Kits (sold separately) Shipping Part Nominal Package Finish Weight Number Size Of lb kg) 40605-001 12-24 50 Zinc 1 (0.5) 12638 40605-004 12-24 1,000 Zinc 9 (4.1) 40605-005 12-24 50 Black 1 (0.5) 12639 40605-006 12-24 1,000 Black 9 (4.1) Square-Punched Hardware Kits (sold separately) 12637-001 M-6 25 Gold over Zinc 1 (0.5) 12638-001 10-32 25 Zinc 1 (0.5) 12639-001 12-24 25 Black 1 (0.5) 2-65 ZONE CABLING & WIRELESS ENCLOSURES Raised Floor, Drop Ceiling and Wall-Mount Enclosures Zone Enclosures - Raised Floor Page 3-4 Zone Enclosures - Drop Ceiling Page 3-6 Zone Enclosures Service Parts Page 3-9 Wireless Enclosures - Drop Ceiling Page 3-10 Wireless Enclosures - Wall-Mounted Page 3-12 ZONE CABLING & WIRELESS ENCLOSURES When it’s time for a network to extend beyond the traditional telecommunications room, CPI Zone Cabling and Wireless Enclosures provide consolidation points that reduce the overall cost of adding or moving network cabling. Working in a partnership with American Access Technologies, Inc., the leading developer of zone cabling and wireless enclosures, CPI offers solutions that include standards-recognized zone cabling practices and several NEMA-rated models that can be used in warehouses, industrial environments and outdoors. Available in several styles of wall-mount and drop ceiling wireless enclosures, end users are able to use CPI Zone Cabling and Wireless Enclosures to pre-wire a work area so connections to the rest of the network are closer to network users. Pre-wiring to zone enclosures also makes future connection changes within the zone easier and less disruptive because only cables within the zone are moved, added or changed. Wireless Enclosures offer added protection and security for wireless access points in any situation. Several models of Wireless Enclosures include locks and durable seals for exterior use, while others are able to easily blend into open office environments with dome covers that limit access to qualified technicians only. CPI Zone Cabling and Wireless Enclosures feature: • High-quality construction and design • Small exterior dimensions to save space in tight areas • Secure equipment support outside of the data room • Reduced cost of cable configurations • Enclosed for security and safety • UL Listed • Suitable for low-voltage and active applications • Can be used in air handling spaces 3-2 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURES Telecommunication Enclosures For Zone Cabling & Wireless Applications In traditional cabling models, cables extend from a centralized telecommunication room to each work area. Cable changes impact the entire length of cable between this central room and the work area and can be disruptive to workers within the workspace. In zone cabling, floor space is divided into zones (typically the area between structural building columns), and an enclosure is placed near the center of the zone to house a consolidation point. Thus, only the cable between the consolidation point and work area is impacted when a network connection is changed, reducing the amount of material, labor and workspace disruption involved in the change. Traditional, Home Run Wiring Alternately, an active component (such as a switch) can be placed within the enclosure, essentially creating a “mini-telecommunication room” within the workspace. When fiber is routed into the enclosure, an easily scalable network is created via the active component. The customer’s network is thus positioned to allow fiber to the desktop when desired. Zone cabling is an ideal solution to support networked areas with high “churn” (such as rented commercial office space, data centers, - laboratories, schools, hospitals, retail operations, warehouses and industrial environments) or for use in any building that does not have planned space for a telecommunication room. Wireless networks eliminate the need for data cabling to each user and are the best solution in large, open areas like classrooms and meeting rooms. Wireless networks can supplement, overlay or replace traditional networks. The key to an effective wireless network is the positioning of Zone Cabling the wireless access point to provide maximum coverage in the workspace. Once locations are defined, wireless enclosures create a secure space for the network connection and the wireless access point. CPI offers Zone Cabling and Wireless Enclosures for use in drop ceilings, access floors and on walls. Also, a special series of wall-mount enclosures made of fiberglass are NEMA rated for use in dusty or wet environments, such as outdoors, in a warehouse or in a light industrial site (not submerged or in hazardous locations). Product applications and model information are given on the following pages. Wireless 3-3 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURES - RAISED FLOOR Raised Floor Enclosures Raised Floor Enclosures fit under a single 2’ x 2’ access floor tile. Most models use the access floor tile as a “lid.” Enclosures are UL Listed, suitable for low voltage and active applications and for use in air handling spaces. A variety of sizes are available to match floor height. Most models include brackets for attachment to access floor support pedestals. Enclosures include threaded equipment mounting rails and have multiple, edge-protected cable access ports with foam sealing kits. All enclosures are finished clear. In enclosures designed for use in low height floors, two facing pairs of pivoting equipment mounting rails are used to provide easy access to the front and rear of the patch panel. In deeper enclosures, rails that are parallel to the floor provide higher consolidation point capacity. There is also a model with a lift out tray that can support active components. Order #12-24 equipment mounting screws (P/N 40605-001) separately. Raised Floor Enclosures For Patch Panels These enclosures use the access floor tile as a “lid.” (All models, except A0222-RF, include access floor installation brackets.) • A0222-RF features four cable access ports 6” x 3/4” (152 mm x 19 mm); 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails “pivoting” • A0422-RF features four cable access ports 6” x 3/4” (152 mm x 19 mm); 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails “pivoting” • A0622-RF features four cable access ports 6-3/4” x 2” (171 mm x 50 mm); 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails “pivoting” • A0822-RF features four cable access ports 6-3/4” x 2” (171 mm x 50 mm); 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails “pivoting” • 13772-001 features larger cable openings for Cat 6a cables; two ports 14-3/4” x 3-1/4” (374 mm x 8 2mm) and two ports 6-1/4” x 7” (158.8 mm x 180 mm); 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails “pivoting” • A1422-RF features four cable access ports 9-3/4” x 2-3/4” (247 mm x 69 mm); 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails “fixed” • 13772-002 features larger cable openings for Cat 6a cables; six ports 14-3/4” x 3-1/4” (374 mm x 82 mm); 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting A0822-RF rails “pivoting” Description Shipping Part Depth Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) A0222-RF 1U+1U Enclosure for 2 (50) Floor 10 (4.5) A0422-RF 1U+1U Enclosure for 4 (100) Floor 10 (4.5) A0622-RF 2U+2U Enclosure for 6 (150) Floor 23 (10.4) A0822-RF 4U+4U Enclosure for 8 (200) Floor 23 (10.4) 4U+4U Enclosure. for 8 (200) Floor, 13772-001 25 (11.3) Large Ports A1422-RF 11U Enclosure for 14 (360) Floor 30 (13.6) 4U+4U Enclosure for 14 (360) Floor, 13772-002 30 (13.6) A1422-RF Large Ports 3-4 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURES - RAISED FLOOR Raised Floor Enclosure For Fiber Prepare your data center for future changes by pre-wiring it with fiber connections located under an access floor. • Fits under a single 2’ x 2’ access floor tile • A0822-RF-F features two 7” x 2” (180 mm x 50 mm) cable access ports and 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails with 4U of rack-mount space • A1422-RF-F features two 10” x 2-1/2” cable access ports and 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails with 6U of rack-mount space • Equipment mounting rails can be centered, or offset in the enclosure to accomodate angled patch panels or longer electronics • Cable tie points simplify cable management A0822-RF-F • Includes (4) access floor support brackets Description Shipping Part Depth Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) A0822-RF-F 4U Fiber Enclosure for 9 (230) Floor 30 (13.6) A1422-RF-F 6U Fiber Enclosure for 14 (356) Floor 30 (13.6) Raised Floor Enclosure For Active Components Features a lift-out tray for 2U x 10-1/4”D (260.4 mm) of active components and 5U (divided 2U - 1U - 2U) for passive connectivity. • Includes a junction box for a duplex power outlet • Includes fan to remove heat generated by active components Description Shipping Part Depth Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) A1411-RF-HR 7U Enclosure for 14 (360) Floor 30 (13.6) A1411-RF-HR Raised Floor Enclosure With Locking Cover For Patch Panels “Drop-In” enclosure measures 21-1/4” x 22-1/4” (539.8 mm x 565.2 mm) and includes a locking cover for use completely below access floor tiles. Installation only requires the removal of one floor tile. • Features pivoting mounting rails similar to models above and is perfect for existing data centers Description Shipping Part Depth Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) A0802-RF-DI A0802-RF-DI 4U+4U Enclosure for 9 (230) Floor 25 (11.3) 3-5 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURES - DROP CEILING Ceiling Enclosures Ceiling Enclosures fit within a single 2’ x 2’ or 2’ x 4’ space, replacing a standard acoustical ceiling tile. The enclosure’s face and interior are painted white and have recessed panels to support a ceiling tile, so that they blend with the drop ceiling. A fully hinged door panel with latch closures supports equipment. The door opens downward so that equipment is facing the service technician. Three door styles are available to support wiring blocks, patch panels or active components. Door locks are available as an accessory. Ceiling Enclosures are UL Listed, suitable for low voltage and active applications and for use in air handling spaces. • 2’ x 2’ enclosures support 70 lb (31.8 kg) of cables and equipment, 20 lb (9.1 kg) on the access door • 2’ x 4’ enclosures support 80 lb (36.3 kg) of cables and equipment, 50 lb (22.7 kg) on the pneumatic assisted access door • Enclosures fit in 12”H (300 mm) drop ceilings and attach to building structure with four or six 3/8” threaded rods (ordered separately) • Includes two or four edge-protected cable access ports with fire-rated foam sealing kits Ceiling Enclosure For Hubs, Switches And Patch Panels Telecommunication enclosure supports a combination of active components and patch panels or other panel-mount termination hardware. Enclosures include a junction box for power and a fan to remove heat generated by active components. • A1222-HR provides 5U for patch panels and 2U x 15”D (380 mm) for active equipment; equipment mounts on the door • 13812-001 provides larger cable openings for Cat 6a; one 3-1/4” x 14-3/4” (82.6 mm x 374.7 mm) and one 6-1/4” x 6-7/8” (158.8 mm x 174.6 mm) • A1024-HR provides 5U for patch panels and 2U x 15”D (380 mm) for active equipment; equipment mounts on the door A1222-HR • A1224-HR provides a total of 10U with (3) brackets sized 4U - 2U - 4U to support a combination of patch panels and 15”D (380 mm) active equipment; brackets may be mounted on the door or the back of the enclosure • Order #12-24 equipment mounting screws separately Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) A1222-HR 2’ x 2’ Ceiling Enclosure 39 (17.7) 13812-001 2’ x 2’ Ceiling Enclosure, Large Ports 40 (18.1) A1024-HR 2’ x 4’ Ceiling Enclosure 47 (21.4) A1224-HR 2’ x 4’ Ceiling Enclosure 45 (20.4) 3-6 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURES - DROP CEILING Ceiling Enclosure For Patch Panels Secure a consolidation point using 19” patch panels or other panel-mount termination hardware. • A1222-PP provides a total of 5U with (3) brackets sized 2U - 1U - 2U; brackets mount on the door • 13812-002 provides larger cable openings for Cat 6a; one 3-1/4” x 14-3/4” (82.6 mm x 374.7 mm) and one 6-1/4” x 6-7/8” (158.8 mm x 174.6 mm) • A1024-PP provides a total of 5U with (3) brackets sized 2U - 1U - 2U; brackets mount on the door • A1224-PP provides a total of 10U with (3) brackets sized 4U - 2U - 4U; brackets may be mounted on the door or the back of the enclosure • Order #12-24 equipment mounting screws separately Shipping A1222-PP Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) A1222-PP 2’ x 2’ Ceiling Enclosure 38 (17.2) 13812-002 2’ x 2’ Ceiling Enclosure, Large Ports 39 (17.7) A1024-PP 2’ x 4’ Ceiling Enclosure 43 (19.6) A1224-PP 2’ x 4’ Ceiling Enclosure 45 (20.4) 13813-001 Ceiling Enclosure Fan Kit & Junction Box 3 (1.4) Fan Kit & Junction Box, included with 13812-001, can be installed on either 13812-002 or 13812-003 to better support active components. 13813-001 Ceiling Enclosure For Wiring Blocks Secure a consolidation point using wiring blocks. Enclosures include removable equipment mounting plates that can be match drilled to accommodate a wide variety of wiring blocks. • A1222-LP has (1) mounting plate, size 13-3/4”W x 19-1/2”L (349 mm x 495 mm) for (2) 300-pair 110D (without legs) style blocks or (1) 300-pair 110A (with legs) style blocks • 13812-003 provides larger cable openings for Cat 6a; one 3-1/4” x 14-3/4” (82.6 mm x 374.7 mm) and one 6-1/4” x 6-7/8” (158.8 mmx 174.6 mm) • A1024-LP has (1) mounting plate, 16”W x 22”L (406 mm x 559 mm) for (2) 300-pair 110A (with legs) style blocks • A1224-LP has (2) mounting plates, size 13-3/4”W x 19-1/2”L (349 mm x 495 mm) for (4) 300-pair 110D (without legs) style blocks or (2) 300-pair 110A (with legs) style blocks Shipping Part Description Weight Number A1224-LP lb (kg) A1222-LP 2’ x 2’ Ceiling Enclosure 38 (17.2) 13812-003 2’ x 2’ Ceiling Enclosure, Large Ports 39 (17.7) A1024-LP 2’ x 4’ Ceiling Enclosure 43 (19.6) A1224-LP 2’ x 4’ Ceiling Enclosure 45 (20.4) 3-7 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURES - DROP CEILING Basic Consolidation Enclosures Basic Consolidation Enclosures (BCE) provide a low-cost, low-density consolidation point for telecommunication cabling. Both Ported (-P) and Non- Ported (-N) enclosures can be configured to be used either above the drop ceiling or below an access floor. All Ported versions (-P) come with a fire-rated foam sealing kits making them suitable for air handling spaces. Basic Consolidation Enclosures are UL Listed (2043), plenum rated, come with a sealed door and a clear aluminum finish. BCE-6-P BCE-6-P measures 14”W x 6”D x 20”L (360 mm x 150 mm x 510 mm) and includes installation brackets for attachment to building structure with 3/8” threaded rods. (Equipment mounting brackets not included.) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) BCE-6-P 2-Port Enclosure 7 (3.2) BCE-6-P BCE-24-P/N BCE-24-P/N measures 14”W x 3”D x 20”L (360 mm x 80 mm x 510 mm). It includes rotating threaded interior mounting brackets for a one rack-mount space (1U) 19” patch panel. Order #12-24 equipment mounting screws separately. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) BCE-24-P 1U 2-Port Enclosure 7 (3.2) BCE-24-P BCE-24-N 1U Non-Ported Enclosure 7 (3.2) BCE-48-P/N BCE-48-P/N measures 14”W x 6”D x 20”L (360 mm x 150 mm x 510 mm). It includes rotating threaded interior mounting brackets for two rack-mount spaces (2U) of 19” patch panels. Order #12-24 equipment mounting screws separately. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) BCE-48-P 2U 2-Port Enclosure 12 (5.4) BCE-48-N 2U Non-Ported Enclosure 12 (5.4) BCE-48-P 3-8 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURES SERVICE PARTS Zone Enclosure Service Parts CPI provides a variety of replacement parts for zone cabling enclosures. Chrome Lock Kits and Spare Keys enhance security of the Ceiling Enclosure, replacing existing turn locks. Mounting Brackets ensure weight of Raised Floor Enclosure is fully supported. Chrome Lock Kits/Spare Keys Optional locks provide additional security for all standard ceiling enclosures. Includes two locks and two keys. Part Description Number Chrome Lock Kit Lock Kit, Pair Spare Keys Spare Keys, Pair Chrome Lock Kit Spare Keys Raised Floor Mounting Brackets Additional brackets used to support Raised Floor Enclosures from access floor support pedestals. Part Description Number RF-BRACKET Mounting Brackets, 4 each RF-BRACKET 3-9 WIRELESS ENCLOSURES - DROP CEILING Ceiling-Mounted Wireless Access Point Enclosures Ceiling Enclosures create a permanent location for various wireless access points or bridges within drop ceilings. Equipment is supported on the access door. Most access doors are pre-punched with openings for antennas. Ceiling Enclosures include support brackets for use with 2’ ceiling “grids”. AAT-CAP features interchangeable door-mounted faceplates with mounting brackets for equipment. Universal Faceplate accepts access points up to 2”H x 10”W x 8”D (50 mm x 250 mm x 200 mm) with antennae(s) up to 10.5” (267 mm) apart. Enclosure is finished in white. Description Shipping Part W x D x L Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) Wireless Ceiling Enclosures Without Faceplates AAT-CAP 12 x 10 x 14.5 (305 x 254 x 368) 8 (3.6) 12 x 13 x 14.5 (305 x 330 x 368) AAT-CAP-10-P 9 (4.1) with junction box AAT-CAP-S 12 x 5 x 14.5 (305 x 127 x 368) 8 (3.6) AAT-CAP-00 Faceplates For Wireless Enclosures AAT-CAP-00 Blank (Solid) Faceplate 3 (1.4) AAT-CAP-UNI AAT-CAP-UNI Universal Faceplate 3 (1.4) ® ® AAT-CAP-11 For Cisco Aironet 1100 3 (1.4) AAT-CAP-11 ® ® AAT-CAP-12 For Cisco Aironet 1200 3 (1.4) ® ® AAT-CAP-1232 For Cisco Aironet 1232 3 (1.4) AAT-CAP-12 ® ® AAT-CAP-1242 For Cisco Aironet 1242 3 (1.4) AAT-CAP-1232 AAT-CAP Enclosures, 10”D (250 mm), With Faceplates AAT-CAP-00-KIT Blank (Solid) Faceplate 10 (4.5) AAT-CAP-1242 AAT-CAP-UNI-KIT Universal Faceplate 10 (4.5) ® AAT-CAP-11-KIT Cisco 1100 Faceplate 10 (4.5) AAT-CAP ® AAT-CAP-12-KIT Cisco 1200 Faceplate 10 (4.5) ® AAT-CAP-1232-KIT Cisco 1232 Faceplate 10 (4.5) ® AAT-CAP-1242-KIT Cisco 1242 Faceplate 10 (4.5) AAT-CAP-S Enclosures, 5”D (130 mm), With Faceplates AAT-CAP-S-00-KIT Blank (Solid) Faceplate 9 (4.1) AAT-CAP-S-UNI-KIT Universal Faceplate 9 (4.1) ® AAT-CAP-S-12-KIT Cisco 1200 Faceplate 9 (4.1) ® AAT-CAP-S-1232-KIT Cisco 1232 Faceplate 9 (4.1) ® AAT-CAP-S-1242-KIT Cisco 1242 Faceplate 9 (4.1) Note: AAT-CAP-11 may only be used with AAT-CAP. AAT-CAP-1232-KIT 3-10 WIRELESS ENCLOSURES - DROP CEILING Ceiling-Mounted Wireless Enclosure Ceiling Enclosures create a secure and permanent location for various wireless access points or bridges within drop ceilings. Equipment is supported on the access door. Enclosures are finished in white. Description Shipping Part W x D x L Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 13833-001 15.5 x 5 x 16.5 (394 x 127 x 419) 13833-001 10 (4.5) ® Optimized for Cisco 1250 10 x 4 x 12.75 (254 x 102 x 324) WA064-CAP 5 (2.3) ® ® Optimized for Cisco Aironet 350 WA064-CAP Dome Wireless Enclosure The AAT-ACE-DOME replaces a single drop ceiling tile to hide wireless access points in open office spaces. The dome is mounted on a fully hinged locking door providing easy access to equipment and cables for authorized technicians only. • (1) 3/4”H x 3”W (19.1 mm x 80 mm) edge-protected cable access port with approved foam sealing kit • Includes two sets of standoffs to adjust height of back plate within dome • Enclosure: 23-3/4”W x 3”D x 23-3/4”L (603.3 mm x 80 mm x 603.3 mm) • Dome: 6-1/2”H (165 mm), 14” Diameter (360 mm) • Dome is large enough to accomodate most acccess points including Cisco’s large 1250 series AP • Product Weight: 10.5 lb (4.76 kg) • Removable mounting plate is 8 7/8”W x 6-7/8”L (225.43 mm x 174.63 mm) • Customer must provide (4) 3/8” threaded rods and installation hardware • Enclosure and dome are finished in white Description Shipping Part W x D x L Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 23.75 x 3 x 23.75 (603 x 80 x 603) AAT-ACE-DOME 21 (9.5) Domed Wireless Enclosure 3-11 WIRELESS ENCLOSURES - WALL Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure Wall-mounted access points provide better wireless coverage in some environments. This enclosure is for interior use and provides a secure and permanent wall-mounted location for various wireless access points and bridges. ® ® • Optimized for Cisco Aironet 350 • Enclosure is finished in beige • UL Listed Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) WA064-WAP 8 x 11 x 3 (200 x 280 x 80) 9 (4.1) NEMA-Rated Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure The AAT-MWME-P is a wall-mounted wireless acces point enclosure designed for warehouse, manufacturing/light industrial and exterior use. A single front door provides access to equipment. The door is attached with a continuous steel hinge and secured by padlock through a stainless steel padlock hasp. A gasket seals the interior at closure. • Enclosure is completely sealed, customer drills cable entry holes to fit application • Enclosure: fiberglass reinforced polyester, gray • Enclosure: 11-1/2”H x 9-1/2”W x 4-1/2”D (292 mm x 241 mm x 114 mm) • Product Weight: 5 lb (2.3 kg) • Interior of the enclosure is 3”D (80 mm) • Maximum equipment size is 9” x 7” x 3” (230 mm x 180 mm x 80 mm) • Customer must provide installation and cable access hardware • NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) AAT-MWME-P 11.5 x 9.5 x 4.5 (292 x 241 x 114) 6 (2.7) 3-12 WIRELESS ENCLOSURES - WALL Large NEMA-Rated Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure The AAT-WME-P is for warehouse, manufacturing, light industrial and exterior use. A single front door provides access to equipment. The door is attached with a continuous steel hinge and secured by padlock through a stainless steel padlock hasp. A gasket seals the interior at closure. • Enclosure is completely sealed, customer drills cable entry holes to fit application • Removable mounting plate for wireless transmitters • Enclosure: Fiberglass reinforced polyester, gray • Product Weight: 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) • The interior of the enclosure is 5”D (130 mm) • Maximum equipment size: 13.5” x 11.5” x 5” (343 mm x 292 mm x 130 mm) • Customer must provide installation and cable access hardware • NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) AAT-WME-P 15.5 x 13.5 x 6 (394 x 343 x 150) 11 (5.0) Large NEMA-Rated Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure With Window The AAT-WMESG-P is for warehouse, manufacturing, light industrial and exterior use. A single front door provides access to equipment. The door is attached with a continuous steel hinge and secured by padlock through a stainless steel padlock hasp. A gasket seals the interior at closure. Large window provides viewing of equipment. • Enclosure is completely sealed, customer drills cable entry holes to fit application • Removable mounting plate for wireless transmitters • Enclosure: Fiberglass reinforced polyester, gray • Product Weight: 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) • The interior of the enclosure is 5”D (130 mm) • Maximum equipment size: 13.5” x 11.5” x 5” (343 mm x 292 mm x 130 mm) • NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 15.5 x 13.5 x 6 (394 x 343 x 150) AAT-WMESG-P 11 (5.0) Large Enclosure with Window 3-13 ZONE CABLING ENCLOSURES - WALL Wall-Mount Enclosure The Wall-Mount Enclosure measures 24”H x 42”W x 7.5”D (610 mm x 1070 mm x 191 mm). Includes mounting positions for passive and active equipment, a junction box and a fan to remove heat generated by active components. Mounting positions include space for a single 100 pair 110-style termination block, a single 6-port fiber optic adapter panel, two 2U x 19” spaces for patch panels or other panel mount termination hardware and one 3U x 19” space for active components up to 18”D (460 mm). The enclosure is pre-punched with knockouts for 1/2” or 1-1/2” electrical conduit for cables and has an insulated, locking, fully-hinged double door to reduce noise and provide security. • Enclosure is finished in beige Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) AAT-AWM-H 24 x 42 x 7.5 (610 x 1070 x 191) 73 (33.1) MUTOA Floor Boxes Multi-User Telecommunications Outlet Assemblies (MUTOA) are typically small, passive devices that do not rack-mount. CPI’s MUTOA Floor Boxes allow convenient and economical storage of these devices. Available in 24- and 48-port designs. • Lightweight construction • Meets TIA-569-B standards Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13701-024 24-Port MUTOA Floor Box 30 (13.6) 13701-048 48-Port MUTOA Floor Box 35 (15.7) 3-14 WALL-MOUNT SYSTEMS Wall-Mount Racks, Cabinets & Accessories Wall-Mount Racks - Hinged Swing Gate Page 4-4 Wall-Mount Racks - Fixed Mount Page 4-7 Wall-Mount Rack with Enclosure Page 4-9 Wall-Mount Rack Accessories Page 4-10 ® Cube-iT PLUS Cabinet System Page 4-11 ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet Page 4-16 Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet Page 4-18 WALL-MOUNT SYSTEMS As telecommunications needs continue to grow and expand, the physical space in which they exist doesn't always grow at the same rate. Wall-Mount Systems overcome this hurdle by providing racks and cabinets that allow you to create locations for cables and equipment where space is limited or does not exist. Secure equipment on the wall inside or outside of the telecommunications room and connect remote groups of users to the network. CPI offers several styles and options of fixed and swing gate Wall-Mount Racks and Cabinets available as either open or enclosed systems. Wall-Mount Open Systems: • Mountable to wall or backboard • Open architecture for airflow and easy access to cables • Support of patch panels, shelves, trays and network equipment with roll-formed #12-24 tapped mounting holes • 19”or 23” rack-mount width • High-strength, lightweight aluminum construction (most models) • Standard EIA-310-D hole pattern • Fixed and swing-out designs for easier installation • Offer up to 350 lb (158.8 kg) static load rating Wall-Mount Enclosed Systems: • Mountable to wall or backboard • Enclosed with lockable doors for security and aesthetic appeal • 19” rack-mount width • Standard EIA-310-D hole pattern • Fixed and swing-out designs for easier installation • Wall-mounted, floor-supported cabinets offer up to 1000 lb (453.6 kg) static load rating 4-2 WALL-MOUNT SYSTEMS Wall-Mounted Products Open Mounting Available in open and enclosed systems, wall-mounted racks and cabinets are an excellent choice to support equipment when floor space is limited or where a small group of users exist. Open wall-mount racks present easy access to cables and equipment and offer both fixed and swing frames. Swing frames pivot open on one side to provide access to the rear of equipment and are used to support patch panels, while fixed frames hold more weight and are used for network routers and switches. Enclosed wall-mount cabinets provide added physical security and are Enclosed available in vertical, hinged and floor-supported designs. Vertical cabinets hold equipment against the wall to minimize the depth of the cabinet. Use vertical Mounting cabinets to support a small group of network users. Hinged cabinets provide access to the front and the rear of equipment. The cabinet body is hinged near the wall and can swing open to access cable terminations and the rear of equipment. Floor-supported cabinets are also hinged, but the cabinet body is supported from the floor with casters. This type of cabinet can hold more weight than wall-mounted hinged cabinets and are used to replace a freestanding rack in small rooms where added equipment security is required. Product Comparison Open Systems Product Purpose Load Rating - lb (kg) Universal Swing Gate Wall Rack Feature rich, swing frame used to support network equipment Up to 150 (68.0) Page 4-4 for a medium size group of users Standard Swing Gate Wall Rack General use, swing frame used to support network equipment Up to 150 (68.0) Page 4-5 for a medium size group of users. UL Listed EasySwing Wall-Mount Rack Affordable, swing frame used to support network Up to 85 (38.6) Page 4-6 equipment for a small group of users. Ships preassembled Heavy-Duty Wall-Mount Equipment Strong, fixed frame used to support network equipment for Rack Up to 350 (158.8) a medium size group of users and other heavy equipment Page 4-7 Fixed Wall-Mount Equipment Rack Basic, fixed frame used to support network equipment for a Up to 200 (90.7) Page 4-8 small group of users. UL Listed Enclosed Systems Feature rich, hinged cabinet used to secure network ® Cube-iT Plus Wall-Mount Cabinet connections for a medium size group of users. Five-inch deep Up to 200 (90.7) Page 4-11 rear panel allows conduit to terminate at back of cabinet. UL Listed ® Cube-iT Plus Floor-Supported Feature rich, hinged and floor-supported wall cabinet replaces Cabinet Up to 1000 (453.6) floor supported network equipment in small equipment rooms Page 4-13 ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet Space-saving cabinet used to secure network connections for Up to 100 (45.4) Page 4-16 a small group of users. Ideal for high-traffic areas Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet Mid-level, hinged cabinet used to secure network connections Up to 150 (68.0) Page 4-18 for a medium size group of users 4-3 SWING GATE WALL-MOUNT RACKS Universal Swing Gate Rack This full-featured swing gate rack offers 150 lb (68.0 kg) load handling capacity, easy assembly and built-in cable management capabilities. • Dual locking latches keep gate securely closed ® • Improved cable management with nine cable pass- through ports and six Saf-T-Grip ® reusable Velcro strips • Gate opens 180°, made of strong, lightweight aluminum • Easy assembly using included instructions • Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm -15.9 mm -12.7 mm) alternating mounting hole pattern drilled on both front and back sides • Rack-mount spaces are marked and numbered • (50) #12-24 mounting screws included; black painted racks ship with black screws, ther racks ship with zinc screws • Supports 150 lb (68.0 kg) of equipment, when securely mounted to wall Universal Swing Gate Rack Usable Dimensions Overall Dimensions - in (mm) Shipping Part Weight Number Height Width Depth Height Width Depth lb (kg) 11347-X19 20U 19"EIA 12 (300) 40.4 (1026) 22.1 (562) 12.8 (325) 24 (10.9) 11348-X19 20U 19"EIA 18 (457) 40.4 (1026) 22.1 (562) 18.8 (478) 29 (13.2) 11347-X23 20U 23" 12 (300) 40.4 (1026) 26.1 (663) 12.8 (325) 25 (11.3) 11348-X23 20U 23" 18 (457) 40.4 (1026) 26.1 (663) 18.8 (478) 30 (13.6) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, , 5=Clear, 7=Black. 4-4 SWING GATE WALL-MOUNT RACKS Standard Swing Gate Wall Rack The Standard Swing Gate Wall Rack provides easy access to the rear of equipment, making it the ideal choice for supporting patch panels and switches. Standard Swing Gate Wall Rack Usable Dimensions Overall Dimensions - in (mm) Shipping Part Weight Number Height Width Depth* Height Width Depth lb (kg) 11790-X12 12U 19"EIA 11 (280) 29.1 (739) 21.7 (551) 12.2 (310) 30 (13.6) 11790-X18 12U 19"EIA 17 (430) 29.1 (739) 21.7 (551) 18.2 (462) 33 (14.9) 11790-X25 12U 19"EIA 24 (610) 29.1 (739) 21.7 (551) 25.2 (640) 46 (20.7) 11791-X12 20U 19"EIA 11 (280) 43.1 (1095) 21.7 (551) 12.2 (310) 33 (15.0) 11791-X18 20U 19"EIA 17 (430) 43.1 (1095) 21.7 (551) 18.2 (462) 36 (16.3) 11791-X25 20U 19"EIA 24 (610) 43.1 (1095) 21.7 (551) 25.2 (640) 50 (22.5) • Dual hinges opens to right or left, stopping 11807-X12 26U 19"EIA 11 (280) 53.6 (1361) 21.7 (551) 12.2 (310) 35 (15.8) in 90° position • EIA-310-D compliant 11807-X18 26U 19"EIA 17 (430) 53.6 (1361) 21.7 (551) 18.2 (462) 37 (16.7) • Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm -15.9 11807-X25 26U 19"EIA 24 (610) 53.6 (1361) 21.7 (551) 25.2 (640) 54 (24.3) mm -12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern 11792-X12 40U 19"EIA 11 (280) 78.1 (1984) 21.7 (551) 12.2 (310) 43 (19.4) • Rack-mount spaces are marked and numbered 11792-X18 40U 19"EIA 17 (430) 78.1 (1984) 21.7 (551) 18.2 (462) 45 (20.7) • Includes (50) #12-24 mounting screws; 11792-X25 40U 19"EIA 24 (610) 78.1 (1984) 21.7 (551) 25.2 (640) 64 (28.9) black painted racks ship with black screws, other racks ship with zinc screws 11793-X12 12U 23" 11 (280) 29.1 (739) 25.7 (653) 12.2 (310) 31 (14.0) • Supports 100 lb (45.4 kg) of equipment in the open and closed position when securely 11793-X18 12U 23" 17 (430) 29.1 (739) 25.7 (653) 18.2 (462) 34 (15.3) mounted 11793-X25 12U 23" 24 (610) 29.1 (739) 25.7 (653) 25.2 (640) 47 (21.1) • Load capacity can be increased to 150 lb 11794-X12 20U 23" 11 (280) 43.1 (1095) 25.7 (653) 12.2 (310) 34 (15.4) (68 kg) with optional Heavy Duty Swing Gate Kit 11794-X18 20U 23" 17 (430) 43.1 (1095) 25.7 (653) 18.2 (462) 37 (16.7) • Supports single-sided and double-side 11794-X25 20U 23" 24 (610) 43.1 (1095) 25.7 (653) 25.2 (640) 51 (23.0) shelves 11808-X12 26U 23" 11 (280) 53.6 (1361) 25.7 (653) 12.2 (310) 36 (16.3) • Ships partially assembled with installation hardware 11808-X18 26U 23" 17 (430) 53.6 (1361) 25.7 (653) 18.2 (462) 38 (17.1) 11808-X25 26U 23" 24 (610) 53.6 (1361) 25.7 (653) 25.2 (640) 55 (24.8) 11795-X12 40U 23" 11 (280) 78.1 (1984) 25.7 (653) 12.2 (310) 44 (19.8) 11795-X18 40U 23" 17 (430) 78.1 (1984) 25.7 (653) 18.2 (462) 46 (21.1) 11795-X25 40U 23" 24 (610) 78.1 (1984) 25.7 (653) 25.2 (640) 65 (29.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Note: Usable Depth is reduced at the top and bottom U to 8” (200 mm) pm -X12; 12” (300 mm on -X18; and 19” (462 mm) on -X25 racks. Heavy Duty Swing Gate Kit Increases the load bearing capacity of P/Ns (-X18) and (-X25) Standard Swing Gate Wall Racks to 150 lb (68 kg). Hardware included. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12795-X01 Two Brackets 4 (1.8) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 4-5 SWING GATE WALL-MOUNT RACKS EasySwing Wall-Mount Rack The EasySwing Wall-Mount Rack is a cost-effective 19” EIA swing gate rack for mounting network, communications and security equipment in a elecommunications or equipment room where floor space is limited. • Opens 180° to right or left, locking latch pin secures gate in closed position. Includes lanyard for attachment to rack • 19” EIA threaded equipment mounting rails • Includes reusable cable management straps • Durable all-steel construction • Ships fully assembled and flat; simply unfold and mount to wall • Keyhole wall mounting holes with mounting template included on carton • Includes (12) #12-24 equipment mounting screws, Order 1/4” installation hardware separately • Supports 85 lb (38.6 kg) of equipment Easy Swing Wall-Mount Rack Usable Dimensions Overall Dims - in (mm) Shipping Part Weight Number Height Width Depth* Height Width Depth lb (kg) 13602-X08 11U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 24.5 (622) 20.3 (516) 8.0 (204) 22 (10.0) 13602-X12 11U 19"EIA 10.5 (266) 24.5 (622) 20.3 (516) 12.0 (305) 24 (10.9) 13602-X18 11U 19"EIA 16.5 (419) 24.5 (622) 20.3 (516) 18.0 (457) 28 (12.7) 13602-X25 11U 19"EIA 23.5 (596) 24.5 (622) 20.3 (516) 25.0 (635) 34 (15.4) Ships flat 13604-X08 19U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 38.5 (978) 20.3 (516) 8.0 (204) 27 (12.2) 13604-X12 19U 19"EIA 10.5 (266) 38.5 (978) 20.3 (516) 12.0 (305) 29 (13.2) 13604-X18 19U 19"EIA 16.5 (419) 38.5 (978) 20.3 (516) 18.0 (457) 33 (15.0) 13604-X25 19U 19"EIA 23.5 (596) 38.5 (978) 20.3 (516) 25.0 (635) 38 (17.2) 13608-X12 26U 19"EIA 10.5 (266) 51.5 (1308) 20.3 (516) 12.0 (305) 33 (15.0) 13608-X18 26U 19"EIA 16.5 (419) 51.5 (1308) 20.3 (516) 18.0 (457) 37 (16.8) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=Computer White, 7=Black. Note: Usable Depth is reduced at the top and bottom 2U on -X08 and -X12 models and at the top and bottom 3U on -X18 and -X25 models. For planning purposes, reduce Useable Depth by 75% and 50% on the top and bottom 2U of -X08 and -X12 racks. Reduce Usable Depth by 80%, 50% and 25% on the top and bottom 3U of -X18 and -X25 racks. Corner Cushions Since wall racks are elevated above the floor and extend away from the wall, bumping into the rack is a safety concern. Corner Cushions cover the exposed leading edges of racks for added protection. • Flame retardant, non-toxic Includes • Foam design conforms to ASTM standards for safety surfacing material double-sided adhesive Shipping squares for Part Description Weight easy Number lb (kg) installation 12858-001 Corner Cushions, Set of 4 1 (0.5) 4-6 FIXED WALL-MOUNT RACK Heavy Duty Wall-Mount Equipment Rack Use the Heavy Duty Wall-Mount Equipment Rack to hold up to 350 lb (158.8 kg). The 24” (610 mm) depth allows larger equipment to be wall-mounted. Quick and easy assembly has been engineered in to save you valuable installation time. Includes assembly hardware and mounting 1/4” x 2” lag bolts. Sold individually. • 12-24 roll-formed threads on 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm -15.9 mm -12.7 mm) spacing, both sides • Rack mount spaces are marked and numbered • Made of high-strength, lightweight aluminum • Includes (50) #12-24 mounting screws; black painted racks ship with black screws, other racks ship with zinc screws • Holds up to 350 lb (158.8 kg) when securely mounted to wall or backboard Heavy Duty Wall-Mount Equipment Rack Usable Dimensions Overall Dims - in (mm) Part Shipping Number Height Width Depth Height Width Depth Weight 15320-X18 20U 19"EIA 18 (457) 41.2 (1046) 23.0 (584) 18.0 (457) 22 (10.0) 15320-X24 20U 19"EIA 24 (610) 41.2 (1046) 23.0 (584) 24.0 (610) 27 (12.2) 15321-X18 40U 19"EIA 18 (457) 76.2 (1935) 23.0 (584) 18.0 (457) 28 (12.7) 15321-X24 40U 19"EIA 24 (610) 76.2 (1935) 23.0 (584) 24.0 (610) 32 (14.5) 15322-X18 20U 23" 18 (457) 41.2 (1046) 27.0 (686) 18.0 (457) 23 (10.4) 15322-X24 20U 23" 24 (610) 41.2 (1046) 27.0 (686) 24.0 (610) 29 (13.2) 15323-X18 40U 23" 18 (457) 76.2 (1935) 27.0 (686) 18.0 (457) 29 (13.2) 15323-X24 40U 23" 24 (610) 76.2 (1935) 27.0 (686) 24.0 (610) 34 (15.4) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=Computer White, 5=Brushed Aluminum, 7=Black. Extra-Capacity, Flush Mounted Wall Bracket This rack is used to mount up to 6U of rack-mount equipment flush to the wall. Ideal for small or tight spaced installations. Supports 150 lb (68 kg). Mounting hardware not included. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum. Part Description Number H x W (in) 11754-X19 6U x 19 Wall Bracket X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 4-7 FIXED WALL-MOUNT RACK Fixed Wall-Mount Equipment Rack The Fixed Wall-Mount Equipment Rack is a sturdy platform for wall mounting equipment. • EIA-310-D compliant equipment mounting system, punched with the Universal alternating 5/8”-5/8”-1/2”(15.9 mm -15.9 mm -12.7 mm) hole pattern • Rack mount spaces are marked and numbered, tapped with #12-24 roll-formed threads • Includes (50) #12-24 equipment mounting screws; black painted racks ship with black screws, other racks ship with zinc screws • Supports single-sided and double-sided shelves • Supports 200 lb (90.7 kg) of equipment when securely mounted to wall or backboard using all eight leg mounting holes Fixed Wall-Mount Equipment Rack Usable Dimensions Overall Dims - in (mm) Shipping Part Weight Number Height Width Depth Height Width Depth lb (kg) 11960-X06 12U 19"EIA 6 (150) 27.4 (696) 22.4 (569) 6.6 (168) 9 (4.1) 11960-X12 12U 19"EIA 12 (300) 27.4 (696) 22.4 (569) 12.6 (320) 12 (5.4) 11960-X18 12U 19"EIA 18 (457) 27.4 (696) 22.4 (569) 18.6 (472) 13 (5.9) 11961-X06 20U 19"EIA 6 (150) 41.4 (1052) 22.4 (569) 6.6 (168) 10 (4.5) 11961-X12 20U 19"EIA 12 (300) 41.4 (1052) 22.4 (569) 12.6 (320) 13 (5.9) 11961-X18 20U 19"EIA 18 (457) 41.4 (1052) 22.4 (569) 18.6 (472) 15 (6.8) 11962-X06 40U 19"EIA 6 (150) 76.4 (1941) 22.4 (569) 6.6 (168) 15 (6.8) 11962-X12 40U 19"EIA 12 (300) 76.4 (1941) 22.4 (569) 12.6 (320) 16 (7.3) 11962-X18 40U 19"EIA 18 (457) 76.4 (1941) 22.4 (569) 18.6 (472) 20 (9.1) 11963-X06 12U 23" 6 (150) 27.4 (696) 26.4 (671) 6.6 (168) 10 (4.5) 11963-X12 12U 23" 12 (300) 27.4 (696) 26.4 (671) 12.6 (320) 11 (5.0) 11963-X18 12U 23" 18 (457) 27.4 (696) 26.4 (671) 18.6 (472) 13 (5.9) 11964-X06 20U 23" 6 (150) 41.4 (1052) 26.4 (671) 6.6 (168) 11 (5.0) 11964-X12 20U 23" 12 (300) 41.4 (1052) 26.4 (671) 12.6 (320) 12 (5.4) 11964-X18 20U 23" 18 (457) 41.4 (1052) 26.4 (671) 18.6 (472) 15 (6.8) 11965-X06 40U 23" 6 (150) 76.4 (1941) 26.4 (671) 6.6 (168) 16 (7.3) 11965-X12 40U 23" 12 (300) 76.4 (1941) 26.4 (671) 12.6 (320) 17 (7.7) 11965-X18 40U 23" 18 (457) 76.4 (1941) 26.4 (671) 18.6 (472) 19 (8.6) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=Computer White, 5=Brushed Aluminum, 7=Black. Corner Cushions Since wall racks are elevated above the floor and extend away from the wall, bumping into the rack is a safety concern. Corner Cushions cover the exposed leading edges of racks for added protection. Includes • Flame retardant, non-toxic double-sided • Foam design conforms to ASTM standards for safety surfacing material adhesive squares for Shipping Part Description Weight easy Number lb (kg) installation 12858-001 Corner Cushions, Set of 4 1 (0.5) 4-8 FIXED WALL-MOUNT Wall-Mount Rack With Enclosure Enjoy the benefits of a wall-mount rack solution with the added protection and security of an enclosure at an attractive price. As always, CPI quality is built into this attractive, economical product. So, whenever floor space is at a premium and a full size rack is not required, use the CPI Wall-Mount Rack with Enclosure. Available in two sizes with aluminum or plexiglass doors. Ships fully assembled with mounting instructions and hardware. Rack Features: • Strong, lightweight aluminum construction provides maximum strength • Includes wall-mounting 1/4” x 2” lag bolts and 50 #12-24 mounting screws; black painted racks ship with black screws, other racks ship with zinc screws • 19”EIA, Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm x 15.9 mm x 12.7 mm) hole pattern allows for a wide variety of mounting options • Supports up to 200 lb (90.7 kg) Enclosure Features: • Strong, lightweight aluminum construction • Vented top and bottom for optimum airflow • Convenient cable access via removable two top and two bottom cable pass-through ports, 1.6” x 3.5” (41 mm x 89 mm) • Lockable door is easily installed to open from left or right • Optional Fan Kit available for 18”D (460 mm) enclosure Wall-Mount Rack With Enclosure Shipping Usable Dimensions Overall Dims - in (mm) Part Weight Number Height Width Depth Height Width Depth lb (kg) 12264-X16 12U 19"EIA 12 (300) 28.5 (724) 24.5 (622) 16.1 (409) 44 (20.0) 12324-X22 20U 19"EIA 18 (457) 42.1 (1069) 24.5 (622) 22.1 (561) 60 (27.2) Includes Door With Tinted Plexiglass Window 12265-X16 12U 19"EIA 12 (300) 28.5 (724) 24.5 (622) 16.1 (409) 44 (20.0) 12325-X22 20U 19"EIA 18 (457) 42.1 (1069) 24.5 (622) 22.1 (561) 60 (27.2) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Flush Mounted Wall Bracket This bracket makes it easy to mount up to two 1U or a single 2U piece of rack-mount equipment (1U=1.75”, 44.45 mm) flush to a wall. Ideal for small or tight spaced installations. Mounting hardware not included. Made of strong, lightweight aluminum. • Supports up to 75 lb (34 kg) Note: This wall bracket is not rack-mountable. Part Number Color 19” Rack 23” Rack 11583-119 11583-123 Gray 11583-219 11583-223 White 11583-519 11583-523 Clear 11583-719 11583-723 Black 4-9 WALL-MOUNT RACK ACCESSORIES Shelves • 15” (380 mm) shelf mounts in 18”D (460 mm) racks only 12291-X01 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10”D (250 mm) Shelf, H x W - in (mm) 2U x 17.25 (438.2), 12291-X01 4 (1.8) Supports 40 lb (18.1 kg) 15”D (380 mm) Shelf, H x W - in (mm) 3U x 17.25 (438.2), 40074-X00 40074-X00 6 (2.7) Supports 50 lb (22.7 kg) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 5.19” (131.8 mm) 12.00” (304.8 mm) 15.00” (381.0 mm) Fan/Filter Kit Fan pressurizes enclosure, forcing warmer air out top vents. Fan is rated for 200 CFM and has an attached 5’6”L (1.6 m) power cord with NEMA 5-15P plug. (37 dB noise level) Shipping Part Description Weight Number 11755-003 lb (kg) 11755-003 200 CFM, 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, NEMA 5-15P 3 (1.4) 11222-001 Replacement Filters, Set of 4 1 (0.5) Power Strip Streamlined, durable steel body is fitted with bracket for mounting. • 17”L (430 mm), uses 1U, black • Circuit breaker, eight outlets, 10’ (3 m) cord Part Surge Plug Outlet AMP Number Protected Type Type 12816-701 15A No NEMA 5-15P 15A (5-15R) 12816-702 15A No NEMA L5-15P 15A (5-15R) 12816-703 15A Yes NEMA 5-15P 15A (5-15R) 12816-704 15A Yes NEMA L5-15P 15A (5-15R) 12816-705 20A No NEMA 5-20P 20A (5-20R) 12816-706 20A No NEMA L5-20P 20A (5-20R) 12816-707 20A Yes NEMA 5-20P 20A (5-20R) See Section 1 for additional shelf options. 12816-708 20A Yes NEMA L5-20P 20A (5-20R) See Section 7 for additional power options. 4-10 ® CUBE-iT PLUS CABINET SYSTEM ® CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet System The patented Cube-it Plus Cabinet System is a series of wall-mounted and floor-supported telecommunications enclosures designed to secure communications equipment for a cross connect. The cabinets are copper and fiber ready, and feature easy access to the front or rear of the cabinet. Both the wall-mounted and floor-supported cabinets share these features: • Swing-out cabinet body enables easy access to the rear of installed equipment • 5”D (130 mm) rear panel is pre-punched with knock-outs for 1/2”, 3/4”, Wall-Mounted 2-1/2” and 3” conduit, and has cable tie points and attachment points for Cube-iT Plus accessory rack-mount brackets • Cabinet body includes one pair of adjustable 19” EIA threaded equipment rails • Cabinet body is vented. Vents will accept accessory fan • Front door design incorporates rounded edges and corners to improve safety in public access spaces Wall-Mounted, Floor-Supported • A l ocking front door and rear panel provide security Cube-iT Plus Cabinet • Wide variety of accessories are available CUBE-iT Wall-Mounted Cabinet Specifications 24”H, 36”H & 48”H Cabinets (610 mm, 910 mm & 1220 mm) • Patented hinge design allows the installer to remove the rear panel for easy installation • For indoor use only, not for use in air-handling spaces • Usable heights: 24”H (610 mm) = 12U; 36”H (910mm) = 18U; 48”H (1220 mm) = 26U • Includes one pair of 19”W adjustable (front-to-rear), mounting rails with Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm-15.9 mm -12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern. EIA-310-D Compliant; front rails are threaded for #12-24 mounting screws • Cable knockouts include: (4) 1/2” or 3/4”, two on top, two on bottom; (8) 2-1/2” or 3”, four on top, four on bottom; (4) edge-protection grommets are included for 3” knockouts Wall-Mounted Cube-iT Plus • Constructed of riveted and bolted steel with epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat paint finish. Equipment mounting rails are aluminum • Ships fully assembled with mounting hardware, 50 each #12-24 screws and installation template • UL Listed to support up to 200 lb (90.7 kg) Depths for Wall-Mounted Cabinet in (mm) Cabinet Depth 13 (330) 18 (460) 24 (610) 30 (760) Cabinet Body Depth 7.2 (18) 12.2 (310) 18.2 (462) 24.2 (615) Maximum Usable Depth 11.8 (300) 16.8 (427) 22.8 (579) 28.8 (732) Wall-Mounted cabinet specifications located on next page. 4-11 ® CUBE-iT PLUS CABINET SYSTEM 24”H (610 mm) Cube-iT Plus - Wall Mounted Part Number & Color Width Depth Shipping Weight Door Style in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) White Black 13265-224 13265-724 Metal Door 24 (610) 13 (330) 70 (31.8) 13275-224 13275-724 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 13 (330) 67 (30.4) 11890-224 11890-724 Metal Door 24 (610) 18 (460) 78 (35.4) 11901-224 11901-724 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 18 (460) 75 (34.0) 11840-224 11840-724 Metal Door 24 (610) 24 (610) 87 (39.5) 11900-224 11900-724 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 24 (610) 84 (38.1) 11996-224 11996-724 Metal Door 24 (610) 30 (760) 97 (44.0) 12419-224 12419-724 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 30 (760) 94 (42.6) Extra Mounting Rails, 1 pair 12787-524 L-Shaped, Threaded, 12U 3 (1.4) 36”H (910 mm) Cube-iT Plus - Wall Mounted Part Number & Color Width Depth Shipping Weight Door Style in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) White Black 13265-236 13265-736 Metal Door 24 (610) 13 (330) 89 (40.4) 13275-236 13275-736 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 13 (330) 83 (37.6) 11890-236 11890-736 Metal Door 24 (610) 18 (460) 99 (44.9) 11901-236 11901-736 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 18 (460) 93 (42.2) 11840-236 11840-736 Metal Door 24 (610) 24 (610) 111 (50.3) 11900-236 11900-736 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 24 (610) 105 (47.6) 11996-236 11996-736 Metal Door 24 (610) 30 (760) 124 (56.2) 12419-236 12419-736 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 30 (760) 118 (53.5) Extra Mounting Rails, 1 Pair 12787-536 L-Shaped, Threaded, 18U 4 (1.8) 48”H (1220 mm) Cube-iT Plus - Wall Mounted Part Number & Color Width Depth Shipping Weight Door Style in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) White Black 13265-248 13265-748 Metal Door 24 (610) 13 (330) 108 (49.0) 13275-248 13275-748 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 13 (330) 101 (45.8) 11890-248 11890-748 Metal Door 24 (610) 18 (460) 121 (54.9) 11901-248 11901-748 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 18 (460) 114 (51.7) 11840-248 11840-748 Metal Door 24 (610) 24 (610) 135 (61.2) 11900-248 11900-748 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 24 (610) 128 (58.1) 11996-248 11996-748 Metal Door 24 (610) 30 (760) 151 (68.5) 12419-248 12419-748 Plexiglass Door 24 (610) 30 (760) 143 (64.9) Extra Mounting Rails, 1 Pair 12787-548 L-Shaped, Threaded, 26U 5 (2.3) Floor-Mount Foot Kit 13483-001 Foot Kit for 24”D (610 mm) & 30”D (760 mm) Cabinets Only 5 (2.3) Note: Foot Kit allows front door and rear panel to open when cabinet is placed on the floor, shelf or other surface. 4-12 ® CUBE-iT PLUS CABINET SYSTEM CUBE-iT Wall-Mounted, Floor-Supported Cabinet Specifications 60”H & 72”H Cabinets (1520 mm & 1830 mm) • Cabinet body features lockable front door and swing-out rear panel for easy equipment access — cabinet body is supported by an attached wheel base • For indoor use only, not for use in air-handling spaces • Usable heights: 60”H (1520 mm) = 33U; 72”H (1830 mm) = 40U • Wheeled base adds an additional 6” (150 mm) to height • Includes one pair of 19”W adjustable (front-to-rear), mounting rails with Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm -15.9 mm -12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern; EIA-310-D Compliant • Includes cable management space for vertical cable manager accessory • Cable knockouts include: (4) 1/2” or 3/4”, two on top, two on bottom; (10) 2-1/2” or 3”, five on top, five on bottom; (5) edge-protection grommets are included for 3” knockouts • Constructed of riveted and bolted steel with epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat paint finish; equipment mounting rails and supports are Wall-Mounted, Floor-Supported Cube-iT Plus Cabinet aluminum • Ships fully assembled with mounting hardware • Support up to 1000 lb (453.6 kg) 60”H (1520 mm) Cube-iT Plus - Wall Mounted & Floor-Supported Part Number & Color Width Depth Shipping Weight Door Style in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) White Black 13491-260 13491-760 Metal Door 27.3 (693) 18 (460) 201 (91.2) 13494-260 13494-760 Plexiglass Door 27.3 (693) 18 (460) 192 (87.1) 13492-260 13492-760 Metal Door 27.3 (693) 24 (610) 221 (100.2) 13495-260 13495-760 Plexiglass Door 27.3 (693) 24 (610) 212 (96.2) 13493-260 13493-760 Metal Door 27.3 (693) 30 (760) 246 (111.6) 13496-260 13496-760 Plexiglass Door 27.3 (693) 30 (760) 236 (107.0) Extra Mounting Rails, 1 pair 13276-260 13276-760 L-Shaped, Threaded, 33U 12 (5.4) 72”H (1830 mm) Cube-iT Plus - Wall Mounted & Floor-Supported Part Number & Color Width Depth Shipping Weight Door Style in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) White Black 13491-272 13491-772 Metal Door 27.3 (693) 18 (460) 224 (101.6) 13494-272 13494-772 Plexiglass Door 27.3 (693) 18 (460) 212 (96.2) 13492-272 13492-772 Metal Door 27.3 (693) 24 (610) 247 (112.0) 13495-272 13495-772 Plexiglass Door 27.3 (693) 24 (610) 235 (106.6) 13493-272 13493-772 Metal Door 27.3 (693) 30 (760) 274 (124.3) 13496-272 13496-772 Plexiglass Door 27.3 (693) 30 (760) 262 (118.8) Extra Mounting Rails, 1 pair 13276-272 13276-772 L-Shaped, Threaded, 40U 14 (6.4) Depths for Wall-Mounted, Floor-Supported Cabinet in (mm) Cabinet Depth 18 (460) 24 (610) 30 (760) Cabinet Body Depth 12.2 (310) 18.2 (462) 24.2 (615) Maximum Usable Depth 16.8 (427) 22.8 (579) 28.8 (732) 4-13 ® CUBE-iT PLUS CABINET SYSTEM ACCESSORIES ® Cube-iT PLUS Accessories Fan Kit Attaches over the vents in the side of the Cube-iT Plus Cabinet, draws air into the cabinet, pressurizing the cabinet and forcing warm air out of the side vents. Fan Filter Kit reduces dust and can be mounted internally for security or externally for 12804-701 convenience, filter kit and filters sold separately. Includes mounting hardware & cable ties. Available in 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 37 dB Fan with 5’L (1.5 m) attached power cord and NEMA 5-15 plug; and 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 37 dB Fan with 5’L (1.5 m) attached power cord and NEMA 6-15P plug. Light 12805-X01 Light attaches to the bottom, top or side of cabinet and provides 8 Watts of fluorescent light with on/off switch. 115 VAC with 6’ (1.8 m) attached power cord and NEMA 5-15P plug. 1U rack-mount version also available. Termination Block Panel Attaches to rear panel of Cube-iT Plus Cabinet. Supports six 110D-style 100-pair blocks or four 66-style blocks/H89D brackets. Clear finish. Vertical Cable Manager 12803-701 Vertical Cable Managers can be used in 60”H (1520 mm) and 72”H (1830 mm) cabinets only. Openings align with rack-mount units, 2.7”W x 5”D (69 mm x 130 mm) usable interior space. Adjusts front-to-rear within cabinet, fingers manage patch cords. Must be installed before rack-mount equipment. Horizontal Wire Management Bar Attaches to the rear of the equipment mounting rail to secure premise cables after termination on patch panels. Includes mounting hardware and 12 cable ties. 13287-501 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13288-501 12804-701 Fan Kit, 100 CFM, 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, NEMA 5-15P 4 (1.8) 12804-702 Fan Kit, 100 CFM, 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, NEMA 6-15P 4 (1.8) 12805-X01 Filter Kit for Fan 4 (1.8) Vertical Cable Managers listed here are for Cube-iT Plus Cabinets only. 12806-001 Filters for Fan, Box of 6 1 (0.5) 13485-760; for 60”H (1520 mm) 12803-701 Light 3 (1.4) 13485-772; for 72”H (1830 mm) Termination Block Panel 13287-501 4 (1.8) 11.5 x 19 (292 x 480 mm), 66 Block Termination Block Panel 13288-501 4 (1.8) 11.5 x 19 (292 x 480 mm), 110 Block 13485-760 Cable Manager for 60 (1520) Cabinet 9 (4.1) 13485-772 Cable Manager for 72 (1830) Cabinet 10 (4.5) 11837-X01 Horizontal Wire Management Bar 2 (0.9) X=color: 2=White, 7=Black 11837-X01 4-14 ® CUBE-iT PLUS CABINET SYSTEM ACCESSORIES ® Cube-iT PLUS Accessories 45˚ Mounting Bracket Attaches to rear panel to create a 3U x 19” EIA rack-mount space for patch panels. Includes installation hardware. 12796-501 90˚ Mounting Bracket Attaches to rear panel of to create a 2U x 19” EIA vertical rack-mount space. Includes installation hardware. Vertical Mounting Bracket Attaches to the equipment mounting rail and creates a 2U x 19” EIA or 3U x 19” vertical rack-mount space. Includes installation hardware. Supports 75 lb (34 kg). 13285-501 Power Strip Attaches to the bottom, top or side, select straight or locking plug style. 115 VAC 15 Amp or 20 Amp, 8 outlets with 10’L (3 m) power cord and circuit breaker. Includes bracket and installation hardware. 13286-501 Shelves Shelves mount in Cube-iT cabinets. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13286-502 12796-501 45˚ Mounting Bracket, 3U, 1 Pair, Clear 3 (1.4) 13285-501 90˚ Mounting Bracket, 2U, 1 Pair, Clear 3 (1.4) 13286-501 Vertical Mounting Bracket, 2U, 1 Pair, Clear 3 (1.4) 13286-502 Vertical Mounting Bracket, 3U, 1 Pair, Clear 3 (1.4) 12820-701 15 Amp Power Strip, NEMA 5-15P 4 (1.8) 12820-702 15 Amp Power Strip, NEMA L5-15P 4 (1.8) 12820-701 12820-703 15 Amp Power Strip, Surge-Protected, NEMA 5-15P 4 (1.8) 12820-704 15 Amp Power Strip, Surge-Protected, NEMA L5-20P 4 (1.8) 12820-705 20 Amp Power Strip, NEMA 5-20P 4 (1.8) 12820-706 20 Amp Power Strip, NEMA L5-20P 4 (1.8) 12820-707 20 Amp Power Strip,Surge-Protected, NEMA 5-20P 4 (1.8) 12291-701 12820-708 20 Amp Power Strip,Surge-Protected, NEMA L5-20P 4 (1.8) 10”D (250 mm) Shelf 12291-X01 4 (1.8) 2U x 17.25 (438.2), Holds 40 lb (18.1 kg) 15”D (380 mm) Shelf 40074-X00 6 (2.7) 3U x 17.25 (438.2), Holds 50 lb (22.7 kg) 40074-700 4-15 THINLINE II WALL-MOUNT CABINET ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet The space-saving ThinLine II safely secures 19” rack-mount network equipment with minimal intrusion into the room — perfect for tight areas and high-traffic places such as classrooms and retail stores. The ThinLine II maximizes interior space using a distinctive equipment mounting rail system. Individual rails can be easily rotated for horizontal or vertical mounting and then bolted into place, making patch panel punchdown easier. The cabinet can hold a server, switch, horizontal cable manager, patch panel, fiber service loop and fiber-optic patch panel — with room to accommodate additional mounting needs. An easy-to-remove top panel slides in and out of position (without tools) using a spring button release. In addition, the 26”H (660 mm) cabinet can be mounted so that the removable “top” panel becomes a side panel. A 4” x 6” (100 mm x 150 mm) opening in the rear of the cabinet and knockouts sized 3/4” and 1-1/2” allow cable entry and exit. Multiple cable ® tie-down points in rear panel and included Saf-T-Grip straps secure cables safely. • Door features rounded edges and corners and can be mounted to open from either right or left • Removable top panel provides direct access to equipment without disturbing other devices • Multiple sets of knockouts allow flexibility in cable organization • Louvers and fan accessory provide ventilation • Cabinet includes a 2” x 4” (50 mm x 100 mm) junction box to hold an optional surge-suppressed duplex outlet, eliminating the need for a power strip ThinLine II can hold a server, switch, horizontal • Made of steel cable manager, patch panel, fiber service loop and • Ships fully assembled with mounting hardware fiber-optic patch panel — with room to • Static load rating is 100 lb (45.4 kg) accommodate additional mounting needs. Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 26”H (660 mm) ThinLine II 13050-X11 26 x 26 x 5, 2U, (660 x 660 x 130) 47 (21.3) 13050-X12 26 x 26 x 8.5, 4U, (660 x 660 x 216) 54 (24.5) 13050-X13 26 x 26 x 12, 6U, (660 x 660 x 300) 60 (27.2) 36”H (910 mm) ThinLine II 13050-X21 36 x 26 x 5, 2U, (910 x 660 x 130) 60 (27.2) 13050-X22 36 x 26 x 8.5, 4U, (910 x 660 x 216) 68 (30.8) 13050-X23 36 x 26 x 12, 6U, (910 x 660 x 300) 76 (34.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 4-16 THINLINE II WALL-MOUNT CABINET ACCESSORIES Fiber Slack Manager Panel The Fiber Slack Manager Panel provides both fiber slack management and a mounting surface for a small fiber manager or fiber-optic patch panel. Secured under the outermost mounting units, the panel takes up no mounting space within the cabinet. It attaches to the cabinet with standard #12-24 rack screws (included in the ThinLine II Cabinet’s hardware kit). Shipping Part Description Color Weight Number lb (kg) 12955-219 19” Rack-Mount White 2 (0.9) 12955-719 19” Rack-Mount Black 2 (0.9) Surge-Suppressed Duplex Receptacle The cabinet can be easily configured with two surge-suppressed outlets, eliminating the need for a power strip. ThinLine II includes an electrical junction box that can be mounted on either side of the cabinet. A 1/2” or 3/4” knockout is provided. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12934-001 Receptacle, 125V, 15A 2 (0.9) Intelligent Fan Kit The ThinLine II Intelligent Fan Kit uses a solid state temperature control to vary fan speed from an ultra quiet low speed at low air temperature through increasingly higher speeds as temperature rises. Shipping Part 13051-001 Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13051-001 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 4U/6U Cabinets 2 (0.9) 13051-001 Intelligent Fan Specifications: 13051-002 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 2U Cabinet 2 (0.9) Maximum Fan Speed Minimum Fan Speed (air temp 104° or greater) (air temp 77° or less) 120 CFM (Free Air) 65 CFM (Free Air) 51 dB (Noise Level) 34 dB (Noise Level) 13051-002 Intelligent Fan Specifications: Minimum Fan Speed Maximum Fan Speed (air temp 77° or less) (air temp 113° or greater) 36 CFM (Free Air) 49 CFM (Free Air) 28 dB (Noise Level) 33 dB (Noise Level) 4-17 SILVER FRAME WALL-MOUNT CABINET Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet The Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet provides an elegant and premium quality enclosure for protecting and securing your rack-mount equipment. Uses less space than conventional floor racks or enclosures. Unique dual- locking hinge design provides convenient front and rear access. With the 5.5” x 10.3” (140 mm x 262 mm) cable pass-through port in the center of the back panel, it is possible to route cable through the wall directly into the mounted cabinet for a more secure installation. Rack-mounting surface depth is adjustable front to back 7-1/2” (191 mm) for 14” (360 mm) depth and 16-1/2” (419 mm) for 24” (610 mm) depth. 36” (910 mm) usable mounting height (20U). Universal 5/8”-5/8”-1/2” (15.9 mm -15.9 mm -12.7 mm) alternating hole pattern on both front and back sides. • Unique dual locking hinge design • Strong, lightweight aluminum construction • 19” rack width • Vented top and bottom for optimum airflow • Adjustable rack-mounting surface • Includes (50) #12-24 mounting screws; black painted units ship with black screws, white units ship with zinc screws • Installation hardware included: 1/4” lag screw for backboard or stud ® mounting and Saf-T-Grip Cable Management Straps for cable routing • Ships fully assembled • Supports up to 150 lb (68 kg) Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) Silver Frame Cabinet w/Smoked Plexiglass Doors 11680-X19 41 x 24.3 x 14 (1040 x 617 x 360) 61 (27.7) 11685-X19 41 x 24.3 x 24 (1040 x 617 x 610) 71 (32.2) Silver Frame Cabinet with Solid Metal Doors 12680-X19 41 x 24.3 x 14 (1040 x 617 x 360) 61 (27.7) Usable Height: 41” (1040 mm) = 36” (910 mm)/20U 12685-X19 41 x 24.3 x 24 (1040 x 617 x 610) 71 (32.2) Usable Depth: 14” (360 mm) = 10.19” (258.8 mm) X=color: 2=White, 7=Black 24” (610 mm) = 20.19 (512.8 mm) Usable Width: 24.3” (617.mm) = 19” (480 mm) Fan/Filter Kit Fan pressurizes enclosure, forcing warmer air out top vents. Fan is rated for 200 CFM and has an attached 5’6”L (1.6 m) power cord with NEMA 5-15P plug. (37 dB noise level) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11755-003 200 CFM, 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz, NEMA 5-15P 3 (1.4) 11222-001 Replacement Filters, Set of 4 1 (0.5) 4-18 CABLE MANAGEMENT PRODUCTS Cable Managers & Accessories ® Evolution Cable Management Page 5-3 ® Velocity Cable Management Page 5-8 ® Velocity Standard Pack Page 5-12 Vertical Cable Management Page 5-13 Horizontal Cable Management Page 5-26 Saf-T-Grip Straps Page 5-32 Cable Manager Accessories Page 5-33 CABLE MANAGEMENT PRODUCTS Connecting switches and servers with the right cabling is crucial to maximizing uptime, especially during system changes and updates. That’s why it’s important to keep your system organized with CPI Cable Management Products, an end-to-end solution that makes it easier to identify, access and sort out all the cables and cords in your network. CPI’s Cable Management Products help untangle any configuration and increase cable performance with systems that run within, between and around racks and cabinets. Rack-mount cable managers provide additional support for cable bundles by defining cable pathways, a critical step in achieving better cable organization. To adapt to your data center needs, CPI Cable Management Products have been designed in a large variety of widths, heights and depths. They are available in several horizontal and vertical sections of various dimensions, utilizing rack-mount unit finger guides and/or rings, and feature door panels to hide and secure cable. CPI Cable Management Products include: • High-quality construction and design • Proper cable bend radii to ensure maximum performance of data transmission • Decreased potential cable damage • Easy cable moves, adds and changes • Prevention of tangled cords • Meets ANSI/TIA/EIA installation guidelines for Category 5e/6/6a and fiber cables • Provides for a professional, attractive installation 5-2 ® EVOLUTION VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Evolution Cable Management ® CPI Evolution Cable Management provides an engineered solution for managing high-density cabling applications on open two-post and four-post CPI Rack Systems, delivering increased performance to match the demands of data center applications. Featuring easy-to-use doors with styling that complements the CPI ® TeraFrame Family of Cabinets; Evolution Cable Management provides innovative interior features to help maximize the capacity and utility of vertical and horizontal cable management. Evolution Vertical Cable Manager: Use vertical managers on the sides of racks to manage premise cables, patch cords and jumper cords. Vertical managers include plastic T-shaped cable guides with openings that align with each rack-mount unit space on the rack. Rounded edges on the cable guides and the top of the manager protect cables as they enter or exit the interior storage space. On double-sided managers, Movable Mid- Sections allow personalized placement of Cable Distribution Spools and other cable management accessories to effectively route patch cords. Use accessory Fiber Segregation Kits to create a dedicated internal channel for fiber cabling or accessory Cable Lashing Bar Kits to anchor premise cables closer to the Movable Mid-Sections to increase capacity. The Movable Mid-Sections can also be positioned for a 50/50, 40/60 or 60/40 front/rear split of the internal cable management space to match cabling requirements. The door is secured by a spring-loaded two-point latch controlled by a single knob; simply turn the knob on the right or left side of the door and pull to swing the door open or turn both knobs to remove the door. The door attaches to the base and top of the cable manager, not the cable guides, and opens wider than previous designs for better access to cables. Vertical managers are available in single-sided, double-sided and combination configurations in five widths to match cabling requirements. Features: • Improved T-shaped cable guides decrease deflection when loaded with cables; especially important when deploying Cat 6a cable • Rounded edges on the cable guides protect cables as they enter and exit the storage space • Door opens to the right or left with a single knob • Rigid trough minimizes movement when installed on the end of a row of racks; solid construction with a full rectangular base supports large bundles of heavy cables • Openings in the back of the single-sided and middle of the double-sided managers allow cables to pass easily front to rear • Double-sided managers have Movable Mid-Sections that allow for flexibility in the volume of cable management space provided in the front and rear portions of the cable manager • Various cable management accessories are available to divide the interior space and manage cable slack For Horizontal Evolution Cable Management, see page 5-26. 5-3 ® EVOLUTION VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Evolution g1 Single-Sided Vertical Cable Manager • Rigid cable manager with 1U spaced plastic T-shaped cable guides (fingers) • Three Fixed Accessory Panels at the back of the cable manager • Three large Cable Distribution Spools included with 10”, 12” and 15” (250 mm, 300 mm and 380 mm) wide managers Shipping Single-Sided Part 7’H (2.1 m) Weight Vertical Cable Number W x D - in (mm) lb (kg) Manager also 35511-703 6 x 13.2 (150 x 335), Black 57 (25.9) available in 6’H (1.8 m) P/N 35512-703 8 x 13.2 (200 x 335), Black 61 (27.7) XXXXX-701 and 35513-703 10 x 13.2 (250 x 335), Black 67 (30.4) 8’H (2.4 m) P/N XXXXX-715. 35514-703 12 x 13.2 (300 x 335), Black 73 (33.1) 35515-703 15 x 13.2 (380 x 335), Black 83 (37.6) Evolution g2 Double-Sided Vertical Cable Manager • Rigid cable manager with 1U spaced plastic T-shaped cable guides (fingers) • Three Movable Mid-Sections; creates 50/50, 60/40 or 40/60 interior split • Three large Cable Distribution Spools included with 10”, 12” and 15” (250 Double-Sided mm, 300 mm and 380 mm) wide managers Vertical Cable Manager also Shipping Part 7’H (2.1 m) available in 6’H Weight Number W x D - in (mm) lb (kg) (1.8 m) P/N XXXXX-701 and 35521-703 6 x 24.5 (150 x 622), Black 94 (42.6) 8’H (2.4 m) P/N 35522-703 8 x 24.5 (200 x 622), Black 101 (45.8) XXXXX-715. 35523-703 10 x 24.5 (250 x 622), Black 110 (49.9) 35524-703 12 x 24.5 (300 x 622), Black 118 (53.5) 35525-703 15 x 24.5 (380 x 622), Black 129 (58.5) Evolution g3 Combination Vertical Cable Manager • Rear Cable Rings with spin-open latches on back (no door/cover) • Three large Cable Distribution Spools included with 10”, 12” and 15” (250 mm, 300 mm and 380 mm) wide managers Combination Shipping Part 7’H (2.1 m) Vertical Cable Weight Number W x D - in (mm) Manager also lb (kg) available in 6’H 35571-703 6 x 20.2 (150 x 513), Black 68 (30.8) (1.8 m) P/N XXXXX-701 and 35572-703 8 x 20.2 (200 x 513), Black 72 (32.7) 8’H (2.4 m) P/N 35573-703 10 x 20.2 (250 x 513), Black 78 (35.4) XXXXX-715. 35574-703 12 x 20.2 (300 x 513), Black 84 (38.1) 35575-703 15 x 20.2 (380 x 513), Black 94 (42.6) 5-4 ® EVOLUTION VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Evolution Cable Management Accessories Fiber Segregation Kit Creates a separate pathway for fiber cables and patch cords inside Evolution vertical managers. The number of kits allowed per manager depends on the position of the Movable Mid-Section in double-sided managers and the width of the vertical cable manager (see table below). Each kit includes two 20.5”H (521 mm) J-shaped steel mounting brackets, eight plastic Fiber Segregation Spools and mounting hardware. The Fiber Segregation Spools turn 360° with stops at 90° allowing easy access to fiber cables. The assembled bracket is 3.8”W x 4.3”D 35475-701 (97 mm x 109 mm) and includes mounting hardware. Cable Lashing Bar Kit Cable Lashing Bar Kit provides tie points for cables inside Evolution vertical managers. Use up to six cable lashing bars (front/rear) in 6”W (150 mm) vertical cable managers and up to ten (front/rear) in the 8”W (200 mm), 10”W (250 mm), 12”W (300 mm) and 15”W (300 mm) vertical cable managers. Each kit includes four round .23” (5.7 mm) diameter 20.6”L (524 mm) steel lashing bars and mounting hardware. Cable Divider Bar Kit Provides tie points for cables inside the Evolution Vertical Cable Manager and divides the interior of the cable manager to create multiple pathways for cables. Each kit includes four Cable Divider Bars; 5.75”H x 1”W x 20”L (146 mm x 25 mm x 510 mm), and mounting hardware. Divider Bars are welded steel construction consisting of a vertical cable lashing bar and two U-shaped cable dividers. Use 35473-001 side-by-side to create multiple pathways in 10”W (250 mm) or wider cable managers. Floor Bracket Floor Bracket secures the base of the Evolution vertical managers to the floor when located at the end of a row of equipment racks. Light-duty, steel bracket with attachment hole sized for 1/4” hardware, packs of 12, order separately. Shipping Part 35503-701 Description Weight Number lb (kg) 35475-701 Fiber Segregation Kit, Back 6 (2.7) 35473-001 Cable Lashing Bar Kit, Zinc 2 (0.9) 35503-701 Cable Divider Bar Kit, Black 3 (1.4) 35506-701 Floor Bracket, Black 3 (1.4) 35506-701 Maximum Number of Fiber Segregation Kits Single-Sided and all Cable Manager Double-Sided with 60/40 other Double-Sided Width in (mm) Front/Rear Split (60% side) positions 6 (150) 1 0 8 (200) 1 1 10 (250) 2 1 See Cable Fill Tables at 12 (300) 2 2 www.chatsworth.com/cablefill 15 (380) 2 2 5-5 ® EVOLUTION VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Evolution Cable Management Accessories Solid Rear Panel Manager Encloses the rear of the Evolution g1 Single-Sided Vertical Cable Manager. Hangs from the top of the manager or attaches to the back of the Fixed Accessory Panels. Install Cable Distribution Spools and any additional Fixed Accessory Panels before attaching the Solid Rear Panel; does not block attachment of other accessories inside the manager. Sold individually or in pairs, includes hardware. Solid Mid Panel Covers and divides the front and rear of the Evolution g2 Double-Sided Vertical Cable Manager. Easy installation; attaches to the back of the Movable Mid- Sections inside the manager. Does not block attachment of additional Movable Mid-Sections or other cable management accessories inside the manager. Includes 355101-702 one Moveable Mid-Section for 7’H (2.1m) manager and two for 8’H (1.8 m) manager. Sold individually or in packs of four, includes hardware. Solid Side Panel Manager Covers the side of a Evolution g2 Double-Sided Vertical Cable Manager located at the end of a row of equipment racks. Easy tool-less installation; hangs from the top of the manager and attaches at the bottom of the manager with included snap-in hardware. Sold individually or in pairs. Description Shipping Part Height - 7’H (2.1 m) Weight Number Width - in (mm) lb (kg) 35501-702 Solid Rear Panel, 6 (150), Each, Black 11 (5.0) 35501-705 Solid Rear Panel, 8 (200), Each, Black 11 (5.0) 35501-708 Solid Rear Panel, 10 (250), Each, Black 11 (5.0) 35501-711 Solid Rear Panel, 12 (300), Each, Black 11 (5.0) 35501-714 Solid Rear Panel, 15 (380), Each, Black 11 (5.0) 35501-752 Solid Rear Panel, 6 (150), Pair, Black 42 (19.1) 35501-755 Solid Rear Panel, 8 (200), Pair, Black 42 (19.1) 35497-702 35501-758 Solid Rear Panel, 10 (250), Pair, Black 42 (19.1) 35501-761 Solid Rear Panel, 12 (300), Pair, Black 42 (19.1) 35501-764 Solid Rear Panel, 15 (380), Pair, Black 42 (19.1) 35497-702 Solid Mid Panel, 6 (150), Each, Black 16 (7.3) 35497-705 Solid Mid Panel, 8 (200), Each, Black 16 (7.3) 35497-708 Solid Mid Panel, 10 (250), Each, Black 16 (7.3) 35497-711 Solid Mid Panel, 12 (300), Each, Black 16 (7.3) 35497-714 Solid Mid Panel, 15 (380), Each, Black 16 (7.3) 35497-752 Solid Mid Panel, 6 (150), Pack of 4, Black 62 (28.1) 35497-755 Solid Mid Panel, 8 (200), Pack of 4, Black 62 (28.1) 35497-758 Solid Mid Panel, 10 (250), Pack of 4, Black 62 (28.1) 35497-761 Solid Mid Panel, 12 (300), Pack of 4, Black 62 (28.1) 35497-764 Solid Mid Panel, 15 (380) Pack of 4, Black 62 (28.1) 35502-702 35502-702 Solid Side Panel Manager, Each 19 (8.6) Accessories listed on this page are available in 35502-752 Solid Side Panel Manager, Pair 35 (15.9) both 6’ (1.8) and 8’ (2.4) heights. 5-6 ® EVOLUTION VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Evolution Cable Management Accessories Fixed Accessory Panel Kit for Evolution g1 Single-Sided Manager Kit includes three Fixed Accessory Panels for the Evolution g1 Single-Sided Vertical Cable Manager. Select to match the width of the cable manager, includes installation hardware. Movable Mid-Section Kit for Evolution g2 Double-Sided Manager Kit includes three Movable Mid-Sections for the Evolution g2 Double-Sided Vertical Cable Manager. Select to match the width, includes installation hardware. 35492-702 Cable Distribution Spools Spools provide slack management and strain relief for patch cords and jumper cables inside Evolution Vertical Cable Managers. Three large cable distribution spools are included with each 10”, 12” and 15” wide (250 mm, 300 mm and 380 mm) vertical cable manager (will not fit other sizes). Attaches inside vertical cable managers. Spools are 2.75” (69.9 mm) in diameter and 5.9”L (150 mm) and made from black plastic, each kit includes four spools and mounting hardware Cable Distribution Spool Spacer Kit Spool Spacer Kit is used with the Cable Distribution Spool to offset the spool so 35493-702 that the front edge of the spool is close to the front edge of cable management fingers in the Evolution g2 Double-Sided Cable Managers. Use in 10”, 12” and 15” (250 mm, 300 mm and 380 mm) wide managers; each manager includes three spools and three spacers. Attaches to the Movable Mid-Sections inside double- sided Evolution g2 Vertical Cable Managers. Use one Cable Distribution Spool Spacer with each Cable Distribution Spool when the Movable Mid-Sections in the cable manager are set for a 50/50 front/rear split. Use two Cable Distribution Spool Spacers with each Cable Distribution Spool when the Movable Mid-Sections in the cable manager are set for a 60/40 front/rear split; stack both of the Cable Distribution Spool Spacers on the 60% side. Spacers are 2.8” (71 mm) in diameter 15008-001 and 2.5”H (64 mm) and made from black plastic, each kit includes eight spacers and mounting hardware. Shipping Part Description Weight Number Width - in (mm) lb (kg) 35492-701 For 6 (150) Evolution g1 Single-Sided 3 (1.4) 35492-702 For 8 (200) Evolution g1 Single-Sided 4 (1.8) 35505-001 35492-703 For 10 (250) Evolution g1 Single-Sided 5 (2.3) 35492-704 For 12 (300) Evolution g1 Single-Sided 6 (2.7) 35492-705 For 15 (380) Evolution g1 Single-Sided 7 (3.2) 35493-701 For 6 (150) Evolution g2 Double-Sided 4 (1.8) 35493-702 For 8 (200) Evolution g2 Double-Sided 5 (2.3) 35493-703 For 10 (250) Evolution g2 Double-Sided 5 (2.3) 35493-704 For 12 (300) Evolution g2 Double-Sided 7 (3.2) 35493-705 For 15 (380) Evolution g2 Double-Sided 8 (3.6) 15008-001 Cable Distribution Spools, Pack of 4 2 (0.9) 35505-001 Cable Distribtuoin Spool Spacer Kit 1 (0.5) Color is black. 5-7 ® VELOCITY CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Velocity Cable Management ® CPI’s Velocity Cable Management is an economical cable management solution for everyday use in telecommunication rooms, equipment rooms and lab spaces and creates a complete vertical and horizontal pathway for premise cabling and patch cords on CPI Rack Systems. Vertical Cable Managers: Velocity Cable Management includes single- and double-sided vertical cable managers available in four widths and three heights and can ship unassembled in compact packaging to reduce shipping costs and storage space, providing easier staging and handling on the job site with less packaging to remove. No tools are required to assemble the cable manager. The components simply snap together and the manager bolts to the side of the rack with included hardware. The vertical cable manager features a large cross section to maximize internal cable management space. To simplify cable management, T-shaped cable guides and openings on the sides of the manager align with each rack-mount unit and have rounded edges to protect cables from snags. Snap-on covers are included and swing open to the right or left to provide easy access and protect cables when closed. The manager has openings in the body which allow cables to pass easily front-to-rear. Add the accessory Cable Spool Kit to manage fiber, the Cable Lashing Bar Kit to secure large cable bundles or the Cable Ring Kit to create a rear pathway on the back of single-sided managers. • Vertical managers for open two-post and four-post CPI Rack Systems that have 3”D (80 mm) mounting channels; do not use with 6” Deep Standard Rack or SeismicFrame Two-Post Rack. • Packaging: - Each vertical cable manager ships unassembled in a single carton - Each horizontal cable manager ships fully assembled in a single carton • Material: - Vertical cable manager has steel mid panels, splice plates and plastic sides; covers on 3.6”W (91 mm) and 6”W (152 mm) managers are plastic; covers on 10”W (254 mm) and 12”W (305 mm) managers are steel with plastic hinges - Horizontal cable manager is plastic • Finish: Black epoxy-polyester hybrid powder coat paint on steel parts; black plastic Snaps together: For Velocity Horizontal Cable Management, see page 5-26. 5-8 ® VELOCITY CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Velocity Single-Sided Vertical Cable Managers Single-Sided Vertical Cable Managers include: • Four vertical side sections with T-shaped cable guides spaced 1U apart • Four mid panels with attachment points for cable management accessories • Two splice plates used to assemble the top and bottom side sections • Two half-height covers that snap onto the T-shaped cable guides • Eight M8 hex bolts, washers and hex flange nuts to secure cable managers to the rack Velocity Single-Sided Vertical Cable Managers Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) For 6’H (1.8 m), 38U Racks 13901-701 70 x 3.6 x 9.7 (1778 x 91 x 246) 17 (7.7) 13902-701 70 x 6 x 9.8 (1778 x 152 x 249) 18 (8.2) 13904-701 70 x 10 x 10.3 (1778 x 254 x 262) 30 (13.6) 13905-701 70 x 12 x 10.4 (1778 x 305 x 264) 32 (14.5) For 7’H (2.1 m), 45U Racks 13901-703 80.5 x 3.6 x 9.7 (2045 x 91 x 246) 18 (8.2) Note: 3.6”W & 6”W ship with extruded 13902-703 80.5 x 6 x 9.8 (2045 x 152 x 249) 20 (9.1) plastic doors; 10”W & 12”W ship with metal doors. 13904-703 80.5 x 10 x 10.3 (2045 x 254 x 262) 32 (14.5) 13905-703 80.5 x 12 x 10.4 (2045 x 305 x 264) 34 (15.4) For 8’H (2.4 m), 51U Racks 13901-715 91 x 3.6 x 9.7 (2311 91 x 246) 19 (8.6) 13902-715 91 x 6 x 9.8 (2311 x 152 x 249) 21 (9.5) 13904-715 91 x 10 x 10.3 (2311x 254 x 262) 34 (15.4) 13905-715 91 x 12 x 10.4 (2311 x 305 x 264) 36 (16.3) Color is black. Velocity Single-Sided Vertical Cable Managers are 9.5”D (241 mm) without doors. The overall depth listed in the order table varies due to the bevel on the door which differs slightly with width. Usable depth is 7.5” (191 mm). Usable width is 1.3” (33 mm) less than overall width. ® Velocity Cable Managers are easy to ship and store - compact packaging requires less storage space, reduces waste and is easier and more cost-efficient to ship. See Cable Fill Tables at www.chatsworth.com/cablefill 5-9 ® VELOCITY CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Velocity Double-Sided Vertical Cable Manager Double-Sided Vertical Cable Manager includes: • Four vertical side sections with T-shaped cable guides spaced 1U apart • Four mid panels with attachment points for cable management accessories • Two splice plates used to assemble the top and bottom side sections • Four half-height covers that snap onto the T-shaped cable guides • Eight M8 hex bolts, washers and hex flange nuts to secure cable managers to the rack Velocity Double-Sided Vertical Cable Managers Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) For 6’H (1.8 m), 38U Racks 13911-701 70 x 3.6 x 16.4 (1778 x 91 x 417) 23 (10.4) 13912-701 70 x 6 x 16.6 (1778 x 152 x 422) 26 (11.8) 13914-701 70 x 10 x 17.5 (1778 x 254 x 445) 37 (16.8) 13915-701 70 x 12 x 17.8 (1778 x 305 x 446) 40 (18.1) For 7’H (2.1 m), 45U Racks 13911-703 80.5 x 3.6 x 16.4 (2045 x 91 x 417) 25 (11.3) 13912-703 80.5 x 6 x 16.6 (2045 x 152 x 422) 28 (12.7) Note: 3.6”W & 6”W ship with extruded 13914-703 80.5 x 10 x 17.5 ( 2045 x 254 x 445) 40 (18.1) plastic doors; 10”W & 12”W ship with metal doors. 13915-703 80.5 x 12 x 17.8 (2045 x 305 x 446) 43 (19.5) For 8’H (2.4 m), 51U Racks 13911-715 91 x 3.6 x 16.4 (2311 x 91 x 417) 27 (12.2) 13912-715 91 x 6 x 16.6 (2311 x 152 x 422) 30 (13.6) 13914-715 91 x 10 x 17.5 (2311 x 254 x 445) 44 (20.0) 13915-715 91 x 12 x 17.8 (2311 x 305 x 464) 47 (21.3) Color is black. Velocity Double-Sided Vertical Cable Managers are 16 “D (406 mm) without doors. The overall depth listed in the order table varies due to the bevel on the door which differs slightly with width. Usable depth in the front of the manager is 7.5” (191 mm). Usable depth at the rear of the manager is 5.5” (140 mm). Usable width is 1.3” (33 mm) less than overall width. See Cable Fill Tables at www.chatsworth.com/cablefill 5-10 ® VELOCITY CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Velocity Cable Management Accessories Cable Ring Kit Creates a separate cable pathway on the back of a Velocity Single-Sided Vertical Cable Manager for premise cables. Attaches to the sides with included hardware. Match the kit to the width and height of the vertical cable managers; one kit per manager. Rings are C-shaped, 3.0”H x 7.7”D (76 mm x 196 mm), made from aluminum and painted black; latch is black plastic and spins open to provide access to cables. Cable opening on 3.6”W (91 mm) rings is 1.4”W (36 mm); cable opening on other rings is 3.8”W (97 mm). Each kit includes multiple rings and mounting hardware. The kit for 6’ (1.8 m) include six rings, the kit for 7’ (2.1 m) includes seven rings and the kit for the 8’ (2.4 m) includes eight rings. 13934-7XX Cable Spool Kit The Cable Spool Kit includes four small cable spools to provide slack management and strain relief for patch cords and jumper cables inside the Velocity Vertical Cable Managers. Attaches to the mid panel with included hardware. Use in 6”W (152 mm) or wider vertical cable managers; one kit per side. Spools are 2” (51 mm) in diameter and 6”L (152 mm) and made from aluminum; painted black. Each kit includes four spools and mounting hardware. Cable Lashing Bar Kit 13935-701 Provides tie points for cables inside Velocity Vertical Cable Managers. Attaches to the mid panel with included hardware. Use in 6”W (152 mm) or wider vertical cable managers; one kit per side. Bars are .23” (5.7 mm) in diameter; two bars are 23.7”L (602 mm); four bars are 16.6”L (422 mm), made from steel; zinc-plated, silver-colored. Each kit includes six lashing bars and mounting hardware. Description Shipping Part H x W Weight Number ft (m) x in (mm) lb (kg) 13934-716 Cable Ring Kit for 6 (1.8) x 3.6 (91) Manager 8 (3.6) 13934-717 Cable Ring Kit for 7 (2.1) x 3.6 (91) Manager 9 (4.1) 13934-718 Cable Ring Kit for 8 (2.4) x 3.6 (91) Manager 11 (5.0) 13934-726 Cable Ring Kit for 6 (1.8) x 6 (152) Manager 9 (4.1) 13934-727 Cable Ring Kit for 7 (2.1) x 6 (152) Manager 11 (5.0) 13928-001 13934-728 Cable Ring Kit for 8 (2.4) x 6 (152) Manager 12 (5.4) 13934-746 Cable Ring Kit for 6 (1.8) x 10 (254) Manager 12 (5.4) 13934-747 Cable Ring Kit for 7 (2.1) x 10 (254) Manager 14 (6.4) 13934-748 Cable Ring Kit for 8 (2.4) x 10 (254) Manager 15 (6.8) 13934-756 Cable Ring Kit for 6 (1.8) x 12 (305) Manager 14 (6.4) 13934-757 Cable Ring Kit for 7 (2.1) x 12 (305) Manager 16 (7.3) 13934-758 Cable Ring Kit for 8 (2.4) x 12 (305) Manager 18 (8.2) 13935-701 Cable Spool Kit, Pack of 4, Zinc 2 (0.9) 13928-001 Cable Lashing Bar Kit, Black 2 (0.9) Cable ring kits are Black. 5-11 ® VELOCITY STANDARD PACK ® Velocity Standard Pack ® The Velocity Standard Pack is an easy to use solution for managing equipment and cabling at the cross connect. It includes one CPI Standard Rack, a concrete floor installation kit and a single or double-sided Velocity vertical cable manager packaged in a single carton. The Velocity Standard Pack is offered in four variations, with a single-sided or double-sided cable manager in either 3.6”W (91 mm) or 6”W (152 mm). Cable managers can be mounted on either side of the standard rack. • Numbered rack-mount spaces on the Standard Rack are printed on the equipment mounting channels providing the installer an easy way of positioning equipment in planned spaces. Rack-mount unit • Cable openings in Velocity vertical cable managers align with rack-mount marks printed on rack units on the rack allowing cables to exit by rack-mount units. • Cable openings have rounded edges to protect cable and will not deform or break. • Cover snaps on and opens to the right or left for easy access to cables during moves, adds or changes. Velocity Standard Pack includes: • (1) 45U x 19” Standard Rack ® • (1) Single or double-sided Velocity vertical cable manager • (1) Rack installation kit Description Shipping Part Width Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) (1) Standard Rack, 45U x 19”EIA, UL, Black ® (1) Velocity Single-Sided Vertical Cable 57011-703 Manager, 3.6”W (91 mm), Black 47 (21.3) (1) Rack Installation Kit for concrete floor, 1/2” hardware, Zinc Side cable openings align with rack-mount (1) Standard Rack, 45U x 19”EIA, UL, Black units on the rack ® (1) Velocity Double-Sided Vertical Cable 57012-703 Manager, 3.6”W (91 mm), Black 60 (27.2) (1) Rack Installation Kit for concrete floor, 1/2” hardware, Zinc (1) Standard Rack, 45U x 19”EIA, UL, Black ® (1) Velocity Single-Sided Vertical Cable 57013-703 Manager, 6”W (152 mm), Black 50 (22.7) (1) Rack Installation Kit for concrete floor, 1/2” hardware, Zinc (1) Standard Rack, 45U x 19”EIA, UL, Black ® (1) Velocity Double-Sided Vertical Cable 57014-703 Manager, 6”W ( 152mm), Black 68 (30.8) (1) Rack Installation Kit for concrete floor, 1/2” hardware, Zinc See Section 1 for rack shelf accessories. 5-12 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT MCS Master Cabling Section The MCS Master Cabling Section virtually eliminates the need for horizontal cable managers by providing frequent 1U spacing of the cable guides that aligns precisely with the rack spacing. Includes innovative, rigid aluminum SwitchGate Door/Cover that hides and conceals cable. A handle is included on the outside of the door/cover making removal and installation even easier. • Extra-wide, contoured cable guides provide smooth movement and meet UL 94V-O Flame Resistant standards • SwitchGate Door/Cover is easily switched from right to left opening and can be removed • Double-Sided MCS Master Cabling Sections have edge-protected ® pass through ports and vertical slots for optional Saf-T-Grip straps • 10”W (250 mm) version includes (4) Cable Distribution Spools • Mounting hardware and doors are included Double-Sided MCS Shown on rack with • Attach to Standard Racks, Universal Racks or QuadraRacks shown with door open Jumper Tray Shipping Shipping Part Height Depth Part Height Depth Weight Weight Number ft (m) in (mm) Number ft (m) in (mm) lb (kg) lb (kg) 4.4”W (112 mm) Single-Sided 4.4”W (112 mm) Double-Sided 30091-X00 5.6 (1.7) 8.08 (205.2) 14 (6.4) 30094-X00 5.6 (1.7) 16.15 (410.2) 34 (15.4) 30091-X01 6 (1.8) 8.08 (205.2) 15 (6.8) 30094-X01 6 (1.8) 16.15 (410.2) 36 (16.3) 30091-X02 6.6 (2.0) 8.08 (205.2) 16 (7.3) 30094-X02 6.6 (2.0) 16.15 (410.2) 38 (17.2) 30091-X03 7 (2.1) 8.08 (205.2) 17 (7.7) 30094-X03 7 (2.1) 16.15 (410.2) 40 (18.1) 30091-X05 7.6 (2.3) 8.08 (205.2) 18 (8.2) 30094-X05 7.6 (2.3) 16.15 (410.2) 42(19.1) 30091-X15 8 (2.4) 8.08 (205.2) 20 (9.1) 30094-X15 8 (2.4) 16.15 (410.2) 45 (20.4) 30091-X08 9 (2.7) 8.08 (205.2) 22 (10.0) 30094-X08 9 (2.7) 16.15 (410.2) 49 (22.2) 6”W (150 mm) Single-Sided 6”W (150 mm) Double-Sided 30092-X00 5.6 (1.7) 8.08 (205.2) 16 (7.3) 30095-X00 5.6 (1.7) 16.15 (410.2) 38 (17.2) 30092-X01 6 (1.8) 8.08 (205.2) 17 (7.7) 30095-X01 6 (1.8) 16.15 (410.2) 40 (18.1) 30092-X02 6.6 (2.0) 8.08 (205.2) 19 (8.6) 30095-X02 6.6 (2.0) 16.15 (410.2) 43 (19.5) 30092-X03 7 (2.1) 8.08 (205.2) 20 (9.1) 30095-X03 7 (2.1) 16.15 (410.2) 45 (20.4) 30092-X05 7.6 (2.3) 8.08 (205.2) 21 (9.5) 30095-X05 7.6 (2.3) 16.15 (410.2) 48 (21.8) 30092-X15 8 (2.4) 8.08 (205.2) 23 (10.4) 30095-X15 8 (2.4) 16.15 (410.2) 51 (23.1) 30092-X08 9 (2.7) 8.08 (205.2) 25 (11.3) 30095-X08 9 (2.7) 16.15 (410.2) 56 (25.4) 10”W (250 mm) Single-Sided 10”W (250 mm) Double-Sided 30093-X00 5.6 (1.7) 8.08 (205.2) 38 (17.2) 30096-X00 5.6 (1.7) 16.15 (410.2) 44 (20.0) 30093-X01 6 (1.8) 8.08 (205.2) 40 (18.1) 30096-X01 6 (1.8) 16.15 (410.2) 47 (21.3) 30093-X02 6.6 (2.0) 8.08 (205.2) 43 (19.5) 30096-X02 6.6 (2.0) 16.15 (410.2) 50 (22.7) 30093-X03 7 (2.1) 8.08 (205.2) 45 (20.4) 30096-X03 7 (2.1) 16.15 (410.2) 53 (24.0) 30093-X05 7.6 (2.3) 8.08 (205.2)) 48 (21.8) 30096-X05 7.6 (2.3) 16.15 (410.2) 57 (25.9) 30093-X15 8 (2.4) 8.08 (205.2) 51 (23.1) 30096-X15 8 (2.4) 16.15 (410.2) 60 (27.2) 30093-X08 9 (2.7) 8.08 (205.2) 56 (25.4) 30096-X08 9 (2.7) 16.15 (410.2) 67 (30.4) Note: X=color; 5=Clear, 7=Black. 9’ (2.7 m) unit is an 8’ (2.4 m) unit with 1’ (0.3 m) extension. Clear (-5XX) versions have black doors/covers and cable guides. 5-13 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section With Extended Fingers The MCS-EFX is a larger, higher capacity version of CPI’s popular MCS Master Cabling Section vertical cable management solution. It is appropriate for two-post and four-post applications and is available in single-sided and double-sided configurations. MCS-EFX is manufactured from a combination of strong, lightweight aluminum sheet and plenum-rated composite materials for maximum strength at minimal weight. MCS-EFX is packaged in a single carton for easy handling Extended fingers of and includes installation hardware. MCS-EFX • Cable openings on the side of MCS-EFX are sized to accommodate 48 patch cords, twice the capacity of the standard MCS; openings have rounded edges to protect cable and will not deform or break • Patented cable openings on the sides of MCS-EFX align with rack-mount unit space on the rack allowing cables to exit by raack-mount unit • The door hinges open to the right or left for easy access to cables during moves, adds and changes and locks in the closed position to protect cables from damage • Plastic Cable Guides meet UL 94V-O Flame Resistant standards • 10”W and 12”W (250 mm and 300 mm) Double-Sided MCS-EFX include (4) Cable Distribution Spools • Mounting hardware and doors are included • Attach to Standard Racks, Universal Racks or QuadraRacks Hinged locking door Shipping Shipping Part Height Depth Part Height Depth Weight Weight Number ft (m) in (mm) Number ft (m) in (mm) lb (kg) lb (kg) 6”W (150 mm) Single-Sided 6”W (150 mm) Double-Sided 40092-X03 7 (2.1) 10.62 (269.7) 31 (14.1) 40095-X03 7 (2.1) 21.23 (539.2) 56 (25.4) 40092-X05 7.6 (2.3) 10.62 (269.7) 32 (14.5) 40095-X05 7.6 (2.3) 21.23 (539.2) 59 (26.8 40092-X15 8 (2.4) 10.62 (269.7) 35 (15.9) 40095-X15 8 (2.4) 21.23 (539.2) 62 (28.1) 10”W (250 mm) Single-Sided 10”W (250 mm) Double-Sided 40093-X03 7 (2.1) 10.62 (269.7) 40 (18.1) 40096-X03 7 (2.1) 21.23 (539.2) 69 (31.3) 40093-X05 7.6 (2.3) 10.62 (269.7) 42 (19.1) 40096-X05 7.6 (2.3) 21.23 (539.2) 73 (33.1) 40093-X15 8 (2.4) 10.62 (269.7) 45 (20.4) 40096-X15 8 (2.4) 21.23 (539.2) 76 (34.5) 12”W (300 mm) Single-Sided 12”W (300 mm) Double-Sided 40094-X03 7 (2.1) 10.62 (269.7) 44 (20.0) 40097-X03 7 (2.1) 21.23 (539.2) 75 (34.0) 40094-X05 7.6 (2.3) 10.62 (269.7) 47 (21.3) 40097-X05 7.6 (2.3) 21.23 (539.2) 79 (35.8) 40094-X15 8 (2.4) 10.62 (269.7) 50 (22.7) 40097-X15 8 (2.4) 21.23 (539.2) 83 (37.6) X=color: 5=Clear, 7=Black. Clear (-5XX) versions have black doors/covers and cable guides. 5-14 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CCS Combination Cabling Section The CCS Combination Cabling Section offers the best of CPI’s cabling sections, but with added design features. This cabling section is double-sided with the front side featuring plastic cable guides (like those used on the MCS Master Cabling Section) while the back retains the classic VCS Vertical Cabling Section design. • 1U cable guides on the front designed for fanning and managing patch cords Hinged locking door • Open cabling section on the rear provides easy access and routes cable bundles feeding into the back of patch panels • Edge-protected pass through ports make it easy to route cable from front to back; vertical slots along the center separator secure cable ® bundles neatly with optional Saf-T-Grip Cable Management Straps • Plastic Cable Guides meet UL 94V-O Flame Resistant standards • Innovative SwitchGate Door/Cover (front) is easily opened from the right or left and can be removed so that cable does not have to thread through guides • Attach to Standard Racks, Universal Racks, QuadraRack or Adjustable QuadraRack frames • Mounting hardware and doors are included Usable Depth For 3”D (80 mm) Rack Version: Front=5.90” (149.9 mm); Rear=5.35” (135.9 mm) For 6”D (150 mm) Rack Version: Front=7.40” (188.0 mm); Rear=6.85” (174.0 mm) Part Number Shipping Part Number Shipping Height Depth Height Depth 3”D (80 mm) Weight 6”D (150 mm) Weight ft (m) in (mm) ft (m) in (mm) Racks lb (kg) Racks lb (kg) 3.65”W (92.7 mm) 3.65”W (92.7 mm) 30161-701 6 (1.8) 12.24 (311) 25 (11.3) 30164-701 6 (1.8) 14.61 (371) 28 (12.7) 30164-703 7 (2.1) 14.61 (371) 33 (15.0) 30161-703 7 (2.1) 12.24 (311) 29 (13.2) 30161-705 7.6 (2.3) 12.24 (311) 31 (14.1) 30164-705 7.6 (2.3) 14.61 (371) 36 (16.3) 30161-715 8 (2.4) 12.24 (311) 33 (15.0) 30164-715 8 (2.4) 14.61 (371) 38 (17.2) 30161-708 9 (2.7) 12.24 (311) 38 (17.2) 30164-708 9 (2.7) 14.61 (371) 43 (19.5) 6”W (150 mm) 6”W (150 mm) 30162-701 6 (1.8) 12.24 (311) 29 (13.2) 30165-701 6 (1.8) 14.61 (371) 33 (15.0) 30162-703 7 (2.1) 12.24 (311) 34 (15.4) 30165-703 7 (2.1) 14.61 (371) 38 (17.2) 30165-705 7.6 (2.3) 14.61 (371) 41 (18.6) 30162-705 7.6 (2.3) 12.24 (311) 37 (16.8) 30162-715 8 (2.4) 12.24 (311) 39 (17.7) 30165-715 8 (2.4) 14.61 (371) 44 (20.0) 30162-708 9 (2.7) 12.24 (311) 44 (20.0) 30165-708 9 (2.7) 14.61 (371) 49 (22.2) 10”W (250 mm) 10”W (250 mm) 30166-701 6 (1.8) 14.61 (371) 42 (19.1) 30163-701 6 (1.8) 12.24 (311) 40 (18.1) 30163-703 7 (2.1) 12.24 (311) 46 (20.9) 30166-703 7 (2.1) 14.61 (371) 49 (22.2) 30163-705 7.6 (2.3) 12.24 (311) 50 (22.7) 30166-705 7.6 (2.3) 14.61 (371) 53 (24.0) 30166-715 8 (2.4) 14.61 (371) 56 (25.4) 30163-715 8 (2.4) 12.24 (311) 53 (24.0) 30163-708 9 (2.7) 12.24 (311) 59 (26.8) 30166-708 9 (2.7) 14.61 (371) 63 (28.6) Color is black. 5-15 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CCS-EFX Combination Cabling Section With Extended Fingers The CCS-EFX is a double-sided vertical cable management trough designed for use with most two- and four-post racks to manage cable at the cross- connect, especially when using angled-face copper patch panels. The CCS-EFX is manufactured from a combination of strong, lightweight aluminum sheet and plenum-rated composite materials for maximum strength at minimal weight. CCS-EFX is packaged in a single carton for easy handling and includes installation hardware. • Cable openings on the front are sized to fit 48 patch cords, twice the Extended fingers of capacity of the CCS; openings have rounded edges to protect cable CCS-EFX and will not deform or break • Cable openings on front of CCS-EFX align with rack-mount unit on rack allowing cables to exit by rack-mount unit • The front door hinges open to the right or left and locks in the closed position to protect cables • Open cabling section on the rear of CCS-EFX allows large premise cable bundles to exit the manager into the rack-mount space. Spin closure latches secure cables • Attach to 3”D (80 mm) Standard Racks, Universal Racks or QuadraRack • Mounting hardware and doors are included Shipping Part Height Depth Weight Number ft (m) in (mm) Hinged locking door lb (kg) 6”W (150 mm) 40098-703 7 (2.1) 14.94 (379.5) 38 (17.2) 40098-705 7.6 (2.3) 14.94 (379.5) 41 (18.6) Usable Depth 40098-715 8 (2.4) 14.94 (379.5) 44 (20.0) Front=8.60” (218.4 mm); 10”W (250 mm) Rear=5.35” (135.9 mm) 40099-703 7 (2.1) 14.94 (379.5) 52 (23.6) 40099-705 7.6 (2.3) 14.94 (379.5) 56 (25.4) 40099-715 8 (2.4) 14.94 (379.5) 60 (27.2) 12”W (300 mm) 40100-703 7 (2.1) 14.94 (379.5) 56 (25.4) 40100-705 7.6 (2.3) 14.94 (379.5) 60 (27.2) 40100-715 8 (2.4) 14.94 (379.5) 64 (29.0) Color is black. 5-16 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Single-Sided Narrow Vertical Cabling Section Provides convenient cable run between equipment racks. Conceals cable for a more attractive installation. • Bolts to CPI Standard Rack, Universal Rack, QuadraRack 4-Post Frame and QuadraRack Server Frame • Includes formed cabling section, lockable cabling latches - 12” (300 mm) between latches, protective edge guards and mounting hardware • 3.65”W x 6.38”D (92.7 mm x 162.1 mm); single-sided cable trough • 9’ (2.7 m) version consists of a 7’ (2.1 m) section and 2’ (0.6 m) extension 11730 Cabling Section, Single-Sided, Narrow Color 1 Gray 2 Computer White 5 Clear 7 Black 11584-X02 Height - ft (m) One-Foot Extension 00 5.6 (1.7) 01 6 (1.8) 02 6.6 (2.0) 03 7 (2.1) 05 7.6 (2.3) 15 8 (2.4) 08 9 (2.7) 11730 - X XX Single-Sided Narrow Vertical Cabling Section Extensions Adds one or two feet of height to vertical cabling sections, providing a uniform vertical pathway from ceiling to rack. Mounting hardware included. Description Shipping 11378-X02 Part W x D Weight Two-Foot Extension Number in (mm) lb (kg) One-Foot Extension 11584-X02 3 (1.4) 3.65 x 6.38 (92.7 x 162.1) 11730-X03 Two-Foot Extension 11378-X02 4 (1.8) Single-Sided Narrow 3.65 x 6.38 (92.7 x 162.1) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 5-17 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Single-Sided Wide Vertical Cabling Section Provides convenient cable run between equipment racks. Conceals cable for a more attractive installation. ® • Bolts to CPI Standard Rack, Universal Rack, QuadraRack 4-Post Frame and QuadraRack Server Frame • Includes formed cabling section, lockable cabling latches spaced 12” (300 mm) apart, protective edge guards and mounting hardware • 6”W x 6.38”D (150 mm x 162.1 mm); single-sided cable trough • 9’ (2.7 m) version consists of 7’ (2.1 m) section with a 2’ (0.6 m) extension 11374 Cabling Section, Single-Sided, Wide Color 11584-X01 1 Gray One-Foot Extension 2 Computer White 5 Clear 7 Black Height 00 5’ 6” (1.7 m) 01 6’ (1.8 m) 02 6’ 6” (2.0 m) 03 7’ (2.1 m) 05 7’ 6” (2.3 m) 15 8’ (2.4 m) 08 9’ (2.7 m) 11374 - X XX 11378-X01 Two-Foot Extension Single-Sided Wide Vertical Cabling Section Extensions Adds one or two feet of height to vertical cabling sections, providing a 11374-503 uniform vertical pathway from ceiling to rack. Mounting hardware Single-Sided Wide included. Description Shipping Part W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) One-Foot Extension 11584-X01 3 (1.4) 6 x 6.38 (150 x 162.1) Two-Foot Extension 11378-X01 4 (1.8) 6 x 6.38 (150 x 162.1) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 5-18 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Double-Sided Narrow Vertical Cabling Section Provides double-sided 3.65” (92.7 mm) cable run between equipment racks. Oval ports measuring 1.38” x 2.25” (35.1 mm x 51.2 mm) are spaced at 11.62” (295.1 mm) intervals along center separator for convenient cable and wiring ® pass through. Vertical slots secure optional Saf-T-Grip Cable Management Straps for neatly bundled cables. • Bolts to CPI Standard Rack, Universal Rack, QuadraRack 4-Post Frame and QuadraRack Server Frame • Includes formed cabling section, lockable cabling latches spaced 12” (300 mm) apart, protective edge guards and mounting hardware • 3.65”W x 12.75”D (92.7 mm x 323.9 mm); double-sided cable trough • 1.38” x 2.25” (35.1 mm x 57.2 mm) oval pass through ports every 11.62” (295.1 mm) • 9’ (2.7 m) version consists of 7’ (2.1 m) section with a 2’ (0.6 m) extension 11781-X02 • Mounting hardware included One-Foot Extension Shipping Part Description Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) 12096-X03 7 (2.1) Double-Sided Narrow 24 (10.9) 12096-X15 8 (2.4) Double-Sided Narrow 27 (12.2) 12096-X08 9 (2.7 ) Double-Sided Narrow 28 (12.7) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Double-Sided Narrow Vertical Cabling Section Extensions Adds one or two feet of height to vertical cabling sections, providing a uniform vertical pathway from ceiling to rack. Mounting hardware included. 11782-X02 Description Shipping Part W x D Weight Two-Foot Extension Number in (mm) lb (kg) One-Foot Extension 3.65 x 12.75 11781-X02 4 (1.8) (92.7 x 323.9) 12096-X03 Two-Foot Extension 3.65 x 12.75 11782-X02 7 (3.2) Double-Sided Narrow (92.7 x 323.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 5-19 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Double-Sided Wide Vertical Cabling Section These space-saving ducts with locking latches hold and separate wiring for a more organized and managed equipment room installation. Provides convenient cable run between equipment racks. Conceals cable for a more attractive installation. 2.50” (63.5 mm) diameter ports spaced at 11.625” (295.28 mm) intervals allow for convenient cable and wiring pass through. ® Vertical slots secure optional Saf-T-Grip Cable Management Straps for neatly bundled cables. • Bolts to CPI Standard Rack, Universal Rack, QuadraRack 4-Post Frame and QuadraRack Server Frame • Includes formed cabling section, lockable cabling latches - 12” (300 mm) between latches, protective edge guards and mounting hardware • 6”W x 12.75”D (150 mm x 323.9 mm); double-sided cable trough 11781-X01 • 2.5” (64.0 mm) diameter pass through ports every 11.62” (295.1 mm) One-Foot Extension • 9’ (2.7 m) version consists of a 7’ (2.1 m) section with a 2’ (0.6 m) extension • Mounting hardware included Shipping Part Description Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) 11729-X03 7 (2.1) Double-Sided Wide 30 (13.6) 11729-X15 8 (2.4) Double-Sided Wide 31 (14.1) 11729-X08 9 (2.7 ) Double-Sided Wide 32 (14.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Double-Sided Wide Vertical Cabling Section Extensions 11782-X01 Adds one or two feet of height to vertical cabling sections, providing a Two-Foot Extension uniform vertical pathway from ceiling to rack. Mounting hardware included. Description Shipping Part W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 11729-503 One-Foot Extension 6 x 12.75 Double-Sided Wide 11781-X01 5 (2.3) (150 x 323.9) Two-Foot Extension 6 x 12.75 11782-X01 9 (4.1) (150 x 323.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 5-20 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Cabling Section Cover Designed to be used on narrow and wide Vertical Cabling Sections to provide a clean professional appearance. Available in metal or plexiglass versions - plexiglass for 7’ (2.1 m) only - in sizes to fit your installation. • Hides cables • Provides professional appearance • Quick attachment and removal • For use with vertical cabling sections only Shipping Part Height Color/Style Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) 3.65”W (92.7 mm) 12189-001 7 (2.1) Black, Plexiglass 8 (3.6) 12664-702 7 (2.1) Black, Metal 8 (3.6) 11923-705 7.6 (2.3) Black, Metal 4 (1.8) 11923-715 8 (2.4) Black, Metal 5 (2.3) 11923-708 9 (2.7) Black, Metal 5 (2.3) 6”W (150 mm) 12188-001 7 (2.1) Black, Plexiglass 9 (4.1) 12664-701 7 (2.1) Black, Metal 9 (4.1) 11922-705 7.6 (2.3) Black, Metal 7 (3.2) 11922-715 8 (2.4) Black, Metal 7 (3.2) 11922-708 9 (2.7) Black, Metal 8 (3.6) Finger Snaps Cable Guides Adding Finger Snaps Cable Guides is a snap. The unique, patented design provides retrofit cable guides in between the latches on VCS Vertical Cabling Sections or CCS Combination Cabling Sections. • Plastic cable guides that easily retrofit onto CPI VCS Vertical Cabling Sections or CCS Combination Cabling Sections • Resilient composite material ensures long lasting, quality construction • Extra-wide and contoured guides allow smooth transition of the cable from the horizontal pathway into a CPI cabling section • 1U cable guides are designed for fanning and managing patch cords or cables • Meets UL 94V-O Flame Resistant standards Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12370-001 2 Finger Snaps, Black 1 (0.5) 12370-002 12 Finger Snaps, Black 2 (0.9) 5-21 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Extended Fingers Bracket Extended Fingers Bracket provides extra-deep cable management capacity for applications that require large cable bundles or thick cable. Extra space also improves cable bend radius management, meeting or exceeding the needs of the latest Category 5e/6/6a or fiber industry standards. It is a cost-effective accessory for cable management in specific areas of the rack rather than along its entire height. • It is preassembled in 7U, 9U and 13U heights for mounting directly onto any industry-standard rack • Patented cable guide fingers at 1U intervals provide an organized cable pathway • Made of durable, flame-retardant (UL 94V-0) plastic for environmental safety • Sold individually Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 1U 12891-703 7U, Black 2 (0.9) 12891-701 9U, Black 4 (1.8) 12891-702 13U, Black 4 (1.8) Horizontal Cable Guides Rack-Mounted cable guides organize multiple horizontal cable runs. Designed to use with most rack-mounted panels. • Slotted loop design makes cable installation and changes quick and simple • Made of thick aluminum and black plastic dipped to reduce cable insulation damage • Sold in matching pairs • Threaded side holes allow mounting of vertical cable loop (P/N 10683-001) Part Dim. A Dim. B Description Number in (mm) in (mm) 10419-001 One Loop 3.46 (87.9) 4.25 (108.0) 11157-001 Two Loop 5.25 (133.4) 3.88 (98.6) 11154-001 Four Loop 8.60 (218.4) 3.88 (98.6) 11153-001 Six Loop 15.60 (396.2) 3.88 (98.6) 5-22 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT ® IBM Style Vertical Cable Loop Used for vertical cable runs on most rack mounted equipment. Mounts in a variety of ways to equipment rack or connector panels. 1-1/2” (38 mm) hole to hole. • Aluminum construction coated with black plastic to prevent cable scrapes • Sold individually or in package of 100 • Mounting hardware not included Shipping Part Color Weight Number lb (kg) 10683-001 Black 1 (0.5) 10683-101 Black, Package of 100 23 (10.4) Vertical Wire Management Loop CPI Vertical Wire Management Loops are used to organize patch cords and cabling. Maintains vertical wire management for one or two racks mounted together. Mounting hardware not included. • Does not protrude into rack-mounting space • Aluminum construction coated with black plastic to prevent damage to cable jackets Shipping Part Color Weight Number lb (kg) 13079-001 Black 1 (0.5) Double-Wide Cable Ring Provides vertical cable management space between racks butted side-by-side by mounting to the hole pattern across two rack channels. Large size, 2.3”H x 2.8”W x 4”D (58 mm x 71 mm x 100 mm) accommodates larger cable bundles. Made of thick aluminum with rounded edges to reduce cable insulation damage. Sold individually or in box of 100. Shipping weight approximately 4 oz (110 g) each and 25 lb (11.3 kg) for box of 100. Mounting hardware not included. • Mounts to hole pattern across two rack channels • Provides vertical cable management for larger cable bundles • Use where vertical cabling section is not required Part Number Description Individually Box of 100 12228-X01 12228-X11 Double-Wide Loop X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 5-23 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Narrow Cable Ring Attaches to walls or racks where width is limited. Holds and dresses vertical cable runs. Mounting hardware not included. • Made of aluminum with rounded edges to reduce cable insulation damage • Narrow Cable Ring is 2.50”H x 1.25”W x 4.00”D (63.5 mm x 31.8 mm x 101.6 mm) • Sold individually or box of 100 Part Number Description Individually Box of 100 11228-X01 11228-X11 Narrow Cable Ring X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Narrow Cable Loop Use these cable loops to hold and dress cable vertically. Attach to walls or racks where width is limited. Mounting hardware not included. • Made of aluminum with rounded edges to reduce cable insulation damage • Naroow Cable Loop is 2.50”H x 1.25”W x 4.00”D (63.5 mm x 31.8 mm x 101.6 mm) • Sold individually or box of 100 Part Number Description Individually Box of 100 11230-X01 11230-X11 Narrow Cable Loop X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Cable Distribution Spools Cable Distribution Spools promote a gradual bend for cable runs to aid in complying with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B bend radius requirements (typically 4X the cable diameter). Routes all types of cabling from horizontal to vertical or vice-versa. • The kit includes a #12-24 rack screw and a wood screw for use with the 4” (100 mm) spool • Made of high-impact plastic Part Number Description Individually Box of 100 15002-001 15002-001 15002-002 4” (100 mm) Cable Spool 5-24 VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Cable Distribution Spools Cable Distribution Spools provide slack management and strain relief for patch cords and jumper cables inside CPI vertical cable managers. Designed for use inside any CPI double-sided vertical cable manager 10”W and wider, ® including VCS, MCS, MCS-EFX, CCS, CCS-EFX and Evolution g2 Double-Sided ® Vertical Cable Manager. Also compatible with Evolution g1 Single-Sided Vertical Cable Manager. • Three large cable distribution spools are included with each 10”, 12” and 15” wide (250 mm, 300 mm and 380 mm) vertical cable manager (will not fit other sizes) • Attaches to the fixed adapter panels on the back of single-sided vertical cable managers and the Movable Mid-Sections inside the double-sided vertical cable managers • Spools are 2.75” (69.9 mm) in diameter and 5.9”L (150 mm) and made from black plastic • Each kit includes four spools and mounting hardware • Made of high-impact, flame retardant material Shipping Part Description/Color Weight Spools mounted on a double-sided vertical Number lb (kg) cabling section 15008-001 Spool Kit, Black 2 (0.9) 15008-002 Spool Kit, White 2 (0.9) 2” (50 mm) Diameter Fiber Management Spools Use the 2” (50 mm) Diameter Fiber Management Spool to support fiber and copper cables within CPI's extensive line of vertical cabling sections. The spools meet EIA/TIA bend radius requirements and minimize cable tangles and tears for more efficient data transmission. • Provides proper cable support and bend radius for more efficient data transmission • Maintains strength under heavy cable loads • Mounts to all CPI vertical cabling sections 6”W (150 mm) or wider, including MCS, MCS-EFX, CCS, CCS-EFX and VCS P/N 12766-702 2” (50 mm) Diameter Fiber Management Spools Application Shipping Package Part Width Weight Number Of in (mm) lb (kg) For 6, 10 or 12 (150, 250 or 300) 12766-702 2 2 (0.9) Double-Sided Cabling Sections For 6, 10 or 12 (150, 250 or 300) 12766-707 7 5 (2.3) Double-Sided Cabling Sections 5-25 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT ® Evolution Horizontal Cable Manager ® Use Evolution Horizontal Cable Managers above and below patch panels and network switches to organize and store cables. Horizontal managers include plastic T-shaped cable guides to organize patch cords and jumper cords as the cords enter and exit the manager to make individual equipment connections. The snap-on cover matches the door styling on the vertical manager. Swing the cover up or down to access cables; the cover stays in the open position while cabling. Three edge-protected, oval-shaped pass-through ports allow patch cords to pass front-to-rear. Horizontal managers are available in three heights. • Contoured front door with snap-hinges and longitudinal center feature contrasting aluminum finish • Three 1.25”H x 2.12”W (31 mm x 53 mm) edge-protected oval cable pass-through ports at the rear of the cable manager • Improved T-shaped cable guides decrease deflection when loaded with cables; especially important when deploying Cat 6a cable • Rounded edges on the cable guides protect cables as they enter and exit the storage space • Snap-On cover opens up or down and stays in the open position Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 35441-701 1U x 19 x 8.2 (208) 4 (1.8) 35441-702 2U x 19 x 8.2 (208) 5 (2.3) 35441-703 3U x 19 x 8.2 (208) 6 (2.7) Color is black. ® Velocity Horizontal Cable Manager ® Use Velocity Horizontal Cable Manager above and below patch panels and network switches to organize and store cables. Features T-shaped cable guides at the top and bottom of the manager to organize patch cords. Two cable openings in the rear of the manager allow front-to-rear cabling and the snap-on cover stays in the opened position to provide easy access to cables. The single-sided horizontal cable managers are available in three heights. • Horizontal managers for open two-post and four-post CPI Rack Systems • The Velocity Horizontal Cable Manager includes: - One 19”W EIA rack-mount cable manager with T-shaped cable guides - One cover that snaps onto the T-shaped cable guides - Four #12-24 x 1” rack-mount screws and four M6 x 25 mm rack-mount screws Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 13930-701 1U x 19 x 5.9 (150) 2 (0.9) 13930-702 2U x 19 x 5.9 (150) 3 (1.4) 13930-703 3U x 19 x 5.9 (150) 3 (1.4) Color is black. 1U = 1.75” (44.45 mm); the overall height of the manager is .03” (0.16 mm) less than the full rack-mount unit height. Usable depth is 3.7” (94 mm). The usable height of the manager varies but is 1.2” (31 mm) less than the overall height of the manager at the narrowest point. 5-26 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Universal Horizontal Cable Manager Create an attractive and highly functional horizontal pathway for patch cords and multimedia applications using coax, copper and fiber optic cables. After routing the cables or cords, simply snap on the cover for a clean, professional appearance. • Extra-wide and contoured cable guide fingers, spaced 1.75” (44.5 mm) apart, separate and organize patch cords for quick and easy moves, adds and changes. • The cable guides are offset to ensure proper bending radii of patch cables — even hooded patch cables • Patented fingers meet the requirements of UL 94V-0 flammability rating • Snap-on covers are easy to use and open 180° up or down with adjacent installation • Covers and panel have a black powder-coat textured finish, reducing fingerprints and smudges 30530-719 Double-Sided Universal Horizontal Cable Manager Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 30529-719 1U x 19 x 11.73 (297.9) 5 (2.3) 30529-723 1U x 23 x 11.73 (297.9) 6 (2.7) 30530-719 2U x 19 x 11.73 (297.9) 6 (2.7) 30530-723 2U x 23 x 11.73 (297.9) 7 (3.2) 30531-719 3U x 19 x 11.73 (297.9) 6 (2.7) 30531-723 3U x 23 x 11.73 (297.9) 7 (3.2) 30130-719 Single-Sided Universal Horizontal Cable Manager Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 30139-719 1U x 19 x 4.96 (126.0) 2 (0.9) 30139-723 1U x 23 x 4.96 (126.0) 3 (1.4) 30130-719 2U x 19 x 5.14 (130.6) 3 (1.4) 30130-723 2U x 23 x 5.14 (130.6) 4 (1.8) 30131-719 3U x 19 x 5.14 (130.6) 4 (1.8) 30131-723 3U x 23 x 5.14 (130.6) 5 (2.3) 30330-719 30339-719* 1U x 19 x 6.26 (159.0) 3 (1.4) 30339-723* 1U x 23 x 6.26 (159.0) 3 (1.4) Use Universal Horizontal Cable Manager in 30330-719* 2U X 19 X 6.44 (163.6) 4 (1.8) conjunction with the CPI Patch Panel Wire 30330-723* 2U X 23 X 6.44 (163.6) 5 (2.3) Management Bar (P/N 12176-X01) and any of CPI’s vertical cabling sections for clean, 30331-719* 3U X 19 X 6.44 (163.6) 5 (2.3) organized cable management. 30331-723* 3U X 23 X 6.44 (163.6) 6 (2.7) *Note: Deep Panel is used when Double-Sided MCS Master Cabling Sections are center-mounted on 3”D racks. 5-27 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Horizontal Cable Management Accessories Patch Panel Wire Management Bar 19” rack-mountable bar provides the necessary wire management and strain relief required by ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. May be mounted inward for 6” (150 mm) channel or outward to standard 3” (80 mm) rack side channel, attaches to rack with standard #12-24 rack screws (not included). Wire tie holes maintain wire perpendicular relative to termination point, made of sturdy aluminum, sold individually. 12176-X01 Horizontal Wire Management Panel for VCS 19” Wire Management Panel is offset 1.5” (38 mm) from the rack channel to ensure proper bending radii of patch cables — even hooded patch cables. Use in combination with VCS Vertical Cabling Sections. Unique offset design provides patch cable pathway from front-to-back or side-to-side. Available in single 1.75” (44.5 mm) or double 3.5” (89.0 mm) rack-mounting units design. Mounts quickly and easily using threaded cable distribution spools, cable distribution spools maintain bend radius through the pass-through trough and across the front plane of the horizontal manager. 13070-X19 13075-X19 Horizontal Wire Management Panel for MCS and CCS Use in combination with MCS Master Cabling Section, CCS Combination Cabling Section to provide open horizontal management for cables. Clip-On Cable Cover The Clip-On Cable Cover is designed for use with the CPI 19” Horizontal Wire Management Panels. Attach to the horizontal wire management panel by simply sliding/clipping it into place. 12541X19 Slip-On Cover, Ring Panel 12542X19 The Slip-On Cover is used on the Large Horizontal Ring Panel, P/N 11564-XXX. Sold individually Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12176-X01 Patch Panel Wire Mangement Bar 1 (0.5) 13070-X19 Horizontal Wire Panel for VCS, 1U 2 (0.9) 13075-X19 Horizontal Wire Panel for VCS, 2U 2 (0.9) 12663-X01 12541-X19 Horizontal Wire Panel for MCS/CCS, 1U 2 (0.9) 12542-X19 Horizontal Wire Panel for MCS/CCS, 2U 2 (0.9) 12663-X01 Cable Cover for 13070-XXX, 1U 2 (0.9) 12663-X02 Cable Cover for 13075-XXX, 2U 2 (0.9) 11764-X19 Slip-On Cover, 19”W, for 11564-X19 2 (0.9) 11764-X23 Slip-On Cover, 23”W, for 11564-X23 2 (0.9) 11764-X19 X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 11764-X23 5-28 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Jumper And Transition Trays The Jumper and Transition Trays aid in compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B bend radius requirements. Two styles are available to provide upper and lower horizontal/vertical cable management and promote a gradual, controlled bend for both UTP and optical fiber cable. Adjust the position of the bend radius to deliver cables into the vertical cable manager or attach a transition plate between trays to create a solid wire way between racks. Mounting screws not included. Sold individually. • Provides 1-1/2” (38 mm) bend radius for compliant installation of Category 12183 Upper Tray 5e/6/6a or fiber cable • Telescopes to adjust cable entry or exit position • Mounts on 19” or 23” rack; may also be wall-mounted • Strong lightweight aluminum construction Part Number Shipping Description Weight 19” 23” lb (kg) 12183-X19 12183-X23 Upper Tray, 3.5”D (89 mm) 3 (1.4) 13183-X19 13183-X23 Upper Tray, 6”D (150 mm) 4 (1.8) Lower Tray, Single, 13183 Deep Upper Tray 12185-X19 12185-X23 4 (1.8) 3.5”D (89 mm) Lower Tray, Double, 12187-X19 12187-X23 5 (2.3) 3.5”D (89 mm) Transition Plate, 12186-X01 N/A 2 (0.9) 15.5”L (394 mm) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 12185 Lower Tray, Single 12187 Lower Tray, Double 12186 Transition Plate 5-29 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Rack Radius Drop The Rack Radius Drop provides a transition from a horizontal cable run onto a rack while maintaining the recommended bend radius. Cable bundles are held ® securely in place on the Rack Radius Drop by using the included Saf-T-Grip Center Grommet Buckle Cable Management Strap; 9”L (230 mm) for 12392- X09 and 12393-X01 and 6”L (150 mm) for 12392-X06 and 12394-X01 only. Note: For UTP and STP-A, the required bend radius is no less than four times the cable diameter. For optical fiber, the required bend radius is either 10 times the cable diameter or 1.2” (30 mm), whichever is larger. (reference BICSI TDDM). Three styles are available: 12392-X06 1) 3” (80 mm) or 6” (150 mm) rack channels without vertical rack cabling sections use P/N 12392-X06, 3”(80 mm) or 12392-X09, 6”(150 mm). 2) Single sided vertical rack cabling managers use P/N 12393-X01 3) Double sided vertical rack cabling managers use P/N 12394-X01 • Provides an organized method to transition from horizontal cable run onto the rack while maintaining bend radius; styles offered for use with or without vertical rack cabling sections • Provides 1-1/2” (38 mm) bend radius • Quick and easy slip-on installation onto rack channel • Sold individually Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) 12393-X01 lb (kg) Rack Radius Drop for 3 (80) Rack Channels 12392-X06 1 (0.5) w/o Vertical Cabling Sections Rack Radius Drop for 6 (15) Rack Channels 12392-X09 1 (0.5) w/o Vertical Cabling Sections Rack Radius Drop For Use with Single 12393-X01 1 (0.5) Sided Vertical Cabling Section Rack Radius Drop For Use with Double 12394-X01 1 (0.5) Sided Vertical Cabling Section X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 12394-X01 Large Horizontal Cable Ring This is the same ring used on our Large Horizontal Ring Panel series 11564. Sold individually and in quantities of 50. • Provides horizontal cable management on wall • 2.8”H x 6”W (71 mm x 150 mm) heavy duty aluminum rings • Rounded edges protect cable sheaths Shipping Shipping Part Weight Box of 50 Weight Color Number lb (kg) lb (kg) 11563-101 1 (0.5) 11563-150 19 (8.6) Gray 11563-201 1 (0.5) 11563-250 19 (8.6) White 11563-501 1 (0.5) 11563-550 19 (8.6) Clear 11563-701 1 (0.5) 11563-750 19 (8.6) Black 5-30 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT Large Horizontal Ring Panel Used to organize horizontal cable runs. Large 2.8”H (71 mm) by 6”W (150 mm) heavy duty aluminum rings with rounded edges protect cable sheaths and will not bind during installation. Rings are bolted onto panels so they can be added or removed as needed. 19” and 23” wide rack panel options come pre-assembled with seven equally spaced rings. • 2.8”H x 6”W (71 mm x 150 mm) heavy duty aluminum rings • Rings can be added or removed as needed • Installation hardware not included • Shipping weight approximately 5 lb (2.3 kg) Part Number Color 19” 23” 11564-119 11564-123 Gray 11564-219 11564-223 White 11564-519 11564-523 Clear 11564-719 11564-723 Black Rack Cabling Managers Used to organize horizontal cable and wire runs. Two sizes of slotted plastic rings provide ample room to hold all types and sizes of wiring and cabling. • Easy to install on equipment racks • Installation hardware not included 1175 Rack Cabling Managers Panel/Ring Size H x D - in (mm) 2 1U, 1.6 x 1.3 (41 x 33) Rings 3 2U, 3 x 1.6 (80 x 41) Rings Color 1 Gray 2 Computer White 5 Clear 7 Black Rack Width 19 19”W 23 23”W 1175 X - X XX 5-31 ® SAF-T-GRIP STRAPS ® Saf-T-Grip Open Loop Series Used to strap together free hanging computer cable for a tangle-free installation. Strap is held in place by a loop that adheres to one cable. Simply peel the hook and loop sides apart to remove strap. ® Saf-T-Grip End Grommet Buckle Series The buckle design provides extra strength for those harder to manage cables. Mounts cable along walls and backboards or wherever horizontal cable runs are required. Wrap this strap around the cable and back through the nylon buckle. Pull snugly, cinching down the cable for secure fit. Open Loop Series ® Saf-T-Grip Center Grommet Buckle Series The buckle design provides twice the holding strength of ordinary straps. Unique center grommet feature provides a sturdy fixture for attaching straps in any direction. Simply loop the strap around cables and back through the buckle. Secure cinch back and down for a secure hold. Saf-T-Grip Strap Series Type 020 Open Loop Series (pkg. of 25) 050 End Grommet & Buckle Series (pkg. of 25) 060 Center Grommet & Buckle Series (pkg. of 25) Strap Length - in (mm) 06 6 (150), for 2 (50) diameter cable bundles 09 9 (230), for 3 (80) diameter cable bundles 12 12 (300), for 4 (100) diameter cable bundles Strap Width - in (mm) 2 3/4 (19.1) Strap Colors 01 Black 03 Royal Blue 0X0 XX - X XX Center Grommet & Buckle Series 5-32 CABLE MANAGEMENT ACCESSORIES Open Composite Distribution Ring Supports cable and wire in communication closets, on backboards, equipment racks or wherever cable runs are required. These rings are made of high- strength, fire-retardant material with rounded edges to prevent damage to cable and wire insulation while providing easy pull-through. Mounting hole configuration allows rings to be attached to most surfaces including our equipment racks. The open designed “C’’ rings allow for easy adds, moves and changes, eliminating the need to feed through cable. Mounting hardware not included. • Organizes equipment wiring and cabling • Strong, lightweight composite construction • Eliminates cable nicks, great for wire pulling • Split ring style allows easy additions or changes to cable runs • Molded of fire-retardant material Description Shipping Part Width Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 12035-001 2 (50) Open “C” Ring, Gray 1 (0.5) 12035-011 Carton of 100 6 (2.7) Channel-Mounted Distribution Ring Designed to mount to the upright channels of CPI Universal Racks. Made of high-strength, fire-retardant material with rounded edges to prevent damage to cable and wire insulation while providing easy pull-through. The open- design “C’’ rings allow for easy adds, moves and changes, eliminating the need to feed through cable. Mounting hardware not included. • Mounts on CPI Universal Racks only • Organizes equipment wiring and cabling • Strong, lightweight composite construction • Split ring style allows easy additions or changes to cable runs • Molded of fire-retardant material • Sold individually and in quantities of 100 • Internal dimensions: 2.58” W (65.5 mm) x 3”D (76.2 mm) • Overall dimensions: 3.58” (90.9 mm) x 3.93” (99.8 mm); projects 3.68” (93.5 mm) past the sides of the rack channel Description Shipping Part Width Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 11125-001 3 (80) Open “C” Ring, White, 1 1 (0.5) 11125-011 3 (80) Open “C” Ring, White, 100 9 (4.1) 11125-003 3 (80) Open “C” Ring, Black, 1 1 (0.5) 11125-013 3 (80) Open “C” Ring, Black, 100 9 (4.1) 11125 shown on Rack 5-33 CABLE MANAGEMENT ACCESSORIES Closed Composite Distribution Rings With Distribution Rings all your wiring and cabling can now be neatly and easily organized and managed. Designed to support cable and wire in communication closets, on backboards, equipment racks or wherever cable runs are required. The versatile brackets are made of high-strength, fire- retardant composite material. Rounded edges prevent damage to cable and wire insulation while providing easy pull-through. Mounting hole configuration allows brackets to be attached to most surfaces including our equipment racks. Color is compatible with most equipment. Mounting hardware not included. • Strong, lightweight, fire-retardant composite material construction • Easy to install onto CPI equipment racks or backboards • Rounded shape eliminates cable nicks, great for wire pulling • Color: gray finish • Sold individually and in quantities of 100 Description Shipping Part Width Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 12127-001 2 (50) Closed “D” Ring 1 (0.5) 12127-011 Carton of 100 6 (2.7) 10812-001 3 (80) Closed “D” Ring 1 (0.5) 10812-011 Carton of 100 9 (4.1) Metal D-Rings A convenient and economical way to route, support and secure cables and jumper wires in terminal closets or wherever cable runs are required. • Offered in three standard sizes • Made from 1/8” x 1/2” (3.18 mmm x 13 mm) hot-rolled steel strap with zinc plating to resist corrosion • Ring edges are rolled to prevent nicks and scratches in the cable and wire insulation • Sold individually and in quantities of 100 • Mounting hardware not included Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10941-000 Small 1 (0.5) 10941-010 Small, box of 100 16 (7.3) 10942-000 Medium 1 (0.5) 10942-010 Medium, box of 100 22 (10.0) 10943-000 Large 1 (0.5) 10943-010 Large, box of 100 24 (10.9) 5-34 CABLE MANAGEMENT ACCESSORIES Nylon Stand-Off Tie Bracket These brackets mount to the back of the rack channel to provide a convenient point to tie-down cable runs. • Choice of either non-conductive nylon or high strength aluminum • Either end of the aluminum bracket can be attached to rack, allowing cabling to run several different ways • Mounting hardware not included • Sold individually and in quantities of 50 Description Shipping Package Part W x L Weight Number of in (mm) lb (kg) 10001-001 1 x 5 (30 x 13), White Nylon 1 1 (0.5) 10001-050 1 x 5 (30 x 130), White Nylon 50 3 (1.4) Aluminum 10559-X00 1 x 6 (30 x 150), Aluminum 1 1 (0.5) 10559-X50 1 x 6 (30 x 150), Aluminum 50 5 (2.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black Cable Strain Relief Bracket Have you ever pulled cables out of rack-mounted equipment accidentally? Do you need to maintain a minimum bend radius for your cabling? Our rack- mounted cable strain relief is the answer. Made of high-strength aluminum, it ® includes ten flexible Saf-T-Grip Cable Management Straps. This bracket can be mounted at desired height and depth to position straps right where you need them. Reusable rivets allow Saf-T-Grips to be added or removed as required. Aluminum construction. • Mounting hardware not included Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11579-X19 19” Rack 1 (0.5) 11570-X23 23” Rack 1 (0.5) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 5-35 CABLE MANAGEMENT ACCESSORIES Jack Plate Wall-Mounting Bracket This innovative flush-mount wall board bracket is designed to hold round style modular jack plate assemblies. To install, simply drill a 2-3/8” (60.33 mm) diameter hole into dry wall, insert bracket into hole and using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten patented sure-grip pads to hold securely in place. Adjustable pads handle most wall sizes up to 1” (25.4 mm) thick. Clear plastic flush mount design is invisible when installed. Four screws hold pattern to fit round modular jack rings. Includes two #6-32 machine screws. For AT&T and Regional Bell Operating Co. use with modular jack plate assemblies such as Allen-Tel AT218 or Suttle SE-625B2 (not included). Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 20502-002 Jack Plate Wall-Mounting Bracket 1 (0.5) Jack Plate Wall-Mounting Bracket 20502-022 12 (5.4) in carton of 200 Mag-Clips, Medium Sized The medium sized 17000 and 17100 magnetic clips are designed to hold a 25-pair cable or several electrical cords. Keeps cables neat within workstation areas neat and off of the floor to reduce the danger of accidents. Nylon cable ties can be laced through the four square holes in the top of the 17000 series to secure additional cables. Part Description/Color Number 17000-000 Clip With Holes, Gray 17000-050 Clip With Holes, Gray, Box of 50 17000-100 Clip With Holes, Beige 17000-150 Clip With Holes, Beige, Box of 50 17000-000 17100-000 Clip Without Holes, Gray 17100-050 Clip Without Holes, Gray, Box of 50 17100-100 Clip Without Holes, Beige 17100-150 Clip Without Holes, Beige, Box of 50 5-36 CABLE MANAGEMENT ACCESSORIES Mag-Clips, Large This larger clip holds a 100-pair telephone cable or up to 1” (30 mm) diameter tubing. There are also holes provided to lace additional cords to the top of the clip. The amount of direct pull required to separate the clips from a painted steel surface averages 15 lb (67 kg). Shipping Part Description / Color Weight Number lb (kg) 17500-000 Clip, Gray 1 (0.5) 17500-020 Clip, Gray, Box of 25 7 (3.2) 17500-100 Clip, Beige 1 (0.5) 17500-120 Clip, Beige, Box of 25 7 (3.2) 17500-200 Clip, White 1 (0.5) 17500-220 Clip, White, Box of 25 7 (3.2) Mag-Clips, Wrap-Around Clasp The wrap-around clasp easily secures a 25-pair cable,approximately 7/16” (11.113 mm) diameter, or a similar size cable, cord or tubing. The double- magnetic style has extra clasp-mounting screws allowing them to hold two cables with the addition of another clasp. Incorporate either a single or double magnet assembly to provide sufficient holding power. • Direct pull required to separate these magnets from a painted surface averages 5 lb (22 kg) for the single magnetic style and 12 lb (53 kg) for the double magnet style • Finished in Chem Film over zinc plating • Extra clasps may be ordered separately Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 17250-000 Single Wrap-Around Clip 1 (0.5) 17350-000 Double Wrap-Around Clip 1 (0.5) 17260-001 Extra Clasps, Small 1 (0.5) 17260-002 Extra Clasps, Large 1 (0.5) 5-37 CABLE RUNWAY & TRAY PRODUCTS Cable Runway, Cable Tray & Accessories Cable Runway Products Page 6-3 Cable Runway Junction Products Page 6-10 Auxiliary Frame Products Page 6-17 Cable Runway Support Products Page 6-22 Cable Runway Accessories Page 6-31 ® OnTrac Wire Mesh Cable Tray System Page 6-35 CABLE RUNWAY & TRAY PRODUCTS As long-time developers of quality Cable Runway and Tray Products, CPI understands that installing a cable system "goes beyond cable management (Section 5) and connecting two points together.” As building designs change and data center needs evolve, Cable Runway and Tray Products must be sturdy, dependable and able to meet the latest standards. A vital part of the IT infrastructure solution, CPI meets ANSI/TIA/EIA installation guidelines for Category 5e/6/6a and fiber cables by providing horizontal, vertical and backbone pathways from the data center to workstations. UL Classified versions are also available to meet specific code or job requirements. CPI Runway Products offer complete runway and ladder rack solutions that integrate pathway systems within and outside of the equipment room and under access floors. Spanning from the point of entry/exit into the telecommunications or equipment room, to cross-connects between racks and cabinets, CPI can supply a backbone or horizontal cable solution for any situation. Overcome structural obstacles with the flexible pathway solutions found among CPI’s Cable Tray Products. Installed quickly and easily, these cabling solutions can be cut to form smooth curved transitions that adapt to any obstruction or infrastructure need. CPI Cable Runway & Tray Products include: • High-quality construction and design • Promotes proper cable bend radii for better data transmission • Decreases cable damage • Simplifies equipment moves, additions and changes • Prevents tangled cords • Meets ANSI/TIA/EIA installation guidelines for Category 5e/6/6a and fiber cables • UL Classified cable runway and tray options available to meet specific job requirements Featured Product: Universal Cable Runway (Page 6-3) Now available UL Classified. 6-2 CABLE RUNWAY PRODUCTS Runway In A Box Cable runway is individually packaged to simplify shipping. Individual packaging is utilized for all 10250 Series Universal Cable Runway, 11252 Series TELCO-Style Cable Runway and 11275 Series UL Classified Cable Runway. Individual pieces of runway are packaged in a custom width box of 32 ECT cardboard and banded on our strapping machine. Each box is labeled with the part number and product description indicating color and width. Pallets are designed to support the full length and width of multiple quantities of runway. Runway is neatly stacked in two or three columns, fully stretch-wrapped and banded to the pallet to eliminate movement during shipping. Universal Cable Runway Our most popular cable runway is designed for value conscious customers. The Universal Cable Runway offers the industry standard features you’ve come to expect. With the runway supported every 5’ (1.5 m), maximum load with minimal deflection is 132 lb/ft (59.9 kg). • Made of 3/8” x 1-1/2” x .065” (9.53 mm x 38 mm x 1.65 mm) wall rectangular steel tubing • Cross members welded at 12” (300 mm) intervals • Individually boxed to prevent scratches and damage • Standard length is 9’-11 1/2”/119.5” (3035 mm) • Underwriters Laboratory Classified for suitability as an equipment grounding conductor only (must remove paint or use ground straps) • Installation Best Practices includes Runway Elevation Kit Shipping Part Number/Color Width (Dim. A) Weight in (mm) lb (kg) Gray White Black 10250-104 10250-204 10250-704 4 (100) 18 (8.2) 10250-106 10250-206 10250-706 6 (150) 19 (8.6) 10250-109 10250-209 10250-709 9 (230) 20 (9.1) 10250-112 10250-212 10250-712 12 (300) 25 (11.3) 10250-115 10250-215 10250-715 15 (380) 27 (12.2) 10250-118 10250-218 10250-718 18 (460) 29 (13.2) 10250-124 10250-224 10250-724 24 (610) 32 (14.5) 10250-131 10250-231 10250-731 30 (760) 35 (15.7) 10250-137 10250-237 10250-737 36 (910) 38 (17.2) A 6-3 CABLE RUNWAY PRODUCTS TELCO-Style Cable Runway Similar in construction to our Universal Cable Runway (10250 Series). The side stringers are 1 1/2” x 3/8” x .065” (38 mm x 9.53 mm x 1.65 mm) and the cross members are 1/2” x 1” x .065” (12.7 mm x 30 mm x 1.65 mm) welded at 9” (230 mm) intervals. • The overall length is 9’ 8-1/2”116.5” (2959 mm) or 4’ 5-1/2”/53.5” (1359 mm) to comply with TELCO-Style standards • Individually boxed to prevent scratching and damage • Installation Best Practices includes Runway Elevation Kit (page 6-19) Part Number/Color Width (Dim. A) Length (Dim. B) in (mm) in (mm) Gray White Black 11252-106 11252-206 11252-706 6 (150) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 11252-109 11252-209 11252-709 9 (230) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 11252-110 11252-210 11252-710 10 (250) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 11252-112 11252-212 11252-712 12 (300) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 11252-113 11252-213 11252-713 12 (300) 4’ 5-1/2 (1359) A 11252-115 11252-215 11252-715 15 (380) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) Note: Shown in two sections for illustrative purposes, 11252-118 11252-218 11252-718 18 (460) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) actual product is one piece. 11252-120 11252-220 11252-720 20 (510) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) UL Classified Cable Runway Similar in construction to our TELCO Style Cable Runway (11252 series). The side stringers are 1 1/2” x 3/8” x .065” (38.1 mm x 9.53 mm x 1.65 mm) and the cross members are 1/2” x 1” x .065” (12.7 mm x 30 mm x 1.65 mm) welded at 9” (230 mm) intervals. • Color is Gold chem film over zinc plating or black chem • Underwriters Laboratory Classified for suitability (as an equipment grounding conductor only) • The overall length is 9’ 8-1/2”/116.5” (2959 mm) to comply with TELCO-Style standards • Individually boxed to prevent scratching and damage • Installation Best Practices includes Runway Elevation Kit (page 6-19) Shipping Part Width (Dim. A) Length (Dim. B) Weight Number in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) 11275-X06 6 (150) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 19 (8.6) B 11275-X09 9 (230) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 20 (9.1) 11275-X12 12 (300) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 22 (10.0) A Note: Shown in two sections 11275-X15 15 (380) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 26 (11.8) for illustrative purposes, 11275-X18 18 (460) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 28 (12.7) actual product is one piece. 11275-X20 20 (510) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 29 (13.2) 11275-X24 24 (610) 9’ 8-1/2 (2959) 31 (14.1) X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 7=Black 6-4 CABLE RUNWAY PRODUCTS Trough Cable Runway Features rubber-capped vertical members on both sides which form a trough to accommodate larger cable runs. Wall is .065” (1.65 mm) thick. • Use with heavy-duty splice kits (11299-001, 11298-001) 9’ 11-1/2”L/119.5” (3035 mm), 12” (300 mm) Spacing Between Cross Members Part Number/Color Width (Dim. A) in (mm) Gray White Black 10692-109 10692-209 10692-709 9 (230) 10692-110 10692-210 10692-710 10 (250) 10692-112 10692-212 10692-712 12 (300) 10692-115 10692-215 10692-715 15 (380) 10692-118 10692-218 10692-718 18 (460) 9’ 8-1/2”L/116.5” (2959 mm) , 9” (230 mm) Spacing Between Cross Members Part Number/Color Width (Dim. A) in (mm) Gray White Black 10693-109 10693-209 10693-709 9 (230) 10693-110 10693-210 10693-710 10 (250) 10693-112 10693-212 10693-712 12 (300) A 10693-115 10693-215 10693-715 15 (380) Note: When using P/N 10693 10693-118 10693-218 10693-718 18 (460) select a radius drop that is less than 7.5”W (191 mm) such as P/N 12101-X03. Quick Ship Cable Runway Kit The 4’ 6” (1359 mm) length of this cable runway is designed to meet UPS requirements without additional charges. Packaged one kit per box. Kit consists of: • (2) 4’ 6”/53.5” (1359 mm) cable runway; combined length is 8’ 11 3/8”L/ 107.38” (2727.5 mm) • (1) Butt-Splice Kit (P/N 11301-001) Part Number/Color Width (Dim. A) in (mm) Gray White Black 12170-106 12170-206 12170-706 6 (150) 12170-109 12170-209 12170-709 9 (230) 12170-112 12170-212 12170-712 12 (300) 6-5 CABLE RUNWAY PRODUCTS Alternate Space Cable Runway Designed specifically for use over 19” wide racks (CPI Series 55053, 46353 or 66353) and any 6”W (150 mm) vertical cable manager. A single 104.75”L (2660.7 mm) space will transition a row of four 19” Racks (CPI Series 55053, 46353 or 66353) and five 6”W (150 mm) Vertical Cabling Sections (CPI Series 11729, as shown lower left). • Runway cross-members are spaced to simplify horizontal to vertical alignment of Cross Member Radius Drops • Eliminates additional hardware, time-consuming field fabrication, and complicated adjustments required with traditional products Part Number/Color Shipping Width (Dim. A) Weight in (mm) Gray White Black lb (kg) 31472-106 31472-206 31472-706 6 (150) 17 (7.7) 31472-112 31472-212 31472-712 12 (300) 24 (10.9) 31472-118 31472-218 31472-718 18 (460) 28 (12.7) 31472-124 31472-224 31472-724 24 (610) 31 (14.1) Note: Shown in two sections Note: When runway is supported from the ceiling, select a single Radius Drop to for illustrative purposes, match the width of the runway at each transition point. When runway is supported actual product is one piece. with a Rack-to-Runway Mounting Plate, use two each 12100-X06 Radius Drops at each transition point for 12”, 18” and 24”W (300 mm, 460 mm and 610 mm) runway. Cable Runway Pathway Dividers Pathway Dividers divide Cable Runway into multiple cable pathways in order to organize cables according to media type or destination. By organizing horizontal cables by destination according to route or zone, technicians can better manage cables when additional cables are added or when the cable path through the building changes due to building renovations. • Cable spools separate cables into individual pathways for better organization of cables • Spools have a smooth surface to protect cable jackets from damage during installation or maintenance • Easy installation with included hardware • Universal/Trough Style Dividers fit 3/8”H x 1-1/2”W (9.53 mm x 38.1 mm) cross members on CPI Universal or Trough Cable Runway • TELCO/UL Classified Style Dividers fit 1/2”H x 1”W (13 mm x 30 mm) cross members on CPI TELCO or UL Classified Cable Runway Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) Universal or Trough Style Dividers 13392-711 Divider, Package of 5 1 (0.5) 13392-712 Divider, Package of 25 3 (1.4) TELCO or UL Classified Style Dividers 13392-721 Divider, Package of 5 1 (0.5) 13392-722 Divider, Package of 25 3 (1.4) 6-6 CABLE RUNWAY PRODUCTS PatchRack For CPI Cable Runway The PatchRack is a miniature two-post rack that can be attached to CPI Cable Runway to save rack-mount space by placing patch panels or interconnect equipment above the rack or cabinet. Use Patch Rack to create a zone network in the data center. Two versions are available. Racks P/N 13395 attach to the Cable Runway side stringer with a 7”D (180 mm) standoff bracket. Racks P/N 13394 attach to a cross member underneath the Cable Runway. The position of the rack can be adjusted front-to-back or side-to- side. Racks P/N 13395 can also attach perpendicular to Cable Runway that is 12”W (300 mm) or less. Use the Cross Member Hardware Kit P/N 13399-702 for perpendicular mounting of all racks on any width of Cable Runway. P/N 13395 • Attaches to all CPI Cable Runway, but optimized for 1-1/2”H x 3/8”W (38.1 mm x 9.53 mm) side stringers or cross members to Universal Cable Runway • Supports 19”W rack-mount equipment • Supports up to 60 lb (27.2kg) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13395-X04 With Side Stringer Brackets, 4U 5 (2.3) P/N 13394 13395-X08 With Side Stringer Brackets, 8U 7 (3.2) 13394-X04 With Cross Member Brackets, 4U* 4 (1.8) 13394-X08 With Cross Member Brackets, 8U* 6 (2.7) X=color: 0=Gold, 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Gold and white kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. Does not include Side Stringer Brackets. *Attaches to cross-member in parallel orientation only. Accessories For PatchRack Use Cross Member Hardware Kit for perpendicular mounting on all widths of Cable Runway. The D-Ring Kit provides cable management P/N 13399 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13399-702 Cross Member Hardware Kit, Black 1 (0.5) 13396-204 D-Rings for 4U Rack, 6 Rings, White 1 (0.5) 13396-208 D-Rings for 8U Rack, 10 Rings, White 2 (0.9) 13396-704 D-Rings for 4U Rack, 6 Rings, Black 2 (0.9) 13396-708 D-Rings for 8U Rack, 10 Rings, Black 2 (0.9) P/N 13396 6-7 CABLE RUNWAY PRODUCTS Cable Runway Radius Drop Mounts to the side stringer or cross member of CPI Cable Runway to help maintain proper Category 5e/6/6a or fiber bend radius. • Quick and easy installation using clevis pin • Fits 6”, 9”, 12” and 18” (150 mm, 230 mm, 300 mm and 460 mm) cross member tubing • For use only with runs on CPI Universal Runway (Series 10250) • Provides 3” (80 mm) bend radius • Products 5”W (130 mm), 12100-X06, 12101-X03, drop into CPI’s 6”W (150 mm) vertical cabling sections • Supplied with 1-1/2” (38.1 mm) cable spools (P/N 15003-001) to separate and guide cables • Sold individually Runway Radius Drop, Cross Member Cable Runway Part Product Width Cable Width Number in (mm) Spools in (mm) 12100-X06 6 (150) 5 (130) 2 ea. 12100-X09 9 (230) 8 (200) 2 ea. 12100-X12 12 (300) 11 (280) 3 ea. 12100-X18 18 (460) 17 (430) 3 ea. Runway Radius Drop, Stringer Part Runway Product Width Cable Number Application in (mm) Spools 12101-X01 Universal 10-1/4 (260.4) 3 ea. 12101-X02 Telco 7-3/4 (196.9) 2 ea. 12101-X03 Misc. 5 (130) 2 ea. X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Cable Runway Movable Cross Member Permits the dropping of cables at any point between cross members of 9”,12” or 18”W (230 mm, 300 mm or 460 mm) Cable Runways. Combine with the recommended Cable Runway Radius Drop. • Fits on standard Cable Runway only — 1-1/2” x 3/8” stringer (38.1 mm x 9.53 mm) • Can be used as an attachment point for the Cable Runway Radius Drops listed below • Easy installation using provided hardware Part Cable Runway Use with Number in (mm) Radius Drop 12115-X09 9 (230) 12100-X07 12115-X12 12 (300) 12100-X10 12115-X18 18 (460) 12100-X16 X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. White (-2XX) kits include gold-colored hardware, Gray (-1XX) and Black (-7XX) kits include black color hardware. 6-8 CABLE RUNWAY PRODUCTS Cable Runway Radius Bend Creates a gradual bend for cascading cable runs. • Made of lightweight 1-1/2” x 3/8” (38.1 mm x 9.53 mm) tubular steel • Three cross members welded at approximately 23 degree increments • Outside/Inside is determined by welding cross members closer to cable side Part Number 90-Degree 90-Degree Width (Dim. A) in (mm) Outside Bend Inside Bend 10724-X06 10723-X06 6 (150) 10723-X09 10724-X09 9 (230) 10723 10724-X12 10723-X12 12 (300) 10724-X15 10723-X15 15 (380) 10723-X18 10724-X18 18 (460) 10723-X20 10724-X20 20 (510) 10724-X24 10723-X24 24 (610) X=color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black, 0=Gold. Only gold radius bends are UL Classified. 10724 Cable Runway E-Bend Creates a 90 degree gradual sweep in horizontal plane for Cable Runway runs. Designed for cabling in conformance with minimum bend radius requirements (typically 4 times the cable diameter). Made of lightweight 1- 1/2” x 3/8” (38.1 mm x 9.53 mm) tubular steel to fit standard Cable Runway. Cross members welded at approximately 23 degree increments. • Conforms to Category 5e/6/6a requirements • Easy installation using CPI Butt-Splices (P/N 11301-001, not included) Part Number Part Number Part Number 9” W (230 mm) 12”W (300 mm) 18”W (460 mm) 10822-X09 10822-X12 10822-X18 X=color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black, 0=Gold. Only gold E-Bends are UL Classified Cable Runway Standoff Support Kit Allows the attachment of cable runway 12” (300 mm) directly above and either parallel or perpendicular to existing Cable Runway. Each kit consists of the following items: two steel angle pieces, four steel brackets and eight sets of nuts, bolts and washers. The angle pieces are available in gray, white, black or gold finish. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 31470-X12 Standoff Support Kit 1 (0.5) X=color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Black, 0=Gold. Gold (-012) and White (-212) kits include gold-colored hardware, Gray (-112) and Black (-712) kits include black color hardware. 6-9 CABLE RUNWAY JUNCTION PRODUCTS Butt-Splice Kit Use Butt-Splice Kit to connect two sections of Cable Runway end-to-end. Fits both solid and tubular steel 1-1/2” x 3/8” and 2” x 3/8” (38.1 mm x 9.53 mm and 50.8 mm x 9.53 mm) Cable Runway. Kit consists of: • (4) splice plates • (2) 3/8-16 trimmed head bolts • (2) 3/8-16 hex nuts • (2) 3/8” split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight in (mm) Number lb (kg) 11301-X01* Butt-Splice Kit, 1-1/2 x 3/8 (38 x 9.53) Stringer 1 (0.5) 11301-X02* Butt-Splice Kit, 2 (50.8) Stringer 1 (0.5) 16301-X01* UL Classified Kit 1 (0.5) Heavy-Duty Butt-Splice Kit For butting two lengths of Cable Runway together. • Bolt through Butt-Splice Kit for earthquake areas • Cable Runway drilling is required Kit consists of: • (4) splice plates for 1-1/2” stringers • (4) 3/8-16 x 1-1/4” hex cap screws • (4) 3/8-16 hex nuts • (4) 3/8” split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11299-X01* Heavy-Duty Butt-Splice Kit 2 (0.9) 16299-X01* UL Classified Butt-Splice Kit 2 (0.9) Heavy-Duty Junction-Splice Kit Bolt-through Junction-Splice Kit for vertical runs or to meet seismic requirements. • Material is 2” x 2” x 3/16” (50 mm x 50 mm x 4.763 mm) steel angle • Cable Runway drilling is required Kit consists of: • (2) splice angles • (4) 3/8-16 x 1-1/4” hex cap screws • (4) 3/8-16 hex nuts • (4) 3/8 split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11298-X01* Heavy-Duty Junction Splice 3 (1.4) 16298-X01* UL Classified Junction Kit 3 (1.4) *X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 7=Black. Gold kits include gold color hardware, Black kits include black color hardware. 6-10 CABLE RUNWAY JUNCTION PRODUCTS Junction-Splice Kit Used to create a 90 degree junction splice with all types of 1-1/2” x 3/8” or 2” x 3/8” (38.1 mm x 9.53 mm and 50.8 mm x 9.53 mm) Cable Runway. Kit consists of: • (4) corner clamp plates • (2) 3/8-16 x 1 3/8” trimmed head bolts • (2) 3/8-16 hex nuts • (2) 3/8 split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) Junction-Splice Kit 1-1/2 x 3/8 11302-X01 1 (0.5) (38mm x 9.53) Stringer Junction-Splice Kit 2 x 3/8 11302-X02 1 (0.5) (50.8 x 9.53) Stringer 16302-X01 UL Classified Junction Kit 1 (0.5) X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 7=Black Cable Runway Corner Bracket Dim A Dim B Creates a radius for L, T or X-shaped intersections of Cable Runway formed when two or more pieces of Cable Runway are connected together with the Junction-Splice Kit (P/N 11302 or 16302) or Heavy-Duty Junction-Splice Kit (P/N 11298 or 16298). • Single-piece welded assembly fabricated from 3/8” x 1-1/2” x .065” (9.53 mm x 38.1 mm x 1.65 mm) wall rectangular steel tubing 15” W (380 mm) 24”W (610 mm) • Easy installation; brackets/hardware included Dim. in (mm) in (mm) Part Number Part Number Description A 15.48 (393.2) 24.13 (612.9) 15”W (380 mm) 24”W (610 mm) B 15.48 (393.2) 24.13 (612.9) 11959-X15 11959-X24 Corner Bracket X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black Transition Adapter Butt-Splice Kits Enables 1-1/2” x 3/8” (38.1 mm x 9.53 mm) side stringers to be spliced to 2” x 3/8” (50.8 mm x 9.53 mm) side stringers. P/N 10991-001 allows Swivel- Splice Kits to be used with 2” x 3/8” (50.8 mm x 9.53 mm) side stringers. Kit 10699-X01 consists of: • (1) 2” Butt-Splice Kit (P/N 11301-X02) • (2) steel bars 10699-X01 Kit 10991-X01 consists of: • (1) 2” Butt-Splice Kit (P/N 11301-X02) • (1) 1-1/2” Butt-Splice Kit (P/N 11301-X01) 10991-X01 • (2) Gray or Black finish/color steel transition bars Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10699-X01 Adapter Kit, 1-1/2 to 2 (38.1 to 50.8) 2 (0.9) 10991-X01 Transition Kit, 1-1/2 to 2 (38.1 to 50.8) 2 (0.9) X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 7=Black 6-11 CABLE RUNWAY JUNCTION PRODUCTS 90° Runway-Splice Kit Designed to butt-splice 1-1/2” (38.1 mm) Cable Runway at a 90° angle. Kit consists of: • (2) 90° outside clamps • (2) Inside edge clamps • (2) 3/8-16 trimmed round head, square neck bolts • (2) 3/8-16 hex nuts and lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 90° Runway-Splice Kit, 1-1/2 x 3/8 11314-X01 1 (0.5) (38.1 x 9.53) stringer 16314-X01 UL Classified Kit 1 (0.5) X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 7=Black ° 45 Runway-Splice Kit Butt-splices Cable Runway at a 45° angle. Kit consists of: • (2) 45° outside clamps • (2) Inside edge clamps • (2) 3/8-16 trimmed round head, square neck bolts • (2) 3/8-16 hex nuts and lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 45° Runway-Splice Kit, 1-1/2 x 3/8 11313-X01 1 (0.5) (38.1 x 9.53) stringer 16313-X01 UL Classified Kit 1 (0.5) X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 7=Black Adjustable Junction-Splice Kit Adjusts to form any junction angle for cabling that requires a large radius bend or to route around existing plumbing, electrical, etc. Kit consists of: • (4) adjustable corner plates • (2) 3/8-16 x 2” hex cap screws • (2) 3/8-16 hex nuts • (2) 3/8 lock washers Note: Requires one kit to attach one end of cable runway. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10616-X01 Adjustable Junction Splice Kit 2 (0.9) X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 7=Black 6-12 CABLE RUNWAY JUNCTION PRODUCTS Swivel Splice Kits Splices cable runway vertically, horizontally or perpendicularly. Adjusts to any angle; not limited to 45 or 90 degrees. Flexible swivel design simplifies Cable Runway installation by making it easier to route around existing plumbing, electrical, etc. Material is steel. Hardware and instructions are included. Butt Swivel (10487) Kit consists of: • (8) bracket end • (8) 5/16-18 x 3/4” round head square, neck bolts • (2) 5/16-18 x 1” round head square, neck bolts 10487-X01 • (10) 5/16-18 hex nuts, split lock washers Junction Swivel (10488) Kit consists of: • (4) bracket end • (2) bracket supports and plate clamps • (2) 5/16-18 x 1” round head square, neck bolts • (8) 5/16-18 x 3/4” round head. square. neck bolts • (10) 5/16-18 hex nuts, split lock washers Vertical Swivel (10489) Kit consists of: • (4) bracket end • (2) bracket clamps and plate clamps • (2) 5/16-18 x 1” round head, square neck bolts • (6) 5/16-18 x 3/4” round head, square neck bolts • (8) 5/16-18 hex nuts, split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight 10488-X01 Number lb (kg) 10487-X01 Butt-Swivel Splice Kit 1 (0.5) 10488-X01 Junction Swivel Splice Kit 1 (0.5) 10489-X01 Vertical Swivel Splice Kit 1 (0.5) 16487-X01 UL Classified Butt Swivel Splice Kit 1 (0.5) UL Classified Junction 16488-X01 1 (0.5) Swivel Splice Kit UL Classified Vertical 16489-X01 1 (0.5) Swivel Splice Kit X=color over zinc: 0=Gold, 7=Black 10489-X01 6-13 CABLE RUNWAY JUNCTION PRODUCTS 3” (80 mm) Channel Rack-To-Runway Mounting Plate Secures Cable Runway to the top of Standard Rack and Universal Rack. Mounts either parallel or perpendicular. For proper attachment of 6”W (150 mm) Cable Runway, specify a rack with top bars instead of top angles. • Material is 1/4” (6.4 mm) thick cold-rolled steel. Installation best practice includes Runway Elevation Kit (P/N 10506-XXX) P/N 10595-XXX consists of: P/N 12408-X24 consists of: Parallel Mounting • (1) mounting plate • (1) mounting plate • (4) 5/16-18 x 2 1/4” J-bolts • (2) 5/16-18 x 3 1/4” J-bolts • (4) 5/16-18 hex nuts • (2) 5/16-18 x 2 1/4” J-bolts • (4) 5/16 split lock washers • (4) 5/16-18 hex nuts • (4) 5/16 split lock washers Shipping Part Runway Width Plate Weight Number in (mm) Material lb (kg) 10595-X04 4 (100) Steel 4 (1.8) 10595-X08 5 to 8 (130 to 200) Steel 5 (2.3) 10595-X12 9 to 12 (230 to 300) Steel 5 (2.3) Perpendicular Mounting 10595-X18 15 to 18 (380 to 460) Steel 7 (3.2) 12408-X24* 20 to 24 (510 to 610) Aluminum 4 (1.8) X=color: 0=Gold, 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Gold and white kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. 12408-X24 includes hat- shaped mounting plate that adds 1.25” (32 mm) to height of rack, not available in gold. 3” (80 mm) Channel Rack-To-Runway Mounting Plate With Bracket Secures Cable Runway to the top of Universal Rack without intruding into mounting space. The combination of the flat plate and hat-shaped bracket form a clamp around the rack's top angles or top bars. Mounts either parallel or perpendicular. For proper attachment of 6” runway, use top bars (13045 Series) rather than top angles. Installation best practice includes Runway Elevation Kit (P/N 10506-XXX) Kit consists of: • (1) mounting plate • (2) hat-shaped brackets • (2) J-Bolts, 5/16-18 x 2-1/4” • (3) hex nuts, 5/16-18 • (3) split lock washers, 5/16” Shipping Part Runway Width Plate Weight Number in (mm) Material lb (kg) 12730-X04 4 (100) Steel 4 (1.8) 12730-X08 5 to 8 (130 to 200) Steel 5 (2.3) 12730-X12 9 to 12 (230 to 300) Steel 5 (2.3) 12730-X18 15 to 18 (380 to 460) Steel 7 (3.2) 13730-X24 20 to 24 (510 to 610) Aluminum 4 (1.8) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. White kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. 13730-X24 adds 1.25” (32 m) to height of rack. 6-14 CABLE RUNWAY JUNCTION PRODUCTS 6” (150 mm) Channel Rack-To-Runway Mounting Plate Secures Cable Runway to the top of 6”D (150 mm) Standard Rack. Mounts either parallel or perpendicular to runway. • Installation best practice includes Runway Elevation Kit (P/N 10506-XXX) P/N 12121-XXX consists of: P/N 12409-X24 consists of: • (1) mounting plate • (1) mounting plate • (4) 5/16-18 x 2 1/4” J-bolts • (2) 5/16-18 x 3 1/4” J-bolts Parallel Mounting • (4) 5/16-18 hex nuts • (2) 5/16-18 x 2 1/4” J-bolts • (4) 5/16 split lock washers • (4) 5/16-18 hex nuts • (4) 5/16 split lock washers Shipping Part Runway Width Plate Weight Number in (mm) Material lb (kg) 12121-X09 5 to 9 (130 to 230) Aluminum 5 (2.3) 12121-X12 9 to 12 (230 to 300) Aluminum 5 (2.3) 12121-X18 15 to 18 (380 to 460) Aluminum 7 (3.2) 12409-X24 20 to 24 (510 to 610) Aluminum 5 (2.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. White kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. 12409-X24 adds 1.25” (32 mm) to height of Perpendicular Mounting rack. 6” (150 mm) Channel Rack-To-Runway Mounting Plate With Bracket Secures Cable Runway to the top of 6”D (150 mm) Standard Rack without intruding into valuable mounting space. The combination of the flat plate and hat-shaped bracket form a clamp around the rack's top angles or top bars. Mounts either parallel or perpendicular. • Installation best practice includes Runway Elevation Kit (P/N 10506-XXX) Kit consists of: • (1) mounting plates • (2) hat-shaped bracket • (2) J-Bolts, 5/16-18 x 2-1/4” • (3) hex nuts, 5/16-18 • (3) split lock washers, 5/16” Shipping Part Runway Width Plate Weight Number in (mm) Material lb (kg) 12731-X09 5 to 9 (130 to 230) Aluminum 5 (2.3) 12731-X12 9 to 12 (230 to 300) Aluminum 5 (2.3) 12731-X18 15 to 18 (380 to 460) Aluminum 7 (3.2) 13731-X24 20 to 24 (510 to 610) Aluminum 5 (2.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. White kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware.. 13731-X24 adds 1.25” (32 mm) to height of rack.. 6-15 CABLE RUNWAY ELEVATION PRODUCTS Cable Runway Wall To Rack Kit The CPI Cable Runway Wall To Rack Kit is a one part number solution to the problem of providing support for cable between the rack and the wall. Kit consists of: • (1) 4’ 6”L/54” (1370 mm) Universal Cable Runway • (1) Wall angle support bracket • (1) Rack to runway mounting plate • (1) Pair of end caps • (6) J-bolts Note: The kit is available with runway that is 6”, 9” or 12”W (150 mm, 230 mm or Rack Not Included 300 mm). Rack is not included. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) Standard/Universal Racks with 3”D (80 mm) Mounting Channels Width - in (mm) 11911-X06 6 (150) Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 24 (10.9) 11911-X09 9 (230) Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 28 (12.7) 11911-X12 12 (300) Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 32 (14.5) Standard Rack with 6”D (150 mm) Mounting Channels Width - in (mm) 31473-X06 6 (150) Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 17 (7.7) 31473-X09 9 (230) Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 19 (8.6) 31473-X12 12 (300) Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 24 (10.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. White kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. Cable Runway Elevation Kit Supports Cable Runway above a continuous row of CPI Racks or Cabinets of varying height and provides additional space between the tops of the racks or cabinets and the cable runway, which can create smoother transition of cables. • Two ranges of incremental elevation • Can be mounted perpendicular or parallel • Rack kit includes a single pair of brackets and assembly hardware • Rack kits attach to the top of the rack with a Rack-To-Runway Mounting Plate (P/N 10595 or 12121, sold separately) • Cabinet kits include two pairs of brackets and assembly hardware • Cabinet kits attach directly to the top of the cabinet 2”, 2.5” or 3”H (50 mm, 64 mm or 80 mm) Elevation Shipping Shipping Rack Weight Cabinet Weight lb (kg) lb (kg) 10506-X02 2 (0.9) 10506-X12 2 (0.9) 4”, 5” or 6”H (100 mm, 130 mm or 150 mm) Elevation 10506-X06 3 (1.4) 10506-16 5 (2.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black, 0=Gold. Note: Gold and white kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. 6-16 CABLE RUNWAY AUXILIARY FRAME PRODUCTS ® Slip-On Framing Clip, Cable Runway Allows easy installation of additional rack grids to existing grids by slipping clamps around 5/8” threaded rod. • Material is steel finished with gold over zinc plating Kit consists of: • (2) slotted clamps ® • (2) 5/8” Slip-On Lock Nuts ® Slip-On is a registered trademark of Slip-On Lock Nut Co. Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) For 3/8 (9.53) Bar or Runway Stringer, 11019-001 2 (0.9) 5/8” threaded rod For 9/16 (14.288) channel, 11019-002 2 (0.9) 5/8” threaded rod Framing Clip Kit, Cable Runway Creates a rigid connection between two adjacent grid or cable runway sections. • Material is steel finished with gold over zinc plating; kit consists of 2 brackets only • Installation will require: - (1) 5/8-11 or 1/2-13 threaded rod (of appropriate length) - (2) 5/8-11 or 1/2-13 hex nuts - (2) 5/8” or 1/2” split lock washers -001 Shipping Part Description Weight -002 Number in (mm) lb (kg) 5/8” Bolt Size -003 10609-001 For 3/8 (9.53) Bar or Runway Stringer 1 (0.5) 10609-002 For 9/16 (14.288) Channel 1 (0.5) 10609-003 For 1 (30) Channel 1 (0.5) 1/2” Bolt Size 10621-001 For 3/8 (9.53) Bar or Runway Stringer 1 (0.5) 10621-002 For 9/16 (14.288) Channel 1 (0.5) 10621-003 For 1 (30) Channel 1 (0.5) 6-17 CABLE RUNWAY AUXILIARY FRAME PRODUCTS Auxiliary Framing Channel, Cable Runway • Steel channel or bar commonly used as auxiliary framing for Cable Runways • Color is Gray (other colors available) Shipping Part Length Color Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) 1” x 2” x 3/16” (25 mm x 50 mm x 4.763 mm) Channel 11450-101 Gray 10 (3) 24 (10.9) 10745 9/16” x 2” x 3/16” (14.288 mm x 50 mm x 4.763 mm) Channel 10628 10628-102 Gray 10 (3) 17 (7.7) 3/8” x 2” (9.53 mm x 50 mm) Bar 11450 10745-106 Gray 6 (1.8) 14 (6.4) Heavy-Duty, Auxiliary Framing Channel Splice, Cable Runway Provides extra strength to butt-splice framing channel. • Drilling the framing channel is required • Color is gray splice bars with gold hardware Kit consists of: Figure A • (1) channel splice, 6”L (150 mm) • (1) steel bar splice, 6”L (150 mm) Use with 10628 • (4) 1/2-13 hex cap screws • (4) 1/2-13 hex nuts and split lock washers Shipping Part Description Figure Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10746-101 9/16 x 2 (14.288 x 50) Channel A 3 (1.4) 10747-101 1 x 2 (25 x 50) Channel B 3 (1.4) Auxiliary Framing Bar Splice Kit, Cable Figure B Use with 11450 Runway Butt-splices 3/8” x 2” (9.53 mm x 50 mm) Auxiliary Framing Bar. • Drilling the framing bar is required • Material is steel bar 1/4” x 2” x 6”L (6.4 mm x 50 mm x 150 mm) • Color is gray with gold hardware Kit consists of: • (2) splice bars • (4) 1/2-13 hex cap screws • (4) 1/2-13 hex nuts and split lock washers Shipping Figure C Part Description Figure Weight Use with 10745 Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10748-101 Bar Splice Kit C 4 (1.8) 6-18 CABLE RUNWAY AUXILIARY FRAME PRODUCTS J-Bolt Kit, Auxiliary Framing Channel/Wall Angle Support Used to attach a 2” x 1” (50 mm x 30 mm) auxiliary framing channel to a wall angle support. • Finish is gold over zinc plating Kit consists of 2 each: • 1/4-20 x 1-3/4” J-Bolts • 1/4-20 hex nuts • 1/4 split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11303-000 J-Bolt Kit 1 (0.5) J-Bolt Kit, Auxiliary Framing Channel/Rack Top Bar Used to attach a 2” x 1” (50 mm x 30 mm) auxiliary framing channel to a 1 1/2” (38 mm) equipment rack top bar. • Finish is gold over zinc plating Kit consists of: • (1) 1/4” x 1” x 3-1/2” (6.4 mm x 30 mm x 89 mm) cold-rolled steel plate • (2) 5/16-18 x 3-1/4” J-Bolts • (2) 5/16-18 hex nuts and split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11305-000 J-Bolt Kit 1 (0.5) J-Bolt Kit, Auxiliary Framing Channel/Rack Top Angle Used to attach a 2” x 1” (50 mm x 30 mm) auxiliary framing channel to a 2” x 2” (50 mm x 50 mm) equipment rack top angle. • Finish is gold over zinc plating Kit consists of: • (1) 1/4” x 1” x 3-1/2” (6.4 mm x 30 mm x 89 mm) cold-rolled steel plate • (2) 5/16-18 x 3-3/4” J-Bolts • (2) 5/16-18 hex nuts and split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11304-000 J-Bolt Kit 1 (0.5) 6-19 CABLE RUNWAY AUXILIARY FRAME PRODUCTS J-Bolt Kit, Auxiliary Framing Channel/Runway To attach 1-1/2” (38 mm) Cable Runway to a 1” x 2” (30 mm x 50 mm) auxiliary framing channel without drilling. • Gold over zinc plating Kit consists of: • (1) 1/4”x 1” x 3-1/2” (6.4 mm x 30 mm x 89 mm) cold-rolled steel plate • (2) 5/16-18 x 3-1/4” J-Bolts • (2) 5/16-18 hex nuts, split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 11306-001 For 1-1/2 (38) Side Stringers 1 (0.5) 11306-002 For 2 (50) Side Stringers 1 (0.5) J-Bolt Clip Kit, Auxiliary Framing Channel/Cable Runway For fastening Cable Runway to auxiliary framework. Material is steel finished with gold over zinc plating. Kit consists of: • (2) Clip J-Bolt • (2) 1/2-13 split lock washer • (2) 1/2-13 hex nut Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10635-003 For 3/8 x 2 (9.53 x 50) Bar 1 (0.5) 10635-005 For 9/16 x 2 (14.288 x 50) Channel 1 (0.5) 10635-007 For 1 x 2 (30 x 50) Channel 1 (0.5) Clip J-Bolt, Auxiliary Framing Channel/Cable Runway Used to attach Cable Runway to auxiliary framing. • Sold individually • Gold over zinc plating Kit consists of: • (1) 1/2-13 lock nut • (1) 1/2 Split lock washer Shipping Part Description Weight Number Nominal Size and Length lb (kg) 10620-003 1/2-13 x 4-3/8” 1 (0.5) 10620-004 1/2-13 x 4-7/8” 1 (0.5) 6-20 CABLE RUNWAY AUXILIARY FRAME PRODUCTS Spanner Kit, Auxiliary Framing Channel/Cable Runway Used to attach Cable Runway to auxiliary framing. • Gold over zinc plating, sold individually Kit consists of: • (1) Spanner Bolt • (1) 1/2-13 split lock washer • (1) 1/2-13 hex nut Shipping Part Description Weight Number Nominal Size and Length lb (kg) 10702-001 1/2-13 x 4-3/8” 1 (0.5) 10702-002 1/2-13 x 4-7/8” 1 (0.5) J-Bolts (Hook Bolt, Round Bend), Auxiliary Framing Channel/Cable Used to bolt Cable Runway (11431 series only), auxiliary framing channels and/or bars together. • Gold over zinc and black zinc plate finish • Includes nut and split lock washer • Commercial grade, kits sold individually Shipping Part Nominal Length Opening Weight Number Size lb (kg) 11430-X01 1/4-20 1 3/4” 7/32 1 (0.5) 11430-X02 1/4-20 2” 7/32 1 (0.5) 11431-X01 5/16-18 2 1/4” 7/16 1 (0.5) 11431-X02 5/16-18 2 3/4” 7/16 1 (0.5) 11431-X03 5/16-18 3 1/4” 7/16 1 (0.5) 11431-X04 5/16-18 3 3/4” 9/32 1 (0.5) 11431-X05 5/16-18 3 3/4” 7/16 1 (0.5) 11431-X06 5/16-18 6 1/2” 7/16 1 (0.5) X=color: 0=Gold, 7=Black Mounting Kit, Auxiliary Framing Channel For fastening Cable Runway to auxiliary framework. Material is steel finished with gold over zinc plating. Shipping Part Description Weight in (mm) Number lb (kg) 10709-001 For 3/8 x 2 (9.53 x 50) Bar, Pair 1 (0.5) 10709-003 For 9/16 x 2 (14.288 x 50) Channel, Pair 1 (0.5) 10709-005 For 1 x 2 (30 x 50) Channel, Pair 1 (0.5) 6-21 CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Triangular Support Bracket, Aluminum Triangular Support Bracket provides wall support for Cable Runway. Made of 1/4” x 2” (6.4 mm x 50 mm) aluminum bar. Load rating is 100 lb (45.4 kg). Kit consists of: • (1) triangular bracket • (2) 5/16-18 x 2 1/4” J-bolts • (2) 5/16-18 hex nuts & 5/16 lock washers Runway Shipping Part Widths Color Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 11312-106 4-6 (100 - 150) Gray 2 (0.9) 11312-112 6-12 (150 - 300) Gray 3 (1.4) 11312-118 12-18 (300 - 460) Gray 3 (1.4) 11312-206 4-6 (100 - 150) White 2 (0.9) 11312-212 6-12 (150 - 300) White 3 (1.4) 11312-218 12-18 (300 - 460) White 3 (1.4) 11312-706 4-6 (100 - 150) Black 2 (0.9) 11312-712 6-12 (150 - 30m) Black 3 (1.4) 11312-718 12-18 (300 - 460) Black 3 (1.4) Triangular Support Bracket, Steel Triangular Support Bracket provides wall support for cable runway. Made of cold rolled steel. Load rating is 400 lb (181.4 kg). Kit consists of: • (1) vertical wall-mounting bracket • (1) runway support channel • (1) angle support channel • (3) clevis pins (5/16” diameter) & cotter pins • (2) 5/16-18 x 2 1/4” J-bolts • (2) 5/16-18 hex nuts & 5/16 lock washers Runway Shipping Part Widths Color Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 11746-112 6, 12 (150, 300) Gray 5 (2.3) 11746-118 18 (460) Gray 8 (3.6) 11746-124 24 (610) Gray 9 (4.1) 11746-212 6, 12 (150, 300) White 5 (2.3) 11746-218 18 (460) White 8 (3.6) 11746-224 24 (610) White 9 (4.1) 11746-712 6, 12 (150, 300) Black 5 (2.3) 11746-718 18 (460) Black 8 (3.6) 11746-724 24 (610) Black 9 (4.1) 11746-012 6, 12 (150, 300) Gold 5 (2.3) 11746-018 18 (460) Gold 8 (3.6) 11746-024 24 (610) Gold 9 (4.1) Gold and white kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. 6-22 CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Wall Angle Support Kit, Cable Runway 2” x 2” x .105” (50 mm x 50 mm x 2.67 mm) steel support angle is designed for wall-mounting specific widths of Cable Runway. Kit consists of: • (1) wall angle • (2) 5/16-18 x 2 1/4” J-bolts • (2) 5/16-18 hex nuts • (2) 5/16 lock washers C 11421 Wall Angle Support Kit Color 1 Gray 2 Computer White 7 Black 0 Gold Runway Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C Width in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) 04 4 (100) 6 (150) 4.31 (109.5) 4.31 (109.5) 06 6 (150) 8 (200) 6.31 (160.3) 4 (100.0) 09 9 (230) 11 (280) 9.31 (236.5) 7 (180.0) 10 10 (250) 12 (300) 10.21 (261.9) 8 (200.0) 12 12 (300) 14 (360) 12.31 (312.7) 10 (250.0) 15 15 (380) 17 (430) 15.31 (388.9) 13 (330.0) 18 18 (460) 20 (510) 18.31 (465.1) 16 (410.0) 20 20 (510) 22 (560) 20.31 (515.9) 18 (460.0) 24 24 (610) 26 (660) 24.31 (617.5) 22 (460.0) 30 30 (760) 32 (810) 30.31 (769.9) 28 (710.0) 11421 - X XX Note: Gold and white kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. 6-23 A B CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Wall Angle, Cable Runway Steel angles used as a wall support or as part of earthquake bracing. • Material is 2” x 2” x 3/16” (50 mm x 50 mm x 4.763 mm) steel • Color used is Gray (other colors available) • Wall angle is not pre-drilled Shipping Part Dim. A Color Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) 11420-101 1 (0.3) Gray 3 (1.4) 11420-104 4 (1.2) Gray 7 (3.2) 11420-108 8 (2.4) Gray 20 (9.1) 11420-110 10 (3.0) Gray 23 (10.4) J-Bolt Kit, Cable Runway To attach Cable Runway to Wall Angle Support, a Wall Support Bracket or to a ® MegaFrame Cabinet. Kit (wall angle/support) consists of: • (2) 5/16-18 x 2-1/4” J-bolts (11431-001) • (2) 5/16-18 hex nuts • (2) 5/16 split lock washers MegaFrame kit consists of: • (4) 5/16-18 x 3-1/4” J-bolts • (4) 5/16” split lock washers • (4) 5/16-18 hex nuts Shipping Part Color Weight Number lb (kg) 11308-X01 J-Bolt Kit 1 (0.5) 11308-X05 J-Bolt Kit, MegaFrame 1 (0.5) X=color: 0=Gold, 7=Black Foot Kit, Cable Runway To attach and secure Cable Runway to a wall or floor. Foot made of 3/8” x 1-1/2” x 6”H (9.53 mm x 38 mm x 150 mm) steel. Kit consists of: • (2) cable rack feet • (4) splice plates • (2) 3/8-16 x 2 1/4” trimmed round head square neck bolts • (2) 3/8-16 hex nuts • (2) 3/8” lock washers Shipping Part Color Weight Number lb (kg) 11309-X01 Foot Kit 4 (1.8) X=color: 0=Gold, 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Gold and white kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color hardware. 6-24 CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Adjustable Floor Support Stands, Cable Runway Use for floor support for cable runway grids. • Sold in pairs. • Design allows mounting of any width cable runway • Heights from 5” to 10” (130 mm to 250 mm) • Should be securely fastened to floor Kit consists of: • (2) 2” pipe caps • (2) floor flanges • (2) 2” pipe • (4) grid clamps • (2) spacers, 3/8” x 1.5” • (2) 5/8-11 threaded rod • (2) 5/8 lock washers • (6) 5/8-11 nuts Part Number Height in (mm) Gray White Black 11235-101 11235-201 11235-701 5 to 6 (130 to 150) 11236-101 11236-201 11236-701 6 to 8 (150 to 200) 11237-101 11237-201 11237-701 8 to 10 (200 to 300) Adjustable Floor Support Channel, Cable Runway Use for floor support of Cable Runway. • Sold in pairs • Cable Runway height adjustable from 3” to 8” (80 mm to 200 mm) • Must be securely fastened to floor with 5/8” rods and anchors (included) Part Number Runway Width Gray White Black in (mm) 11241-112 11241-212 11241-712 12 (300) 11241-115 11241-215 11241-715 15 (380) 11241-118 11241-218 11241-718 18 (460) Note: To install the anchors, use the specially designed anchor setting tool (P/N 06003-001) sold separately. 1/2 Pair Shown 6-25 CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Tall Pipe Stand, Cable Runway Supports auxiliary framing or Cable Runway from the floor. • Material is steel Kit consists of: • (1) floor flange • (1) appropriate length of 2” (50 mm) pipe • (1) pipe cap, center drilled and tapped for a 5/8- 11 threaded rod (P/N 11440, not included) • (3) 5/8-11 hex nuts • (3) 5/8 split lock washers • (4) 1/4-20 x 1 1/2” studs • (4) 1/4-20 concrete anchors • (4) 1/4-20 hex nuts • (4) 1/4 Type B washers Installation also requires: • (1) grid clamp of appropriate width, See P/N 10609 • (1) 5/8-11 threaded rod of appropriate length, See P/N 11440 Note: Must be securely mounted to floor with included anchor kit. Also, in the case of attachment to Cable Runway, you may need to use Runway Support Brackets, series 11408 or 10607. Overall Shipping Part Description Height Weight Number in (mm) ft (m) lb (kg) 10684-X01 2 x 79 (50 x 2010) Tall Pole 7 (2.1) 16 (7.3) 10684-X02 2 x 85 (50 x 2160) Tall Pole 7.6 (2.3) 18 (8.2) 10684-X03 2 x 91 (50 x 2310) Tall Pole 8 (2.4) 20 (9.1) 10684-X04 2 x 103 (50 x 2620) Tall Pole 9 (2.7) 24 (10.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black Threaded Ceiling Kit, Cable Runway Used to suspend Cable Runway from the ceiling. Material is steel, finished with Gold over zinc plating. Kit consists of: • (1) ceiling support bracket • (1) either 3/8-16 x 6’, 5/8-11 x 6’, M10 x 2M or M16 x 2M threaded rod • (1) runway support bracket • (4) either 3/8-16, 5/8-11, M10 or M16 hex nuts Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) Drawing shows 2 kits 11310-001 Threaded Ceiling Kit, 3/8” Rod 3 (1.4) 11310-003 Threaded Ceiling Kit, 5/8” Rod 7 (3.2) Note: Recommended spacing between ceiling kits is 5’ (1.5 m). The ceiling hole diameter for P/N 11310 is .375” 11310-093 Threaded Ceiling Kit, M10 x 2M 7 (3.2) (9.5 mm) for 3/8” or M10 rod; .500” (12.7 mm) for 5/8” or 11310-094 Threaded Ceiling Kit, M16 x 2M 7 (3.2) M16 rod. 6-26 CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Threaded Drop Rods Used to support Cable Runway from ceilings • Standard or metric threads, various lengths • Gold chem film over zinc plate finish Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11440-001 3/8-16 UNC-2A rod, 6’L 2 (0.9) 11440-002 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 6’L 5 (2.3) 11440-003 3/8-16 UNC-2A rod, 12’L 5 (2.3) 11440-004 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 12’L 10 (4.5) 11440-005 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 8’L 7 (3.2) 11440-006 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 4’L 4 (1.8) 11440-007 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 6”L 1 (0.5) 11440-008 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 8”L 1 (0.5) 11440-009 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 5.5”L 1 (0.5) 11440-012 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 1’L 1 (0.5) 11440-024 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 2’L 2 (0.9) 11440-036 5/8-11 UNC-2A rod, 3’L 3 (1.4) 11440-091 M10 x 1.5 rod, 1 m L 2 (0.9) 11440-092 M16 x 2 rod, 1 m L 3 (1.4) 11440-093 M10 x 1.5 rod, 2 m L 3 (1.4) 11440-094 M16 x 2 rod, 2 m L 5 (2.3) 11440-095 M10 x 1.5 rod, 3 m L 7 (3.2) 11440-096 M16 x 2 rod, 3 m L 11 (5.0) Threaded Rod Coupling Kit Used to splice two threaded rods end to end. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10697-001 For 3/8” Rod 3 (1.4) 10697-002 For 5/8” Rod 3 (1.4) 6-27 CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Threaded Rod Cover Protects cable from damage during installation. • Made of plastic PVC tubing. Gray I.D. = 0.630” (16 mm) Shipping Part Description Weight Number Length - ft (m) lb (kg) 11085-001 Threaded Rod Cover, 10 (3) 5 (2.3) Threaded Rod I-Beam Clamps, Cable Runway Fastens a 3/8” or 5/8” threaded rod to an I-beam. • Material is cold-rolled steel • Finish is Gold over zinc plating Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10557-001 For 3/8”-16 Threaded Rod 3 (1.4) 10557-003 For 5/8”-11 Threaded Rod 3 (1.4) ® Slip-On Lock Nut Used to add a nut to threaded rod without having to thread from the end. ® Zinc plated. Slip-On is a registered trademark of Slip-On Lock Nut Co. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 03003-001 3/8”-16 Slip-On Lock Nut 1 (0.5) 03003-002 5/8”-11 Slip-On Lock Nut 1 (0.5) Size Recommended Recommended in (mm) Load - lb (kg) Torque 3/8 (10) 2,000 (907.2) 19-25 ft/lb (26 Nm-34 Nm) 5/8 (16) 5,000 (2268.0) 100-120 ft/lb (135.6 Nm-162.7 Nm) Runway Support Brackets Secures threaded rod to Cable Runway. Mounting hardware not included. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) For 3/8” (10 mm) or M10 Rod and 11408-001 1 (0.5) 1-1/2 (38) Stringers For 5/8” (16 mm) or M16 Rod and 11408-003 1 (0.5) 1-1/2 (38) Stringers 6-28 CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Ceiling Support Bracket Used to attach threaded rod to ceiling, hardware is not included. Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11406-001 3/8” (10 mm) or M10 Rod 1 (0.5) 11406-002 5/8” (16 mm) or M16 Rod 1 (0.5) Slotted Support Bracket Secures threaded rod to Cable Runway. Kit consists of: • (1) slotted support bracket • (2) hex nuts • (2) split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10607-002 For 3/8 or M10 Rod and 1-1/2 (38) Stringers 1 (0.5) 10607-001 For 5/8 or M16 Rod and 1-1/2 (38) Stringers 1 (0.5) Vertical Wall Brackets Used to secure Cable Runway with 1-1/2” x 3/8” (38 mm x 9.53 mm) stringers to a wall. Sold in pairs • Material is 1/4” x 1-1/2” (6.4 mm x 33 mm) steel • Gold color over zinc plating or Black • Wall mounting hardware not included Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10608-001 Runway Wall Brackets (Pair), Gold 1 (0.5) 10608-701 Runway Wall Brackets (Pair), Black 1 (0.5) ® Slip-On Support Bracket, Cable Runway Provides easy additions of Cable Runway layers to existing cable racks by allowing support brackets and nuts to slip over drop rod. • For use with 5/8” (16 mm) threaded rod only • Finish is gold over zinc plating Kit consists of: • (2) patented Slip-On nut • (1) slotted bracket • (1) retainer piece Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10873-001 Slip-on Support Bracket 1 (0.5) 6-29 CABLE RUNWAY SUPPORT PRODUCTS Cable Runway Center Support Kit This kit has been designed to make installation of cable runway in the ceiling even easier by using just a single point of attachment. The center attachment design not only makes installation easy but also provides quick and simple cable routing with no need to thread the cable between the runway supports. The support kit securely attaches to the cable runway stringer, eliminating possible dislocations. • Not Included: Threaded rod (P/N 11440-002 or -004) and Ceiling Support Bracket (P/N 11406-002). • Made of steel • Provides an “open” support system with quick and simple cable routing • Threaded rod cover protects cable insulation from damage Kit consists of: • (1) support bracket • (1) reinforcement bar • (2) 5/8-11 hex nuts The Cable Runway Center Support Kit is available • (1) 5/8 split lock washers in sizes to support 6” to 24”W (150 mm to 610 • (1) 12”L (300 mm) threaded rod cover mm) cable runway • (1) J-bolt kit (2 J-bolts; 2 nuts; 2 washers) Shipping Dim. A Part Description Weight Number Width - in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) 12362-X06 6 (150) 6.56 (166.6) 2 (0.9) 12362-X12 12 (300) 12.56 (319.0) 2 (0.9) 12362-X15 15 (380) 16.20 (411.5) 3 (1.4) 12362-X18 18 (460) 19.20 (487.7) 4 (1.8) 12362-X24 24 (610) 25.20 (640.1) 5 (2.3) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black, 0=Gold, Gold and white kits include gold color hardware; Gray and black kits include black color hardware. Cable Retaining Post Provides extra cable depth to existing 1-1/2” (38 mm) cable runway installation. Mounts onto Cable Runway side stringers. • Post is 1/2” x 1” x .065” (12.7 mm x 25.4 mm x 1.7 mm) wall rectangular steel tubing; bracket is 1046 steel Kit consists of: • (1) Post, bracket, and end cap • (1) 1/4-20 x 1-1/4” hex cap screw, split lock washer and hex nut Part Height “A” Shipping Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10596-X06 6 (150) 1 (0.5) 10596-X08 8 (200) 1 (0.5) 10596-X10 10 (250) 1 (0.5) Post and bracket are gold over zinc 10596-X56 6 (150), Pack of 50 29 (13.2) plating or painted gray, black or white. 10596-X58 8 (200), Pack of 50 33 (15.0) White kits include gold color hardware, Gray and black kits include black color 10596-X50 10 (250), Pack of 50 38 (17.2) hardware. End cap is black. X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. 6-30 CABLE RUNWAY ACCESSORIES Cable Runway Insulator Bar Kit Electrically isolates Cable Runway sections, isolating grounded sections of runway or where strong EMI/RFI fields could generate eddy-currents, which ® could disturb down-line equipment. Made of durable, non-conductive Delrin Kit consists of: • (2) insulator bars, 1.5”H x 3/8”W x 5.5”L (38 mm x 9.53 mm x 140 mm) • (2) butt-splice kits (P/N/ 11301-001) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10842-001 Insulator Bar Kit, 1 Kit 2 (0.9) 10842-010 Insulator Bar Kit, 10 Kits 24 (10.9) End Closing Kit, Cable Runway Used to close an unspliced end of Cable Runway. Made of 3/8” x 1-1/2” x .065” (9.53 mm x 38 mm x 1.65 mm) thick rectangular steel tubing. Kit consists of: • (1) end closing bar • (4) corner clamp plates • (2) 3/8-16 x 1 3/8” trimmed round head square neck bolts • (2) 3/8-16 hex nuts Part Width Description in (mm) Number 11700-X04 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 4 (100) Gold and white kits include gold color hardware, 11700-X05 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 5 (130) Gray and black kits include black color hardware. 11700-X06 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 6 (150) 11700-X09 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 9 (230) 11700-X12 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 12 (300) 11700-X15 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 15 (380) 11700-X18 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 18 (460) 11700-X20 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 20 (510) 11700-X24 End Closing Kit, Cable Runway 24 (610) X=color: 0=Gold, 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Cable Runway Tray For use with Universal (10250) Cable Runway. Material is .032” (.81 mm) thick sheet aluminum Length is 9’ 11-1/2”/119.5” (3035 mm). Part Width Shipping Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10606-X06 6 (150) 2 (0.9) 10606-X09 9 (230) 3 (1.4) 10606-X12 12 (300) 4 (1.8) 10606-X15 15 (380) 5 (2.3) Tray rests on cross members, between stringers 10606-X18 18 (460) 6 (2.7) 10606-X24 24 (610) 9 (4.1) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 6-31 CABLE RUNWAY ACCESSORIES Protective End Caps For Runway Covers and protects exposed ends of cable runway and auxiliary framing bar and channel. Reduces chances of personal injury and equipment damage. • Made of fire-retardant flat black colored rubberized material • Sold in pairs Shipping Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10642-001 For 1-1/2 x 3/8 (38 x 9.53) Stringer 1 (0.5) 10757-001 For 2 x 3/8 (50 x 9.53) Auxiliary Bar 1 (0.5) “L” Bracket, Cable Runway Bracket provides a separate facility for running power conductors or other cables that should be physically separated from main cables. • Made of 1/8” x 1” (3.18 mm x 30 mm) steel; gold finish/color over zinc plating Kit consists of (1): • Bracket for 1-1/2” stringer • 1/4-20 x 3/4” hex bolt Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11268-001 “L” Bracket 1 (0.5) Touch-Up Paint In Spray Can Air dry lacquer for touching up finish. Matches color and gloss of CPI’s 12 oz (340 g) textured paint; Air dries to hard finish in minutes pressurized can Shipping Part Description Weight Number oz (g) lb (kg) 25400-X 00 12 (340) Spray Can 2 (0.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black Touch-Up Paint In Bottle Air dry waterborne paint for touching up finish. Matches color and gloss of 1 oz (30 g) bottle CPI’s textured paint. with applicator Shipping Part Description Weight Number oz (g) lb (kg) 25401-X00 1 (30) Bottle 2 (0.9) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black 6-32 CABLE RUNWAY ACCESSORIES Hex Nuts Shipping Part Nominal Size Finish Weight Number lb (kg) 20142-071 1/4-20 Gold 1 (0.5) 20017-071 1/4-20 Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) 20142-081 5/16-18 Gold 1 (0.5) 20017-081 5/16-18 Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) 20142-091 3/8-16 Gold 1 (0.5) Sold individually 20017-091 3/8-16 Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) 03001-001 1/2-13 Gold 1 (0.5) 20142-111 5/8-11 Gold 1 (0.5) Split Lock Washers Shipping Part Nominal Size Finish Weight Number lb (kg) 04003-002 1/4” Gold 1 (0.5) 20015-070 1/4” Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) 20141-080 5/16” Gold 1 (0.5) 20015-080 5/16” Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) Sold individually 20141-090 3/8” Gold 1 (0.5) 20015-090 3/8” Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) 20141-100 1/2” Gold 1 (0.5) 04003-001 5/8” Gold 1 (0.5) Washers: Type A Plain Shipping Part Nominal Size Finish Weight Number lb (kg) 20283-012 5/16” Wide Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) 04002-002 3/8” Wide Gold 1 (0.5) Sold individually 20283-013 3/8” Narrow Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) 04002-001 5/8” Wide Gold 1 (0.5) 20283-022 5/8” Wide Zinc Plated 1 (0.5) 6-33 CABLE RUNWAY ACCESSORIES Hex Cap Bolts Also called Washer Faced Hex Cap Screws. Commercial grade. Zinc plate or gold finish Part Nominal Finish Length Number Size 20290-106 1/4-20 Zinc Plated 3/4” 20290-118 1/4-20 Zinc Plated 2-1/4” 20290-216 5/16-18 Zinc Plated 2” 20290-307 3/8-16 Zinc Plated 7/8” 02004-001 3/8-16 Gold 1-1/4” 02004-002 1/4-20 Gold 1-1/4” 02004-003 1/2-13 Gold 1-1/2” 02004-004 3/8-16 Gold 1-1/2” 02004-005 1/2-13 Gold 1-3/4” 02004-006 5/8-11 Gold 1-1/4” 02004-007 5/8-11 Gold 3-1/4” Hex Lag Screw Used to install racks onto wood or other soft surfaces. Gold over zinc plate finish Shipping Part Nominal Size Length Weight Number lb (kg) 02006-001 1/2-6 2” 1 (0.5) 02006-002 5/8-5 2” 1 (0.5) 02007-004 1/4-10 2” 1 (0.5) Sold individually 20098-832 3/8-7 2” 1 (0.5) 6-34 ® ONTRAC WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY SYSTEM ® OnTrac Wire Mesh Cable Tray System ® CPI’s OnTrac Wire Mesh Cable Tray System creates point-to-point pathways for network cabling in data centers, network equipment rooms and office spaces. The OnTrac Wire Mesh Cable Tray System can be cut and formed into smooth turns and transitions easily adapting to most locations. The tray provides excellent load bearing capability and protection for cables and is UL Classified for suitability as an equipment grounding conductor. Choose from various supports to attach the tray to the ceiling, wall or under access floors to create a pathway for network cables. Features: • Constructed from 5 mm and 6 mm diameter steel wires, welded on 2” x 4” (50 mm x 100 mm) intersections • Available in three heights 2” (50 mm), 4” (100 mm) and 6” (150 mm) and various widths in standard 10’L (3 m) sections • Cut and bend to form smooth curved transitions around obstacles • UL Classified for suitability as an equipment grounding conductor only. • Pre-galvanized, Black powder coat paint finish or Zinc ELectroplate* • Side walls are 2” (50 mm), 4” (100 mm) and 6”H (150 mm) to support different cable fill capacities Part Number & Nominal Dimensions Cable Fill Area Shipping Weight Pre- Height Width 2 2 lb (kg) Black Paint Zinc Plate** in mm Galvanized* in (mm) in (mm) 34811-604 34811-704 34811-504 2 (50) 4 (100) 7.8 4 999 11 (5.0) 34811-606 34811-706 34811-506 2 (50) 6 (150) 11.3 7 258 12 (5.4) 34811-608 34811-708 34811-508 2 (50) 8 (200) 15.2 9 798 14 (6.4) 34811-612 34811-712 34811-512 2 (50) 12 (300) 23.1 14 879 17 (7.7) 34811-616 34811-716 34811-516 2 (50) 16 (400) 31.3 20 161 20 (9.1) 34811-618 34811-718 34811-518 2 (50) 18 (450) 35.3 22 741 21 (9.5) 34811-620 34811-720 34811-520 2 (50) 20 (500) 38.8 25 040 23 (10.6) 34811-624 34811-724 34811-524 2 (50) 24 (600) 47.7 30 766 26 (11.8) 34821-604 34821-704 34821-504 4 (100) 4 (100) 14.6 9 419 14 (6.4) 34821-606 34821-706 34821-506 4 (100) 6 (150) 22.5 14 516 16 (7.3) 34821-608 34821-708 34821-508 4 (100) 8 (200) 30.3 19 548 18 (8.7) 34821-612 34821-712 34821-512 4 (100) 12 (300) 46.1 29 741 21 (8.5) 34821-616 34821-716 34821-516 4 (100) 16 (400) 61.8 39 870 24 (10.9) 34821-618 34821-718 34821-518 4 (100) 18 (450) 69.7 44 967 25 (11.3) 34821-620 34821-720 34821-520 4 (100) 20 (500) 78.3 50 516 27 (12.2) 34821-624 34821-724 34821-524 4 (100) 24 (600) 95.3 61 483 30 (13.6) 34831-608 34831-708 34831-508 6 (150) 8 (200) 45.6 29 395 22 (10.0 34831-612 34831-712 34831-512 6 (150) 12 (300) 69.1 44 580 25 (11.3) 34831-616 34831-716 34831-516 6 (150) 16 (400) 92.8 59 870 28 (12.7) 34831-618 34831-718 34831-518 6 (150) 18 (450) 104.6 67 483 29 (13.2) 34831-620 34831-720 34831-520 6 (150) 20 (500) 116.4 75 096 31 (14.1) 34831-624 34831-724 34831-524 6 (150) 24 (600) 143.0 92 257 34 (15.4) *Pre-galvanized is UL Classified in US only. **Longer lead times when ordering Zinc Electroplate part numbers. 6-35 ® ONTRAC WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES ® OnTrac Wire Mesh Tray Accessories Standard Splice Kit Use to connect sections of cable tray together end-to-end, at intersections and turns. Each splice kit includes: a stamped washer with a fixed screw, a contoured splice washer and a flange nut. The two splice halves wrap around 34738-X01 adjacent wires connecting the tray together. Splice Washer & Bolt Kit Use with Splice Bar (P/N 34739-X01) to connect trays together end-to-end for securing to ceiling, wall and access floor supports or to attach accessories. Includes splice washers, carriage bolts and a flange nuts. Splice Bar 34728-X01 Use with splices from the Splice Washer & Boklt Kit (P/N 34728-X01) to create secure end-to-end connection between cable tray sections. Attaches to the side of the tray using three splice washers from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01). Recommended for all trays that are 18”W (450 mm) or wider. Manufactured from steel; 10.8”L (274.6 mm). Clamp Washer Securely fasten two layers of wire mesh when connecting trays at 90° bends 34739-X01 or intersections or to attach tray to support. Attaches to the tray using a carriage bolt and flange nut from P/N 34728-X02. Carriage Bolt Hardware Use with Clamp Washer to connect wire mesh trays together. Includes carriage bolt and flange nut. Use to attach dividers and horizontal radius together. 34746-X01 90˚ Splice Bar Kit Create a secure 90° T- or L-shaped intersection between two cable tray sections. Kit includes all hardware needed to make one 90° intersections (two 90° Splice Bars, eight contoured splice washers, four Clamp Washers and ten 1/4-20 x 3/4”L carriage bolts and flange nut. 90° T-shaped or two L-shaped splice bars are manufactured from steel; 5 31/32” (152 mm). 34728-X02 Shipping Part Number & Finish Description Weight Black Zinc lb (kg) 34738-701 34738-501 Standard Splice Kit, Pack of 50 11 (5.0) 34728-701 34728-501 Splice Washer & Bolt, Pack of 50 2 (0.9) 34739-701 34739-501 Splice Bar, Pack of 50 12 (5.4) 34746-701 34746-501 Clamp Washer, Pack of 25 2 (0.9) 34728-702 34728-502 Carriage Bolt Washer, Pack of 50 2 (0.9) 34740-701 34740-501 90˚ Splice Bar Kit 2 (0.9) 34740-X01 6-36 ® ONTRAC WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES L Support Bracket Kit Use to support a wire mesh cable tray pathway along a wall or under a floor Installation requires two 3/8” lag bolts and two flat washers for plywood backer boards or two 1/4” hex cap bolts, two flat washers and two appropriate anchors for concrete walls (ordered separately). Use the 16”W (400 mm) or smaller version to support cable tray from an access floor pedestal; attach to the pedestal with a single Pedestal Clamp Bracket Kit (P/N 34737-X01); floor height must be at least 12” (300 mm). Tray attaches to the L Support Bracket with two splice washers from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01) or use the fold-over tab at the end of the bracket to secure the tray. Can be used to support multiple trays of varying widths; the combined width of multiple trays must not 34734-7XX exceed the width of the tray stated in the order table below. Manufactured from steel; length varies, sold individually. Trapeze Support Bracket Use to support wire mesh cable tray from the ceiling using a pair of threaded rods. Installation requires a pair of 1/2”, 3/8” or 1/4” threaded rods, four hex nuts, two (1/2”) or four (3/8”, 1/4”) flat washers, two split lock washers and two appropriate anchors/ceiling clamps (order separately). Tray attaches to the Trapeze Support Bracket with two slice washers from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01). Can be used to support multiple trays of varying widths; the combined width of multiple trays must not exceed the width of the tray stated in the order table below. Manufactured from steel; length varies, sold individually. 34730-7XX Edge Hanger Use in pairs to support wire mesh cable tray from the ceiling using threaded rod. Installation requires a single 3/8” or 1/4” threaded rod, two hex nuts, one 3/8” or two 1/4” flat washers, one split lock washer and an appropriate anchor/ceiling clamp (ordered separately). The side of the tray is supported in the two J-shaped hooks at the bottom of the hanger; use pliers to close hooks and secure tray once cable has been loaded. Use in pairs to support a single 34731-701 cable tray. Manufactured from steel. Description Shipping Part Number Width Weight in (mm) lb (kg) 34734-X04 L Support Bracket, for 4 (100) Tray 1 (0.5) 34734-X08 L Support Bracket, for 8 (200) Tray 2 (0.9) 34734-X12 L Support Bracket, for 12 (300) Tray 2 (0.9) 34734-X16 L Support Bracket, for 16 (400) Tray 3 (1.4) 34734-X20 L Support Bracket, for 20 (500) Tray 3 (1.4) 34734-X24 L Support Bracket, for 24 (600) Tray 4 (1.8) 34730-X12 Trapeze Support Bracket, for 12 (300) Tray 2 (0.9) 34730-X16 Trapeze Support Bracket, for 16 (400) Tray 2 (0.9) 34730-X20 Trapeze Support Bracket, for 20 (500) Tray 3 (1.4) 34730-X24 Trapeze Support Bracket, for 24 (600) Tray 3 (1.4) 34731-X01 Edge Hanger, Pack of 50 7 (3.2) X=finish; 5=Zinc, 6=Pre-Galvanized, 7=Black 6-37 ® ONTRAC WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES Center Support Bracket Use to support wire mesh cable tray from the ceiling with a single 3/8” threaded rod. Tray attaches to the Center Support Bracket with two splice washers from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01) or use fold-over tabs to secure the tray on all sizes except the 4”W (100 mm) version. Used to support a single cable tray. Manufactured from steel; length varies, sold individually. Triangle Support Bracket 34729-7XX Use to support a wire mesh cable tray pathway along a wall. Installation requires two 3/8” lag bolts and two flat washers for plywood backer boards or two 1/4” hex cap bolts, two flat washers and two appropriate anchors for concrete walls (ordered separately). Tray attaches to the Triangle Support Bracket with two splice washers from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01) or use the fold-over tab at the end of the bracket to secure the tray. Manufactured from steel; height and length vary, sold individually. Wall-Mount Angle 34733-7XX Use to support the end of wire mesh cable tray against the wall. Installation requires two 1/4” lag bolts and two flat washers for plywood backer boards or two 1/4” hex cap bolts, two flat washers and two appropriate anchors for concrete walls (ordered separately). Tray attaches to the Wall-Mount Angle with two splice washers from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01). Manufactured from steel; length varies, sold individually. Description Shipping Part Number Width Weight in (mm) lb (kg) 34735-7XX 34729-X04* Center Support Bracket, for 4 (100) Tray 1 (0.5) 34729-X08* Center Support Bracket, for 8 (200) Tray 1 (0.5) 34729-X12* Center Support Bracket, for 12 (300) Tray 2 (0.9) 34729-X16* Center Support Bracket, for 16 (400) Tray 2 (0.9) 34729-X20* Center Support Bracket, for 20 (500) Tray 2 (0.9) 34729-X24* Center Support Bracket, for 24 (600) Tray 3 (1.4) 34733-X04 Triangle Support Bracket, for 4 (100) Tray 1 (0.5) 34733-X08 Triangle Support Bracket, for 8 (200) Tray 1 (0.5) 34733-X12 Triangle Support Bracket, for 12 (300) Tray 2 (0.9) 34733-X16 Triangle Support Bracket, for 16 (400) Tray 2 (0.9) 34733-X20 Triangle Support Bracket, for 20 (500) Tray 3 (1.4) 34733-X24 Triangle Support Bracket, for 24 (600) Tray 4 (1.8) 34735-X08** Wall Mount Angle, for 8 (200) Tray 1 (0.5) 34735-X12** Wall Mount Angle, for 12 (300) Tray 1 (0.5) 34735-X16** Wall Mount Angle, for 16 (400) Tray 1 (0.5) 34735-X20** Wall Mount Angle, for 20 (500) Tray 2 (0.9) 34735-X24** Wall Mount Angle, for 24 (600) Tray 2 (0.9) X=finish; 5=Zinc, 6=Pre-Galvanized, 7=Black * Available in Zinc & Black Finishes only. **Available in Pre-Galvanized & Black Finishes only. 6-38 ® ONTRAC WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES Pedestal Clamp Bracket Use with the L Support Bracket to support wire mesh cable tray from access floor pedestals under an access floor. Use one Pedestal Clamp Bracket to attach a 16”W (400 mm) or smaller L Support Bracket to an access floor pedestal; floor height must be at least 12” (300 mm). Manufactured from steel; sold individually. 34737-501 Pedestal Clamp Bracket Kit Use to support wire mesh cable tray from adjacent access floor pedestals. Kit includes two Pedestal Clamp Brackets, a tray support bracket, and installation hardware. Tray attaches to the tray support bracket with two splice washers from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01). Can be used to support multiple trays of varying widths with a combined width up to 20”W Tray support bracket is manufactured from steel; sold individually. Rack-Mount Hook Use to attach wire mesh cable tray to the top of a two-post or four-post CPI 34737-502 Rack System. Includes a Clamp Washer with a hook that attaches to the L-shaped top angle on CPI Rack Systems. Attach tray to the top of the rack in the parallel (side-to-side) or perpendicular (front-to-back) orientation; parallel alignment may not be centered over the rack. Hook is manufactured from steel; sold in packs of 4. Under Floor Support 34732-701 Use to support wire mesh cable tray from the floor under an access floor. Attaches to the floor with 1/4” hardware or adhesive. Tray attaches to the Under Floor Support with a splice washer from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01). Under Floor Supports can be used in pairs to support wider trays. Manufactured from steel; width, height and depth vary – see the order table below, sold individually. Description Shipping Part Number H x W x D Weight 34736-7XX Finish in (mm) lb (kg) 34737-501 Pedestal Clamp Bracket, Zinc 1 (0.5) 34737-502 Pedestal Clamp Bracket Kit, Zinc 4 (1.8) 34732-701 Rack-Mount Hook, Pack of 4, Black 1 (0.5) Under Floor Support, 3 x 4 x 7 34736-X43 1 (0.5) (75 x 100 x 180) Under Floor Support, 6 x 4 x 8.6 34736-X46 2 (0.9) (150 x 100 x 218) Under Floor Support, 3 x 8 x 7 34736-X83 2 (0.9) (75 x 200 x 180) Under Floor Support, 6 x 8 x 8.6 34736-X86 3 (1.4) (150 x 200 x 218) Under Floor Support, 9 x 8 x 10.2 34736-X89 4 (1.8) (225 x 200 x 260) X=finish; 6=Pre-Galvanized, 7=Black 6-39 ® ONTRAC WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES Cable Tray Divider Use to divide the internal area of a section of wire mesh cable tray to organize cables by type or zone. Hemmed top edge protects cables. Plain galvanized finish (cannot be painted), includes two 5’L (1.5 m) sections. Cable Tray Cover 34743-50X Use to cover the top of a section of wire mesh cable tray to protect or hide cables. Hemmed edges protect the installer. Attaches to the tray with fold-over tabs formed along the edge of the cover; bend the tabs over the top wire on the tray using a flat edge screwdriver. Plain galvanized finish (cannot be painted), includes two 5’L (1.5 m) sections. Cable Tray Bottom Insert 34744-5XX Use to cover the bottom of a section of wire mesh cable tray to protect or hide cables. Plain galvanized finish (cannot be painted), includes two 5’L (1.5 m) sections. Cable Tray Bolt Style Cutting Tool Use to cut wire mesh cable tray to fit and form pieces to match pathway requirements, has angled head to allow clear view while cutting. 34745-5XX Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 34743-502 Cable Tray Divider, for 2 (50) Tray 3 (1.4) 34743-504 Cable Tray Divider, for 4 (100) Tray 5 (2.3) 34743-506 Cable Tray Divider, for 6 (150) Tray 7 (3.2) 34839-001 34744-5XX* Cable Tray Cover 2 (0.9) 34745-5XX* Cable Tray Bottom Insert 4 (1.8) 34839-001 Cable Tray Bolt Style Cutting Tool 6 (2.7) *P/Ns 34744-5XX and 34745-5XX available in all tray sizes; -X04 (4”, 100 mm), -X06 (6”, 150 mm). -X08 (8”, 200 mm), -X12 (12”, 300 mm), -X16 (16”, 400 mm), -X18 (18”, 450 mm), -X20 (20”, 500 mm), -X24 (24”, 600 mm). Shipping Weights for 4” Tray. 6-40 ® ONTRAC WIRE MESH CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES Tool-Less Radius Drop Use to properly support cables as they exit or enter cable tray pathways. Provides a wide radius featuring tool-less attachment that requires no cutting of the tray during installation. Secure cables through slots in the radius drop with cable straps or ties. Attaches to the bottom of the tray with bendable tabs that lock the radius drop in place. Can also be attached to the bottom of the tray with a splice washer from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit 34741-701 (P/N 34728-X01). Manufactured from steel; sold individually. Large Radius Drop Use to properly support cables as the cables exit or enter cable tray pathways. Secure cables through slots in the radius drop with cable straps or ties. Attaches to the bottom or side of the tray with two splice washers from the Splice Washer & Bolt Kit (P/N 34728-X01). Manufactured from steel; sold individually. 34747-701 Split Bolt Grounding Clamp Use to attach a ground conductor to wire mesh cable tray. Split bolt attaches over the wires that form the tray. Slot accommodates #6 AWG wire; remove paint from tray for ground contact. Manufactured from bronze alloy and copper 1.5”L (38 mm). 34838-001 Label Holder Use to label a section of wire mesh cable tray to identify the pathway or a drop location. Attaches to the side or bottom of the tray. Shipping Part Description W eight Number lb (kg) 34741-X01 Tool-Less Radius Drop 1 (0.5) 34749-001 34747-X01 Large Radius Drop 1 (0.5) 34838-001 Split Bolt Grounding Clamp, Pack of 10 1 (0.5) 34749-001 Label Holder, Pack of 10 1 (0.5) X=finish; 5=Zinc, 7=Black 6-41 POWER MANAGEMENT PRODUCTS Power Strips & Power Distribution Units for Racks & Cabinets Overview Page 7-3 Vertical Power Strips - Cabinets Page 7-5 Vertical Power Strips - Racks Page 7-6 Horizontal Power Strips Page 7-7 Vertical Power Strips - Basic Page 7-8 Power Distribution Units - Vertical Page 7-10 Power Distribution Units - Horizontal Page 7-11 Mounting Brackets Page 7-13 PowerScope In-Line Meter Page 7-14 POWER MANAGEMENT PRODUCTS Power Management Products are designed to fully integrate into a CPI Rack System (Section 1) or Cabinet and Enclosure System (Section 2), delivering electrical power to support a wide array of active equipment and provide reliable, efficient distribution of power. CPI has a large variety of sizes and configurations available to meet almost any need. For basic applications with lower power requirements and where remote monitoring is not required, use CPI’s rack-mount Power Strips to distribute power to equipment. In data center, computer and equipment room applications, use CPI’s rack-mount Power Distribution Units (PDUs) to distribute power to equipment and remotely monitor power, temperature and humidity conditions. To upgrade existing PDUs with remote monitoring, select CPI’s PowerScope In-Line Power Meter. CPI Power Management Products include: Power Strips – Vertical and Horizontal Rack-Mount Configurations • Optional circuit breakers, surge protection and local meters • Single-Input, Single-Phase models for circuits rated up to 20 Amperes • NEMA-NEMA plug-to-receptacle combinations • UL Listed Power Distribution Units (PDUs) – Vertical and Horizontal Rack-Mount Configurations • Four progressive feature levels: Basic, Metered, Monitored and Controlled • Optional circuit breakers, local meters, remote monitoring and remote power cycling • Monitored and Controlled models integrate with CPI’s Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) software (Section 10) which provides simplified web-based, multi-site monitoring • Single-Input models for circuits rated up to 60 Amperes • Single-Phase and Three-Phase plugs • NEMA-NEMA, NEMA-IEC, and IEC-IEC plug-to-receptacle combinations • UL Listed PowerScope In-Line Power Meter • Upgrade existing basic and metered PDUs with remote monitoring • Remote monitoring of current use, temperature and humidity • Optional local meters • Single-Input and Dual-Input models • Single-Phase and Three-Phase plugs 7-2 OVERVIEW Power Strip and PDU Options Power Strips: CPI’s Power Strips are available with the following options: • Thermal Circuit Breakers – provide basic over-current protection • Surge Protection – provides basic voltage-spike protection • Local Meters – displays the total current use by connected equipment Included Features Basic Metered Tool-less Mounting on Vertical Power Strips for Cabinets • • Branch Circuit Breakers o o Local Digital Current Meters • Note: • means included; o means optional PDUs: CPI’s PDUs are grouped into four progressive levels with distinct features: • Basic - Provides basic power distribution and circuit protection with circuit breakers. Some models are available without circuit breakers. • Metered - Includes features of Basic PDUs but also contains an in-line ammeter with digital display that shows the amount of current being used by equipment attached to the PDU. Single-phase PDUs with multiple circuit segments (two or more circuit breakers) may have multiple ammeters with digital displays – one for each circuit segment. Three-phase PDUs have three ammeters with digital displays – one for each phase. Both arrangements make it easier to plan and balance power loads. • Monitored – Presents same features of Metered PDUs along with an Ethernet connection which allows monitoring of power meters through an IP connection using a web browser, CPI’s SEMA software (Section 10) or third-party software that supports SNMPv1 protocol. Monitored PDUs also have an external temperature and humidity sensor connection. Connect the environmental sensor (sold separately) to monitor temperature and humidity conditions in the cabinet. • Controlled - Includes features of Monitored PDUs as well as switchable outlets that can be turned on or off remotely allowing remote power cycling. Each controlled outlet also has a built-in ammeter allowing current to be measured by outlet. Use with SEMA software (Section 10) to generate reports that lists individual equipment power use. Included Features Basic Metered Monitored Controlled Tool-less Mounting • • • • Circuit Breakers o o o • Local Digital Current Meters • • • Network Access/Current Monitoring • • Temp/Humidity Sensor Port • • SEMA-Compatible • • Controlled Outlets • Monitored Outlets • Note: • means included; o means optional. PDUs rated aove 20 Amperes require Circuit Breakers. 7-3 ORDERING INFORMATION Plug/Inlet & Outlet Recognition Table Straight Plugs NEMA 5-15P NEMA 5-20P NEMA 6-20P 125VAC/15A 125VAC/20A 250VAC/20A NEMA L6-20P Locking Plugs NEMA L5-15P NEMA L5-20P NEMA L5-30P NEMA L6-30P (Single-Phase) 125VAC/15A 125VAC/20A 125VAC/30A 250VAC/20A 250VAC/30A NEMA L21-20P NEMA L21-30P NEMA L15-20P NEMA L15-30P CS 3P/4W Locking Plugs (Three-Phase) 120/208 VAC/20A 120/208 VAC/30A 250VAC/20A 250VAC/30A 250V/50A NEMA 5-15R NEMA 5-20R NEMA 6-20R NEMA L6-20R NEMA L15-30R Power Receptacles 125VAC/15A 125VAC/20A 250VAC/20A 250 VAC/20A 250 VAC/30A IEC 60320 C-13/C-14 IEC 60320 C-19/C-20 IEC 60309/3-WIRE IEC 60309/4-WIRE 2 P+E 3 P+E IEC Power Outlet/Inlet UL-125/250 VAC/15A UL-125/250 VAC/20A 250VAC/16-32A 250 VAC/60A CE-230 VAC/10A CE-230 VAC/16A Please note the following: • PDUs may have one or two styles of outlets; use this diagram of plugs and outlets to aid in product selection • Carefully note circuit breaker configurations on models rated over 20 Amperes; total current available to equipment may be limited by the circuit breaker configuration; outlets are evenly divided between circuit breakers If you do not see the configuration that you need, please contact CPI Technical Support for assistance. 7-4 VERTICAL POWER STRIPS - CABINETS Vertical Power Strips • 100-125 Volt, single-phase power strips • Available in two heights: - 66.3”H (1683 mm) with 20 outlets - 38.5”H (978 mm) with 10 outlets • Thermal circuit breaker, NEMA plug, NEMA outlets • 10’L (3 m) attached power cord • Metered models include an ammeter with digital display • Optional surge protection • Cabinet versions include mounting brackets for M-Series MegaFrame and C-Series SlimFrame Cabinets and tool-less buttons for accessory power strip mounting brackets • Rack versions include 6.5”D (165 mm) Offset Rack-Mount Brackets for Rack Systems • Other mounting brackets available as separate accessories Basic Power Strips, Vertical Mount for Cabinets Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12850-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (10) 5-15R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12848-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (20) 5-15R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12850-723 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P No (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12850-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12848-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12850-707 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12848-707 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12850-702 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (10) 5-15R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12848-702 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (20) 5-15R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12850-706 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12848-706 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12850-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12848-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) Metered Power Strips, Vertical Mount for Cabinets Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12848-755 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12848-757 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12848-756 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12848-758 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) See page 7-4 for plug definitions. Continued on next page. 7-5 VERTICAL POWER STRIPS - RACKS Basic Power Strips, Vertical Mount for Racks Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12853-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (10) 5-15R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12851-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (20) 5-15R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12853-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12851-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12853-707 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12851-707 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12853-702 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (10) 5-15R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12851-702 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (20) 5-15R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12853-706 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12851-706 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12853-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 38.5 (978) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12851-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) Metered Power Strips, Vertical Mount for Racks Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12851-755 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12851-757 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12851-756 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12851-758 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (20) 5-20R 66.3 (1683) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12853-701 See page 7-4 for plug definitions. Continued on next page. 7-6 HORIZONTAL POWER STRIPS - 19”W EIA Horizontal Power Strips • 100-125 Volt, single-phase power strips • 19”EIA rack-mount, uses 1U of space • NEMA plug, NEMA outlets • 10’L (3 m) attached power cord • Optional thermal circuit breaker • Metered models include an ammeter with digital display • Optional surge protection Basic Power Strips, Horizontal Rack-Mount Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12816-709 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P No (8) 5-15R 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) 12816-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) 12816-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) 12816-706 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12816-703 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) 12816-707 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) 12816-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) Metered Power Strips, Horizontal Rack-Mount Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 13239-756 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 4.5 (114) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 13239-753 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (10) 5-15R 1U 19"EIA 4.5 (114) 13239-757 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (10) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 4.5 (114) 12816-707 13239-757 See page 7-4 for plug definitions. Continued on next page. 7-7 VERTICAL POWER STRIPS - BASIC The following Power Strips include special mounting brackets for specific CPI Racks or Wall-Mount Cabinets (Section 4). Basic Power Strips, Vertical Mount for Universal Rack Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12819-709 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P No (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 2.7 (69) 3.0 (80) 12819-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 2.7 (69) 3.0 (80) 12819-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 2.7 (69) 3.0 (80) 12819-706 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 2.7 (69) 3.0 (80) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12819-703 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 2.7 (69) 3.0 (80) 12819-707 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 2.7 (69) 3.0 (80) 12819-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 2.7 (69) 3.0 (80) Basic Power Strips, Stand-Off Mount, 19”W EIA Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12817-709 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P No (8) 5-15R 1U 19"EIA 8.5 (216) 12817-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 1U 19"EIA 8.5 (216) 12817-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 8.5 (216) 12817-706 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 8.5 (216) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12817-703 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 1U 19"EIA 8.5 (216) 12817-707 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 8.5 (216) 12817-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 8.5 (216) Basic Power Strips, Stand-Off Mount, 23”W Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12818-709 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P No (8) 5-15R 1U 23" 8.5 (216) 12818-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 1U 23" 8.5 (216) 12818-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 23" 8.5 (216) 12818-706 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 23" 8.5 (216) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12818-703 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 1U 23" 8.5 (216) 12818-707 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 23" 8.5 (216) 12818-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 1U 23" 8.5 (216) Note: Standoff Bracket (for 19”W & 23”W) is 6.75"D (165 mm); the Power Strip is 1.6"D (41 mm). 7-8 VERTICAL POWER STRIPS - BASIC ® Basic Power Strips,for CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet System Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12820-709 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P No (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12820-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12820-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12820-706 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12820-703 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12820-707 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12820-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) Basic Power Strips,for Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip 12821-709 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P No (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12821-701 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12821-705 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12821-706 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase Power Strip, Surge-Protected 12821-703 15 1.4 NEMA 5-15P 1 x 15A (8) 5-15R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12821-707 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) 12821-708 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P 1 x 20A (8) 5-20R 17 (432) 1.6 (41) 1.6 (41) Offset Rack-Mount Brackets Use Offset Rack-Mount Brackets where additional depth is required over the standard 6.5”D (165 mm) Versa-clamp included with vertical power strips for racks. • Allows rotation of power strip into preferred orientation prior to securing in place • Allows vertical positioning • Used with CPI Vertical Power Strips for Racks, page 7-6. Two brackets included Shipping in each kit Part Description Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 12847-701 6.5 (165) Offset Bracket Kit* 2 (0.9) 12847-702 9.1 (231) Offset Bracket Kit 2 (0.9) Illustration shows 9.1” (231 mm) and standard 12847-703 11.7 (297) Offset Bracket Kit 2 (0.9) 6.5” (165 mm) brackets *Note: Vertical Power Strips for racks include 6.5”D (165 mm) mounting brackets 7-9 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDUs) - VERTICAL Power Distribution Units (PDUs) • Four feature levels: Basic, Metered, Monitored, Controlled • Tool-less mounting on CPI cabinets • Optional circuit breakers and ammeter with local display for branch monitoring • Optional network connection with remote monitoring and power cycling • Monitored and Controlled models integrate with CPI’s Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) software (Section 10) which provides simplified web-based, multi-site monitoring • Single-input models for 110-250 VAC circuits rated up to 60 Amperes • Single-phase and three-phase plugs • NEMA-NEMA, NEMA-IEC and IEC-IEC plug-to-receptacle combinations • Other models available not listed in the catalog, please contact Technical Support. Basic, Vertical PDUs Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 208 Volt, Three-Phase PDUs 35815-1G3 40 11.5 IEC 60A 3P+E 3 x 20A (42) C13 68.5 (1740) 2.0 (51) 3.5 (89) 35815-1G2 40 11.5 IEC 60A 3P+E 3 x 20A (15) C13, (9) C19 68.5 (1740) 2.0 (51) 3.5 (89) 35616-1A1 60 17.3 IEC 60A 3P+E 6 x 20A (12) C19 68.5 (1740) 2.0 (51) 3.5 (89) Note: Order mounting brackets separately. Metered, Vertical PDUs Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 208 Volt, Three-Phase PDUs 35815-2G1 40 11.5 IEC 60A 3P+E 3 x 20A (24) C13 68.5 (1740) 2.0 (51) 3.5 (89) Note: Order mounting brackets separately. Monitored, Vertical PDUs Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 208 Volt, Three-Phase PDUs 35815-3G2 40 11.5 IEC 60A 3P+E 3 x 20A (15) C13, (9) C19 68.5 (1740) 2.0 (51) 3.5 (89) 35616-3A1 60 17.3 IEC 60A 3P+E 6 x 20A (12) C19 68.5 (1740) 2.0 (51) 3.5 (89) Note: Order mounting brackets separately. See page 7-4 for plug definitions. Continued on next page. 7-10 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDUs) - HORIZONTAL Basic, Horizontal Rack-Mount PDUs Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase PDUs 35692-111 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P No (4) C13, (4) C19 1U 19"EIA 1.9 (48) 35692-121 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P No (4) C13, (4) C19 1U 19"EIA 1.9 (48) 35693-112 30 2.9 NEMA L5-30P 2 x 20A (12) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 35693-113 30 2.9 NEMA L5-30P 2 x 20A (20) 5-20R 2U 19"EIA 6.0 (152) 35693-111 30 2.9 NEMA L5-30P 2 x 20A (12) C13 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 200-240 Volt, Single-Phase PDUs 13653-701 20 3.3 NEMA 6-20P 1 x 20A (12) 6-20R 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 35682-111 20 3.3 NEMA 6-20P No (4) C13, (4) C19 1U 19"EIA 1.9 (48) 13653-702 20 3.3 NEMA L6-20P 1 x 20A (12) 6-20R 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 35682-121 20 3.3 NEMA L6-20P No (4) C13, (4) C19 1U 19"EIA 1.9 (48) 35683-111 30 5.0 NEMA L6-30P 2 x 20A (12) C13 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 35662-112 16 2.7 IEC C20* No (10) C13 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) 35662-111 16 2.7 IEC C20* No (16) C13 1U 19"EIA 4.5 (114) 35663-111 32 5.3 IEC 32A 2P+E 2 x 16A (12) C13 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 208 Volt, Three-Phase PDUs 35676-111 60 17.3 IEC 60A 3P+E 6 x 20A (12) C19 2U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) Note: Includes mounting brackets for 19"EIA rack/cabinet. Order power cord for models with C20 Input separately. Metered, Horizontal Rack-Mount PDUs Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlets H W D 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase PDUs 35692-211 20 1.9 NEMA 5-20P No (4) C13, (4) C19 1U 19"EIA 1.9 (48) 35692-221 20 1.9 NEMA L5-20P No (4) C13, (4) C19 1U 19"EIA 1.9 (48) 35693-212 30 2.9 NEMA L5-30P 2 x 20A (12) 5-20R 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 35693-213 30 2.9 NEMA L5-30P 2 x 20A (20) 5-20R 2U 19"EIA 6.0 (152) 35693-211 30 2.9 NEMA L5-30P 2 x 20A (12) C13 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 200-240 Volt, Single-Phase PDUs 13653-751 20 3.3 NEMA 6-20P 1 x 20A (12) 6-20R 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 35682-211 20 3.3 NEMA 6-20P No (4) C13, (4) C19 1U 19"EIA 1.9 (48) 13653-752 20 3.3 NEMA L6-20P 1 x 20A (12) 6-20R 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 35682-221 20 3.3 NEMA L6-20P No (4) C13, (4) C19 1U 19"EIA 1.9 (48) 35683-211 30 5.0 NEMA L6-30P 2 x 20A (12) C13 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) 35882-2A2 30 5.0 NEMA L6-30P 2 x 15A (24) C13 2U 19"EIA 8.0 (203) 35662-212 16 2.7 IEC C20* No (10) C13 1U 19"EIA 1.6 (41) 35662-211 16 2.7 IEC C20* No (16) C13 1U 19"EIA 4.5 (114) 35663-211 32 5.3 IEC 32A 2P+E 2 x 16A (12) C13 1U 19"EIA 6.5 (165) Note: Includes mounting brackets for 19"EIA rack/cabinet. Order power cord for models with C20 Input separately. 7-11 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDUs) - HORIZONTAL Monitored, Horizontal Rack-Mount PDUs Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Munber Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlet H W D 200-240 Volt, Single-Phase PDUs 35882-3A1 30 5.0 NEMA L6-30P 2 x 15A (24) L6-15R 2U 19"EIA 8.0 (203) 35882-3A2 30 5.0 NEMA L6-30P 2 x 15A (24) C13 2U 19"EIA 8.0 (203) 208 Volt, Three-Phase PDUs 35676-311 60 17.3 IEC 60A 3P+E 6 x 20A (12) C19 2U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) Note: Includes mounting brackets for 19"EIA rack/cabinet. Controlled, Horizontal Rack-Mount PDUs Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Breakers Outlet H W D 200-240 Volt, Single-Phase PDUs 35882-5A2 30 5.0 NEMA L6-30P 2 x 15A (24) C13 1U 19"EIA 28 (711) 35883-5B2 32 5.3 IEC 32A 2P+E 2 x 16A (24) C13 1U 19"EIA 28 (711) Note: Includes mounting brackets for 19"EIA 4-post rack or cabinet. Requires front and rear support. PowerWedge 35882-5A2 front and rear views See page 7-4 for plug definitions. Continued on next page. 7-12 VERTICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDUs) BRACKETS Vertical PDU Mounting Brackets Kit Used to attach Vertical PDUs to CPI Cabinet and Rack Systems. Each Mounting Bracket Kit includes a pair of mounting brackets to support the PDU. Mounting Bracket Kits are NOT included with PDUs. Select the kit to match the cabinet or rack model. ® • The F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System kit supports two 2.4”W (61 mm) or narrower PDUs, has tool-less attachment points spaced 64.75” (1645 mm) and 61.25” (1556 mm) apart and requires a minimum 6.7” (170 mm) 13780-C01 equipment mounting rail setback. One kit is included with each 42U or taller cabinet manufactured after August 1, 2011. The kits are not compatible with F-Series TeraFrame Cabinets manufactured before August 1, 2011, F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet System or N-Series TeraFrame Network Cabinet. ® • The GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System kit supports two 2.0”W (51 mm) or narrower PDUs, has tool-less attachment points spaced 64.75” (1645 mm) or 61.25” (1556 mm) apart depending on mounting location and requires a minimum 6.75” (172 mm) equipment mounting rail setback. One 25140-701 kit is included with each 42U or taller cabinet. ® • The M-Series MegaFrame® Cabinet System and C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet System kit supports two 2.4”W (61 mm) or narrower PDUs, has tool-less attachment points spaced 64.75” (1645 mm) apart and requires a minimum 6.0” (152 mm) equipment mounting rail setback. One kit is included with each 37U or taller cabinet manufactured after August 1, 2011. • The Rack Systems kit supports one PDU and has tool-less attachment points spaced 64.75” (1645 mm) apart. The 2U brackets attach to the rack channel spaced 37U apart and extend between 8.5” D (216 mm) and 12” D (300 mm) in .875” (22 mm) increments. 13762-701 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13780-C01 For F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System 2 (0.9) 25140-701 For GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System 2 (0.9) For M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet System 13762-701 2 (0.9) or C-Seres SlimFrame Cabinet System 35700-701 For Rack Systems 2 (0.9) 35700-701 PDU Accessories • For Monitored and Controlled PDUs and PowerScope In-Line Meter • The Serial Cable is required to use a direct serial connection to configure PDUs/PowerScope for network connection • Connect an Environmental Sensor (P/N 35941-132) to PDUs/PowerScope to remotely measure temperature and humidity in the cabinet (see next page) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 35941-131 35941-131 Serial Setup Cable, RJ-45 to DB9 2 (0.9) Environmental Probe Assembly 35941-132 Temperature & Humidity Sensor, RJ11, 2 (0.9) 5’6”L (1.7 m) Cord 7-13 POWERSCOPE IN-LINE METER PowerScope In-Line Meter Use the PowerScope In-Line Meter in data centers, computer and equipment rooms to upgrade existing basic or metered PDUs with network-based current monitoring. PowerScope attaches between the power connection and PDU and measures total current use by equipment attached to the PDU. It features an Ethernet connection which allows current monitoring through an IP connection using a web browser, CPI’s SEMA Software (Section10) or third-party software that support SNMPv1 protocol. It also has an external temperature and humidity sensor connection. Connect the environmental sensor (sold separately) to monitor temperature and humidity conditions in the cabinet. • Match the Plug/Connector style to the PDU; power cords are 3’L (1 m) • CPI PowerScope In-Line Meter is available in a 1U horizontal rack-mount configuration only, Optional local meters Input Output Dims - in (mm) Part Number Amp kW Plug Local Meter Connectors H W D For 110-125 Volt, Single-Phase PDUs 35992-100 20 1.9 (2) NEMA L5-20P No (2) L5-20R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35992-120 20 1.9 (2) NEMA L5-20P Yes (2) L5-20R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35992-200 30 2.9 (2) NEMA L5-30P No (2) L5-30R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35992-220 30 2.9 (2) NEMA L5-30P Yes (2) L5-30R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) For 200-240 Volt, Single-Phase PDUs 35992-301 20 3.3 (2) NEMA L6-20P No (2) L6-20R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35991-311 20 3.3 (1) NEMA L6-20P Yes (1) L6-20R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35991-312 16 2.7 (1) IEC 16A 2P+E Yes (1) IEC 16A 2P+E 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35992-321 20 3.3 (2) NEMA L6-20P Yes (2) L6-20R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35592-322 16 2.7 (2) IEC 16A 2P+E Yes (2) IEC 16A 2P+E 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35992-401 30 5.0 (2) NEMA L6-30P No (2) L6-30R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35991-411 30 5.0 (1) NEMA L6-30P Yes (1) L6-30R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35991-412 32 5.3 (1) IEC 32A 2P+E Yes (1) IEC 32A 2P+E 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35992-421 30 5.0 (2) NEMA L6-30P Yes (2) L6-30R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35992-422 32 5.3 (2) IEC 32A 2P+E Yes (2) IEC 32A 2P+E 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) For 208 Volt, Three-Phase PDUs 35993-405 30 8.6 (1) L21-30P No (1) L21-30R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35993-404 30 8.6 (1) L15-30P No (1) L15-30R 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) 35993-603 40 11.5 (1) 50A CS8365C No (1) 50A CS8375 1U 19"EIA 9.0 (230) Note: Includes mounting brackets for 19"EIA rack/cabinet. Input/output cords are 3'L (1 m). PowerScope In-Line Meter front and rear views 7-14 KVM SYSTEMS Keyboard, Video, Monitor Systems & Accessories 17” LCD KVM Drawer Page 8-3 Analog KVM Switch with DB15 Ports Page 8-5 IP KVM Switch with DB15 Ports Page 8-7 IP KVM Switch with Cat 5/6 Ports Page 8-9 KVM Switch Accessories Page 8-12 KVM SYSTEMS CPI provides space-saving, scalable and fully integrated KVM Systems with optional IP capability. KVM Systems provide convenient console and IP access to servers. KVM Systems include: Analog KVM • Compact, simple and cost-effective single-user keyboard, video and mouse (KVM) switching solutions for small and medium-sized computer rooms • Access up to 16 computers per switch and 128 with expansion switches • View computers from the rack-mount drawer • Transfer between computers with intuitive, on-screen menu or keyboard hot keys KVM over IP • Enterprise class, multi-user KVM switches • Access up to 32 computers per switch and 256 with expansion switches • View computers from the rack-mount drawer, a remote computer or over the IP network using a web browser • Transfer between computers with intuitive, on-screen menu or keyboard hot keys New Product: IP KVM Switch with Cat 5/6 Ports (Page 8-9) Provides multi-user local and remote access for up to 32 computers 8-2 17” LCD KVM DRAWER 17” LCD KVM DRAWER The 17” LCD KVM Drawer is a combination LCD flat panel display, keyboard and touchpad console that uses only 1U of rack-mount space. Use the space- saving 17” LCD KVM Drawer in 4-post racks and cabinets to provide easy access to rack-mount equipment. The 17” LCD KVM Drawer includes a 17” TFT LCD color display, a full size keyboard with separate number pad and an integrated touchpad. Both US and UK keyboard layouts are available. The drawer has a single HD15 connector and includes a Combo KVM Cable with connections for VGA video and PS/2, as well as USB keyboard and mouse, allowing one cable to connect all types of equipment. The display supports a wide range of resolutions to match most PC, MAC, SUN, IBM, HP and Dell computers. A wide viewing angle and good contrast create a crisp, clear image. 37200-111 Two drawer styles are available: single and dual rail. The single rail model features a laptop-style design where the keyboard and panel are hinged and the LCD panel pivots open. On the dual rail model, the keyboard tray and panel are separate, which allows the LCD panel to be left in the open position when the keyboard tray is closed. The 17” LCD KVM Drawer is part of a complete solution that includes KVM Switches which provide access to multiple computers from a single set of peripherals. Features: • Combination rack-mount LCD panel, keyboard and touchpad drawer • For 19”EIA cabinets, uses only 1U of rack-mount space 37201-111 • Single or dual rail models; dual rail model allows the display to remain open when the keyboard tray is closed • 17” industrial TFT LCD display • US or UK keyboard layouts with integrated touchpad • Supports VGA video connection and PS/2 or USB keyboard and mouse connections • Three-piece mounting rails allow easy one-person installation • Keyboard locks in the open position to prevent movement when typing • Also available with an integrated KVM Switch Part Number Shipping Description Weight US UK lb (kg) Keyboard Keyboard 37200-111 37200-112 Single Rail LCD KVM Drawer 43 (19.5) 37201-111 37201-112 Dual Rail LCD KVM Drawer 43 (19.5) Note: The US and UK keyboards have the same keys but locations of some symbol keys are different. Additionally, the UK keyboard includes a key for the Pound Symbol. The part numbers listed above do not include a KVM switch. 8-3 17” LCD KVM DRAWER Specifications: - 1152 x 864, 60/70/75 Hz • Combination rack-mount LCD flat panel monitor, keyboard and - 1280 x 720, 60/70/75 Hz touchpad console - 1280 x 1024, 60/70/72/75 Hz • For indoor use only, in environmentally controlled areas; may • Input Connector: not be used outdoors, in harsh environments or in air-handling (1) HD15, 15-pin connector spaces • Electrical: • Dimensions: - Power Input: Auto-sensing 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 1.73”H x 17.4”W x 25.6”D (44 mm x 442 mm x 650 mm) - Power Consumption: Max. 48 Watt, Standby 5 Watt • Rack-Mount Size: 1U x 19”EIA x 25.6”D (650 mm) - Power Inlet: (1) IEC60320 C-14 • 17” LCD monitor with TFT color display • Environmental: • US or UK keyboard layout with Integrated touchpad - Operation: 32-122°F (0-50°C) • Compatibility: Multi-platform, PC, MAC, SUN, IBM, HP and Dell - Storage: 23-140°F (-5-60°C) • Display specifications: - Relative Humidity: 5%-90%, non-condensing - Brightness (cd/m²): 250 - Shock: 10G acceleration (11 ms duration) - Color Support: 16.7 M - Vibration: 5-500Hz 1G RMS random vibration - Contrast Ratio (typ.): 1000:1 • Regulation Approval: - Viewing Angle (H/V): 160° x 160° - FCC, CE (all) - Display Area (mm): 338 x 270 • Includes Rack/Cabinet Mounting Brackets: - Tr Response Time (ms): 1.3 - Requires four-point (front/rear) support - LCD Panel MTBF (hrs): 50,000 - Maximum rack/cabinet front/rear rail-to-rail depth is 35.5” - VGA Signal Input: Analog RGB, 0.7Vp-p (900 mm) - Sync. Type: Separate H/V, Composite, SOG • Includes Cables: • Supports Screen Resolutions: - (1) 6’L (1.8 m) IEC60320 C-13 to NEMA 5-15P power cord - 720 x 400, 70 Hz - (1) 6’L (1.8 m) HD15 to VGA/PS2/USB Combo KVM Cable - 640 x 480, 60/70/72/75 Hz • Finish: Black only - 800 x 600, 60/70/72/75 Hz - 1024 x 768, 60/70/75 Hz System Diagram: Front view: 17” LCD KVM Drawer 17” LCD KVM Drawer and Analog Switch Power KVM Port Back view: P/N 37200-111, 37200-112, 37201-111 and 37201-112. Technical Data Sheet and User Manual illustrates cable diagrams. Go to www.chatsworth.com/products/KVM-systems for downloading. 8-4 ANALOG KVM SWITCH with DB15 PORTS Analog KVM Switch with DB15 Ports The Analog KVM Switch with DB15 ports provides basic, single-user access to 16 computers from a single set of peripherals and uses only 1U of rack-mount space. The Analog KVM Switch is an excellent solution for small and medium single-site facilities. It features a 16-port analog KVM switch that can be expanded with up to seven additional standalone switches to connect up to 128 computers. Available as a standalone switch or combined with a 17" LCD KVM Drawer. The Analog KVM Switch supports eight password protected user accounts for added security and allows the user to easily transfer between computers with an intuitive on-screen menu or keyboard hotkeys. Individual user access can be assigned by port and each port can be named with the computer name, simplifying equipment identification. Additionally, LEDs which indicate port 37203-161, 17” LCD connection status and buttons that allow manual switching between computers KVM Drawer and are on the front panel or the keyboard tray. Analog Switch The 17” LCD KVM Drawer and Analog Switch includes a 17” TFT LCD color display, a full size keyboard with separate number pad and an integrated touchpad. The display supports a wide range of resolutions to match most PC, MAC, SUN, IBM, HP and Dell computers. The single rail model features a laptop-style design where the keyboard and panel are hinged and the LCD panel pivots open. On the dual rail model, the keyboard tray and panel are separate, which allows the LCD panel to be left in the open position when the keyboard tray is closed. 37202-160, Analog KVM Switch Features: • Rack-mount Analog KVM (keyboard, video, mouse) switch • For 19”EIA cabinets, uses only 1U of rack-mount space • Connect 16 computers through one set of peripherals • Multi-platform switch, supports VGA video connection and PS/2 or USB keyboard and mouse connections • Easy switching between computers with buttons, hotkeys or on-screen display • Password protected access and eight user accounts • LEDs to indicate computer connections • Expand by connecting up to eight switches together to access 128 computers from a single set of peripherals • Also available with an integrated 17" LCD KVM Drawer • Drawer available in single or dual rail models with US or UK keyboard layouts Part Number Shipping Description Weight US UK Note: Connect the Analog KVM Switch to each lb (kg) Keyboard Keyboard computer with a Combo KVM Cable or expand the Single Rail, 17” LCD KVM Drawer number of ports by connecting another switch with a 37203-161 37203-162 and Analog Switch, 16 DB15 53 (24.1) Cascade Cable. Each switch has 16 DB15 computer ports, no IP Console ports and one DB15 cascade expansion port. Dual Rail, 17” LCD KVM Drawer Combo KVM Cables feature a VGA video connection 37204-161 37204-162 and Analog Switch, 16 DB15 53 (24.1) and combination PS/2 and USB keyboard and mouse ports, no IP Console connections, so one type of cable connects all types Analog KVM Switch of equipment. Order cables separately: one Combo KVM Cable per computer and one Cascade Cable Analog KVM Switch, 16 DB15 ports, 37202-160 10 (4.5) per expansion switch. 1 Local, no IP Console 8-5 ANALOG KVM SWITCH with DB15 PORTS Specifications: • Display specifications • Rack-mount 16-port analog KVM switch - Brightness (cd/m²): 250 • For indoor use only, in environmentally controlled areas; may - Color Support: 16.7 M not be used outdoors, in harsh environments or in air-handling - Contrast Ratio (typ.): 1000:1 spaces - Viewing Angle (H/V): 160° x 160° • Dimensions: - Display Area (mm): 338 x 270 - Switch: 1U x 19"EIA, 1.73"H x 17.6"W x 7.1"D (44 mm x 446 - Tr Response Time (ms): 1.3 mm x 180 mm) - LCD Panel MTBF (hrs): 50,000 - Drawer: 1U x 19"EIA, 1.73"H x 17.4"W x 25.6"D (44 mm x 442 - VGA Signal Input: Analog RGB, 0.7Vp-p mm x 650 mm) - Sync. Type: Separate H/V, Composite, SOG • KVM Ports: • Supports Screen Resolutions: - (16) DB-15 combo connector - 720 x 400, 70 Hz - Requires Combo KVM Cables (P/N 37208-161,-111), ordered - 640 x 480, 60/70/72/75 Hz separately - 800 x 600, 60/70/72/75 Hz • KVM Management: - 1024 x 768, 60/70/75 Hz - Multilingual OSD: English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, - 1152 x 864, 60/70/75 Hz Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese - 1280 x 1024, 60/70/72/75 Hz - Hotkey combinations: Scroll-lock, Cap-lock, Num-lock, Alt, • Electrical: Ctrl & Win - Power Input: Auto-sensing 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz - Security: Password enable and disable, up to eight user - Power Consumption: Max. 48 Watt, Standby 5 Watt profiles for port access - Power Inlet: (1) IEC60320 C-14 - PC Selection: Front button, OSD menu, hotkey • Environmental: • KVM Expansion: - Operation: 32-122°F (0-50°C) - Up to 128 servers by eight level cascade - Storage: 23-140°F (-5-60°C) - Requires a Cascade Cable (P/N 37208-162), ordered • Regulation Approval: separately - FCC, CE (all) • KVM Compatibility: • Includes Rack/Cabinet Mounting Brackets: - Multi-platform: PC, MAC, SUN, IBM, HP and Dell - Switch: Requires front only support - Support: Windows Vista/2003/XP/2000, Linux, Netware, Unix - Drawer: Requires front and rear support, maximum rail depth • Drawer is 35.5" (900 mm) - 17” LCD monitor with TFT color display • Includes Cables: - US or UK keyboard layout - (1) 6’L (1.8 m) IEC60320 C-13 to NEMA 5-15P power cord - Integrated touchpad • Finish: Black only - KVM port status LEDs and buttons System Diagram: Front view: 17” LCD KVM Drawer & Switch Front view: Analog KVM Switch LED indicators for connection and active port and buttons to manually switch port Local USB Power KVM Ports (16) Console Cascade Back view: P/N 37202-160 – 1 local console, no remote console, no IP console, 16 DB15 server connections, 1 DB15 cascade KVM Ports (16) Power connection (use Cascade Cable P/N 37208-162) Cascade Back view: P/N 37203-161, 37203-162, 37204-161, 37204-162 – Technical Data Sheet and User Manual illustrates cable diagrams. no local console (drawer is local console), no remote console, no Go to www.chatsworth.com/products/KVM-systems IP console, 16 DB15 server connections, 1 DB15 cascade for downloading. connection (use Cascade Cable P/N 37208-162) 8-6 IP KVM SWITCH-DB15 PORTS IP KVM Switch with DB15 Ports The IP KVM Switch with DB15 computer ports provides basic, single-user access to 16 computers from a single set of peripherals or a network connection and uses only 1U of rack-mount space. The IP KVM Switch with DB15 computer ports is an excellent solution for small and medium single-site facilities. Drawer and Switch combination features an LCD flat panel display, keyboard and touchpad console and a 16-port IP KVM switch that can be expanded with up to seven additional standalone switches to connect up to 128 computers. The IP KVM Switch with DB15 ports features two user interfaces; the local console and an IP connection accessed through the network using a Java- enabled web browser. The local console supports eight password protected user accounts for added security. Individual user access can be assigned by port 37209-261, 17” LCD and each port can be named with the computer name, simplifying equipment KVM Drawer and IP identification. Similarily, the IP connection supports one active user and fifteen Switch password protected user accounts with user or administrator roles and keeps an event log for added security. The 17” LCD KVM Drawer includes a 17” TFT LCD color display, a full size keyboard with separate number pad and an integrated touchpad. It features a laptop-style design where the keyboard and panel are hinged and the LCD panel pivots open. Both US and UK keyboard layouts are available. The display supports a wide range of resolutions to match most PC, MAC, SUN, IBM, HP and Dell computers. 37212-260, IP KVM Switch with DB15 Features: ports • Rack-mount IP KVM (keyboard, video, mouse) switch • For 19”EIA cabinets, uses only 1U of rack-mount space • Connect 16 computers through one set of peripherals or IP connection • Multi-platform switch, supports VGA video connection and PS/2 or USB keyboard and mouse connections • Easy switching between computers with buttons, hotkeys or on-screen display • Password protected access and eight user accounts • LEDs to indicate computer connections • Expand by connecting up to seven additional standalone KVM expansion switches to access 128 computers from a single set of peripherals • Also available with an integrated 17" LCD KVM Drawer • Drawer available in single rail model with US or UK keyboard layouts Part Number Shipping Note: Connect the IP KVM Switch with DB15 ports Description Weight US UK to each computer with a Combo KVM Cable or lb (kg) Keyboard Keyboard expand the number of ports by connecting another Single Rail, 17” LCD KVM Drawer switch with a Cascade Cable. Each switch has 16 37209-261 37209-262 and IP Switch, 16 DB15 ports, 53 (24.1) DB15 computer ports and one DB15 cascade 1 IP Console expansion port. IP KVM Switch Combo KVM Cables feature a VGA video connection IP KVM Switch, 16 DB15 ports, 37212-260 10 (4.5) and combination PS/2 or USB keyboard and mouse 1 Local, 1 IP Console connections, so one type of cable connects all types Expansion Switch of equipment. Order cables separately: one Combo Analog KVM Switch, 16 DB15 ports, KVM Cable per computer and one Cascade Cable 37202-160 10 (4.5) 1 Local, no IP Console per expansion switch. 8-7 IP KVM SWITCH-DB15 PORTS Specifications: - US or UK keyboard layout, integrated touchpad • Rack-mount 16-port IP KVM switch - KVM port status LEDs and buttons • For indoor use only, in environmentally controlled areas; may • Display specifications not be used outdoors, in harsh environments or in air-handling - Brightness (cd/m²): 250 spaces - Color Support: 16.7 M • Dimensions: - Contrast Ratio (typ.): 1000:1 - Switch: 1U x 19"EIA, 1.73"H x 17.6"W x 7.1"D - Viewing Angle (H/V): 160° x 160° (44 mm x 446 mm x 180 mm) - Display Area (mm): 338 x 270 - Drawer: 1U x 19"EIA, 1.73"H x 17.4"W x 25.6"D - Tr Response Time (ms): 1.3 (44 mm x 442 mm x 650 mm) - LCD Panel MTBF (hrs): 50,000 • KVM Ports: - VGA Signal Input: Analog RGB, 0.7Vp-p - (16) DB-15 combo connector - Sync. Type: Separate H/V, Composite, SOG - Requires Combo KVM Cables (P/N 37208-161,-111), ordered • Supports Screen Resolutions: separately - 720 x 400, 70 Hz • KVM Management: - 640 x 480, 60/70/72/75 Hz - Multilingual OSD: English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, - 800 x 600, 60/70/72/75 Hz Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese - 1024 x 768, 60/70/75 Hz - Hotkeys: Scroll-lock, Cap-lock, Num-lock, Alt, Ctrl & Win - 1152 x 864, 60/70/75 Hz - Security: Password enable and disable, up to eight user - 1280 x 1024, 60/70/72/75 Hz profiles for port access • Electrical: - PC Selection: Front button, OSD menu, hotkey - Power Input: Auto-sensing 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz • IP Console: - Power Consumption: Max. 24 Watt, Standby 5 Watt - (1) RJ45 (8P8C) Ethernet, 10/100 Mbps - Power Inlet: (1) IEC60320 C-14 - (1) RJ45 serial • Environmental: - (1) USB - Operation: 32-122°F (0-50°C) • IP Security: - Storage: 23-140°F (-5-60°C) - SSL v 3, RSA, AES, CSR, http & https Internet access • Regulation Approval: - Fifteen user profiles (one active user) - FCC, CE (all) • KVM Expansion: • Includes Rack/Cabinet Mounting Brackets: - Up to 128 servers by eight level cascade - Switch: Requires front only support - Requires a Cascade Cable (P/N 37208-162), order separately - Drawer: Requires front and rear support, maximum rail depth • KVM Compatibility: is 35.5"(900 mm) - Multi-platform: PC, MAC, SUN, IBM, HP and Dell • Includes Cables: - Support: Windows Vista/2003/XP/2000, Linux, Netware, Unix - (1) 6’L (1.8 m) IEC60320 C-13 to NEMA 5-15P power cord • Drawer: • Finish: Black only - 17” LCD monitor with TFT color display System Diagram: Front view: 17” LCD KVM Drawer & IP Switch Front view: IP KVM Switch LED indicators for connection and active port and buttons to manually switch port Local USB IP Console Console KVM Ports (16) Power Cascade Back view: P/N 37212-260 – 1 local console, no remote console, 1 IP console, 16 DB15 server connections, 1 DB15 cascade IP KVM Ports (16) Power connection (use Cascade Cable P/N 37208-162) Cascade Back view: P/N 37209-261, 37209-262 – no local console (drawer Technical Data Sheet and User Manual illustrates cable diagrams. is local console), no remote console, 1 IP console, 16 DB15 server Go to www.chatsworth.com/products/KVM-systems connections, 1 DB15 cascade connection (use Cascade Cable P/N for downloading. 37208-162) 8-8 IP KVM SWITCH-CAT 5/6 PORTS IP KVM Switch with Cat 5/6 Ports The IP KVM Switch with Cat 5/6 computer ports provides multiuser access to 16 or 32 computers from local console, a remote console or over the Ethernet using a Java-enabled web browser. The IP KVM Switch is an excellent solution for IT staff that require both local and remote access to equipment. It features a 16-port or 32-port IP switch that can be expanded with up to seven additional switches to connect up to 256 computers through the local and remote console and a single IP address. The IP KVM Switch with Cat 5/6 ports features multiple user interfaces: the local console, a remote console to connect to another computer located on site, and one or two IP connections accessed through the network using a Java- enabled web browser. Expansion switches are also available without IP connections. The local and remote consoles support eight password protected 37205-361, 17” LCD user accounts for added security. Individual user access can be assigned by port KVM Drawer and IP and each port can be named with the computer name, simplifying equipment Switch with Cat 5/6 identification. Additionally, LEDs which indicate port connection status and ports buttons that allow manual switching between computers are on the front panel or the keyboard tray. Similarly, each IP connection supports one active user and fifteen password protected user accounts with user or administrator roles and keeps an event log for added security. The 17” LCD KVM Drawer and IP Switch includes a 17” TFT LCD color display, a full size keyboard with number pad and an integrated touchpad. The display supports a wide range of resolutions to match most PC, MAC, SUN, IBM, HP IP KVM Switch with and Dell computers. Cat 5/6 ports. Available in 16-or 32-Port models Features: • Rack-mount IP KVM (keyboard, video, mouse) switch • For 19”EIA cabinets, uses only 1U of rack-mount space • Access 16 or 32 computers through one set of peripherals, a remote console or an IP network • Multi-platform switch, supports VGA video connection and PS/2 or USB keyboard and mouse connections • Easy switching between computers with buttons, hotkeys or on-screen display • Password protected IP access, 15 user accounts, assign administrator or user roles, select models support two simultaneous users • LEDs to indicate computer connections • Expand by connecting up to eight switches together to access 128 or 256 computers from a single set of peripherals, a remote console or the IP connection • Also available with an integrated 17" LCD KVM Drawer • Drawer available in single or dual rail models with US or UK keyboard layouts Note: The IP KVM Switch with Cat 5/6 computer ports uses Cat 5/6 UTP cables to connect to servers instead of proprietary signal cables, which means higher port density on the switch and that servers can be located farther away from the switch. A dongle, ordered separately, is used on the computer end to make the keyboard, video and mouse connections. See next page for ordering information. 8-9 IP KVM SWITCH-CAT 5/6 PORTS Part Number Shipping Description Weight US UK lb (kg) Keyboard Keyboard Single Rail, 17” LCD KVM Drawer 37205-361 37205-362 and IP Switch, 16 Cat 5/6 ports, 50 (22.7) 1 Remote, 1 IP Console Single Rail, 17” LCD KVM Drawerr 37205-421 37205-422 and IP Switch, 32 Cat 5/6 ports, 53 (24.1) 1 Remote, 2 IP Consoles Dual Rail, 17” LCD KVM Drawer 37206-361 37206-362 and IP Switch, 16 Cat 5/6 ports, 50 (22.7) 1 Remote, 1 IP Console 17” LCD KVM Drawer and IP Switch Dual Rail, 17” LCD KVM Drawer 37206-421 37206-422 and IP Switch, 32 Cat 5/6 ports, 53 (24.1) 1 Remote, 2 IP Consoles IP KVM Switch with CAT 5/6 Ports IP KVM Switch, 16 Cat 5/6 ports, 37207-360 9 (4.1) 1 Local, 1 Remote, 1 IP Console IP KVM Switch, 32 Cat 5/6 ports, 37207-420 12 (5.5) 1 Local, 1 Remote, 2 IP Consoles Expansion Switch Analog KVM Switch, 16 Cat 5/6 ports, 37210-260 8 (3.6) 1 Local, 1 Remote, no IP Console IP Switch with Cat 5/6 Ports Analog KVM Switch, 32 Cat 5/6 ports, 37210-220 12 (5.5) 1 Local, 1 Remote, no IP Console Specifications: • Remote Console: • Rack-mount 16-port or 32-port IP KVM (keyboard, video, mouse) - (1) RJ45 Switch with Cat 5/6 ports - Use Cat6 or Cat5 UTP cable for server connection, up to • For indoor use only, in environmentally controlled areas; may 500 ft (150 m) not be used outdoors, in harsh environments or in air-handling - Includes remote receiver, Combo KVM Cable for remote spaces computer, and power supply • Dimensions: • KVM Expansion: - Switch: 1U x 19"EIA, 1.73"H x 17.6"W x 7.1"D - 16-port models: up to 128 servers by eight level cascade (44 mm x 446 mm x 180 mm) - 32-port models: up to 256 servers by eight level cascade - Drawer: 1U x 19"EIA, 1.73"H x 17.4"W x 25.6"D - Requires Cascade Cable (P/N 37208-165), ordered separately (44 mm x 442 mm x 650 mm) • KVM Compatibility: • KVM Ports: - Multi-platform: PC, MAC, SUN, IBM, HP and Dell - (16) or (32) RJ45 (8P8C) connectors - Support: Windows Vista/2003/XP/2000, Linux, Netware, Unix - Use Cat6 or Cat5 cable for server connections, up to • KVM Drawer 132 ft (40 m) - 17” LCD monitor with TFT color display - Requires VGA-USB dongle (P/N 37208-103) or VGA-PS/2 - US or UK keyboard layout, integrated touch pad dongle (P/N 37208-104) to connect computers - KVM port status LEDs and buttons • KVM Management: • Display specifications: - Multilingual OSD: English, French, German, Spanish, Italian, - Brightness (cd/m²): 300 (single), 250 (dual) Russian, Simplified Chinese, Japanese - Color Support: 16.7 M - Security: Password enable and disable, up to 8 user profiles - Contrast Ratio (typ.): 1000:1 for port access - Viewing Angle (H/V): 160° x 160° - PC Selection: Front button, OSD menu, hotkey - Display Area (mm): 338 x 270 • IP Console: - Tr Response Time (ms): 1.3 - (1) or (2) RJ45 Ethernet - LCD Panel MTBF (hrs): 50,000 - (1) or (2) RJ45 serial - VGA Signal Input: Analog RGB, 0.7Vp-p - (1) or (2) USB - Sync. Type: Separate H/V, Composite, SOG • IP Security: - SSL v3, RSA, AES, CSR, http & https internet access Specifications continued on next page. - Fifteen user profiles (one active user) per IP Console 8-10 IP KVM SWITCH-CAT 5/6 PORTS • Supports Screen Resolutions: - Storage: 23-140°F (-5-60°C) - 720 x 400, 70 Hz - Relative Humidity: 90%, non-condensing - 640 x 480, 60/70/72/75 Hz - Shock: 50G acceleration (11 ms, half-sine wave) - 800 x 600, 60/70/72/75 Hz - Vibration: 58-100Hz / 0.98G (11 ms / cycle) - 1024 x 768, 60/70/75 Hz • Regulation Approval: - 1152 x 864, 60/70/75 Hz - FCC, CE - 1280 x 1024, 60/70/72/75 Hz • Includes Rack/Cabinet Mounting Brackets: • Electrical: - Switch: Requires front only support - Power Input: Auto-sensing 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz - Drawer: Requires front and rear support, maximum rail depth - Power Consumption: Max. 24 Watt, Standby 5 Watt is 35.5” (900 mm) - Power Inlet: (1) IEC60320 C-14 • Included Cables: • Environmental: - (1) 6’L (1.8 m) IEC60320 C-13 to NEMA 5-15P power cord - Operation: 32-122°F (0-50°C) • Finish: Black only System Diagram: Front view: 17” LCD KVM Drawer & IP Switch - 16-Port and 32 Port: Front view: IP KVM Switch- 16-Port: 16 Port P/Ns: 37205-361, 37205-362, 37206-361, 37206-362 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 32 Port P/Ns: 37205-421, 37205-422, 37206-421, 37206-422 37207-360, 37210-260 – LED indicators for connection, local and remote active ports and buttons to manually switch ports Local console Remote Power IP out in Cascade Back view : P/N 37207-360 – 1 local console, 1 remote console, 1 IP console, 16 RJ45 (8P8C) server connections, 1 cascade connection (use Cascade Cable P/N 37208-165) Local Console Remote Power out in Cascade Back view: P/N 37210-260 (Expansion switch) – 1 local console, 1 Power Remote KVM Ports (16) remote console, No IP console, 16 RJ45 (8P8C) server connections, 1 cascade connection (use Cascade Cable P/N (37208-165). IP Cascade Front view: IP KVM Switch- 32-Port: Back view – P/N 37205-361, 37205-362, 37206-361, 37206-362 – no local console (drawer is local console), 1 remote console, 1 IP console, 16 RJ45 (8P8C) server connections, 1 cascade connection (use Cascade Cable P/N 37208-165) P/N 37207-420, 37210-220 – LED indicators for connection, local and remote active ports and buttons to manually switch ports Local Power IP 2 Remote KVM Ports (32) IP 2 console Remote IP 1 Cascade IP 1 out in Cascade Back view – P/N 37205-421, 37205-422, 37206-421, 37206-422 – Back view: P/N 37207-420 – 1 local console, 1 remote console, 2 no local console (drawer is local console), 1 remote console, 2 IP IP consoles, 32 RJ45 (8P8C) server connections, 1 cascade consoles, 32 RJ45 (8P8C) server connections, 1 cascade connection connection (use Cascade Cable P/N 37208-165) (use Cascade Cable P/N 37208-165) Local console Remote out in Cascade Back view: P/N 37210-220 (Expansion switch) – 1 local console, 1 Technical Data Sheet and User Manual illustrates cable diagrams. remote console, no IP console, 32 RJ45 (8P8C) server connections, Go to www.chatsworth.com/products/KVM-systems for 1 cascade connection (use Cascade Cable P/N 37208-165). downloading. 8-11 KVM SWITCH ACCESSORIES Combo KVM Cables for KVM Switches with DB15 Ports Use Combo KVM Cables to attach computers to the KVM Switch with DB15 ports. Each cable can connect one computer with PS/2 or USB keyboard and mouse connections. The cable has a combination DB-15 connector on the switch end and three breakout cables on the other end for computer connections. The breakout side includes one HD-15 connector for VGA video, one PS/2 connector and one USB connector. The system includes a USB-to-PS/2 converter for systems with PS/2 keyboard and mouse. 37208-161 Cascade Cable for KVM Switches with DB15 Ports Use the Cascade Cable to connect two switches together for expansion. Computers connected to both switches will be viewed through one set of peripherals. Each Cascade Cable has a combination DB-15 connector on each end. IP KVM Cable Dongles for KVM Switches with Cat 5/6 Ports Use IP KVM Cable Dongles to connect computers to the IP KVM Switch Cat 5/6 ports with Cat 5/6 cables (ordered separately). The dongle has an RJ45 (8P8C) connector for the Cat 5/6 cable from the switch on one end and computer video, 37208-162 keyboard and mouse connectors on the other end. Select the dongle to match keyboard and video connection: USB or PS/2. Cascade Cable for KVM Switches with Cat 5/6 Ports Use the Cascade Cable to connect two switches together for expansion. Computers connected to both switches will be viewed through one set of peripherals, the remote console or the IP connection on the first switch. 37208-103 Description Shipping Part Length Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) KVM with DB15 Ports 37208-161 Combo KVM Cable, 6’L (1.8 m) 3 (1.4) 37208-111 Combo KVM Cable, 10’L (3.0 m) 3 (1.4) 37208-861 Combo KVM Cable, 6’L (1.8 m), Pack of 8 5 (2.3) 37208-811 Combo KVM Cable, 10’L (3.0 m), Pack of 8 7 (3.2) 37208-661 Combo KVM Cable, 6’L (1.8 m), Pack of 16 8 (3.6) 37208-165 37208-611 Combo KVM Cable, 10’L (3.0 m), Pack of 16 12 (5.4) Combo cables, 10 each 6’L (1.8 m) 37208-621 12 (5.4) and 6 each 10’L (3.0 m) 37208-162 Cascade Cable, 6’L (1.8 m) 3 (1.4) KVM with Cat 5/6 Ports Note: Use the VGA-USB dongle (P/N 37208-103) 37208-103 Cable Dongle, VGA-USB 3 (1.4) with server computers that have a VGA video and USB mouse and keyboard connectors. The VGA-USB 37208-803 Cable Dongle, VGA-USB, Pack of 8 4 (1.8) dongle is also available in a pack of eight (P/N 37208-603 Cable Dongle, VGA-USB, Pack of 16 7 (3.2) 37208-803) or a pack of 16 (P/N 37208-603). 37208-104 Cable Dongle, VGA-PS/2 3 (1.4) 37208-804 Cable Dongle, VGA-PS/2, Pack of 8 4 (1.8) Use the VGA-PS2 dongle (P/N 37208-104) with server computers that have a VGA video and PS/2 37208-604 Cable Dongle, VGA-PS/2, Pack of 16 7 (3.2) keyboard and mouse connectors. The VGA-PS2 37208-165 Cascade Cable, 6’L (1.8 m) 3 (1.4) dongle is also available in a pack of eight (P/N 37208-804) or a pack of 16 (P/N 37208-604). 8-12 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING & SECURITY SYSTEMS Remote Infrastructure Management Page 9-3 (RIM) Sensors Page 9-5 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING & SECURITY SYSTEMS With all the attention given to virtual security threats like hacking and viruses, you don’t want to be concerned about a security breach at the cabinet level as well. CPI’s Environmental Monitoring & Security Systems offer an array of products that keep an eye on everything from temperature and moisture to physical movement in the equipment room and unauthorized access to the cabinet door. Many of these products can also be directed into CPI’s Remote Infrastructure Management System, allowing much of your data center’s security, safety and functionality to be monitored remotely at any time of day. Remote Infrastructure Management (RIM-600) • Remotely monitor, record and analyze environmental conditions in data centers and equipment rooms • Support up to eight external sensors per Host or Node Module • Monitor all sensors from one user interface using included software • Automatically poll up to 64 IP address from each module An IP addressable, multi-cabinet Electronic Locking System is also available for the F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet System. Contact CPI Technical Support for system configuration assistance. 9-2 REMOTE INFRASTRUCTURE MANAGEMENT Remote Infrastructure Management (RIM-600) The Remote Infrastructure Management (RIM-600) System gives you the ability to remotely monitor, record and analyze environmental security and safety conditions in your data center and equipment rooms. Each RIM-600 Host or Node supports up to eight external sensors and will automatically poll up to 64 IP addresses per module using a scheduled network ping and port service tests (HTTP, FTP, email, etc.). No special wiring is required. Connect up to 31 Nodes to each Host through your network and monitor up to 256 environmental sensors and 2,048 IP addresses and ports anywhere in your network. Additionally, one PowerGate Module can be connected to each RIM-600 Host Module Host or Node Module to provide remote reboot capability for up to 256 outlets. • Includes Ethernet and phone connection • Includes battery backup and non-volatile data storage so you do not lose RIM-600 Node Module monitoring capability if the power goes out • Sensors are attached using standard Cat5 cable with RJ-45 connectors; The RIM-600 has three internal sensors sensors are automatically recognized and configured when connected (Power, Sound, Battery) and supports up to • Set limits and be notified by voice call (with custom messages), pager, eight external sensors that monitor: email, fax or SNMP trap • Room temperature (F° or C°) • Supports 64 users with eight contact points each; schedule the method of • Cabinet temperature (F° or C°) contact for each user by time of day • Presence of water • Check status by voice dial-in, Website, network log-in, SNMP get/set and • Humidity two-way email • Smoke • Host is shipped complete with User Manual, ConsoleView Software and • Power null modem serial cable • Motion • UL Listed and CE Approved • Door open or closed • Normally Open/Normally Closed Shipping Dry Contact Bridge Part Description Weight Number • 4-20 mA Bridge lb (kg) • Dual door sensor for cabinets 60000-001 Host, 100-250 VAC, 50-60 Hz 14 (6.4g) International Host, 100-250 VAC, 60000-102 14 (6.4) 50-60 Hz, shipped without Power Cord 60001-001 Node, 120 VAC, 60 Hz 7 (3.2) 60001-002 Node, 100-240 VAC, 50-60 Hz 7 (3.2) International Node, 100-240 VAC, 60001-102 7 (3.2) 50-60 Hz, shipped without Power Cord 60075-001 Wall-Mount Kit 2 (0.9) Note: Host Module includes users manual and configuration software CD. Host Module 60000-001 has IEC-60320, C-14 power inlet and includes a detachable power cord with a NEMA 5-15P plug. Node Module 60001-002 includes an auto sensing power transformer with an IEC-60320, C-14 power inlet and includes a detachable power cord with NEMA 5-15P plug. See following pages for sensor information. 9-3 RIM-600 MODULES AND BUNDLE SOLUTION PowerGate Modules PowerGate Modules allow you to remotely control/reset/recycle individual power outlets. Input power is rated at 120 VAC, 15A, outputs vary as listed below. • Each PowerGate is UL Listed and includes a null modem cable for 60045-001 connection to a Host/Node Module • Program with RIM-600 to trigger on/off with alarms Description Shipping Part Length Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) PowerGate, (1) Power Input Connection, 60045-001 14 (6.4) 60046-001 (8) Outlets, max 12A PowerGate 2, (9) IEC C-14 Power Input Connections, (8) Outlets 60046-001 14 (6.4) (channel 1 & 5 rated at 10A max, all other channels rated at 4A max) PowerGate2 Power Cord, 60078-010 1 (0.5) IEC to NEMA 5-15P, 10 (3) RIM-600 Remote Environmental Monitoring Bundle RIM-600 Host Module shown Remotely monitor, record and analyze environmental conditions in your data center and equipment rooms by using this starter bundle kit. • Monitor room and cabinet conditions for up to four cabinets • Includes a RIM-600 Host Module, Temperature and Humidity Sensors, Patch Cords and Installation Hardware • Supports up to 8 external sensors • Automatically poll up to 64 IP addresses using a scheduled networking ping and port service tests • Expandable up to 256 external sensors with the addition of RIM-600 Nodes • Add on with optional sensors; Motion Detector, Smoke Detector, Water Detector, Door Open/Close and PowerGate Modules. Description Shipping Weight Part Number Length - ft (m) lb (kg) Each F600-0 Bundle consists of: 25 (11.3) F600-0* (1) 60000-001, RIM-600 Host Module (3) 60012-007, Mini-Temperature Sensors with attached 7 (2.1) cable (1) 60030-001, Humidity Sensor (1) 60011-001, Temperature Sensor with Display (°F) (1) 60075-710, Rack-Mount Bracket (4) 60070-007, Network Patch Cord, RJ-45, 7 (2.1) (1) 60074-001, Coupler Kit, RJ-45 (1) User Manual, ConsoleView Software and null modem cable *Order F600-1 for International configurations with °C temperature sensors and shipped without power cord. 9-4 RIM-600 SENSORS Room Temperature Sensors Shipping Part • Humidity: 5% to 90 % RH Description Weight Number • Sensor type: solid state IC lb (kg) • Accuracy: ± 3° 60010-001 Range 5°F to 122°F, No Display 1 (0.5) • Connection: RJ-45 60010-002 Range -15°C to 50°C, No Display 1 (0.5) • Housing: white plastic • Mounting: wall, flat surface or 60011-001 Range 32°F to 95°F, With Display 1 (0.5) single-gang box • Indoor use only 60013-001 Range 0°C to 50°C, With Display 1 (0.5) 60011-001 shown • Display: digital, two-digit (select models) Note: Use bracket 60075-710 for rack-mounting. Miniature Temperature Sensor Shipping Part • Humidity: 5% to 90% RH Description Weight Number • Sensor type: solid state IC lb (kg) • Available preset to °F or °C 60012-007 Range 5°F to 140°F 1 (0.5) • Accuracy: ± 3° 60012-057 Range -15°C to 60°C 1 (0.5) • Connection: RJ-45, includes attached 7’L (2.1 m) cable • Housing: black plastic • Mounting: flat surface • Size: 1.4”H x 2.2”W x .6”D (36 mm x 56 mm x 15 mm) • Indoor use only, no display Humidity Sensor Shipping Part • Range of measurement: 0-100% RH Description Weight Number • Temperature: 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) lb (kg) • Accuracy: ± 5% 60030-001 Humidity Sensor, No Display 1 (0.5) • Connector: RJ-45 60031-001 Humidity Sensor with Display 1 (0.5) • Housing: white plastic • Mounting: wall, flat surface Note: Use bracket 60075-710 for rack-mounting. • Indoor use only, no display Humidity Sensor, With Display 60031-001 shown • Range of measurement: 5-95% RH • Temperature: 32°F to 158°F (0°C to 70°C) • Accuracy: ± 3% • Connector: RJ-45 • Housing: white plastic • Mounting: wall, flat surface or single-gang box • Indoor use only • Display: digital, two-digit Water Detection Sensor Description Shipping Part • Sensing method: conductivity Length Weight Number • Sensor: polymer core cable with sensing ft (m) lb (kg) wire, 10’L (3 m) Water Detection Sensor with 60032-010 1 (0.5) • Connector: RJ-45 (daisy chain up to three 10 (3) Water Detection Rope sensors running off of (1) RIM-600 port) Additional 10 (3) Water • Housing: black plastic with mounting ears 60072-001 1 (0.5) Detection Rope Water Detection Rope, 10’L (3 m) • Extend the reach of the water detection Note: Use panel 60075-720 for rack-mounting. sensor • Add up to 10 ropes, 100’ (30.5 m) in-line with each Water Detection Sensor 9-5 RIM-600 SENSORS Smoke Detector Description Shipping Part • Sensitivity: 2.0 ± .37% to .39% /ft Length Weight Number • Contact Rating: 2 Amp, 28 VDC or ft (m) lb (kg) 120 VAC resistive 60062-007 Smoke Detector with 7 (2.1) Cable 3 (1.4) • Heat Sensor rating: Fixed 135°F (57°C) rate of rise >15°F/min. (8.3°C/min) • Operating voltage: 8.5 VDC to 33 VDC, 10% maximum ripple • Maximum ambient temperature: 100°F (37.8°C) • Power-up time: 15 seconds • Housing: white plastic, 6.1” (155 mm) diameter x 1.9”H (48 mm) • Mounting: wall, flat surface or single-gang box Motion Sensor Description Shipping Part • Sensing method: infrared Length Weight Number • Sensor: passive, dual-element ft (m) lb (kg) • Connector: RJ-45; includes 7’L (2.1 m) cord 60061-007 Passive Infrared, with 7 (2.1) Cord 1 (0.5) • Housing: white plastic • Adjustments for sensitivity, LED display and Pulse count • Indoor use only • Mounting: flat surface Normally Open/Normally Closed Dry Shipping Part Contact Bridge Description W eight Number Monitor a device equipped with a relay output lb (kg) that functions as an alarm. Senses a definite 60050-001 Dry Contact Bridge (N/O,N/C) 1 (0.5) yes/no input from a normally open or normally closed output, and sends an alarm when the Note: Use panel 60075-720 for rack-mounting. yes or no condition is sensed. • Input: normally open or normally closed (switchable) • Source/sense voltage: 14 VDC • Source/sense current: 10 mA • Connector: RJ-45 • Temperature: 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50°C) • Housing: black plastic with mounting ears • Indoor use only, no display Shipping Door Open/Closed Sensor Part Description Weight • Single and dual door version Number lb (kg) • Use dual door sensor for equipment 60052-001 Door Sensor, Magnetic Reed 1 (0.5) cabinets • Magnetic reed switch 60052-002 Dual-Door Sensor, Magnetic Reed 1 (0.5) • Connects to a Host or Node Module • Single door sensor includes one door sensor, a 7’L (2.1 m) RJ-45 cable and a 25’L (7.6 m) sensor cable • Dual door sensor includes two door sensors, a 7’L (2.1 m) RJ-45 cable and (2) 10’L (3 m) sensor cables (for cabinets) 9-6 RIM-600 SENSORS 4-20 mA Dry Contact Bridge Shipping Part Monitor a maximum or minimum threshold; Description Weight Number for example, the amount of fuel or water in lb (kg) a tank. Senses a range of inputs from a 60051-001 Dry Contact Bridge (4-20mA) 1 (0.5) corresponding 4-20 mA Transducer, and sends an alarm when a specific threshold Note: Use panel 60075-720 for rack-mounting. is reached between 0% (4 mA) and 100% (20 mA). Power Monitoring Sensor Shipping Part • Range: 0 VAC to 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz Description Weight Number lb (kg) • Accuracy: ± 2% • Power connector: IEC-60320, C-14, Power Monitoring Sensor with C-13 60040-001 1 (0.5) power inlet to NEMA 5-15P Power Cord • Includes a 6’L (1.8 m) C-13 to NEMA Power Monitoring Sensor with C-13 5-15P or C-13 to C-14 power cord 60040-002 1 (0.5) to C-14 Power Cord • Connector: RJ-45 • Housing: black plastic with mounting ears Note: Use panel 60075-720 for rack-mounting. Cables And Accessories Use patch cables to attach sensors to the RIM-600 Host and Node Module. Use null modem cables to attach PowerGate Modules to the RIM-600 Host and Node Modules. Optional mounting brackets let you attach sensors to 19” racks or cabinets. 60070-025 Description Shipping Part Length Weight 60074-001 Number lb (kg) ft (m) 60070-007 Patch Cable, RJ-45, 7 (2.1) 1 (0.5) 60070-014 Patch Cable, RJ-45, 14 (4.3) 1 (0.5) 60075-710 60070-025 Patch Cable, RJ-45, 25 (7.6) 1 (0.5) 60074-001 RJ-45 F/F Coupler Kit (4) 1 (0.5) 60071-006 Null Modem Cable, 6 (1.8) 1 (0.5) 60088-002 60075-001 Host/Node Wall-Mount Kit 2 (0.9) Temp/Humidity Sensor 60075-710 1 (0.5) 60075-720 Rack-Mount Bracket Sensor Mounting Panel, 60075-720 2 (0.9) 1U x 19”W 60087-001 User Manual 1 (0.5) 60088-002 ConsoleView Software CD 1 (0.5) 9-7 SOFTWARE SYSTEMS Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) Software 10-3 SOFTWARE SYSTEMS CPI’s Software Systems provide centralized access across the organization for monitoring and controlling PDUs within racks and cabinets. Use CPI’s Software to store critical information about each device in a searchable, centralized database, making it easy to locate equipment, measure and record temperature and humidity and provide comprehensive per-outlet power usage across the enterprise. Combine CPI Software Systems with KVM Systems, Power Management Products, Thermal Management and Cabinet and Enclosure Systems to achieve a completely personalized Enterprise Infrastructure Solution. CPI Software Systems include: • Automatic measurement and recording of temperatures, humidity and power in each cabinet • Monitors Controlled CPI PDUs with port metering to provide per-outlet (per-device) power usage • Capability to set and receive alarms for temperature, humidity and power usage limits • Scalability to meet evolving data center needs 10-2 SCALABLE ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION (SEMA) Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) Software CPI’s Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) software is an infrastructure management application with a web-based interface that allows enterprise-wide asset management and power monitoring and control when used with CPI’s SEMA-compatible monitored or controlled PDUs and PowerScope In-Line Meter. Featuring a graphical display with an intuitive interface, the SEMA software provides a map view of your corporate enterprise, data centers, zones in each data center, rack/cabinet rows in each data center zone and the equipment in each rack/cabinet. The software lets you associate the controllable PDUs with individual racks and devices so you can measure power use by device. Link multiple PDU outlets together to easily cycle power for redundant systems and log current use by specific time intervals or when there is a specific change in current to track power use and identify power problems. Configure the PDUs remotely using the Internet Explorer web browser, store information about each connected device in the SQL Server database, search records by specific attributes, set alarm thresholds for current, temperature and humidity and receive warning notifications by email, page or Instant Message. SEMA supports Microsoft Active Directory, RADIUS and LDAP-based user authentication and provides password protected access. Administrators can create user accounts with three levels of user permissions (view, configure, administrator) and assign user group permissions down to the rack-level. All connections between a user and server are secure and use AES-256 bit encryption. SEMA software is shipped installed on a 1U rack-mount server with Microsoft Server 2008 and SQL Server Express. SEMA software includes a base license, one year of support and a 50 node activation key. Each PDU or PowerScope connection is one node. Order additional activation keys if the system has more than 50 nodes. Extended software support plans are also available. CPI TeraFrame Cabinet controlled PDUs monitored with the Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) software 10-3 SCALABLE ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION (SEMA) CPI’s Enterprise Infrastructure Solution combines the Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) software and Controlled PDUs to create a complete system to control and manage rack-level equipment in your data center. It is a complete system for enterprise rack-level asset management, power measurement and control to help IT administrators and facility managers optimize daily data center tasks and energy use. Row and rack-level Top level display of your layouts of your cabinets data centers 10-4 SCALABLE ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT APPLICATION (SEMA) Shipping Part Scalable Enterprise Description Weight Number lb (kg) Management Application SEMA software, pre-installed on 1U server with 36005-100 base license, 50 node activation key and 50 (22.7) (SEMA) Software one year software support 36000-501 SEMA License with 10 Node Activation Key 2 (0.9) Specifications: 36000-502 SEMA License with 50 Node Activation Key 2 (0.9) 36000-503 SEMA License with 100 Node Activation Key 2 (0.9) • SEMA Software pre-installed on a 1U server 36000-504 SEMA License with 500 Node Activation Key 2 (0.9) 36000-505 SEMA License with 1000 Node Activation Key 2 (0.9) • Must be used with monitored or controlled SEMA-compatible CPI PDUs and PowerScope 36000-506 SEMA License with Single Site Node Activation Key 2 (0.9) In-Line Meter 1 Year Additional Support Plan • Server and Software Specifications: 36001-101 Additional Software Support, 50 to 100 Nodes 2 (0.9) - Dell R310 or equivalent, specified at purchase 36001-102 Additional Software Support,101 to 200 Nodes 2 (0.9) - 1U, 19"EIA rack-mount - O/S: Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2, 36001-103 Additional Software Support, 201 to 500 Nodes 2 (0.9) Standard Edition, pre-installed 36001-104 Additional Software Support, 501 to 1000 Nodes 2 (0.9) - D/B: Microsoft SQL Express, pre-installed 36001-105 Additional Software Support, 1001 to 2000 Nodes 2 (0.9) - NIC: Dual Gigabit Network Adapter (1 LAN, 1 WAN) 36001-106 Additional Software Support, 2001+ Nodes 2 (0.9) - Power Supply: Redundant 400 Watt 2 Year Additional Support Plan • Includes an activation key for 50 nodes (PDUs or 36001-201 Additional Software Support, 50 to 100 Nodes 2 (0.9) PowerScope In-Line Meters). Activation of 36001-202 Additional Software Support,101 to 200 Nodes 2 (0.9) additional nodes requires additional activation keys. 36001-203 Additional Software Support, 201 to 500 Nodes 2 (0.9) 36001-204 Additional Software Support, 501 to 1000 Nodes 2 (0.9) • Includes 1 year of software maintenance and 36001-205 Additional Software Support, 1001 to 2000 Nodes 2 (0.9) updates. Additional coverage is available. 36001-206 Additional Software Support, 2001+ Nodes 2 (0.9) 3 Year Additional Support Plan 36001-301 Additional Software Support, 50 to 100 Nodes 2 (0.9) 36001-302 Additional Software Support,101 to 200 Nodes 2 (0.9) 36001-303 Additional Software Support, 201 to 500 Nodes 2 (0.9) 36001-304 Additional Software Support, 501 to 1000 Nodes 2 (0.9) 36001-305 Additional Software Support, 1001 to 2000 Nodes 2 (0.9) 36001-306 Additional Software Support, 2001+ Nodes 2 (0.9) Notes: SEMA Software includes a base license with 50 Node Activation Key. Order additional licenses as required as more nodes are deployed. The Single Site license covers unlimited nodes for a single site. Extend software support for (1, 2 or 3) additional years. Select to match the number of nodes in your enterprise. Contact CPI Technical Support for configuration assistance. See Section 7 for Power Products 10-5 GROUNDING & BONDING PRODUCTS Busbar, Insulation Products, Tools & Accessories Busbars Page 11-3 Insulators Page 11-7 Grounding Products Page 11-9 Compression Tools, Lugs & Taps Page 11-14 GROUNDING & BONDING PRODUCTS In response to the increase in newer, more sensitive, highly sophisticated electronic equipment, ® CPI offers a comprehensive line of UL Listed Grounding and Bonding Products. The electrical protection and grounding of today’s high-speed cabling systems is an essential part of a properly installed IT infrastructure, which is why CPI’s Grounding and Bonding Products are designed to provide protection and help prevent transient voltages from damaging sensitive electronic equipment. Stocked with a wide range of products spanning from grounding busbars and pipe clamps to ground terminal blocks and ground strap kits, CPI is equipped to handle a full list of safety codes and standards. CPI Grounding and Bonding Products feature: • Comprehensive line of products that promote electrical safety throughout the network • A complete bonding solution with grounding busbars, pipe and floor pedestal clamps, insulators, joint compound, compression tools and lugs/taps, as well as other equipment • UL Listed and compliant with industry standards 11-2 BUSBARS BICSI & ANSI/EIA/TIA Grounding Busbars The CPI 13622 series Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) provides a central ground attachment point for telecommunications systems, computers and other equipment located in the data room. The CPI 40153 series Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) provides a central ground attachment point for telecommunications bonding backbones, equipment and the building’s ground electrode system. All CPI Grounding Busbars are UL Listed. Hole patterns on Busbars accommodate two-hole lugs per the recommendation of BICSI NECA/BICSI 607-2011 and TIA-607-B standards. 13622-010: (4) Lugs, 5/8” (15.88 mm) hole centers Insulators electrically isolate Busbars from the wall or other mounting (3) Lugs, 1” (25.4 mm) hole centers surfaces, thereby controlling the current path. • Mounting brackets are manufactured from high-quality 300 series stainless steel with 3/8” (9.53 mm) diameter mounting holes spaced 5.75” (146.1 12.00” (304.8 mm) mm) apart • Busbars mount on the wall, floor or ceiling • Ships preassembled • Sold individually 0.00 • Busbar assemblies with lug kits also available • Other configurations available on request Each Busbar consists of: 2.00” (50.8 mm) (12) • (1) Busbar 0.312” (7.92 mm) (8) • (2) insulators 0.437” (11.1 mm) • (2) stand-off brackets • (4) stainless steel bolts with Torx T-45 head 13622-012: (6) Lugs, 5/8” (15.88 mm) hole centers • Order installation hardware separately (3) Lugs, 1” (25.4 mm) hole centers Busbar Size Shipping Part Description H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) 13622-010 10 (250) TGB 2 x 10 x 1/4 (50 x 250 x 6.4) 3 (1.4) 13622-012 12 (300) TGB 2 x 12 x 1/4 (50 x 300 x 6.4) 4 (1.8) 40153-012 12 (300) TMGB 4 x 12 x 1/4 (50 x 100 x 6.4) 7 (3.2) 40153-020 20 (510) TMGB 4 x 20 x 1/4 (50 x 510 x 6.4) 8 (3.6) Note: See details at left for lug sizes and quantities. Overall height with stand-off brackets is 6.63” (168 mm); overall depth is 3.13” (80 mm). 40153-012: (15) Lugs, 5/8” (15.88 mm) hole centers (3) Lugs, 1” (25.4 mm) hole centers 40153-020: (27) Lugs, 5/8” (15.88 mm) hole centers (3) Lugs, 1” (25.4 mm) hole centers 11-3 0.00 BUSBARS Standard Busbars CPI Standard Busbars are insulated ground bus mounting plates specifically designed for commercial applications. The hard-drawn electrolytic tough pitch 110 alloy solid copper ground bars are 1/4” (6.4 mm) thick and stand off 2.75” (69.9 mm) from the backboard or wall. The 10” (250 mm) Busbar accepts 1/4” single bolt lugs. The 12” and 20” (300 mm and 510 mm) Busbars provide connection for nine or 17 lugs respectively, accepting lugs with either 3/4”, 1” or 1-3/4” (19.1 mm, 25 mm or 44.5 mm) center. Any lug with 3/8” bolts may be used. • All Busbars ship individually and preassembled • Other configurations available on request • UL Listed Each Busbar assembly consists of: 10622-010 • (1) Busbar • (2) insulators • (2) stand-off brackets • (4) stainless steel bolts with Torx T-45 head • Order installation hardware separately Size Shipping Part Description H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10622-010 Busbar 4 x 10 x 1/4 (100 x 250 x 6.4) 4 (1.8) 10622-012 Busbar 4 x 12 x 1/4 (100 x 300 x 6.4) 5 (2.3) 10622-012 10622-020 Busbar 4 x 20 x 1/4 (100 x 510 x 6.4) 8 (3.6) Overall height with stand-off brackets is 6.63” (168 mm); overall depth is 3.13” (80 mm). 20.00” (510.00 mm) 0.000 4.00” (101.6 mm) (53) 0.437” (11.1 mm) 10622-020 Busbar Insulator Assemblies CPI also offers standalone Busbar Insulator Assemblies. • Ships preassembled • Replaces CPI P/N 13622-000 Pair of assemblies consists of: • (2) stainless steel bolts, 3/8”W x 5/8”L • (4) lock washers, 3/8” • (4) flat washers, 3/8” • (2) stainless steel bolts, 3/8”W x 3/4”L • (2) insulators, 1-/34”W x 1-7/8”D, 3/8” threaded insert • (2) stainless steel wall brackets, 1”W (25 mm), 1” standoff • Order installation hardware separately Sold in pairs Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10622-000 Busbar Insulator Assemblies, 1 Pair 2 (0.9) 11-4 0.000 BUSBARS Busbar Assemblies With Lug Kits Busbar Assemblies with Lug Kits contain the CPI 13622 series Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) or the CPI 40153 series Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) along with required stainless steel hardware to fasten the two-hole ground lugs to the Busbar. • #6 lugs are 2-hole lugs with 1/4” hardware • #2, 2/0 and 4/0 lugs are 2-hole lugs with 3/8” hardware • Order installation hardware separately • UL Listed 40158-020 Shown Busbar Size Shipping Part Description H x W x D #2 Lug #6 Lug 2/0 Lug 4/0 Lug Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 2 x 12 x 1/4 40156-012 TGB Pattern 3 ea 6 ea 1 ea 0 5 (2.3) (50 x 300 x 6.4) 4 x 12 x 1/4 40158-012 TMGB Pattern 3 ea 6 ea 1 ea 1 ea 8 (3.6) (100 x 300 x 6.4) 4 x 20 x 1/4 40158-020 TMGB Pattern 3 ea 6 ea 1 ea 1 ea 11 (5.0) (100 x 510 x 6.4) Overall height with stand-off brackets is 6.63” (168 mm); overall depth is 3.13” (80 mm). Horizontal Rack Busbar Horizontal Rack Busbar for consolidating equipment grounds. Constructed of 3/16”-thick x 3/4”H (4.763 mm x 19.1 mm) hard-drawn electrolytic tough pitch 110 alloy copper bar with eight #6-32 tapped lug mounting holes on 1” (25.4 mm) centers and two pairs of 5/16” (7.938 mm) diameter holes spaced 3/4” (19.1 mm) apart for attaching ground jumpers. • Other configurations available on request • UL Listed Part number consists of Busbar and a hardware kit that includes: • (1) splice plate bar, 3”L (80 mm) 19” rack width Busbar shown • (2) #12-24 copper machine screws • (2) #12 copper flat washers • (8) #6-32 copper machine screws • (8) #6 ring terminals • Order installation hardware separately Rack Shipping Part Description Width Weight Number (in) lb (kg) 10610-019 Horizontal Rack Busbar 19 2 (0.9) 10610-023 Horizontal Rack Busbar 23 3 (1.4) Shown mounted to rack 10610-035 Horizontal Rack Busbar 35 4 (1.8) 11-5 BUSBARS Vertical Rack Busbar Vertical Rack Busbar for consolidating equipment grounds. Constructed of 5/8”H x 1/4”W (15.88 mm x 6.4 mm) hard-drawn electrolytic tough pitch 110 alloy copper bar with pairs of #1/4-20 tapped mounting holes on 5/8” (15.88 mm) centers. The 36”L (910 mm) bar has one set of #5/16 self-clinching studs on 1” (25.4 mm) centers at one end for attachment of a ground conductor. The 72”L (1830 mm) bar has two sets of #5/16 self-clinching studs on 1” (25.4 mm) centers at both ends for attachment of a ground conductor. • Each package contains one Vertical Rack Busbar • Vertical Rack Busbars with insulators and lug kits are also available • Other configurations are available on request • UL Listed Description Shipping Part Number H xW x D Weight Number of Lugs in (mm) lb (kg) 40160-036 5/8 x 1/4 x 36 (15.88 x 6.4 x 910) 8 4 (1.8) 40160-072 5/8 x 1/4 x 72 (15.88 x 6.4 x 1830) 13 5 (2.3) Vertical Rack Ground Bar Kit The Rack Ground Bar Kit includes a thin strip of tinned copper that attaches to the rack’s equipment mounting rail to provide direct ground contact for rack-mount equipment or a convenient bonding strip. Sized to fit a 7’ (2.1 m) high rack with an EIA-310-D Universal hole pattern and 45U, the ground bar is punched with a series of holes that align with each mounting hole on the rack. When equipment is mounted to the rack, the rack-mount brackets touch the ground bar. Alternately, the Equipment Ground Jumper Kit can be used to connect equipment to the grounding bar. • Each kit includes one ground bar, three #12-24 zinc-plated thread forming hex washer head installation screws, an abrasive pad, joint compound and a ground label • The ground bar is .05” (1.3 mm) thick tinned copper strip, 78.65”H x .68”W (1997 mm x 17 mm) and is punched with holes that match the EIA-310-D Universal Hole Pattern • UL Listed Ground Bar Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 40172-001 Rack Ground Bar Kit 2 (0.9) 11-6 BUSBARS/INSULATORS Vertical Rack Busbar Kits Vertical Rack Busbar Kits isolate the Busbar from the rack to help control current paths from passing through one piece of equipment to another. • Other configurations are available on request • UL Listed Kit consists of: • (1) Vertical Rack Busbar • (1) #2 AWG two-hole ground compression lug with 3/8” (9.53 mm) holes on 1” (25.4 mm) centers ® • (3) white Delrin insulator blocks • (3) self-tapping screws • (3) #12-24 mounting screws • (2) stainless steel lock washers, 5/16” • (2) nuts Description Shipping Part H x W x D Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 40161-036 5/8 x 1/4 x 36 (15.88 x 6.4 x 910) 6 (2.7) 40161-072 5/8 x 1/4 x 72 (15.88 x 6.4 x 1830) 7 (3.2) Shown mounted to rack Rack Busbar Insulator Block Rack Busbar Insulator Blocks provide rigid support to physically separate Rack Busbars from all sources of electrical energy. Its offset design securely attaches the Busbar using a #12 self-tapping screw while allowing unobstructed access to rack-mounted equipment. The Insulator Block has a #12 clearance hole for mounting to the rack. ® • Made of durable, nonconductive white Delrin • Block measures 3/4”H x 11/16”W x 1-1/4”L (19.1 mm x 17.463 mm x 31.8 mm) • Available individually or in packages of 50 Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 40157-001 Insulator Block, Each 1 (0.5) Shown mounted between 40157-050 Insulator Block, Box of 50 2 (0.9) rack and Busbar 11-7 INSULATORS Rack Base Insulator Kit Rack Base Insulator Kits electrically isolate the racks from the floor for an effective grounding and bonding system. Made of .060” (1.52 mm) thick phenolic insulating material and accepts up to 1/2” diameter screws. Used on concrete floors, not needed for access floor applications. Kit consists of: • (2) isolation plates • (4) isolation grommets Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10605-019 Insulator Kit, 19” Rack 3 (1.4) 10605-023 Insulator Kit, 23” Rack 3 (1.4) Cable Runway Insulator Bar Kit Electrically isolates Cable Runway sections, isolating grounded sections of runway or where strong EMI/RFI fields could generate eddy-currents, which could disturb down-line equipment. ® • Made of durable, nonconductive white Delrin • Available individually or in packages of 10 Kit consists of: • (2) insulator bars, 1.5”H x 3/8”W x 5.5”L (38 mm x 9.53 mm x 140 mm) • (2) butt-splice kits (P/N/ 11301-001) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10842-001 Insulator Bar Kit, 1 Kit 3 (1.4) 10842-010 Insulator Bar Kit, 10 Kits 25 (11.3) 11-8 GROUNDING PRODUCTS Cable Runway Ground Strap Kit Cable Runway Ground Strap Kits provide a ground pathway between cable runway lengths when fastened together across splices. Installation requires drilling 5/16” holes. Ground Straps consist of an 8”L (200 mm) #6 AWG green insulated stranded copper conductor with horizontal yellow stripe attached at both ends to two-hole compression lugs with 1/4” bolt holes spaced on 5/8” (15.88 mm) centers. • Overall length of 11” (280 mm) • Available individually or in packages of 25 • Constructed of UL Listed components • Replaces CPI P/N 12061-001 Shown mounted • Other configurations available on request across Kit consists of: runway • (4) stainless steel cap screws, #1/4-20 x 3/4”L splice point • (4) flat washers, 1/4” • (4) lock washers, 1/4” • (4) nuts, 1/4” Shipping Part Description Unit Weight Number lb (kg) 40164-001 #6 AWG Ground Strap 1 1 (0.5) 40164-025 #6 AWG Ground Strap 25 12 (5.0) Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block CPI's Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block provides a convenient way to attach ground wires to racks or cabinets and meets BICSI and ANSI-J-STD-607-A two-hole mounting recommendations. Constructed of extruded, high-strength aluminum and accepts conductors ranging from #14 AWG through 2/0. Includes two #3/8-24 x 7/8”L stainless steel set screws. • Manufactured from electroplated tin aluminum • UL Listed • Available individually or in packages of 10 • Mounting hardware not included Shipping Part Description Unit Wire Size Weight Number lb (kg) Shown mounted 40167-001 Two-Hole Block 1 #14-2/0 1 (0.5) on rack 40167-010 Two-Hole Block 10 #14-2/0 10 (4.5) 11-9 GROUNDING PRODUCTS One Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block CPI's traditional One Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block provides a convenient way to attach ground wires to racks or cabinets using one #12-24 screw (not supplied). Holds up to two #4 gauge wires. Shipping Part Wire Zinc Plated Description Unit Weight Number Size lb (kg) 08009-001 One-Hole Block 1 Up to #4 1 (0.5) 08009-010 One-Hole Block 10 Up to #4 10 (4.5) Equipment Ground Jumper Kit Use the Equipment Ground Jumper Kit with the Vertical Rack Busbar Kit or Rack Ground Bar Kit to bond rack-mount equipment. The Equipment Ground Jumper Kit includes a 24”L (710 mm) insulated green/yellow helical stripe #6 AWG ground conductor with a Slotted Compression Lug on one end and a 90° Slotted Compression Lug on the other end. The 90° Slotted Lug attaches to the busbar or ground bar allowing easy alignment with equipment. The Slotted Compression Lug attaches to equipment. The kit includes an abrasive pad, antioxidant joint compound and two installation screws to prepare and secure the jumper to the busbar or ground bar. The installer must provide installation hardware for the lug that attaches to equipment. • Each kit includes one 24”L (710 mm) insulated ground jumper with attached lugs, two plated installation screws, an abrasive pad and joint compound • The lugs are made from electroplated tinned copper and have two mounting holes spaced .5” to .625” apart that accept 1/4” screws • UL Listed Components Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 40159-010 Equipment Ground Jumper Kit 2 (0.9) Ground Wire Use Ground Wire to create custom-length ground jumpers to bond CPI Racks, Cabinets and Cable Runway to Telecommunications Grounding Busbars. • Ground Wire is a #6 AWG, 133-strand, green insulated MTW conductor with a yellow helical stripe • Sold in a 100’ (30 m) length on a spool • High strand count requires specific Compression Lugs (40162-913, 40162-963, 4012-914 or 40162-964) Description Shipping Part Length Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) 40159-001 Ground Wire, #6 AWG, 100 (30) Spool 14 (6.4) 11-10 GROUNDING PRODUCTS Ground Jumper Ground Jumpers provide common grounding from equipment rack or cabinet to the Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor. Can be used with CPI “L” Brackets (P/N 10001-001 or 10559-500) to attach cable run vertically along equipment rack or cabinet. Ground jumpers are constructed of a 9'L (2.7 m) #6 AWG stranded copper conductor insulated green with a horizontal yellow stripe attached to a compression lug with two 1/4” bolt holes spaced Shown mounted on 5/8” centers. on rack • Available individually or in packages of 10 • Constructed of UL Listed components • Replaces CPI P/N 41016-00X and 41026-00X • Other configurations available on request Description Shipping Part Length Unit Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) 40159-009 9 (2.7) Green Jumper 1 2 (0.9) 40159-019 9 (2.7) Green Jumper 10 20 (9.1) Stand-Off Tie-Down “L” Brackets These “L” brackets mount to the back of the rack channel to provide a convenient tie-down point for grounding and bonding cable runs. Available in nonconductive nylon or high-strength aluminum construction. Either end of the aluminum bracket can be attached to the rack or cabinet face, allowing cable Nylon run in several different ways. Description Shipping Part W x L Unit Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) 10001-001 1 x 5 (30 x 130) White Nylon 1 1 (0.5) 10001-050 1 x 5 (30 x 130) White Nylon 50 3 (1.4) 10559-X00 1 x 6 (30 x 150) Aluminum 1 1 (0.5) 10559-X50 1 x 6 (30 x 150) Aluminum 50 5 (1.4) Aluminum X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black 11-11 GROUNDING PRODUCTS Pedestal Clamp with Ground Connector Support ground wires from round or square raised floor pedestals using the Pedestal Clamp with Grounding Connector. The connector provides a ground connection for the pedestal and supports up to four wires from the pedestal. Use to create a signal reference grid under the raised access floor using #6 Cross Connector AWG or 2/0 bare round wire. Select the Pedestal Clamp with Grounding Connector to match the style and size of the pedestal and size of the conductor. • Use Cross Connectors to create signal reference grid intersections; support up to four conductors, two per side, size #6 AWG or 2/0 • Use Straight Connectors to support the signal reference grid in between intersections; support one or two conductors on one side of the pedestal only, size #6 AWG or 2/0 • Manufactured from electrotin plated copper or bronze (P/N 40169-003) with stainless steel installation hardware • Part numbers 40169-001 and 40169-002 are UL Listed Straight Connector Pedestal Style, Shipping Part Number and Size Description Diameter Weight Number of Connectors in (mm) lb (kg) Pedestal Clamp, 40169-001 Square, 1-1/8 (28) OD (2) #6 AWG per side 2 (0.9) Cross Connector Pedestal Clamp, Round, 1-1/8 (28) to (1) #6 AWG and 40169-002 2 (0.9) Cross Connector 1-3/4 (44) OD (1) 2/0 per side Pedestal Clamp, Square or Round, (2) #6 AWG or 40169-003 2 (0.9) Straight Connector 1-1/8 (28) OD (2) 2/0 one side only Note: P/N 40169-003 can support two conductors that are the same size; conductors can be #6 AWG through 2/0. Pipe Clamp with Ground Connector Support ground wires from metal pipes of various sizes with the Pipe Clamp with Grounding Connector. The connector provides a ground connection for the pipe and supports up to two wires parallel or perpendicular to the pipe. Select the Pipe Clamp with Grounding Connector to match the size of the pipe. • Attaches to pipes ranging in size from .5” to 6” nominal (.375” to 6.63” outside diameters) • Supports one or two conductors; conductors must be the same size • Use with conductors ranging in size from #6 up to 250 MCM • Attach conductors parallel or perpendicular to the pipe • Manufactured from electroplated tinned bronze with stainless steel hardware Pipe Size / Diameter Ranges Shipping Part Description Nominal Size / Outside Diameter Weight Number in (mm) lb (kg) Note: P/N 40170-001 40170-001 Pipe Clamp 5-.75 (10-19) .375-1 (9.5-30) 2 (0.9) supports parallel attachment 40170-002 Pipe Clamp 1-1.25 (30-31.8) .75-1.7 (19-43) 2 (0.9) of only one conductor or perpendicular attachment of 40170-003 Pipe Clamp 1.5-2 (38-50) 1-2.4 (30-61) 2 (0.9) two conductors. All other 40170-004 Pipe Clamp 2.5-3 (64-80) 2.25-3.5 (58-89) 2 (0.9) clamps support parallel or perpendicular attachment of 40170-005 Pipe Clamp 3.5-4 (89-100) 3.2-4.5 (81-114) 2 (0.9) two conductors. Conductors must be the same size. 40170-006 Pipe Clamp 5-6 (130-150) 5.63-6.63 (143-169) 2 (0.9) 11-12 GROUNDING PRODUCTS Clean-Thread Screws The #12-24 Combination Pan Head, Pilot Point Mounting Screws attach equipment to racks and cabinets. A cutting notch in the thread removes paint in threaded holes to improve metal-to-metal contact. The pilot point reduces cross-threading. The combination head can be used with #3 Phillips and slotted screwdrivers. • Zinc finish • Available in packages of 50 and 1,000 Shipping Part Description Unit Weight Number lb (kg) 40605-001 #12-24 Screws 50 1 (0.5) 40605-004 #12-24 Screws 1,000 9 (4.1) Aluminum-To-Aluminum Or Aluminum-To-Copper Antioxidant Joint Compound Recommended for all aluminum-to-aluminum and aluminum-to-copper connectors, bare conductors, Busbars, insulated conductors and conduit threads. Shipping Part Size Description Unit Weight Number oz (g) lb (kg) 40166-101 Antioxidant, Gray .5 (14) 1 1 (0.5) 40166-801 Antioxidant, Gray 8 (230) 1 1 (0.5) 40166-150 Antioxidant, Gray .5 (14) 50 2 (0.9) .5 oz (14 g) 8 oz (230 g) 40166-812 Antioxidant, Gray 8 (230) 12 6 (2.7) • Oxide inhibiting joint compound is used to improve the electrical conductivity and enhance the integrity of any grounding or bonding connection Copper-To-Copper Joint Compound • Good for all voltages • Assures a high-connectivity joint by sealing out Recommended for all copper-to-copper connections, copper threads and all air and moisture to prevent corrosion and mechanical/pressure type grounding connections. reformation of oxide film • Also used as an anti-seizing thread lubricant and Shipping Part ensures continuity of ground on aluminum Description Size Unit Weight Number conduit threads lb (kg) • Bulk packaging quantities available 40168-101 Antioxidant, Copper .5 oz 1 1 (0.5) 40168-801 Antioxidant, Copper 8 oz 1 1 (0.5) 40168-150 Antioxidant, Copper .5 oz 50 2 (0.9) 40168-812 Antioxidant, Copper 8 oz 12 6 (2.7) 11-13 COMPRESSION TOOLS & LUGS Mechanical Compression Tools Mechanical Compression Tools are used to attach compression lugs and butt splices (not Compression Tool recommended for use with C-Tap connections). The tools feature long steel handles with comfortable rubber grips. The Dieless Compression Tool works with either copper or aluminum conductors. The Crimp Tool comes complete with dies and features extra-long handles for two-handed crimping. Part Length Shipping Weight Description Conductor Size Number lb (kg) in (mm) Crimp Tool Copper #8-250 MCS Compression Tool, 40165-001 24 (610) 5 (2.3) Aluminum #8-4/0 Dieless 40165-002 Crimp Tool #8-1/0 10.5 (267) 3 (1.4) Compression Lugs Connect copper or tinned copper conductors to Busbars, racks, cabinets or Cable Runway. • Manufactured from electroplated tinned copper conductors • Available individually or in bulk quantities in three styles; Two-Hole, Slotted and 90˚ Slotted • Other configurations available Shipping Part Hole Spacing Hole Size Description Cable Size Color Code Quantity Weight Number in (mm) in (mm) lb (kg) 40162-901 Two-Hole Lug #6 .625 (15.9) .250 (6.4) Blue 1 1 (0.5) 40162-951 Two-Hole Lug #6 .625 (15.9) .250 (6.4) Blue 50 2 (0.9) 40162-902 Two-Hole Lug #6 .750 (19.1) .375 (9.5) Blue 1 1 (0.5) 40162-952 Two-Hole Lug #6 .750 (19.1) .375 (9.5) Blue 50 2 (0.9) 40162-903 Two-Hole Lug #6 1.00 (25.4) .375 (9.5) Blue 1 1 (0.5) 40162-953 Two-Hole Lug #6 1.00 (25.4) .375 (9.5) Blue 50 2 (0.9) 40162-904 Two-Hole Lug #2 .625 (15.9) .250 (6.4) Brown 1 1 (0.5) 40162-954 Two-Hole Lug #2 .625 (15.9) .250 (6.4) Brown 25 2 (0.9) 40162-905 Two-Hole Lug #2 .750 (19.1) .375 (9.5) Brown 1 1 (0.5) 40162-955 Two-Hole Lug #2 .750 (19.1) .375 (9.5) Brown 25 2 (0.9) 40162-907 Two-Hole Lug #2 1.00 (25.4) .375 (9.5) Brown 1 1 (0.5) 40162-957 Two-Hole Lug #2 1.00 (25.4) .375 (9.5) Brown 25 2 (0.9) 40162-909 Two-Hole Lug 2/0 1.00 (25.4) .375 (9.5) Black 1 1 (0.5) 40162-959 Two-Hole Lug 2/0 1.00 (25.4) .375 (9.5) Black 10 2 (0.9) 40162-910 Two-Hole Lug 2/0 1.75 (44.5) .500 (12.7) Black 1 2 (0.9) 40162-960 Two-Hole Lug 2/0 1.75 (44.5) .500 (12.7) Black 10 2 (0.9) 40162-911 Two-Hole Lug 4/0 1.00 (25.4) .375 (9.5) Purple 1 1 (0.5) 40162-961 Two-Hole Lug 4/0 1.00 (25.4) .375 (9.5) Purple 10 2 (0.9) 40162-912 Two-Hole Lug 4/0 1.75 (44.5) .500 (12.7) Purple 1 1 (0.5) 40162-962 Two-Hole Lug 4/0 1.75 (44.5) .500 (12.7) Purple 10 3 (1.4) 40162-913 Slotted Lug #6 .500 (12.7)/.625 (15.9) .250 (6.4) Blue 1 1 (0.5) 40162-963 Slotted Lug #6 .500 (12.7)/.625 (15.9) .250 (6.4) Blue 25 2 (0.9) 40162-914 90˚ Slotted Lug #6 .500 (12.7)/.625 (15.9) .250 (6.4) Blue 1 1 (0.5) 40162-964 90˚ Slotted Lug #6 .500 (12.7)/.625 (15.9) .250 (6.4) Blue 25 2 (0.9) 11-14 COMPRESSION TAPS C-Type Compression Taps C-Type Compression Taps connect two copper conductors with the use of a hydraulic crimping tool. • Available individually or in bulk packages • Other sizes available on request • UL Listed Shown connecting two copper conductors Part Shipping Weight Description Run Tap Unit Number lb (kg) #2 Stranded #2 Stranded 40163-004 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) #2 Solid #2 Solid #2 Stranded #2 Stranded 40163-054 C Taps 50 4 (1.8) #2 Solid #2 Solid #2 Stranded #4 Stranded 40163-003 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) #2 Solid #8 Solid #2 Stranded #4 Stranded 40163-053 C Taps 50 6 (2.7) #2 Solid #8 Solid #4 Stranded #4 Stranded 40163-002 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) #4 Solid #6 Solid #4 Stranded #4 Stranded 40163-052 C Taps 50 3 (1.4) #4 Solid #6 Solid #4 Stranded #6 Stranded 40163-001 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) #6 Solid #6 Solid #4 Stranded #6 Stranded 40163-051 C Taps 50 3 (1.4) #6 Solid #6 Solid 2/0 Stranded #2 Stranded 40163-005 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) 1/0 Solid #8 Solid 2/0 Stranded #2 Stranded 40163-055 C Taps 10 1 (0.5) 1/0 Solid #8 Solid 2/0 Stranded 2/0 Stranded 40163-007 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) 1/0 Solid 1/0 Solid 2/0 Stranded 2/0 Stranded 40163-057 C Taps 10 1 (0.5) 1/0 Solid 1/0 Solid 4/0 Stranded #2 Stranded 40163-006 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) 3/0 Solid #6 Solid 4/0 Stranded #2 Stranded 40163-056 C Taps 10 1 (0.5) 3/0 Solid #6 Solid 4/0 Stranded 2/0 Stranded 40163-008 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) 3/0 Solid 1/0 Solid 4/0 Stranded 2/0 Stranded 40163-058 C Taps 10 2 (0.9) 3/0 Solid 1/0 Solid 4/0 Stranded 4/0 Stranded 40163-009 C Taps 1 1 (0.5) 3/0 Solid 3/0 Solid 4/0 Stranded 4/0 Stranded 40163-059 C Taps 10 2 (0.9) 3/0 Solid 3/0 Solid 11-15 SEISMIC PROTECTION SYSTEMS Bracing Products for Racks & Cabinets ® Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack Page 12-3 Seismic Protection Products - Racks Page 12-6 Seismic Protection Products - Runway Page 12-8 Seismic Protection Products - Cabinets Page 12-9 ® Seismic Frame Cabinet System Page 12-10 SEISMIC PROTECTION SYSTEMS It’s much easier to prepare for the next seismic event than to predict it. This is especially important for data centers that can’t afford to be offline or are not backed up at a secondary location. To reduce this risk and minimize equipment damage, additional seismic bracing for racks, cabinets, runway and trays is required and used in many parts of the world. Structural engineers can use CPI Seismic Protection Systems to reduce excessive motion that may cause undue strain on cable or conduit interconnection which may help equipment remain operational. OSHPD Pre-Approved Products: CPI is also helping customers reduce the Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) approval cycle as they plan installations in seismically active regions by obtaining the OSHPD Pre-Approval (OPA) numbers for several CPI products. OSHPD is the regulatory agency for the state of California that oversees the construction of hospital facilities. When equipment such as CPI Racks, Cabinets and Enclosure Systems are installed in California hospitals, OSHPD is responsible for reviewing and approving the anchorage design, as well as the architectural structure design. Find OSHPD Pre-Approved (OPA) part numbers and other useful design tools at www.chatsworth.com/designtools. CPI Seismic Protection Systems include: • Seismic Products for Rack Systems • Seismic Products for Cable Runway and Tray • Seismic Products for Cabinet and Enclosure Systems ® • Seismic Frame Cabinet System To reduce the risk of equipment damage from seismic events, check all codes, rules and regulations in your area. Utilize the service of a structural engineer, and follow his/her suggestions. CPI offers an assortment of Seismic Protection Systems to stiffen, brace and stabilize racks and rack-mounted equipment to comply with your structural engineer’s recommendations. 12-2 ® SEISMIC FRAME TWO-POST RACK ® Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack ® CPI’s Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack is designed specifically to support network equipment in areas with seismic activity. The welded, steel Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack resists the swaying motion caused by earthquakes to reduce the amount of vibration transferred through the rack to equipment and is less likely to be damaged during a seismic event. The Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack supports 19” EIA-310-D compliant or 23”W equipment with two pairs of mounting rails that can be spaced 6” (150 mm) or 3” (80 mm) apart. The mounting rails are marked and numbered withrack- mount units (U) and are available threaded or square-punched with painted or zinc-plated finish. This rack ships fully assembled and includes a Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block for bonding the rack to the busbar. The rack is rated for a 1,000 lb (453.6 kg) seismic Zone 4 load per Section 4.4 of ® the Telecordia Technologies, Inc. GR-63-CORE Network Equipment Building Systems (NEBS) requirements. Features: • Welded, steel network equipment rack engineered specifically to protect equipment in areas with seismic activity • Available in two sizes; 24”W (610 mm) or 28”W (710 mm) • Vertical Powers Strips and T-shaped Cable Management Fingers attach directly to the rack channel to provide power and cable distribution for equipment • 19”W Rack fits within a 24” (610 mm) access floor tile • Fully bonded rack has (2) masked grounding locations and includes a Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block for easy connection to the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar • Independently seismic-tested and certified, meets industry recognized ® Telecordia Technologies, Inc. GR-63-CORE Network Equipment Building Systems (NEBS) Zone 4 requirements • EIA-310-D Compliant • UL Listed NWIN per UL60950, File E227626 • 1000 lb (453.6 kg) load rating for seismic areas Rack Includes: • (1) welded, steel frame • (4) equipment mounting rails • (50) each equipment mounting screws/cage nuts • (1) Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block Adjustable Depth Mounting Rails ® Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack Two Mounting Hole Ground populated with available accessories Terminal Block 12-3 ® SEISMIC FRAME TWO-POST RACK Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack Open, two-post, seismic rack supports 19” EIA or 23” wide rack-mount equipment. Description Shipping Part H x W Weight Number ft (m) lb (kg) 7 (2.1) x 19”, 44U 13853-X03 180 (81.6) Tapped #12-24 Zinc Rails 7 (2.1) x 19”, 44U 13854-X03 178 (80.7) Square-Punched Zinc Rails 7 (2.1) x 19”, 44U 13855-X03 180 (81.6) Tapped #12-24 Painted Rails 7 (2.1) x 19”, 44U 13856-X03 178 (80.7) Square-Punched Painted Rails 7 (2.1) x 23”, 44U 13883-X03 185 (83.9) Tapped #12-24 Zinc Rails 7 (2.1) x 23”, 44U 13884-X03 183 (83.0) Square-Punched Zinc Rails 7 (2.1) x 23”, 44U 9.6” 13885-X03 185 (83.9) C (294 mm) Tapped #12-24 Painted Rails B 15.0” 7 (2.1) x 23”, 44U (380 mm) 13886-X03 183 (83.0) A Square-Punched Painted Rails Description 19 in (mm) 23 in (mm) X=color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Install using (4) seismic-rated concrete anchors (sold separately). Overall Width (A) 24.0 (610) 28.0 (710) Frame Opening (B) 19.3 (490) 23.3 (592) Rail Clearance (C) 17.75 (450) 21.75 (552) Cable Management Fingers Kit Organize patch cords and jumper cables by rack-mount unit. • 7U T-shaped plastic cable guides snap onto the front and rear of the rack frame • Openings between the T-shaped guides align with each rack-mount unit on the rack • Single-Sided Kit includes 12 cable guides for one side (front or rear) of the rack • Double-Sided Kit includes 24 cable guides for both sides (front and rear) of the rack Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) Cable Management Fingers Kit, 13696-001 7 (3.2) Single-Sided Cable Management Fingers Kit, 13696-002 14 (6.4) Double-Sided Color is Black. 12-4 ® SEISMIC FRAME TWO-POST RACK ACCESSORIES Seismic Frame Accessories VCS Vertical Cabling Section Two aluminum cable managers, 6”W x 6.38”D (150 mm x 162 mm), attach to align with the front and rear of the rack. Large cable pass-through ports on the back of each manager align with openings in the side of the frame; spin-open plastic latches secure cables in managers. Attach two CPI Vertical Power Strips to slots on the back of the manager using the mounting kit listed below. One Single-Sided Cable Management Fingers Kit included to organize cables. VCS Vertical Cabling Section Offset Bracket Brackets attach a Single-Sided Wide VCS (P/N 11374-X03) to the Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack so that it aligns with the front of the rack. Kit includes four brackets, use two brackets per side to attach the cabling section. 13704-703 Floor Drilling Template Durable 28”W x 15”D (710 mm x 380 mm) aluminum template locates floor mounting holes for 19”W and 23”W Seismic Frame Two-Post Racks. Concrete Floor Anchor Kit 13699-701 Includes four M12 x 5-1/8” Hilti HSL-3-G Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchors to attach Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack to a concrete slab floor. Minimum recommended thickness of the concrete slab on the ground floor is 5-1/2” (140 mm). Each rack must be secured to the structural floor. Spacing between racks should be determined by a licensed structural engineer familiar with seismic applications 13703-701 and codes. Vertical Power Strip Mounting Kit Includes mounting hardware that allows two CPI Vertical Power Strips to attach to the keyholes on the sides of the Seismic Frame Two-Post Rack or the back of the Vertical Cabling Section listed above. Cannot be used on the same side as the Vertical Cabling Section or Cable Management Fingers Kit. Duplex Electrical Outlet Box 13702-001 Provides a location for a power connection at the base of the rack. Includes a single-gang box for a single duplex receptacle and two self-tapping Torx head T25 installation screws. Outlet box is welded steel, 3-3/4”H x 1-13/16”W x 2-1/2”D (95 mm x 46 mm x 64 mm) with a 15.5 in³ (250 cm³) wiring capacity, has eight (four accessible) concentric knockouts for 1/2” or 3/4” conduit, and is zinc galvanized for corrosion protection. UL Listed. Shipping Part 13697-001 Description Weight Number lb (kg) 13704-X03 VCS Vertical Cabling Section, Black 35 (15.9) 13699-701 VCS Offset Mounting Bracket Kit, Black 2 (0.9) 13703-701 Floor Drilling Template, Black 6 (2.7) 13702-001 Concrete Floor Anchor Kit 3 (1.4) 13697-001 Vertical Power Strip Mounting Kit 1 (0.5) 13698-001 13698-001 Duplex Electrical Outlet Box, Zinc 1 (0.5) P/N 13704-X03 available in other colors. X=color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. 12-5 SEISMIC PROTECTION PRODUCTS FOR RACKS Universal Earthquake Bracing Kit This adjustable wall/ceiling brace provides a means of securing an equipment rack or auxiliary frame to meet earthquake safety codes. • Material is 2” x 1/4” (50 mm x 6.35 mm) steel finished with Gold Chem Film over zinc plating Kit consists of: • (4) brackets (make 2 swivel brackets) • (2) 1/2-13 x 1 1/4” hex bolts • (2) 1/2-13 hex nuts • (2) 1/2” split lock washers Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10562-001 Universal Earthquake Bracing Kit 3 (1.4) Note: Seismic installation requirements should be approved by a licensed structural engineer. Installation drawings: Installation will require (not included): For rack: • (1) 5/8-11 threaded rod of appropriate length • (1) 5/8-11 x 1 1/4” hex cap screw Rod must be trimmed to proper length during installation • (1) 5/8-11 hex nut • (2) 5/8-11 hex nuts • (1) 5/8” split lock washer • (2) 5/8 flat Type A washer, wide For auxiliary frame or grid: • Clip kit and hardware for attachment to channel or bar • (1) Grid Clamp Kit Installation may also require (not included): • (1) 5/8-11 x 3 1/4” hex screw cap For concrete ceiling: • (1) 5/8-11 hex nut • (1) 5/8-11 concrete anchor • (1) 5/8” split lock washer • (1) 5/8-11 x 3” stud For plywood backboard: • (2) 5/8-11 hex nuts • (1) 5/8” x 2” hex lag screw • (1) 5/8” split lock washer • (1) 5/8” split lock washer • (1) 5/8” flat, washer, wide, Type A 12-6 SEISMIC PROTECTION PRODUCTS FOR RACKS Rack Seismic Gusset Kit The Rack Seismic Gusset and Hardware Kit can be added to any CPI Universal Rack (46XXX series) to stiffen critical load bearing joints, reducing the need to stabilize the top of the rack. • Adds additional support to critical rack joints • Kit can be added to any CPI Universal Rack (46XXX series) Kit consists of: • (4) welded steel bolt-on gussets • (8) 1/2-13 x 1-1/4” bolts • (8) 1/2-13 nuts Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 11592-X01 Gusset and Hardware Kit 10 (4.5) X=color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Note: Seismic installation requirements should be approved by a licensed structural engineer. Heavy-Duty Top Angle Optional top angle for CPI Universal, Standard or 6”D (150 mm) Standard Racks. • Material is aluminum extrusion, 1 1/2” x 2” x 1/4” (38.1 mm x 51 mm x 6.4 mm) with two 11/16” (17.46 mm) punched holes in top surface • Recommended to be used in pairs with 10562-001 bracing • Sold individually Part Number 19” Rack Dim. A 23” Rack Dim. A 10473-X01 14.57 (370.1) 10473-X02 18.57 (471.7) X=color; 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black. Adjustable Bracing Kit For Racks This adjustable, strong, easy-to-install rack bracing kit provides a cost effective, attractive solution to bracing for equipment rack. Attaches directly to the wall. • Adjustable 24” to 36”D (610 mm to 910 mm) from wall • Made of strong lightweight aluminum • Available in 19”and 23” widths • Available in four colors to complement rack installations Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12407-X19 19”W Kit 6 (2.7) Note: For secure bracing, 12407-X23 23”W Kit 7 (3.2) the rack/frame must be X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 5=Clear, 7=Black secured to the floor. 12-7 SEISMIC PROTECTION PRODUCTS Single Earthquake Bracing Kit Stabilizes Cable Runway hung from threaded rods. Material is 2” x 3/8” (50 mm x 9.53 mm) steel with gold over zinc plating. Kit consists of: • (2) steel bars (45° angle) • (4) 1/2-13 x 1 1/4” hex nuts & cap screws • (4) 1/2” split lock washers Installation will require (not included): • Threaded rod and runway attachment hardware • (1) 2” x 2” x 3/16”’ (50 mm x 50 mm x 4.763 mm) steel angle of appropriate length. See P/N 11420 (angle must be trimmed to proper length and drilled during installation) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10695-001 Single Earthquake Brace 8 (3.6) Double Earthquake Bracing Kit Stabilizes Cable Runway hung from threaded rods. Material is 2” x 3/8” (50 mm x 9.53 mm) steel with gold over zinc plating. Kit consists of: • (2) steel bars (45° angle) • (1) “V” steel bar • (8) 1/2-13 x 1 1/4” hex cap screws • (8) 1/2-13 hex nuts • (8) 1/2” split lock washers Installation will require (not included): • Threaded rod and runway attachment hardware • (2) 2” x 2” x 3/16” (50 mm x 50 mm x 4.763 mm) steel angle of appropriate length. See P/N 11420 (angle must be trimmed to proper length and drilled during installation) Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 10696-001 Double Earthquake Brace 14 (6.4) Note: Seismic installation requirements should be approved by a licensed structural engineer. Installation may also require (not included): For concrete ceiling: • 5/8-11 concrete anchors • 5/8-11 x 3 1/2” studs • 5/8-11 hex nuts • 5/8” split lock washers For secondary structure: • 5/8-11 threaded rod • Grid Clamp Kits • 5/8-11 hex cap screws • 5/8-11 hex nuts • 5/8” split lock washers 12-8 SEISMIC PROTECTION PRODUCTS Seismic Equipment Bracket for Cabinets The Seismic Equipment Bracket prevents back-and-forth, side-to-side and up-and-down movement of shelf-mounted equipment by bracing the equipment's chassis to the cabinet's vertical mounting rails. • Uses 1U of mounting space, securing equipment between 15” and 32” (380 mm and 810 mm) in depth • The bracket easily adjusts into multiple configurations which provides security for shelf-mount equipment of different depth or height • The bracket will adjust in depth for use in any of CPI’s 24”, 30”, 36” or 39”D ® ® (610 mm, 760 mm, 910 mm or 990 mm) MegaFrame , SlimFrame , ® ® SteelFrame, Seismic Frame Cabinets and TeraFrame Cabinets Shipping 19” Width 23” Width Color Weight lb (kg) 14061-119 14061-123 Gray 6 (2.7) 14061-219 14061-223 White 6 (2.7) 14061-719 14061-723 Black 6 (2.7) Adjustable Bracing Kit for Cabinets Attach bracing kit to cabinet top panel where there is a risk of seismic activity. Earthquake design criteria specify that equipment remain operational when subjected to earthquakes even though some small amount of repairable secondary physical damage may occur. • Adjustable 24” to 36” (610 mm to 910 mm) distance from wall • For use with M-Series, E-Series and Seismic Frame Cabinets Shipping Part Description Weight Number lb (kg) 12477-X19 19”W Kit 6 (2.7) 12477-X23 23”W Kit 7 (3.2) Note: For secure bracing, X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black attach the cabinet to the floor using the proper floor installation kit along with CPI floor Anchor Clamp provided with each cabinet. 12-9 ® SEISMIC FRAME CABINET SYSTEM ® Seismic Frame Cabinet System Rated Zone 4 compliant to Bellcore GR-63-CORE for Network Equipment ® Building Systems (NEBS), Section 4.4.1.1, the Seismic Frame Cabinet System is designed to withstand the seismic stress of an 8.3 Richter scale earthquake. Offered in a 84”H x 19”W x 36”D (2130 mm x 910 mm) cabinet solution, the aluminum outer frame provides the sound structural environment necessary for sensitive Information Technology (IT) hardware components. • Standard 19” EIA rack width • Features square-punched mounting rails with rack-mount unit marks • Aluminum outer frame with steel inner frame delivers maximum strength with minimum weight • Seismic bracing kits and a full line of structural enhancement products are available to support site-specific structural requirements • Internal cable management provides flexibility for wire routing and fits on-site customization • Adjustable front to rear vertical mounting rails allow use as a standard four-post cabinet or two-channel rack • Load Rating: 800 lb (362.9 kg) seismic 84”H x 19” W x 36”D (2130 mm x 910 mm ) Seismic Cabinet Part Cabinet Door Style Number Front Rear 11972-X02 No Front No Rear 11972-X12 Plexiglass Metal 11972-X22 Metal Metal Vented Plexiglass Perforated Metal 11972-X32 11972-X42 Perforated Metal Perforated Metal 84”H x 19” W x 36”D (2130 mm x 910 mm) Without Side Panels Cabinet Door Style Part Number Front Rear 11973-X02 No Front No Rear 11973-X12 Plexiglass Metal 11973-X22 Metal Metal 11973-X32 Vented Plexiglass Perforated Metal Closeup of reinforced inner frame 11973-X42 Perforated Metal Perforated Metal X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. Frame is anodized aluminum Cabinet Dimensions Usable Height 43U 84”H x 19” W x 36”D (2130 mm x 910 mm) Frame Only** Usable Depth 36” (910 mm) Usable Width 19”EIA Part Number Cabinet Door Style 11974-X02 Frame Only Overall Height 84.13” (2136.9 mm) Overall Depth (w/doors) 39.62” (1006.3 mm) X=color: 1=Gray, 2=White, 7=Black. **Frame is anodized aluminum Overall Width 27.32” (693.9 mm) Shipping Weight 286 lb Min / 376 lb Max (129.7 kg) / (170.6 kg) 12-10 ALPHABETICAL INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX New Products Rack System part numbers now cUL Listed: Universal Racks Page 1-3 Standard Racks Page 1-7 Adjustable Rail QuadraRack/ServerRack Page 1-10 Adjustable QuadraRack/ServerRack Page 1-13 Single-Sided Shelf Page 1-20 26”D (660 mm) Shelf Page 1-21 Double-Sided Shelf Page 1-22 Heavy Duty Equipment Shelf for 3” (80 mm) Channel Page 1-23 High-Density Patching Frame Page 1-39 ® GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System Page 2-34 Airflow Director Page 2-37 Bottom Panel Page 2-37 Rail Seal Kit Page 2-37 Brushed Side Panel Page 2-37 Cable Port Brush Kit Page 2-38 Cable Port Grommet Kit Page 2-38 Snap-In Grommet Kit Page 2-38 Baying Seal Kit Page 2-38 Cable Lashing Bracket Kit Page 2-39 Cable Ring Kit Page 2-39 Full Height PDU Bracket Page 2-39 Cable Ring Manager Page 2-40 Vertical Cable Manager Page 2-40 Fan Top Panel Kit Page 2-41 ® HotLok Snap-In Filler Panels Page 2-52 ® KoldLok Raised Floor Grommet Page 2-53 Universal Cable Runway now UL Classified Page 6-3 17” LCD KVM Drawer Page 8-3 Analog KVM Switch with DB15 Ports Page 8-5 IP KVM Switch with DB15 Ports Page 8-7 IP KVM Switch with Cat 5/6 Ports Page 8-9 Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) Software now pre-installed on a 1U Server Page 10-3 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# A B Adjustable Bracing Kit, Cabinets 12-9 Busbar Adjustable Bracing Kit, Racks 12-7 Busbar, Horizontal Rack 11-5 Adjustable Floor Support Channel, Runway 6-25 Busbar, Rack Insulator Block 11-7 Adjustable Junction-Splice Kit 6-12 Busbar, Standard 11-4 Adjustable QuadraRack & ServerRack 1-14 Busbar, Vertical Rack 11-6 Adjustable Rail QuadraRack & ServerRack 1-11 Butt-Splice Kit 6-10 Air Dam Kit, Cabinets 2-55 Butt Swivel Splice Kit 6-13 Air Dam Kit, TeraFrame 2-12 C Air Dam Kit, TFHD 2-23 Cabinets Airflow Director, GlobalFrame 2-37 C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet 2-49 Airflow Director, TeraFrame 2-11 E-Series ISP Co Location Cabinet 2-50 Alternate Space Runway 6-6 F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet UL 2-9 Anchor Setting Tool 1-30 F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet 2-22 Anchors 1-30 GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet UL 2-36 Antioxidant Joint Compound 11-13 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet UL 2-45 anyServer Bracket 1-24 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet 2-27 Auxiliary Framing Channel, Runway 6-18 ® Seismic Frame Cabinet System 2-51, 12-10 B ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet 4-16 Base Angle, Rack 1-31 Cabinet Accessories Baying Kit, High Density Patching Frame 1-39 Air Dam Kit, TeraFrame 2-12 Baying Kit, N-Series TeraFrame 2-29 Air Dam Kit, TFHD 2-23 Baying Kit, TeraFrame 2-17 Airflow Director, GlobalFrame 2-37 Baying Kit, TeraFrame HD 2-23 Airflow Director, TeraFrame 2-11 Baying Seal Kit, GlobalFrame 2-38 Baying Kit, N-Series TeraFrame 2-29 Block Mounting Bar 1-41 Baying Kit, TeraFrame 2-17 Bottom Panel, GlobalFrame 2-37 Baying Kit, TeraFrame HD 2-23 Bottom Panel, TeraFrame 2-12 Baying Seal Kit, GlobalFrame 2-38 Bottom Panel, TeraFrame HD 2-24 Bottom Panel, GlobalFrame 2-37 Brackets Bottom Panel, TeraFrame 2-12 66 Mounting Block 1-41 Cable Lashing Bar, TeraFrame 2-16 Ceiling Support 6-29 Cable Lashing Bracket, GlobalFrame 2-39 Equipment Support 1-35 Cable Lashing Bracket, TFHD 2-24 Extended Fingers 5-22 Cable Management Kit, N-Series TeraFrame 2-29 Fiber Mgmt, Horizontal Furcation 2-33 Cable Manager, CUBE iT 4-14 Hinged Panel 1-41 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 2-13 Wall-Mount 4-7 Cable Managers, Enhanced Narrow 2-59 Runway Support 6-47 Cable Managers, Enhanced,Wide 2-59 Fiber Mgmt, Swivel Cable Spool 2-32 Cable Port Brush Kit, GlobalFrame 2-38 Busbar Caster Kit 2-65 Busbar Assembly 11-5 Caster Kit, N-Series TeraFrame 2-29 Busbar Insulator Assembly Kit 11-4 Caster Kit, TeraFrame 2-18 Busbar Kit, Grounding 11-3 Fan Kit, M-Series Cabinet 2-54 13-3 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# C C Cabinet Accessories Cable Guide Kit, ARQR/ARSR 1-12 Fan Top Panel Kit, GlobalFrame 2-41 Cable Guides, Finger Snaps 5-21 Fan Top Panel Kit, GlobalFrame 2-41 Cable Lashing Bar, Evolution 5-5 Fiber Mgmt, Horizontal Furcation Bracket 2-33 Cable Lashing Bar, Velocity 5-11 Fiber Mgmt, Swivel Cable Spool 2-32 Cable Loop, Narrow 5-24 Fiber Trunk Cable Mgr, N-Series TeraFrame 2-31 Cable Ring, Double-Wide 5-23 Filtered Ventilation System, M-Series 2-57 Cable Ring, Large Horizontal 5-30 Front-to-Back Cable Mgr, TeraFrame 2-14 Cable Ring, Narrow 5-24 Full-Height PDU Bracket, GlobalFrame 2-39 Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 6-16 Intelligent Fan Door 2-56 Cabling Sections KoldLok Grommet 2-53 CCS Combination Cabling Section 5-27 Lockable Storage Drawer Dividers 2-64 CCS-EFX Combination Cabling Sect 5-16 Mounting Rails, N-Series TeraFrame 2-30 Double-Sided, Narrow Cabling Section 5-19 Mounting Rails, N-Series TeraFrame 2-30 Double-Sided, Wide Cabling Section 5-20 Network Duct Panel, N-Series TeraFrame 2-29 Evolution Cable Manager, Horizontal 5-26 PowerScope In-Line Meter 7-14 Evolution Cable Manager, Vertical 5-4 Rail Adapter Kit 2-65 MCS Master Cabling Section 5-13 Rail Adapter Kit 2-65 MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section 5-14 Rail Seal Kit, GlobalFrame 2-37 Single-Sided, Narrow Cabling Section 5-17 Ramp, TFHD 2-23 Single-Sided, Wide Cabling Section 5-18 Shelf, Fixed 2-67 Velocity Cable Management, Horizontal 5-29 Shelf, Fixed, Vented 2-60 Cabling Accessories Shelf, Monitor & Sliding Keyboard 2-63 Cable Ring, Double-Wide 5-23 Shelf, Rack-Mount Cable 2-18, 2-63 Cable Ring, Large Horizontal 5-30 Shelf, Sliding, Solid 2-61 Cable Ring, Narrow 5-24 Shelf, Sliding, Vented 2-61 Cable Strain Relief Bracket 5-35 Side Skirt, TFHD 2-23 Cabling Section Covers 5-21 Standard Fan Door, M-Series 2-56 Ring Panel, Large Horizontal 5-31 Universal Cabinet Light 2-64 Vertical Cable Loop 5-23 Vertical Cable Manager , Cabinets 2-58 Ceiling Enclosure 3-6 Vertical Cable Manager, TeraFrame 2-13 Center Rail for AQR/ASR 1-16 Vertical Cable Ring Manager, TFHD 2-24 Clip J-Bolt Kit 6-20 Vertical Cabling Ring Kit 2-58 Compound, Copper-to-Copper Joint 11-13 Vertical Cabling Ring Kit, Narrow Mgr 2-58 Compression Lugs UL 11-14 Vertical Exhaust Duct, TeraFrame 2-11 Compression Tools 11-14 Vertical Exhaust Duct, TeraFrame 2-11 Corner Cushions, Wall Rack 4-6 Vertical Power Strip Manager, TeraFrame UL 2-15 Cube iT PLUS Cabinet System Zero Spacing Baying Kit, TeraFrame 2-17 Cable Manager 4-14 Cable Cover, Clip-On 5-28 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" UL 4-12 Cable Distribution Spool 5-24 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet, 60" & 72" 4-13 Cable Distribution Spool 5-7, 5-25 Fan Filters 4-14 Cable Divider Bar Kit, Evolution 5-5 Fan Kit 4-14 13-4 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# C D Cube iT PLUS Cabinet System Evolution Foot Kit 4-12 Cable Manager, Horizontal 5-26 Horizontal Wire Bar 4-14 Cable Divider Bar Kit 5-5 Light Kit 4-14 Cable Lashing Bar 5-5 Mounting Bracket, 45° 4-15 Cable Spool Spacer Kit 5-7 Mounting Bracket, 90° 4-15 Fixed Accessory Panel 5-7 Mounting Rails 4-12 Floor Bracket 5-5 Power Strip 4-15, 7-9 Movable Mid-Section 5-7 Termination Block Panel 4-14 Solid Rear Panel 5-6 Vert Mounting Bracket 4-15 Solid Side Panel 5-6 ExpandaRack 1-18 D Extended Fingers Bracket 5-22 D-Rings for PatchRack, Cable Runway 6-7 D-Rings, Metal 5-34 F Distribution Ring, Channel-Mounted 5-33 F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet 2-9 Distribution Ring, Open 5-33 F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet 2-22 Distribution Rings, Closed 5-34 Faceplates, Enclosures 3-10 Dolly Wheels, Racks 1-33 Fan Filters,CUBE-iT PLUS 4-14 Dolly, Mid-Size 1-33 Fan Kit, CUBE-iT PLUS 4-14 Door, Metal for Rack Enclosure 1-9 Fan Kit, M-Series Cabinet 2-54 Duplex Receptacle, Surge-Suppressed 4-17 Fan Top Panel Kit, GlobalFrame 2-41 Dust Cover, QuadraRack 1-19 Fan/Filter Kit 1-9, 4-18 Fiber Management E Fiber Management Spools, 2" 5-25 Earthquake Bracing Kit, Double 12-8 Fiber Trunk Cable Mgr, N-Series TeraFrame 2-31 Earthquake Bracing Kit, Racks 12-6 Horizontal Furcation Bracket 2-33 EasySwing Wall-Mount Rack 4-6 Module Adapter 2-32 Enclosure Faceplates 3-10 Raised Floor Enclosure UL 3-5 Enclosure, Ceiling 3-6 Segregation Kit, Evolution 5-5 Enclosure, Ceiling-Mounted Wireless 3-11 Slack Manager Panel 4-17 Enclosure, Drop Ceiling 3-8 Swivel Cable Spool 2-32 Enclosure, Fiber Raised Floor 3-5 Universal Accessory Rail 2-32 Enclosure, MUTOA Floor Box 3-14 Vertical Furcation Bracket 2-33 Enclosure, Wireless 3-10 Filler Panels, HotLok Snap-In 2-52 Enclosures Mounting Bracket 3-9 Filler Panels, Snap-In 2-41 Equipment Ground Jumper Kit UL 11-10 Filter Replacement Kit 1-9, 4-18 Equipment Guard Rail 1-34 Filter Replacement, Filter Ventilation System 2-57 Equipment Rail, ARQR/ARSR 1-12 Filtered Ventilation System, M-Series 2-57 Equipment Support Bracket 1-35 Equipment Support Rails, AQR/ASR 1-16 G Evolution GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet 2-36 Cable Manager, Vertical 5-4 Airflow Director 2-37 Fiber Segregation Kit 5-5 Baying Seal Kit 2-38 13-5 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# G H GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet Horizontal Cable Guides 5-22 Bottom Panel 2-37 Horizontal Wire Bar, CUBE-iT PLUS 4-14 Brush Side Panel 2-37 Horizontal Wire Management 5-28 Cable Grommet Kit 2-38 HotLok Snap-In Filler Panels 2-52 Cable Lashing Bracket 2-39 I Cable Port Brush Kit 2-38 Installation Kits 2-18 Cable Ring Kit 2-39 Installation Kits 1-29 Cable Ring Manager 2-40 Insulator Bar Kit, Cable Runway 6-31, 11-8 Fan Top Panel Kit 2-41 Insulator Kit, Rack Base 1-29, 11-8 Full-Height PDU Bracket 2-39 Intelligent Fan Door 2-56 Rail Seal Kit 2-38 Intelligent Fan Kit, ThinLine 4-17 Snap-In Grommet & Plug 2-38 J Snap-In Grommet Kit 2-38 J-Bolt Kit 6-20 Vertical Cable Manager 2-40 J-Bolt Kit, Cable Runway 6-24 Grommet, Raised Floor 2-53 J-Bolts 6-21 Grounding Products Jack Plate Wall-Mount Bracket 5-36 Busbar Assembly 11-5 Jumper Tray, Upper 5-29 Busbar Insulator Assembly Kit 11-4 Junction Swivel Splice Kit 6-13 Busbar Kit, Grounding 11-3 Junction-Splice Kit 6-11 Busbar, Horizontal Rack 11-5 K Busbar, Vertical Rack 11-6 Keyboard 1-28 Compression Taps, C-Type 11-15 Keyboard & Tray, 2-Post Racks 1-28 Equipment Ground Jumper Kit 11-10 Keyboard & Tray, 4-Post/Cabinets 1-28 Ground Jumper 11-11 KoldLok Grommet 2-53 Ground Wire UL 11-10 KoldLok Wave 2-54 One Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block 11-10 KVM Systems Pedestal Clamp with Ground Connector 11-12 KVM, 17" LCD Drawer 8-3 Pipe Clamp with Ground Connector 11-12 KVM, Analog Expansion Switch 8-10 Rack Busbar Insulator Block 11-7 KVM, Analog Switch, DB15 Ports 8-5 Stand-Off Tie-Brackets 11-11 KVM, Cable 8-12 Two-Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block UL 11-9 KVM, Dongle 8-13 H KVM, IP Switch, Cat 5/6 Ports 8-10 Hardware 1-38, 2-18, 11-13 KVM, LCD, Analog, DB15 Ports 8-5 Hardware Kit 1-17, 1-24, 2-18, 2-65 KVM, LCD, IP, Cat 5/6 Ports 8-10 Heavy-Duty Butt-Splice Kit 6-10 L Heavy-Duty Junction Splice Kit 6-10 Labels, RMU Kit 1-35, 2-64 Heavy-Duty Junction-Splice Kit 6-10 Light, CUBE-iT PLUS UL 4-14 Heavy-Duty Top Angle for Racks 1-31, 12-7 Light, Universal Cabinet 2-64 Hex Cap Bolts 6-34 Lock Kit, Zone Enclosures 3-9 Hex Lag Screw 6-34 Lockable Storage Drawer Dividers 1-25, 2-64 Hex Nut 6-33 High Density Patching Frame UL 1-39 13-6 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# M O ® OnTrac Wire Mesh Tray M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet 2-45 Triangle Support Bracket, OnTrac 6-38 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet, 48" 2-46 Under Floor Support, OnTrac 6-39 Mag Clips Large 5-37 Wall Mount Angle, OnTrac 6-38 Mag Clips, Medium 5-36 Mag Clips, Wrap-Around 5-37 P MCS Master Cabling Section 5-13 Paint, Touch-Up 1-32 MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section 5-14 Patch Panel Wire Management Bar 5-28 Mechanical Compression Tools 11-14 PatchRack , Cable Runway 6-7 Mounting Bracket, 45° , CUBE-iT 4-15 Pathway Dividers, Cable Runway 6-6 Mounting Bracket, 90° , CUBE-iT 4-15 Pedestal Clamp with Ground Connector 11-12 Mounting Bracket, Enclosures 3-9 Pipe Clamp with Ground Connector 11-12 Mounting Bracket, Hinged Panel 1-41 Power Management Mounting Bracket, Hinged Panel 1-41 Horizontal, Single-Phase 4-10, 7-7 Mounting Brackets, 66 Block 1-41 PDU Cables 7-13 MUTOA Floor Box 3-14 PDU Cables/Accessories 7-13 PDU Mounting Brackets 2-15, 7-13 N PDU Mounting Brackets 7-13 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet 2-27 ® PDU, Horizontal 7-13 N-Series TeraFrame, Cisco Compatible 2-28 PDU, Vertical 7-10 N-Series TeraFrame, Juniper Compatible 2-28 PDU/Power Strip Lashing Bar, TeraFrame 2-16 O Power Strip CUBE-iT Cabinet UL 4-15, 7-9 Offset Rack-Mount Brackets 7-9 Power Strip Lashing Bar, TFHD 2-24 One Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block 11-10 PowerScope In-Line Meter 7-14 ® OnTrac Wire Mesh Tray PowerScope In-Line Meter 7-14 Cable Tray Bottom Insert 6-40 Silver Frame Cabinet 7-9 Cable Tray Cover 6-40 Stand-Off Mount 7-8 Cable Tray Cutting Tool 6-40 Vertical, Single-Phase 7-5 Center Support Bracket 6-38 Vertical, Universal Racks UL 7-8 Clamp Washer 6-36 Q Ede Hanger 6-37 QuadraRack & ServerRack (4-Post) L Support Bracket 6-37 Adjustable QuadraRack & ServerRack 1-14 Label Holder 6-41 Adjustable Rail QuadraRack & ServerRack 1-11 Large Radius Drop 6-41 Center Rail 1-16 OnTrac Wire Mesh Cable Tray 6-35 Dust Cover, 1-19 Pedestal Clamp 6-39 Equipment Support Rails 1-16 Rack-Mount Hook 6-39 Fixed Mounting Rail 1-12 Splice Bar Kit,90˚ 6-36 Lockable Storage Drawer Dividers 1-25 Splice Kit 6-36 QuadraRack 4-Post Frame 1-18 Splice Washer & Bolt Kit 6-36 QuadraRack Server Frame, Fixed 1-17 Split Bolt Grounding Clamp 6-41 Side Panels 1-12 Tool Less Radius Drop 6-41 Solid Shelf 1-19 Trapeze Support Bracket 6-37 13-7 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# Q R QuadraRack & ServerRack (4-Post) Rack Channel Standoffs, 6"D 1-36 Tie-Down Bracket, QuadraRack 1-19 Rack Enclosure, Single, 19"W 1-9 Top-Mount Cable Waterfall Tray 1-12 Rack Enclosure, Single, 23"W 1-9 Vented Shelf, QuadraRack 1-19 Rack, Universal Swing Gate 4-4 Vented Shelves 1-15 Rail Adapter Kit 2-65 RIM-600 System R 10’L Water Detect Sensor Rope 9-5 Rack, 2-Post 4-20 mA Dry Contact Bridge 9-7 Rack Enclosure 1-9 ConsoleView Software CD 9-7 Rack, Universal UL 1-4 Door Open/Closed Sensor 9-6 Runway Mounting Kit, High Density Frame 1-39 Humidity Sensor 9-5 Seismic Frame Two Post Rack 12-3 Humidity Sensor 9-5 Rack Accessories Mini Temperature Sensor 9-5 Base Angle 1-31 Motion Sensor 9-6 Dolly Wheels, Racks 1-33 Null Modem Cable 9-7 Double-Sided Shelf, Solid UL 1-22 Open/Close Contract Bridge 9-6 Dust Cover, QuadraRack 1-19 Power Monitoring Sensor 9-7 Equipment Support Rails, AQR/ASR 1-16 PowerGate 2 Module 9-4 ExpandaRack 1-18 PowerGate 2 Power Cord 9-4 Panel Adapter for Racks 1-37 PowerGate Module 9-4 Panel Hinges 1-40. RIM-600 Bundle 9-4 Rack Base Dust Cover 1-34 RIM-600 Host 9-3 Rack Base Dust Cover 1-34 RIM-600 Node UL 9-3 Rack Busbar Insulator Block 11-7 Sensor Panel/Bracket 9-7 Rack Cabling Managers 5-31 Smoke Detector Sensor 9-6 Rack Channel Standoffs, 3"D 1-36 Temperature Sensor 9-5 Rack Extension Kit 1-34 User Manual 9-7 Rack Filler Panel 1-32 Wall-Mount Kit 9-7 Rack Panel Adapters 1-35 Water Detection Sensor 9-5 Rack Seismic Gusset Kit 12-7 Runway Rack Standard Rollers 1-33 TELCO-Style Runway 6-4 Rack Support, Raised Floor 1-30 UL Classified Runway 6-4 Rack-to-Runway Mounting Plate, 3” 6-14 Universal Runway 6-3 Rack, Standard, 3"D UL 1-7 Runway Accessories Shelf, Heavy-Duty Equipment 1-23 90 Splice Kit° 6-12 Shelf, Single-Sided UL 1-20 45° Splice Kit 6-12 Shelf, Single-Sided Steel 1-21 Adjustable Floor Support Stands, Runway 6-25 Shelf, Sliding Equipment 1-23 Adjustable Junction-Splice Kit UL 6-12 Top Angle 1-31 Alternate Space Runway 6-6 Top-Mount Cable Waterfall Tray 1-12 Auxiliary Framing Channel, Runway 6-18 Rack Termination Systems Butt Swivel Splice Kit 6-13 Mounting Brackets, 66 Block 1-41 Butt-Splice Kit 6-10 High Density Patching Frame 1-39 13-8 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# R R Runway Accessories Runway Accessories Cable Mounting Plate, 3" 6-14 Trough Cable Runway 6-5 Cable Retaining Post 6-30 Wall Angle 6-24 Cable Runway Mounting Bracket 1-16 Wall Angle Support Kit 6-23 Ceiling Support Bracket 6-29 Wall to Rack Kit 6-16 Center Support Kit 6-30 S Channel Mounting Plate, 6" 6-15 ® Saf-T-Grip Straps 1-37, 5-32 Corner Bracket 6-11 Scalable Enterprise Mngmt Application (SEMA) 10-3 Cross Member 6-8 Seismic D-Rings, PatchRack 6-7 Adjustable Bracing Kit, Cabinets 12-9 E-Bend 6-9 Adjustable Bracing Kit, Racks 12-7 Elevation Kit 6-16 Cable Management Kit 12-4 End Closing Kit 6-31 Cabling Section Offset Bracket 12-5 Framing Clip Ki 6-17 Concrete Floor Anchor Kit 12-5 Ground Strap Kit 11-9 Duplex Electrical Outlet Box UL 12-5 Heavy-Duty Aux Framing Channel 6-18 Earthquake Bracing Kit, Double 12-8 Heavy-Duty Butt-Splice Kit 6-10 Earthquake Bracing Kit, Racks 12-6 Heavy-Duty Junction-Splice Kit 6-10 Equipment Bracket, Cabinets 12-9 High Density Frame Mounting Kit 1-39 Floor Drilling Template 12-5 L Bracket 6-32 Power Strip Mounting Kit 12-5 PatchRack 6-7 Rack Seismic Gusset Kit 12-7 Pathway Dividers 6-6 Seismic Frame® Cabinet System 2-51, 12-10 Quick Ship Cable Runway Kit 6-5 Seismic Frame® Two Post Rack UL 12-4 Radius Bend, Inside 6-9 Vertical Cabling Section 12-5 Radius Bend, Outside 6-9 Shelves Radius Drop, Cross-Member 6-8 10"D Wall-Mount 4-10 Radius Drop, Stringer 6-8 15"D Single-Sided 1-20, 4-10 Runway Foot Kit 6-24 16"D Low Profile 1-20 Runway Support Bracket 6-28 19"D Low Profile 1-21 Runway Tray 6-31 26"D UL 1-21 Slip-On® Framing Clip 6-17 32"D Sliding, Solid 2-62 Slip-On® Lock Nut 6-28 32"D Sliding, Vented 2-62 Slip-On® Support Bracket, Runway 6-29 CPU/Monitor, Double Keyboard Trays 1-26 Slotted Support Bracket 6-29 CPU/Monitor, Single Keyboard Tray 1-26 Standoff Support Kit, Cable Runway 6-9 CPU/Monitor, Single Keyboard Tray 1-26 Tall Pipe Stand 6-26 Double-Sided Low Profile 1-22 Threaded Ceiling Kit 6-26 Double-Sided Steel 1-21 Threaded Drop Rods 6-27 Double-Sided, Vented 1-22 Threaded Rod Coupling Kit 6-27 Double-Sided, Vented 1-22 Threaded Rod Cover 6-28 Extra-Extending 1-23 Threaded Rod I-Beam Clamps 6-28 Extra-Heavy-Duty Sliding 1-16, 1-19, 2-62 Triangle Support Bracket 6-22 Fixed, Low Profile for Cabinets 2-63 13-9 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# S T Shelves TeraFrame Fixed, Low Profile for Cabinets 2-63 Bottom Panel, TeraFrame 2-12 Fixed, Solid 2-60 Cable Lashing Bar, TeraFrame 2-16 Fixed, Solid UL 2-60 Cable Lashing Bar, TeraFrame HD 2-24 Fixed, Vented 2-60 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 2-13 Fixed, Vented 2-60 Caster Kit, N-Series TeraFrame 2-29 Fixed, Vented 2-60 Caster Kit, TeraFrame 2-18 Heavy-Duty Equipment 1-23 F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet 2-9 Monitor & Sliding Keyboard 2-63 F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet 2-22 Rack-Mount Cable 2-18, 2-63 Fiber Trunk Cable Mgr, N-Series TeraFrame 2-31 Single-Sided 1-20 Front-to-Back Cable Mgr, TeraFrame 2-14 Single-Sided Shelf, Vented 1-20 Mounting Hardware Kit, TeraFrame 2-18 Single-Sided Steel 1-21 Mounting Rails, N-Series TeraFrame 2-30 Sliding Equipment 1-23 Mounting Rails, N-Series TeraFrame 2-30 Sliding, Solid 2-61 Mounting Rails, TeraFrame 2-19 Sliding, Vented 2-61 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet 2-27 Small Peripheral Shelf 1-20 Network Duct Panel, N-Series TeraFrame 2-29 Stationary Keyboard 1-28 Ramp, TFHD 2-23 Vented Shelf, QuadraRack 1-19 Rear Door Sealing Kit, TeraFrame 2-11 Vented Shelves, AQR/ASR 1-15 Right Hand Latch Kit, N-Series TeraFrame 2-29 Snap-In Filler Panels 2-41 Seal Kit, TeraFrame 2-17 Split Lock Washers 6-33 Side Skirt, TFHD 2-23 Software, SEMA 10-3 Side Skirt, TFHD 2-23 Splices Slide Adapter Kt, TeraFrame 2-13 45° Runway-Splice Kit 6-12 Vertical Cable Manager, TeraFrame 2-13 90° Runway Splice Kit 6-12 Vertical Cable Ring Manager, TFHD 2-24 Butt Swivel Splice Kit, UL 6-13 Vertical Exhaust Duct, TeraFrame 2-11 Butt-Splice Kit, Cable Runway UL 6-10 Vertical Power Strip Manager, TeraFrame UL 2-15 Heavy-Duty Butt-Splice Kit, UL 6-10 Zero Spacing Baying Kit, TeraFrame 2-17 Heavy-Duty Junction Splice Kit, UL 6-10 Touch-Up Paint 1-32, 6-32 Heavy-Duty Junction-Splice Kit 6-10 Trays Junction Swivel Splice Kit 6-11 Flush-Mount Keyboard 1-27 Transition Adapter Butt Splice Kit 6-11 Jumper Tray, Lower 5-29 Keyboard & Mouse 1-28 T Keyboard, 19" Full 1-28 TeraFrame Sliding Keyboard & Mouse 1-27 Air Dam Kit, TeraFrame 2-12 Sliding Keyboard, Wrist Rest 1-27 Air Dam Kit, TFHD 2-23 Sliding Single Keyboard 1-26 Airflow Director, TeraFrame 2-11 Transition Tray 5-29 Baying Kit, N-Series 2-29 Baying Kit, TeraFrame 2-17 U Baying Kit, TeraFrame HD 2-23 UL Listed Bolt Down Kit, TFHD 2-23 45° Runway-Splice Kit 6-12 13-10 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# DESCRIPTION PAGE# U U UL Listed UL Listed 90° Runway Splice Kit 6-12 Raised Floor Enclosure 3-4 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 1-14 Runway Splice Kit 90° 6-12 Adj Rail QuadraRack & ServerRack 1-11 Runway-Splice Ki, 45° 6-12 Adjustable Junction-Splice Kit 6-12 Runway, UL Classified 6-4 Busbar Assembly 11-5 Runway, Universal 6-3 ® Busbar Kit, Grounding 11-3 Seismic Frame Two Post Rack 12-4 Busbar, Horizontal Rack 11-5 Shelf, Fixed, Low Profile for Cabinets 2-63 Busbar, Vertical Rack 11-6 Shelf, Fixed, Solid 2-60 Busbars, Standard 11-4 Shelf, Fixed, Vented 2-60 Butt Swivel Splice Kit 6-13 Swing Gate Wall Rack 4-5 Butt-Splice Kit, Cable Runway 6-10 Two-Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block 11-9 C-Type Compression Taps 11-15 Vertical Power Strip Manager, TeraFrame 2-15 Cable Runway 6-3 Vertical Rack Busbar Kit 11-7 Cable Runway Radius Bend, Inside 6-9 Vertical Swivel Splice Kit 6-13 Cable Runway Radius Bend, Outside 6-9 Universal Cabinet Light 2-64 Ceiling Enclosure 3-6 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 5-27 Ceiling-Mounted Wireless Enclosure 3-11 Universal Runway 6-3 Compression Lugs 11-14 Universal Swing Gate Rack 4-4 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 4-12 V Double-Sided Shelf, Solid 1-22 Velocity Cable Lashing Bar 5-11 Duplex Box 12-6 Velocity Cable Ring Manager 5-11 Enclosure, Drop Ceiling 3-8 Velocity Cable Spool 5-11 Enclosure, Fiber Raised Floor 3-5 Velocity Horizontal Cable Manager 5-26 Equipment Ground Jumper Kit 11-10 Velocity Standard Pack 5-12 F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet 2-9 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 5-9 GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet 2-36 Vertical Cabling Ring Kit 2-58 Heavy-Duty Butt-Splice Kit 6-10 Vertical Cabling Ring Kit, Narrow Mgr 2-58 Heavy-Duty Junction Splice Kit 6-10 Vertical Cabling Section Extensions 5-19 Heavy-Duty Swing Gate Kit 4-5 Vertical Exhaust Duct, TeraFrame 2-11 Heavy-Duty, 3" Channel Shelf 1-23 Vertical Power Strip Manager, TeraFrame UL 2-15 High Density Patching Frame 1-39 Vertical Rack Busbar Kit UL 11-7 Junction Swivel Splice Kit 6-13 Vertical Rack Ground Bar Kit 11-6 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet 2-45 Vertical Swivel Splice Kit, UL 6-13 Offset Rack-Mount Brackets 7-9 Vertical Wall Bracket 6-29 One Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block 11-10 Vertical Wire Management Loop 5-23 PDU, Horizontal 7-13 W PDU, Vertical 7-10 Wall-Mount Cabinets Pedestal Clamp with Ground Connector 11-12 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet 24", 36", 48" 4-12 Pipe Clamp with Ground Connector 11-12 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet 60" & 72" 4-13 Power Strip, CUBE-iT Cabinet 4-15, 7-9 Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet 4-18 Rack, Universal 1-4 13-11 ALPHABETICAL INDEX DESCRIPTION PAGE# W Wall-Mount Cabinets ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet 4-16 Wall-Mount Racks EasySwing Wall-Mount Rack 4-6 Swing Gate Wall Rack UL 4-5 Universal Swing Gate Rack 4-4 Wall-Mount Rack, Fixed UL 4-8 Wall-Rack, Heavy-Duty Equipment 4-7 Heavy-Duty Swing Gate Kit 4-5 Wall Mount Enclosure 3-14 Wall Rack Corner Cushions 4-6 Wall-Mount Bracket, Flush-Mount 4-7 Wall-Mount Rack w/Enclosure 4-9 Washers, Plain "A" Type 6-33 Wireless Enclosures Wireless Ceiling Enclosure 3-10 Wireless Ceiling Enclosure 3-11 Wireless Enclosure Kits 3-10 Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure 3-12 Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure 3-13 Wireless, Dome Enclosure 3-11 X XLBET 110A Block System 1-40 XLBET Mounting Bar 1-53 Zone Enclosure Faceplates 3-10 Enclosure, Basic Consolidation 3-8 Enclosure, Drop Ceiling 3-6 Enclosure, Wall Mount 3-12 Enclosure, Wireless 3-10 Enclosure, Wireless, Domed 3-11 Lock Kit, Zone Enclosures 3-9 MUTOA Floor Box 3-14 Raised Floor Enclosure 3-4 Spare Key, Zone Enclosures 3-9 13-12 PART NUMBER INDEX PART NUMBER INDEX New Products Rack System part numbers now cUL Listed: Universal Racks Page 1-3 Standard Racks Page 1-7 Adjustable Rail QuadraRack/ServerRack Page 1-10 Adjustable QuadraRack/ServerRack Page 1-13 Single-Sided Shelf Page 1-20 26”D (660 mm) Shelf Page 1-21 Double-Sided Shelf Page 1-22 Heavy Duty Equipment Shelf for 3” (80 mm) Channel Page 1-23 High-Density Patching Frame Page 1-39 ® GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet System Page 2-34 Airflow Director Page 2-37 Bottom Panel Page 2-37 Rail Seal Kit Page 2-37 Brushed Side Panel Page 2-37 Cable Port Brush Kit Page 2-38 Cable Port Grommet Kit Page 2-38 Snap-In Grommet Kit Page 2-38 Baying Seal Kit Page 2-38 Cable Lashing Bracket Kit Page 2-39 Cable Ring Kit Page 2-39 Full Height PDU Bracket Page 2-39 Cable Ring Manager Page 2-40 Vertical Cable Manager Page 2-40 Fan Top Panel Kit Page 2-41 ® HotLok Snap-In Filler Panels Page 2-52 ® KoldLok Raised Floor Grommet Page 2-53 Universal Cable Runway now UL Classified Page 6-3 17” LCD KVM Drawer Page 8-3 Analog KVM Switch with DB15 Ports Page 8-5 IP KVM Switch with DB15 Ports Page 8-7 IP KVM Switch with Cat 5/6 Ports Page 8-9 Scalable Enterprise Management Application (SEMA) Software now pre-installed on a 1U Server Page 10-3 PART NUMBER INDEX PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION 02004 6-34 Hex Cap Bolts 10683 5-23 Vertical Cable Loop, IBM 10684 6-26 Tall Pipe Stand, Runway 02006 5-32 Saf-T-Grip Straps, Center Grommet 10692 6-5 Trough Cable Runway 02006 6-34 Hex Lag Screw 02007 6-34 Hex Lag Screw 10693 6-5 Trough Cable Runway 02009 5-32 Saf-T-Grip Straps, Open Loop 10695 12-8 Earthquake Bracing Kit 02012 5-32 Saf-T-Grip Straps, Open Loop 10696 12-8 Earthquake Bracing Kit 10697 6-27 Threaded Rod Coupling Kit 03001 6-33 Hex Nut 10699 6-11 Transition Adapter, Splice 03003 6-28 Slip-On Lock Nut 04002 6-33 Washers, Plain "A" Type 10702 6-21 Spanner J-Bolt Kit 04003 6-33 Split Lock Washers 10709 6-21 Spanner Clip, Runway 05006 5-32 Saf-T-Grip Straps, End Grommet 10723 6-9 Radius Bend, Runway 10724 6-9 Radius Bend, Runway 05009 5-32 Saf-T-Grip Straps, End Grommet 10745 6-18 Framing Channel, Runway 05012 5-32 Saf-T-Grip Straps, End Grommet 06001 1-30 Anchors 10746 6-18 Heavy-Duty Aux. Channel 06003 1-30 Anchor Setting Tool 10747 6-18 Heavy-Duty Aux. Channel 06006 1-37, 5-32 Saf-T-Grip Straps, Center Grommet 10748 6-18 Splice Kit, Runway 10757 6-32 End Caps, Runway 06009 1-37, 5-32 Saf-T-Grip Straps, Center Grommet 10758 1-20 Small Peripheral Shelf 06012 1-37, 5-32 Saf-T-GripStraps, Center Grommet 08009 11-10 One Mntg Hole Grnd Terminal Block 10812 5-34 Distribution Rings, Closed 10001 5-35, 11-11 Stand-Off Tie-Brackets 10822 6-9 Cable Runway E-Bend 10175 1-33 Dolly Wheels for Racks 10842 6-31, 11-8 Insulator Bar Kit, Runway 10873 6-29 Slip-On Bracket, Runway 10250 6-3 Universal Runway 10941 5-34 Metal D-Rings 10375 1-31 Top Angle 10419 5-22 Horizontal Cable Guides 10942 5-34 Metal D-Rings 10473 1-31, 12-7 Heavy-Duty Top Angle for Racks 10943 5-34 Metal D-Rings 10487 6-13 Butt Swivel Splice Kit 10991 6-11 Transition Butt Splice Kit 11019 6-17 Slip-On Clip, Runway 10488 6-13 Junction Swivel Splice Kit 11038 1-9 Rack Enclosure, 19"W 10489 6-13 Vertical Swivel Splice Kit 10506 6-16 Cable Runway Elevation Kit 11048 1-9 Rack Enclosure, 23"W 10557 6-28 Threaded Rod Clamps, Runway 11054 1-21 Shelf, 26"D 10559 5-35, 11-11 Stand-Off Tie Bracket 11085 6-28 Threaded Rod Cover 11125 5-33 Distribution Ring, Mounted 10562 12-6 Earthquake Bracing Kit, Racks 11153 5-22 Horizontal Cable Guides 10565 1-34 Rack Extension Kit 10587 2-65 Rail Adapter Kit 11154 5-22 Horizontal Cable Guides 10595 6-14 3” Rack-to-Runway Mounting Plate 11157 5-22 Horizontal Cable Guides 10596 6-30 Cable Retaining Post, Runway 11164 1-23 Heavy-Duty, 3" Shelf 11177 1-41 66 Block Brackets 10605 1-29, 11-8 Insulator Kit, Rack Base 11188 1-41 66 Block Brackets 10606 6-31 Cable Runway Tray 10607 6-29 Slotted Support Bracket 11222 1-9, 4-18 Filter Replacement Kit 10608 6-29 Vertical Wall Bracket 11228 5-24 Cable Ring, Narrow 10609 6-17 Framing Clip Kit, Cable Runway 11230 5-24 Cable Loop, Narrow 11231 1-22 Shelf, Double-Sided 10610 11-5 Busbar, Horizontal Rack 11232 1-22 Shelf, Double-Sided 10616 6-12 Adjustable Junction-Splice Kit 10620 6-20 Clip J-Bolt Kit 11235 6-25 Adj. Floor Support Stands 10621 6-17 Framing Clip Kit, Cable Runway 11236 6-25 Adj. Floor Support Stands 10622 11-4 Busbars, Standard 11237 6-25 Adj. Floor Support Stands 11241 6-25 Adj. Floor Support Stands 10622 11-4 Busbar Insulator Assembly Kit 11252 6-4 Runway, TELCO-Style 10628 6-18 Auxiliary Framing Channel, Runway 10629 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 11268 6-32 Cable Runway “L” Bracket 10630 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 11275 6-4 Runway, UL Classified 10631 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 11293 1-20 Shelf, 16"D Low Profile 11294 1-21 Shelf, 19"D Low Profile 10632 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 11298 6-10 Heavy-Duty Splice Kit 10635 6-20 J-Bolt Clip Kit 10642 6-32 Protective End Caps, Runway 11299 6-10 Heavy-Duty Butt-Splice Kit 14-3 PART NUMBER INDEX PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION 11301 6-10 Butt-Splice Kit, Cable Runway 11755 1-9, 4-18 Fan/Filter Kit 11302 6-11 Junction-Splice Kit 11760 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 11303 6-19 J-Bolt Kit 11761 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 11304 6-19 J-Bolt Kit 11762 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 11305 6-19 J-Bolt Kit 11763 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 11306 6-20 J-Bolt Kit 11764 5-28 Slip-On Cover, Ring Panel 11308 6-24 J-Bolt Kit, Cable Runway 11781 5-19 Vertical Cabling Section Extensions 11309 6-24 Runway Foot Kit, Cable Runway 11782 5-19 Vertical Cabling Section Extensions 11310 6-26 Threaded Ceiling Kit, Runway 11790 4-5 Swing Gate Wall Rack 11312 6-22 Triangle Support Bracket, Runway 11791 4-5 Swing Gate Wall Rack 11313 6-12 45° Runway-Splice Kit 11792 4-5 Swing Gate Wall Rack 11314 6-12 90° Runway Splice Kit 11793 4-5 Swing Gate Wall Rack 11347 4-4 Universal Swing Gate Rack 11794 4-5 Swing Gate Wall Rack 11348 4-4 Universal Swing Gate Rack 11795 4-5 Swing Gate Wall Rack 11359 1-22 Shelf, Double-Sided Low Profile 11807 4-5 Swing Gate Wall Rack 11374 5-18 Single-Sided, Wide Cabling Section 11808 4-5 Swing Gate Wall Rack 11378 5-17 Vertical Cabling Section Extensions 11809 2-58 Vertical Cable Manager, Narrow 11406 6-29 Ceiling Support Bracket 11810 1-40 XLBET 110A Block System, 23”W 11408 6-28 Runway Support Bracket 11817 2-58 Vertical Cabling Ring Kit, Narrow 11415 1-23 Shelf, Sliding Equipment 11837 4-14 Horizontal Wire Bar, CUBE-iT PLUS 11420 6-24 Wall Angle, Runway 11840 4-12 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 11421 6-23 Wall Angle Support Kit, Runway 11890 4-12 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 11430 6-21 J-Bolts 11900 4-12 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 11431 6-21 J-Bolts 11901 4-12 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 11440 6-27 Threaded Drop Rods 11910 1-40 XLBET 110A Block System, 35”W 11450 6-18 Auxiliary Framing Channel, Runway 11911 6-16 Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 11487 1-26 CPU/Monitor, Single Keyboard Tray 11913 2-62 32"D Sliding Shelf, Vented 11488 1-26 CPU/Monitor, Double Keyboard Tray 11914 2-62 32"D Sliding Shelf, Solid 11520 1-40. Panel Hinges 11922 5-21 Cabling Section Covers 11521 1-41 Mounting Bracket, Hinged Panel 11923 5-21 Cabling Section Covers 11522 1-41 Mounting Bracket, Hinged Panel 11927 1-35, 2-64 Labels, Kit 11523 1-41 Mounting Bracket, Hinged Panel 11959 6-11 Corner Bracket, Runway 11524 1-41 Mounting Bracket, Hinged Panel 11960 4-8 Wall-Mount Rack, Fixed 11525 1-41 Mounting Bracket, Hinged Panel 11961 4-8 Wall-Mount Rack, Fixed 11546 1-28 Keyboard Tray, 19" Full 11962 4-8 Wall-Mount Rack, Fixed 11554 1-33 Rack Standard Rollers 11963 4-8 Wall-Mount Rack, Fixed 11558 1-9 Metal for Rack Enclosure Door 11964 4-8 Wall-Mount Rack, Fixed 11563 5-30 Cable Ring, Large Horizontal 11965 4-8 Wall-Mount Rack, Fixed 11564 5-31 Ring Panel, Large Horizontal 11972 2-51, 12-10 Seismic Frame Cabinet System 11570 5-35 Cable Strain Relief Bracket 11973 2-51, 12-10 Seismic Frame Cabinet System 11583 4-9 Flush Wall-Mount Bracket 11974 2-51, 12-10 Seismic Frame Cabinet System 11584 5-17 Vertical Cabling Section Extensions 11996 4-10 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 11592 12-7 Rack Seismic Gusset Kit 12035 5-33 Distribution Ring, Open 11643 1-33 Dolly, Mid-Size 12062 1-26 Tray, Sliding Single Keyboard 11680 4-18 Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet 12096 5-19 Double-Sided, Narrow Cable Section 11685 4-18 Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet 12100 6-8 Runway Radius Drop, Cross-Member 11690 1-27 Tray, Sliding Keyboard & Mouse 12101 6-8 Runway Radius Drop, Stringer 11700 6-31 End Closing Kit, Runway 12115 6-8 Cross Member, Cable Runway 11729 5-20 Double-Sided, Wide Cabling Section 12121 6-15 Rack-to-Runway Mtng Plate 11730 5-17 Narrow Cabling Section, S/S 12127 5-34 Distribution Rings, Closed 11746 6-22 Triangle Support Bracket, Runway 12170 6-5 Cable Runway Kit, Quick Ship 11752 5-31 Rack Cabling Managers 12176 5-28 Patch Panel Wire Management Bar 11753 5-31 Rack Cabling Managers 12183 5-29 Jumper Tray, Upper 11754 4-7 Wall-Mount Bracket, Flush-Mount 12185 5-29 Jumper Tray, Single 14-4 PART NUMBER INDEX PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION 12186 5-29 Transition Tray 12685 4-18 Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet 12187 5-29 Jumper Tray, Lower 12700 1-16, 1-19, 2-62 Extra-Heavy-Duty Sliding Shelf 12188 5-21 Cabling Section Covers 12717 1-27 Flush-Mount Keyboard Tray 12189 5-21 Cabling Section Covers 12730 6-14 3” Mounting Plate, Rack-to-Runway 12193 1-28 Keyboard & Mouse Tray 12731 6-15 6” Mounting Plate, Rack-to-Runway 12227 1-23 Extra-Extending Shelf 12751 1-24 anyServer Bracket, 1U 12228 5-23 Cable Ring, Double-Wide 12752 1-24 anyServer Bracket, 2U 12264 4-9 Wall-Mount Rack w/Enclosure 12759 1-24 anyServer Bracket Support Arms 12265 4-9 Wall-Mount Rack w/Enclosure 12766 5-25 Fiber Management Spools, 2" 12291 4-10 Shelf, 10"D Wall-Mount 12787 4-12 Mounting Rails, CUBE-iT 12293 1-23 Shelf, Heavy-Duty Equipment 12795 4-5 Heavy-Duty Swing Gate Kit 12309 1-36 Rack Channel Standoffs, 3"D 12796 4-15 45° Mounting Bracket, CUBE-iT 12310 1-36 Rack Channel Standoffs, 6"D 12803 4-14 Light, CUBE-iT PLUS 12311 1-36 Rack Channel Standoffs, 1-1/2"D 12804 4-14 Fan Kit, CUBE-iT PLUS 12312 1-35 Equipment Support Bracket 12805 4-14 Fan Filters, CUBE-iT PLUS 12324 4-9 Wall-Mount Rack w/Enclosure 12806 4-14 Fan Filters, CUBE-iT PLUS 12325 4-9 Wall-Mount Rack w/Enclosure 12816 4-10, 7-7 Power Strip, Horiz, Single-Phase 12334 2-60 Fixed, Solid Shelf 12817 7-8 Power Strip, Stand-Off Mount, 19" 12335 2-60 Fixed, Vented Shelf 12818 7-8 Power Strip, Stand-Off Mount, 23" 12336 2-60 Fixed, Solid Shelf 12819 7-8 Power Strip, Vertical, Racks 12337 2-60 Fixed, Vented Shelf 12820 4-15, 7-9 Power Strip, CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet 12338 2-61 Sliding, Solid Shelf 12821 7-9 Power Strip, Silver Frame Cabinet 12339 2-61 Sliding, Vented Shelf 12847 7-9 Offset Rack-Mount Brackets 12345 2-61 Sliding, Solid Shelf 12848 7-5 Power Strip, Vertical, Single-Phase 12346 2-61 Sliding, Vented Shelf 12850 7-5 Power Strip, Vertical, Single-Phase 12362 6-30 Cable Runway Center Support Kit 12851 7-6 Power Strip, Vertical, Single-Phase 12370 5-21 Cable Guides, Finger Snaps 12853 7-6 Power Strip, Vertical, Single-Phase 12392 5-30 Rack Radius Drop 12858 4-6 Corner Cushions, Wall Rack 12393 5-30 Rack Radius Drop 12891 5-22 Extended Fingers Bracket 12394 5-30 Rack Radius Drop 12934 4-17 Duplex Receptacle 12407 12-7 Adjusable Bracing Kit, Racks 12955 4-17 Fiber Slack Manager Panel 12408 6-14 3” Rack-to-Runway Mounting Plate 13044 1-37 Panel Adapter for Racks 12409 6-15 6” Rack-to-Runway Mounting Plate 13050 4-16 ThinLine II Wall-Mount Cabinet 12419 4-12 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 13051 4-17 Intelligent Fan Kit,ThinLine 12465 2-58 Vertical Cable Manager , Cabinets 13070 5-28 Horizontal Wire Mgmt Panel, VCS 12477 12-9 Adjustable Bracing Kit, Cabinets 13075 5-28 Horizontal Wire Mgmt Panel, VCS 12480 2-54 Fan Kit, M-Series Cabinet 13079 5-23 Vertical Wire Management Loop 12487 1-26 CPU/Monitor, Single Keyboard Tray 13082 1-25, 2-64 Lockable Storage Drawer, 2U 12495 2-63 Monitor & Sliding Keyboard Shelf 13083 1-25, 2-64 Lockable Storage Drawer, 3U 12505 2-57 Filter Ventilation System 13084 1-25, 2-64 Lockable Storage Drawer, 4U 12507 2-57 Filter Ventilation Filter Replacement 13170 2-59 Cable Managers, Enhanced, Wide 12510 2-57 Filtered Ventilation System 13171 2-59 Cable Managers, Enhanced, Narrow 12511 2-57 Filtered Ventilation System 13183 5-29 Jumper Tray, Upper 12541 5-28 Horizontal Wire Management, 19" 13185 1-25, 2-64 Lockable Storage Drawer Dividers 12542 5-28 Horizontal Wire Management, 19" 13203 2-65 Caster Kits 12573 2-63 Fixed, Low Profile Shelf, Cabinets 13204 2-65 Caster Kits 12610 2-63 Fixed, Low Profile Shelf, Cabinets 13212 2-56 Intelligent Fan Door, M-Series 12637 1-17, 1-24, 2-18, 2-65 Mounting Hardware Kit 13213 2-56 Intelligent Fan Door, C-Series 12638 1-17, 1-24, 2-18, 2-65 Mounting Hardware Kit 13222 2-56 Standard Fan Door, M-Series 12639 1-17, 1-24, 2-18, 2-65 Mounting Hardware Kit 13223 2-56 Standard Fan Door, C-Series 12663 5-28 Cable Cover, Clip-On 13239 7-7 Power Strips, Horiz, Single-Phase 12664 5-21 Cabling Section Covers 13265 4-12 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 12665 1-28 Shelf, Stationary Keyboard 13275 4-12 CUBE-iT PLUS 24", 36", 48" 12680 4-18 Silver Frame Wall-Mount Cabinet 13276 4-13 CUBE-iT PLUS Mounting Rails 14-5 PART NUMBER INDEX PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION 13285 4-15 90° Mounting Bracket, CUBE-iT 13855 12-4 Seismic FrameTwo Post Rack 13286 4-15 Vert Mounting Bracket, CUBE-iT 13856 12-4 Seismic FrameTwo Post Rack 13287 4-14 Termination Block Panel, CUBE-iT 13870 2-53 KoldLok Wave Grommet 13288 4-14 Termination Block Panel, CUBE iT 13783 2-53 KoldLok Wave Cover 13336 2-55 Air Dam Kit 13872 2-53 KoldLok Raised Floor, Mini Grommet 13392 6-6 Pathway Dividers, Cable Runway 13883 12-4 Seismic Frame Two Post Rack 13393 2-64 Universal Cabinet Light 13884 12-4 Seismic Frame Two Post Rack 13394 6-7 PatchRack , Cable Runway 13885 12-4 Seismic Frame Two Post Rack 13395 6-7 PatchRack, Cable Runway 13886 12-4 Seismic Frame Two Post Rack 13396 6-7 D-Rings for PatchRack, Runway 13901 5-9 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 13399 6-7 PatchRack Hardware Kit, Runway 13902 5-9 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 13480 1-28 Keyboard & Tray, 4-Post/Cabinets 13904 5-9 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 13483 4-12 CUBE-iT PLUS, Foot Kit 13905 5-9 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 13485 4-14 Cable Manager, CUBE iT 13911 5-10 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 13490 1-28 Keyboard & Tray, 2-Post/Racks 13912 5-10 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 13491 4-13 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet, 60" & 72" 13914 5-10 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 13492 4-13 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet, 60" & 72" 13915 5-10 Velocity Vertical Cable Manager 13493 4-13 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet, 60" & 72" 13928 5-11 Cable Lashing Bar, Velocity 13494 4-13 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet, 60" & 72" 13930 5-26 Velocity Horizontal Cable Manager 13495 4-13 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet, 60" & 72" 13934 5-11 Cable Ring Manager, Velocity 13496 4-13 CUBE-iT PLUS Cabinet, 60" & 72" 13935 5-11 Cable Spool, Velocity 13501 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 14061 12-9 Seismic Equip Bracket, Cabinets 13515 1-30 Raised Floor Rack Support 14068 2-58 Vertical Cabling Ring Kit 13517 2-18, 2-63 Shelf, Rack-Mount Cable 14070 2-60 Fixed Shelf, Solid 13571 2-53 KoldLok Integral Grommet 14072 2-60 Fixed Shelf, Vented 13576 2-53 KoldLok Surface-Mount Grommet 14171 2-52 Filler Panels, HotLok Snap-In 13602 4-6 EasySwing Wall-Mount Rack 14172 2-52 Filler Panels, HotLok Snap-In 13604 4-6 EasySwing Wall-Mount Rack 15002 5-24 Cable Distribution Spool 13608 4-6 EasySwing Wall-Mount Rack 15008 5-7, 5-25 Cable Distribution Spool 13622 11-3 Busbar Kit, Grounding 15053 1-17 QuadraRack Server Frame, Fixed 13653 7-11 PDU, Horizontal 15205 1-16 Cable Runway Mounting Bracket 13671 2-53 KoldLok Split Integral Grommet 15211 1-14 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 13674 2-53 KoldLok Extended 3" Grommet 15212 1-14 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 13675 2-53 KoldLok Extended 6" Grommet 15213 1-14 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 13676 2-53 KoldLok Surface-Mount Grommet 15214 1-14 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 13677 2-53 KoldLok Surface-Mount Grommet 15215 1-14 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 13696 12-4 Seismic Rack Cable Management 15216 1-14 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 13697 12-5 Seismic Rack Power Strip Mounting 15217 1-14 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 13698 12-5 Seismic Rack Duplex Outlet Box 15218 1-14 Adj QuadraRack & ServerRack 13699 12-5 Seismic Rack Cable Offset Bracket 15235 1-16 Equipment Support Rails, AQR/ASR 13701 3-14 MUTOA Floor Box 15245 1-15 Solid Shelves, Adjustable Racks 13702 12-5 Seismic Rack Floor Anchor Kit 15251 1-11 Adj Rail QuadraRack & ServerRack 13703 12-5 Seismic Rack Floor Drilling Template 15252 1-11 Adj Rail QuadraRack & ServerRack 13704 12-5 Seismic Rack, Vert Cabling Section 15253 1-11 Adj Rail QuadraRack & ServerRack 13730 6-14 3" Channel Runway Mounting Plate 15254 1-11 Adj Rail QuadraRack & ServerRack 13731 6-15 6" Channel Runway Mounting Plate 15255 1-15 Vented Shelves, AQR/ASR 13762 7-13 PDU Mounting Brackets 15259 1-12 Fixed Mounting Rail, ARQR/ARSR 13772 3-4 Raised Floor Enclosure 15260 1-12 Fixed Mounting Rail, ARQR/ARSR 13780 2-15, 7-13 PDU Mounting Brackets 15270 1-12 Side Panels, ARQR/ARSR 13812 3-6 Ceiling Enclosure 15275 1-12 Top-Mount Cable Waterfall Tray 13813 3-7 Ceiling Enclosure Fan Kit 15285 1-12 Equipment Rail for ARQR/ARSR 13833 3-11 Ceiling-Mounted Wireless Enclosure 15286 1-12 Cable Guide Kit for ARQR/ARSR 13853 12-4 Seismic Frame Two Post Rack 15320 4-7 Wall-Rack, Heavy-Duty Equipment 13854 12-4 Seismic Frame Two Post Rack 15321 4-7 Wall-Rack, Heavy-Duty Equipment 14-6 PART NUMBER INDEX PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION 15322 4-7 Wall-Rack, Heavy-Duty Equipment 25108 2-38 Snap-In Grommet, GlobalFrame 15323 4-7 Wall-Rack, Heavy-Duty Equipment 25110 2-40 Vertical Cable Mgr, GlobalFrame 15330 1-16 Center Rail, AQR/ASR 25120 2-40 Vertical Cable Mgr, GlobalFrame 15335 1-16 Center Rail, AQR/ASR 25130 2-37 Bottom Panel, GlobalFrame 15555 1-27 Tray, Sliding Keyboard, Wrist Rest 25140 7-13 PDU Mounting Brackets 15556 1-27 Tray, Sliding Keyboard, Wrist Rest 25141 2-39 Full-Height PDU Brkt, GlobalFrame 16270 2-23 Air Dam Kit, TFHD 25150 2-37 Airflow Director, GlobalFrame 16271 2-23 Baying & Fascia Kit, TFHD 25190 2-38 Cable Port Brush Kit, GlobalFrame 16272 2-24 Cable Lashing Bar, TFHD 25221 2-39 Cable Lashing Bracket, GlobalFrame 16273 2-24 Cable Lashing Bracket, TFHD 25242 2-38 Baying Seal Kit, GlobalFrame 16274 2-24 Power Strip Lashing Bar, TFHD 25250 2-37 Rail Seal Kit, GlobalFrame 16275 2-24 Vertical Cable Ring Manager, TFHD 25252 2-38 Rail Seal Kit, GlobalFrame 16277 2-23 Side Skirt, TFHD 25400 1-32, 6-32 Touch-Up Spray Paint 16278 2-24 Bottom Panel, TFHD 25401 1-32, 6-32 Touch-Up Paint, Bottle 16279 2-23 Bolt Down Kit,TFHD 25404 2-40 Vertical Cable Mgr, GlobalFrame 16280 2-23 Unloading Ramp, TFHD 30013 1-41 Block Mounting Bar, 19" Angle 16298 6-10 Heavy-Duty Junction Splice Kit, UL 30014 1-41 Block Mounting Bar, 23" Angle 16299 6-10 Heavy-Duty Butt-Splice Kit, UL 30015 1-41 Block Mounting Bar, 19" T-Bar 16301 6-10 Butt-Splice Kit, UL 30016 1-41 Block Mounting Bar, 23" T-Bar 16302 6-11 Junction-Splice Kit, UL 30024 1-32 Rack Filler Panel 16313 6-12 45° Runway-Splice Kit, UL 30025 1-32 Rack Filler Panel 16314 6-12 90° Runway Splice Kit, UL 30026 1-32 Rack Filler Panel 16341 1-19 Dust Cover, QuadraRack 30027 1-32 Rack Filler Panel 16342 1-19 Spacer, Line-Up, QuadraRack 30091 5-13 MCS Master Cabling Section 16350 1-19 Vented Shelf, QuadraRack 30092 5-13 MCS Master Cabling Section 16351 1-19 Solid Shelf ,QuadraRack 30093 5-13 MCS Master Cabling Section 16356 1-19 Tie-Down Bracket, QuadraRack 30094 5-13 MCS Master Cabling Section 16487 6-13 Butt Swivel Splice Kit, UL 30095 5-13 MCS Master Cabling Section 16488 6-13 Junction Swivel Splice Kit, UL 30096 5-13 MCS Master Cabling Section 16489 6-13 Vertical Swivel Splice Kit, UL 30130 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 17000 5-36 Mag Clips, Medium 30131 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 17100 5-36 Mag Clips, Medium 30139 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 17250 5-37 Mag Clips, Wrap-Around 30161 5-27 CCS Combination Cabling Section 17260 5-37 Mag Clips, Wrap-Around 30162 5-15 CCS Combination Cabling Section 17350 5-37 Mag Clips, Wrap-Around 30163 5-15 CCS Combination Cabling Section 17500 5-37 Mag Clips Large 30164 5-15 CCS Combination Cabling Section 20015 6-33 Split Lock Washers 30165 5-15 CCS Combination Cabling Section 20017 6-33 Hex Nut 30166 5-15 CCS Combination Cabling Section 20067 1-30 Anchors 30330 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 20098 6-34 Hex Lag Screw 30331 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 20141 6-34 Split Lock Washers 30339 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 20142 6-33 Hex Nut 30529 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 20283 6-33 Washers, Plain "A" Type 30530 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 20290 6-34 Hex Cap Bolt 30531 5-27 Universal Horizontal Cable Manager 20502 5-36 Jack Plate Wall-Mount Bracket 31410 1-35 Rack Panel Adapters, 1U 23480 1-28 Keyboard 31420 1-35 Rack Panel Adapters, 2U 25037 2-37 Brush Side Panel, GlobalFrame 31430 1-35 Rack Panel Adapters, 3U 25088 2-41 Fan Top Panel Kit, GlobalFrame 31440 1-35 Rack Panel Adapters, 4U 25102 2-40 Cable Ring Manager, GlobalFrame 31450 1-35 Rack Panel Adapters, 5U 25103 2-40 Cable Ring Manager, GlobalFrame 31470 6-9 Standoff Support Kit, Cable Runway 25104 2-39 Cable Ring Kit, GlobalFrame 31472 6-6 Alternate Space Runway 25105 2-39 Cable Ring Kit, GlobalFrame 31473 6-16 Cable Runway Wall to Rack Kit 25106 2-39 Cable Ring Kit, GlobalFrame 34370 2-11 Vertical Exhaust Duct, TeraFrame 25107 2-38 Snap-In Grommet Kit, GlobalFrame 34408 2-30 Mounting Rails, N-Series TF 14-7 PART NUMBER INDEX PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION 34409 2-30 Mounting Rails, N-Series TF 34749 6-41 Label Holder, OnTrac 34416 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34811 6-35 OnTrac Wire Mesh Cable Tray 34417 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34821 6-35 OnTrac Wire Mesh Cable Tray 34418 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34831 6-35 OnTrac Wire Mesh Cable Tray 34419 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34838 6-41 Split Bolt Grounding Clamp, OnTrac 34420 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34839 6-40 Cable Tray Cutting Tool, OnTrac 34421 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 35008 2-19 Mounting Rails, TeraFrame 34422 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 35009 2-19 Mounting Rails, TeraFrame 34423 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 35021 2-38 Cable Grommet Kit, GlobalFrame 34424 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 35051 2-18 Caster Kit, TeraFrame 34425 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 35058 2-18 Mounting Hardware Kit, TeraFrame 34426 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 35078 2-17 Zero Spacing Baying Kit, TeraFrame 34427 2-13 Cable Manager, TeraFrame 35079 2-17 Baying Kit, TeraFrame 34521 2-12 Air Dam Kit, TeraFrame 35080 2-17 24" Baying & Fascia Kit, TeraFrame 34522 2-12 Air Dam Kit, TeraFrame 35081 2-17 Seal Kit, TeraFrame 34523 2-12 Air Dam Kit, TeraFrame 35085 2-12 Bottom Panel, TeraFrame 34537 2-41 Filler Panels, Snap-In 35086 2-16 PDU/Power Strip Lashing Bar, TF 34538 2-41 Filler Panels, Snap-In 35087 2-16 Cable Lashing Bar, TeraFrame 34570 2-11 Airflow Director, TeraFrame 35090 2-13 Vertical Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34573 2-11 Rear Door Sealing Kit, TeraFrame 35092 2-13 Slide Adapter Kt, TeraFrame 34595 2-15 Vertical Power Strip Mgr, TeraFrame 35095 2-13 Vertical Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34620 2-29 Network Duct Panel, N-Series TF 35100 2-14 Vertical Cable Ring Manager, TF 34626 2-30 Mounting Rails, N-Series TF 35101 2-14 Vertical Cable Ring Manager, TF 34628 2-29 Caster Kit, N-Series TeraFrame 35102 2-13 Vertical Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34667 2-30 Mounting Rails, N-Series TF 35103 2-13 Vertical Cable Manager, TeraFrame 34680 2-29 Cable Management Kit, N-Series TF 35106 2-14 Front-to-Back Cable Mgr, TeraFrame 34682 2-29 Baying Kit, N-Series TeraFrame 35108 2-14 Front-to-Back Cable Mgr, TeraFrame 34684 2-29 Right Hand Latch Kit, N-Series TF 35441 5-26 Evolution Cable Manager, Horizontal 34701 2-32 Fiber Mgmt, Universal Access. Rail 35473 5-5 Cable Lashing Bar, Evolution 34707 2-33 Fiber Mgmt, Vertical Furcation Brkt 35475 5-5 Fiber Segregation Kit, Evolution 34708 2-33 Fiber Mgmt, Horiz Furcation Bracket 35492 5-7 Fixed Accessory Panel, Evolution 34713 2-32 Fiber Module Adapter 35493 5-7 Movable Mid-Section, Evolution 34716 2-32 Fiber Mgmt, Swivel Cable Spool 35497 5-6 Solid Mid Panel, Evolution 34719 2-31 Fiber Trunk Cable Mgr, N-Series TF 35501 5-6 Solid Rear Panel, Evolution 34728 6-36 Splice Washer & Bolt, OnTrac 35502 5-6 Solid Side Panel, Evolution 34728 6-36 Splice Washer & Bolt Kit, OnTrac 35503 5-5 Cable Divider Bar Kit, Evolution 34729 6-38 Center Support Bracket, OnTrac 35505 5-7 Cable Spool Spacer Kit, Evolution 34730 6-37 Trapeze Support Bracket, OnTrac 35506 5-5 Floor Bracket, Evolution 34731 6-37 Ede Hanger, OnTrac 35511 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g1, S/S 34732 6-39 Rack-Mount Hook, OnTrac 35512 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g1, S/S 34733 6-38 Triangle Support Bracket, OnTrac 35513 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g1, S/S 34734 6-37 L Support Bracket, OnTrac 35514 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g1, S/S 34735 6-38 Wall Mount Angle, OnTrac 35515 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g1, S/S 34736 6-39 Under Floor Support, OnTrac 35521 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g2, D/S 34737 6-39 Pedestal Clamp, OnTrac 35522 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g2, D/S 34738 6-36 Splice Kit, OnTrac 35523 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g2, D/S 34739 6-36 Splice Bar, OnTrac 35524 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g2, D/S 34740 6-36 90˚ Splice Bar Kit, OnTrac 35525 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g2, D/S 34741 6-41 Tool Less Radius Drop, OnTrac 35571 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g3 34743 6-40 Cable Tray Divider, OnTrac 35572 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g3 34744 6-40 Cable Tray Cover, OnTrac 35573 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g3 34745 6-40 Cable Tray Bottom Insert, OnTrac 35574 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g3 34746 6-36 Clamp Washer, OnTrac 35575 5-4 Evolution Cable Manager, g3 34747 6-41 Large Radius Drop, OnTrac 35616 7-10 PDU, Vertical 14-8 PART NUMBER INDEX PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION 35662 7-11 PDU, Horizontal 40159 11-10 Ground Wire 35663 7-11 PDU, Horizontal 40159 11-11 Ground Jumper 35676 7-11 PDU, Horizontal 40160 11-6 Busbar, Vertical Rack 35682 7-11 PDU, Horizontal 40161 11-7 Vertical Rack Busbar Kit 35683 7-11 PDU, Horizontal 40162 11-14 Compression Lugs 35692 7-11 PDU, Horizontal 40163 11-15 C-Type Compression Taps 35693 7-11 PDU, Horizontal 40164 11-9 Cable Runway Ground Strap Kit 35700 7-13 PDU Mounting Brackets 40165 11-14 Mechanical Compression Tools 35815 7-10 PDU, Vertical 40166 11-13 Antioxidant Joint Compound 35882 7-12 PDU, Horizontal 40167 11-9 Two-Mounting Hole Ground Block 35883 7-13 PDU, Horizontal 40168 11-13 Copper-to-Copper Joint Compound 35941 7-13 PDU Cables/Accessories 40169 11-12 Pedestal Clamp, Ground Connector 35991 7-14 PowerScope In-Line Meter 40170 11-12 Pipe Clamp with Ground Connector 35992 7-14 PowerScope In-Line Meter 40172 11-6 Vertical Rack Ground Bar Kit 35993 7-14 PowerScope In-Line Meter 40602 1-29 Spacer Kit, Univ Racks 36000 10-5 SEMA Software License 40604 1-29, 2-18 Installation Kit, Concrete Slab 36001 10-5 SEMA Software License 40605 1-38, 2-18, 11-13 Mounting Hardware 36005 10-5 SEMA Software Package 40606 1-38 Mounting Hardware 37200 8-3 KVM, 17" LCD Drawer 40607 1-29 Installation Kits 37201 8-3 KVM, 17" LCD Drawer 40750 1-21 Single-Sided Steel Shelf 37202 8-5 KVM, Analog Switch, DB15 Ports 40751 1-21 Double-Sided Steel Shelf 37203 8-5 KVM, LCD, Analog, DB15 Ports 41021 1-31 Base Angle 37204 8-5 KVM, LCD, Analog, DB15 Ports 41050 1-34 Rack Base Dust Cover 37205 8-10 KVM, LCD, IP, Cat 5/6 Ports 42050 1-34 Rack Base Dust Cover 37206 8-10 KVM, LCD, IP, Cat 5/6 Ports 46053 1-4 Universal Rack 37207 8-10 KVM, IP Switch, Cat 5/6 Ports 46083 1-4 Universal Rack 37208 8-12 KVM Cable 46353 1-4 Universal Rack 37209 8-13 KVM Dongle 46363 1-5 Universal Rack 37209 8-7 KVM, LCD, IP, DB15 Ports 46383 1-4 Universal Rack 37210 8-10 KVM, Analog Expansion Switch 46753 1-4 Universal Rack 37212 8-7 KVM, LCD, IP, DB15 Ports 46763 1-5 Universal Rack 40056 1-34 Equipment Guard Rail 46783 1-4 Universal Rack 40057 1-34 Equipment Guard Rail 48353 1-4 Universal Rack 40058 1-34 Equipment Guard Rail 48383 1-4 Universal Rack 40059 1-34 Equipment Guard Rail 50110 1-18 ExpandaRack, Standard Rack 40074 1-20, 4-10 Shelf, 15"D Single-Sided 50120 1-18 QuadraRack 4-Post Frame 40075 1-20 Shelf, Single-Sided 50130 1-18 ExpandaRack, Universal Rack 40092 5-14 MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section 50150 1-18 ExpandaRack Pan Set, Std Rack 40093 5-14 MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section 50160 1-18 ExpandaRack Pan Set, Univ Rack 40094 5-14 MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section 55053 1-7 Rack, Standard, 3"D 40095 5-14 MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section 55100 1-39 High Density Patching Frame 40096 5-14 MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section 55104 1-39 Baying Kit, High Density Frame 40097 5-14 MCS-EFX Master Cabling Section 55105 1-39 Runway Mounting Kit, H-D Frame 40098 5-16 CCS-EFX Combination Cabling Sect 57011 5-12 Velocity Standard Pack 40099 5-16 CCS-EFX Combination Cabling Sect 57012 5-12 Velocity Standard Pack 40100 5-16 CCS-EFX Combination Cabling Sect 57013 5-12 Velocity Standard Pack 40108 1-22 Double-Sided Shelf, Solid 57014 5-12 Velocity Standard Pack 40117 1-20 Single-Sided Shelf, Vented 60000 9-3 RIM-600 Host 40118 1-20 Single-Sided Shelf, Vented 60001 9-3 RIM-600 Node 40153 11-3 Busbar Kit, Grounding 60010 9-5 RIM-600 Temperature Sensor 40156 11-5 Busbar Assembly 60011 9-5 RIM-600 Temperature Sensor 40157 11-7 Rack Busbar Insulator Block 60012 9-5 RIM-600 Mini Temperature Sensor 40158 11-5 Busbar Assembly 60013 9-5 RIM-600 Temperature Sensor 40159 11-10 Equipment Ground Jumper Kit 60030 9-5 RIM-600 Humidity Sensor 14-9 PART NUMBER INDEX PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION PART# PAGE# DESCRIPTION 60031 9-5 RIM-600 Humidity Sensor BCE-24-P 3-8 Enclosure, Drop Ceiling 60032 9-5 RIM-600 Water Detection Sensor BCE-48-N 3-8 Enclosure, Drop Ceiling 60040 9-7 RIM-600 Power Monitoring Sensor BCE-48-P 3-8 Enclosure, Drop Ceiling 60045 9-4 RIM-600 PowerGate Module BCE-6-P 3-8 Enclosure, Drop Ceiling 60046 9-4 RIM-600 PowerGate 2 Module C10XX 2-49 C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet 60050 9-6 RIM-600 Open/Close Contract C11XX 2-49 C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet 60051 9-7 RIM-600 4-20 mA Dry Contact C12XX 2-49 C-Series SlimFrame Cabinet 60052 9-6 RIM-600 Door Open/Closed Sensor Chrome Lock 3-9 Lock Kit, Zone Enclosures 60061 9-6 RIM-600 Motion Sensor E10XX 2-50 E-Series ISP CoLocation Cabinet 60062 9-6 RIM-600 Smoke Detector Sensor E20XX 2-50 E-Series ISP CoLocation Cabinet 60071 9-7 Null Modem Cable E30XX 2-50 E-Series ISP CoLocation Cabinet 60072 9-5 10’L Water Detect Sensor Rope E40XX 2-50 E-Series ISP CoLocation Cabinet 60075 9-7 RIM-600 Wall-Mount Kit F-600-0 9-4 RIM-600 Bundle 60075 9-7 RIM-600 Sensor Panel/Bracket FXXX-XXXX-XXX 2-9 F-Series TeraFrame Cabinet 60078 9-4 RIM-600 PowerGate 2 Power Cord FHD-XXXX-XXX 2-22 F-Series TeraFrame HD Cabinet 60087 9-7 RIM-600 User Manual GF-XXXXX 2-36 GF-Series GlobalFrame Cabinet 60088 9-7 RIM-600 ConsoleView Software CD M10XX 2-45 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet 66353 1-8 Standard Rack, 6"D M11XX 2-45 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet 66363 1-8 Standard Rack, 6"D M12XX 2-45 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet 66383 1-8 Standard Rack, 6"D M15XX 2-46 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet, 48" A0222-RF 3-4 Raised Floor Enclosure M20XX 2-45 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet A0422-RF 3-4 Raised Floor Enclosure M21XX 2-45 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet A0622-RF 3-4 Raised Floor Enclosure M22XX 2-45 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet A0802-RF-DI 3-5 Raised Floor Enclosure M25XX 2-46 M-Series MegaFrame Cabinet, 48" A0822-RF 3-4 Raised Floor Enclosure NX0X-XXXX-XXX 2-27 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet A0822-RF-F 3-5 Fiber Raised Floor Enclosure NX1X-XXXX-XXX 2-27 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet A1024-HR 3-6 Ceiling Enclosure NX2X-XXXX-XXX 2-28 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet, Cisco A1024-LP 3-7 Ceiling Enclosure NX3X-XXXX-XXX 2-28 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet, Cisco A1024-PP 3-7 Ceiling Enclosure NX4X-XXXX-XXX 2-28 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet A1222-HR 3-6 Ceiling Enclosure NX5X-XXXX-XXX 2-28 N-Series TeraFrame Cabinet, Cisco A1222-LP 3-7 Ceiling Enclosure RF-Bracket 3-9 Zone Enclosure Mounting Bracket A1222-PP 3-7 Ceiling Enclosure Spare Keys 3-9 Zone Enclosure Spare Key A1224-HR 3-6 Ceiling Enclosure WA064-CAP 3-11 Wireless Ceiling Enclosure A1224-LP 3-7 Ceiling Enclosure WA064-WAP 3-12 Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure A1224-PP 3-7 Ceiling Enclosure A1411-RF-HR 3-5 Raised Floor Enclosure A1422-RF 3-4 Raised Floor Enclosure A1422-RF-F 3-5 Fiber Raised Floor Enclosure AAT-ACE-DOME 3-11 Wireless, Dome Enclosure AAT-AWM-H 3-14 Wall Mount Enclosure AAT-CAP 3-10 Wireless Ceiling Enclosure AAT-CAP-00 3-10 Enclosure Faceplate, Solid AAT-CAP-10-P 3-10 Wireless Ceiling Enclosure AAT-CAP-11 3-10 Enclosure Faceplate AAT-CAP-12 3-10 Enclosure Faceplate AAT-CAP-1232 3-10 Enclosure Faceplate AAT-CAP-1242 3-10 Enclosure Faceplate AAT-CAP-KIT 3-10 Wireless Enclosure Kits AAT-CAP-S 3-10 Wireless Ceiling Enclosure AAT-CAP-UNI 3-10 Enclosure Faceplate, Universal AAT-MWME-P 3-12 Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure AAT-WME-P 3-13 Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure AAT-WMESG 3-13 Wireless Wall-Mount Enclosure BCE-24-N 3-8 Enclosure, Drop Ceiling 14-10 Catalog Includes: Rack Systems Cabinet & Enclosure Systems Zone Cabling & Wireless Enclosures Wall-Mount Systems Cable Management Products Cable Runway & Tray Products Power Management Products KVM Systems Environmental Monitoring & Security Systems Software Grounding & Bonding Products Seismic Protection Systems www.chatsworth.com techsupport@chatsworth.com 800-834-4969 U.S. & Canada All products quoted are subject to availability based on manufacturing capacity and shipping dates should be considered estimates only. While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of all information, CPI does not accept liability for any errors or omissions and reserves the right to change information and descriptions of listed services and products. ©2012 Chatsworth Products, Inc. All rights reserved. CPI, CPI Passive Cooling, MegaFrame, Saf-T-Grip, Seismic Frame, SlimFrame, TeraFrame, GlobalFrame, Cube-iT Plus, Evolution, Velocity, OnTrac, and QuadraRack are federally registered trademarks of Chatsworth Products, Inc. Simply Efficient is a trademark of Chatsworth Products, Inc. All other trademarks belong to their respective companies. 01/12 MKT-60020-540